Home

LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual

1. Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the handshake modes available with your DAQ device DIO Parameter Configures and retrieves miscellaneous parameters associated with digital input and output that are not configured by other DIO VIs in In ID im task ID out channels operation e error out parameter name 1 o error in no error float out value out EEA EE APESE boolean out National Instruments Corporation 25 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 VIS Table 25 1 lists device specific parameters and legal ranges for devices Table 25 1 Device Specific Parameters and Legal Ranges for Devices Parameter Setting Input Output Legal Default Device Name Support Possible You Should Use Values Value VXI DIO 128 0 Input Port per input yes channels floatin N A N A Logic port float out Threshold DAQ DIO 653 1 ACK Req per group taskID in value Off On DIO 32HS Exchange in value out 2 Clock per group taskID in value Off On Reverse in value out Digital Single Read Reads the digital channels that belong to the group identified by taskID and returns the patterns read task ID out moie patterns r ead A o 1 TE ia pattern ist error in no error ken eror out time lirit ready state Digital Single Write Writes the data in pattern array to the digital channels that belong to the group identified by taskID ndes aray
2. File 1 0 Functions File I O functions manipulate files and directories This palette also contains the subpalettes Advanced File Functions Binary File VIs and File Constants Advanced Functions Advanced functions are functions that are highly specialized The Code Interface Node is an example of an advanced function The Advanced palette also contains Data Manipulation functions and Occurrences functions LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 1 4 National Instruments Corporation DAQ Instrument 1 0 Communication Analysis VIs Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs DAQ VIs acquire and generate real time analog and digital data as well as perform counting operations See Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs for more information Instrument I O VIs communicate with instruments using GPIB VISA or serial communication See Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs for more information Communication VIs network to other applications using TCP IP DDE ActiveX Apple Events PPC or UDP See Chapter 48 TCP V s through Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIs for more information Analysis VIs perform measurement signal generation digital signal processing filtering windowing probability and statistics curve fitting linear algebra array operations and VIs which perform additional numerical methods See Chapter 37 Introduction to
3. Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10683 badChanCouplingError All channels of this board must have the same coupling 10684 badChanInputModeError All channels of this board must have the same input mode 10685 clkExceedsBrdsMaxConvRateError The clock rate selected exceeds the recommended maximum rate for this board 10686 scanListInvalidError A configuration change has invalidated the scan list 10687 bufferInvalidError A configuration change has invalidated the acquisition buffer or an acquisition buffer has not been configured 10688 noTrigEnabledError The total number of scans and pretrigger scans implies that a trigger start is intended but no trigger is enabled 10689 digitalTrigBError Digital trigger B is illegal for the total scans and pretrigger scans specified 10690 digitalTrigAandBError This board does not allow digital triggers A and B to be enabled at the same time 10691 extConvRestrictionError This board does not allow an external sample clock with an external scan clock start trigger or stop trigger 10692 chanClockDisabledError Cannot start the acquisition because the channel clock is disabled 10693 extScanClockError Cannot use an external scan clock when performing a single scan of a single channel 10694 unsafeSamplingFreqError The sampling frequency exceeds the safe maximum rate for the hardware gains and filters used DMANotAllowedError You have
4. Logarithm Base 2 Computes the base 2 logarithm of x If x is 0 log2 x is If x is not complex and is less than 0 log2 x is NaN Logarithm Base 10 Computes the base 10 logarithm of x If x is 0 log x is If x is not complex and is less than 0 log x is NaN Logarithm Base X Computes the base x logarithm of y x gt 0 y gt 0 If y is 0 the output is co When x and y are both not complex and x is less than or equal to 0 or y is less than 0 the output is NaN LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Natural Logarithm Computes the natural base e logarithm of x If x is 0 In x is If x is not complex and is less than 0 In x is NaN Natural Logarithm Arg 1 Computes the natural logarithm of x 1 When x is near 0 this function is more accurate than adding 1 to x then using the Natural Logarithm function If x is equal to 1 the result is oo If x is not complex and is less than 1 the result is NaN rift Power Of 2 Computes 2 raised to the x power Power Of 10 Computes 10 raised to the x power Power Of X Computes x raised to the y power If x is not complex it must be greater than zero unless y is an integer value Otherwise the result is NaN If y is zero x y is 1 for all values of x including zero National Instruments Corporation 4 19 LabVIEW Function and VI
5. National Instruments Corporation 11 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Close Config Data Closes a reference to the configuration data identified by refnum If write configuration file is TRUE the VI writes the data to the platform independent configuration file identified by refnum refnum write configuration file error in no error Open Config Data Opens a reference to the configuration data found in a platform independent configuration file If the specified file does not exist and create file if necessary is TRUE the VI also creates the configuration file configuration file path T refnur create file if necessary T error in no error error out Read Key Boolean Reads a Boolean value associated with a key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If the key does not exist the VI returns the default value section refnum refnum out kep D en found default value g F ee value error in no error error cut Read Key Double Reads a 64 bit floating point number value associated with key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If key does not exist the VI returns default value section refnum refnurm out key Found default value p value emor in no eror emor out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 22 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 1
6. PRD Yi Pi amp i Vi i e g x has continuous first and second derivatives everywhere in the range Xxo x _ 1 P x Pa x E p x Dax x For the preceding conditions i 0 1 n 2 From the last condition p x p x we derive the following equations Xi 1 57X Xi41 i 1 i 6 6 G4 3 6 x t 6 amp X 41 Dil ot Ji A Nig y 7 XiT Xii i 1 2 n 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 43 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS These are n 2 linear equations with n unknowns a A l i 0 1 n 1 This VI computes 8 xp N 8 x 3 from initial boundary and final boundary using the formula Mie i sA a aa E I l 3B2 1 i yg eg eS i Here X X X A Bea 1 A Se Xi 17 Xi Xi 17 Xi You can derive this formula from the preceding conditions This VI then uses 8 Xo 8 x _ to solve all the g x fori 1 n 2 g x 1 the output Interpolant You can use Interpolant as an input to the Spline Interpolation VI to interpolate y at any value of x SxSx _ 1 Spline Interpolation Performs a cubic spline interpolation of f at x given a tabulated function if i interpolation value error Interpolant This VI performs cubic a interpolation using a tabulated function in the form of y fx fori 0 1 1 and given the second derivatives Interpolant that the VI obtains from the Sgine aa VI T
7. Use the AO Wait VI to wait for a buffered finite waveform generation to finish before calling the AO Clear VI The AO Wait VI checks the status of the task at regular intervals by calling the AO Write VI and checking its generation complete output The AO Wait VI waits asynchronously between intervals to free the processor for other operations The VI calculates the wait interval by dividing the check every N updates input by the update rate You should not use the AO Wait VI when you generate data continuously because the generation never finishes The AO Clear VI stops a continuous waveform generation AO Write Writes data into the buffer for a buffered analog output operation DSF updates to write taskID in taskID out scaled data number of updates allow regeneration T T 8 E erar in no error ae error out DSP handle structure time limit in sec no charg F i number of buffers 1 generation corn a I National Instruments Corporation 20 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Analog Output Utility Vis This chapter describes the Analog Output Utility VIs The VIs AO Continuous Generation AO Waveform Generation and AO Write One Update are single VI solutions to common analog output problems The Analog Output Utility VIs are intermediate level VIs so they rely on the advanced level VIs You can refer to Ch
8. Tick Count ms Returns the value of the millisecond timer The base reference time millisecond zero is undefined therefore you cannot convert millisecond timer value to a real world time or date Be careful when you use this function in comparisons because the value of the millisecond timer wraps from 2 1 to 0 millizecond timer value Two Button Dialog Box Displays a dialog box that contains a message and two buttons T button name and F button name are the names displayed on the buttons of the dialog box message T button name OK T button F button name Cancel Wait ms Waits the specified number of milliseconds then returns the value of the millisecond timer milliseconds to wait National Instruments Corporation 10 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Wait Until Next ms Multiple Waits until the value of the millisecond timer becomes a multiple of the specified millisecond multiple Use this function to synchronize activities You can call this function in a loop to control the loop execution rate However it is possible that the first loop period might be short millisecond multiple Error Handling VI Descriptions The following Error Handling VIs are available Find First Error Tests the error status of one or more low level functions or subVIs that produce a numeric error code as output eror codes eror eror in no erro
9. 1 where A represents the 2D output sequence Outer Product n is the number of elements in the input sequence X Vector and m is the number of elements in the input sequence Y Vector Complex Pseudolnverse Matrix Finds the PseudoInverse Matrix of a rectangular complex matrix Input Matrix Input Matris Eee Pseudolnverse Matrix tolerance error An SVD algorithm computes PseudoInverse Matrix A and treats any singular values less than the tolerance as zeros If Input matrix A is square and not singular A is the same as A but using the Complex Inverse Matrix VI to compute A is more efficient than using this VI Complex QR Factorization Performs QR factorization for a complex matrix A A cm algorithm QR factorization is also called orthogonal triangular factorization It factors a complex matrix A into two matrices one is an orthogonal matrix Q and the other is an upper triangular matrix R so that A QR This VI supports the Householder algorithm You can use QR factorization to solve linear systems that contain less or more equations than unknowns National Instruments Corporation 45 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Complex SVD Factorization Performs the singular value decomposition SVD of a given m by n complex matrix A with m gt n SVD produces three matrices U S and V so that A US a where U and V are orthogonal matrices S is an n by n diagon
10. FindRQOS Determines which device is requesting service bus requester status byte address list status error in requester index emor out PPoll Performs a parallel poll bus parallel poll byte atakus error out Eror in PPollUnconfig Unconfigures devices for parallel polls The function unconfigures the GPIB devices whose addresses are contained in the address list array for parallel polls that is they no longer participate in polls bus status address list error ir SendList Sends data bytes to multiple GPIB devices This function is similar to Send except that SendList sends data to multiple Listeners with only one transmission bus status address byte court mode error out data string error ir National Instruments Corporation 35 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions TriggerList Triggers multiple devices simultaneously bus status address list F emor out EOT n GPIB 488 2 Bus Management Function Descriptions The bus management functions perform system wide functions or report system wide status FindLstn Finds all Listeners on the GPIB You normally use this function to detect the presence of devices at particular addresses because most GPIB devices have the ability to listen When you detect them you can usually interrogate the devices to determine their identity bus listener address list address
11. Table 6 7 Scan from String Errors Format specifier type mismatch The datatype of a format specifier in the format string does not match the datatype of the corresponding output Unknown format specifier 82 The format string contains an invalid format specifier 3 Too few format specifiers 8 There are more arguments than format specifiers Too many format specifiers 84 There are more format specifiers than arguments Scan failed 85 Scan From String was unable to convert the input string into the datatype indicated by the format specifier Note If an error occurs the source component of the error out cluster contains a string of the form Scan From String arg n where nis the first argument for which the error occurred If you wire a block diagram constant string to format string G checks for errors in format string at compile time You must correct these errors before you can run the VI In this case only the Scan failed error can occur at run time Table 6 8 lists Scan From String examples Table 6 8 Scan from String Examples Format Remaining Input String String Default s Output s String abc xyz Ps abc 12 3 561 7200 s f 2d XYZ 0 amp 0i CDB 12 3 561 12 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 8 Scan from String Examples Continued Format Remaining input String String String Default s Output s
12. altern Je Vie and mode e task ID i task ID out channel indices empty se ies Wodale progress scaled data empty error out Error ir ie au Lelie on mode 0 no ch butter nu ba eraa You wire the new data to one of three inputs scaled data binary data or DSP memory handle The VI searches these inputs in that order for the first array with a length greater than zero The VI then writes the data from this array to the output buffer The length of the scaled data or binary data arrays determines the number of updates the VI writes If DSP memory handle points to the source of the data updates to write must indicate how many updates the VI is to write When no data is wired this VI is still useful for reporting update progress information The total number of updates written to a buffer before you start it can be less than the number of updates you allocated the buffer to hold when you called the AO Buffer Config VI LabVIEW generates only the updates written to the buffer LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 22 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs AO Clock Config Configures an update or interval clock for analog output clock source specification contig mode LO no change alternate rate set no change task ID ock HF task ID out buffer number 1 no change ay eit Pactua
13. e Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs describes Intermediate Counter VIs you can use to program counters on MIO TIO and other devices with the DAQ STC or Am9513 counter chips These VIs call the Advanced Counter VIs to configure the counters for common operations and to start read and stop the counters You can configure these VIs to generate single pulses and continuous pulse trains to count events or elapsed time to divide down a signal and to measure pulse width or period The Easy Counter VIs call the Intermediate Counter VIs for several pulse generation counting and measurement operations e Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs describes the VIs that configure and control hardware counters You can use these VIs to generate variable duty cycle square waves to count events and to measure periods and frequencies e Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIs describes the VIs that calibrate specific devices and set and return configuration information e Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs describes the data acquisition Signal Conditioning VIs which you use to convert analog input voltages read from resistance temperature detectors RTDs strain gauges or thermocouples into units of strain or temperature LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Il 2 National Instruments Corporation Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Vis This chapter contains basic information about the data acquisition DAQ VIs a
14. 2 m 1 2 23 If the size of the input sequence is not a power of 2 this VI calls an efficient Inverse DFT routine The output sequence X Inverse Real FFT FFT X is real and it returns in one real array LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Power Spectrum Computes the power spectrum of the input sequence X 2a Power Spectrum error The Power Spectrum S f of a function x t is defined as Six X OXA X f 1 where X f F x t and X f is the complex conjugate of X f This VI uses the FFT and DFT routines to compute the power spectrum which is given by 1 2 Sy SIF XH Xx n where S y represents the output sequence Power Spectrum and n is the number of samples in the input sequence X When the number of samples n in the input sequence X is a valid power of 2 mEn for m 1 2 3 23 this VI computes the FFT of a real valued sequence using the split radix algorithm and efficiently scales the magnitude square The largest power spectrum the VI can compute using the FFT is 277 8 388 608 or 8M When the number of samples in the input sequence X is not a valid power of 2 MA2 for m 1 2 3 23 where n is the number of samples this VI computes the discrete Fourier transform of a real valued sequence using the chirp z algorithm and scales the magnitude square The largest power spect
15. 9 7 Greater 9 6 gts Go from active Controller to standby 34 10 H Hamming Window 42 6 Hanning Window 42 6 Harmonic Analyzer 40 3 Hex Digit 9 7 Histogram 44 7 Hyperbolic Cosine 4 14 Hyperbolic Sine 4 15 Hyperbolic Tangent 4 15 ICTR Control 27 5 28 10 IIR Cascade Filter 41 10 IIR Cascade Filter with Integrated Circuit 41 11 IIR Filter 41 11 IIR Filter with Integrated Circuit 41 11 Implies 5 4 Impulse Pattern 38 4 Impulse Response Function 40 4 In Port Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 13 7 In Range 9 7 Index amp Append 6 8 Index amp Bundle Cluster Array 8 5 Index amp Strip 6 8 Index Array 7 5 Initialize Array 7 5 Insert Menu Items 12 10 Insert Queue Element 13 13 Integral x t 39 13 Interleave 1D Arrays 7 6 Interpolate 1D Array 7 6 Inv Chebyshev Coefficients 41 12 Inv Chi Square Distribution 44 8 Inv F Distribution 44 9 Inv Normal Distribution 44 9 Inv T Distribution 44 9 Inverse Chebyshev Filter 41 12 Inverse Complex FFT 39 13 National Instruments Corporation l 5 Index Inverse Cosine 4 15 Inverse Fast Hilbert Transform 39 14 Inverse FHT 39 15 Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine 4 15 Inverse Hyperbolic Sine 4 15 Inverse Hyperbolic Tangent 4 16 Inverse Matrix 45 12 Inverse Real FFT 39 16 Inverse Sine 4 16 Inverse Tangent 4 16 Inverse Tangent 2 Input 4 16 Invoke Node 12 3 51 3 IP To String 48 3 ist Set individual status bit
16. Default Default Device Setting Range Setting Setting Range Setting Range 5911 5912 1 1 3 no 1 1 2 1 I lt ns3 support All Other Devices 1 1 3 no 1 1 2 1 1 lt nsx3 support Al Control Controls the analog input tasks and specifies the amount of data to acquire minimum pretrigger scans to acquire task ID task ID out control code total scans to acquire error in no error number of buffers to acquire error out Note You cannot use this VI to start an acquisition when you use a PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 or a DAQCard 700 device to scan multiple SCXI channels in multiplexed mode For this special case you must use the AI SingleScan VI to acquire data For more information about the AI SingleScan VI refer to its description in this chapter However you can use the AI Control VI for a Lab and 1200 Series device PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 or DAQCard 700 device when you scan SCXI channels in parallel mode or sample a single SCXI channel in multiplexed mode You can use this VI for an MIO device scanning SCXI channels in either mode Note Nonbuffered acquisitions are not supported for the following devices e Macintosh NB A2000 e Macintosh VNB A2100 e Macintosh NB A2150 National Instruments Corporation 18 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 3 lists default settings and ranges for the AI Control VI Table 18 3 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for
17. LabViEW Function and VI Reference Manual Wir NATIONAL January 1998 Edition iti gt INSTRUMENTS Part Number 321526B 01 Internet Support E mail support natinst com FTP Site ftp natinst com Web Address http www natinst com Bulletin Board Support BBS United States 512 794 5422 BBS United Kingdom 01635 551422 BBS France 01 48 65 15 59 Fax on Demand Support 512 418 1111 Telephone Support USA Tel 512 795 8248 Fax 512 794 5678 International Offices Australia 03 9879 5166 Austria 0662 45 79 90 0 Belgium 02 757 00 20 Brazil 011 288 3336 Canada Ontario 905 785 0085 Canada Qu bec 514 694 8521 Denmark 45 76 26 00 Finland 09 725 725 11 France 01 48 14 24 24 Germany 089 741 31 30 Hong Kong 2645 3186 Israel 03 6120092 Italy 02 413091 Japan 03 5472 2970 Korea 02 596 7456 Mexico 5 520 2635 Netherlands 0348 433466 Norway 32 84 84 00 Singapore 2265886 Spain 91 640 0085 Sweden 08 730 49 70 Switzerland 056 200 51 51 Taiwan 02 377 1200 United Kingdom 01635 523545 National Instruments Corporate Headquarters 6504 Bridge Point Parkway Austin Texas 78730 5039 USA Tel 512 794 0100 Copyright 1997 1998 National Instruments Corporation All rights reserved Important Information Warranty Copyright Trademarks The media on which you receive National Instruments software are warranted not to fail to execute programming instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship for a per
18. National Instruments Corporation 18 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Note When you run the AI Control VI with control code set to 4 clear the VI performs the equivalent of running the AI Buffer Config VI with allocation mode set to 1 That is both VIs deallocate the internal analog input data buffers However acquisitions that use DSP or expansion card memory are an exception The Al Control VI does not deallocate DSP memory when clearing an acquisition You must explicitly call the AI Buffer Config VI to deallocate DSP acquisition buffers Table 18 1 lists default settings and ranges for the AI Buffer Config VI The first row gives the values for most devices and the other rows give the values for devices that are exceptions to the rule Table 18 1 Al Buffer Config VI Device Specific Settings and Ranges Scans per Buffer Scans per Buffer Buffer Number of Buffers of Buffers Allocation Mode Mode Default Sambora ECLI o E Eg Range E ETN ES panee Most Devices Devices zs n23 EN l 1 2 NB A2000 100 n gt 0 l n20 2 1 2 NB A2100 NB A2150 Al Buffer Read Returns analog input data from the internal data buffer s mark locations conditional retrieval specification Loff A acquisition state task ID a number to read read search location na change A output type L scaled 1 binary data error in no error i error out time limit na change sean backlo
19. National Instruments Corporation 31 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIS The Instrument I O palette consists of the following subpalettes e VISA e Traditional GPIB e GPIB 488 2 e Serial You can find helpful information about individual VIs online by using the LabVIEW Help window Help Show Help When you place the cursor on a VI icon the wiring diagram and parameter names for that VI appear in the Help window You also can find information for front panel controls or indicators by placing the cursor over the control or indicator with the Help window open For more information on the LabVIEW Help window refer to the Getting Help section in Chapter 1 Introduction to G Programming of the G Programming Reference Manual In addition to the Help window LabVIEW has more extensive online information available To access this information select Help Online Reference For most block diagram objects you can select Online Reference from the object s pop up menu to access the online description For information about creating your own online reference files see the Creating Your Own Help Files section in Chapter 5 Printing and Documenting VIs of the G Programming Reference Manual Instrument Drivers Overview A LabVIEW instrument driver is a set of VIs that control a programmable instrument Each VI corresponds to a programmatic operation such as configuring reading
20. aX b where a is the multiplicative scale constant and b is the additive constant offset 1D Polar To Rectangular Converts two arrays of polar coordinates into two arrays of rectangular coordinates according to the following formulas x Magnitude cos Phase y Magnitude sin Phase Magnitude Phase 1D Polynomial Evaluation Performs a polynomial evaluation of X using Coefficients a Coefficients a LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 46 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs The output array Y is given by where m denotes the polynomial order 1D Rectangular To Polar Converts two arrays of rectangular coordinates into two arrays of polar coordinates according to the following formulas magnitude yx y phase tan 2 l x Magnitude Phase error 2D Linear Evaluation Performs a linear evaluation of the two dimensional input array X H Fath error The two dimensional output array Y X a b is given by Y Xa b where a denotes the multiplicative constant and b denotes the additive constant National Instruments Corporation 46 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs 2D Polynomial Evaluation Performs a polynomial evaluation of the two dimensional input array X using Coefficients a Coefficients a The 2D output array Y is given by where m denotes the polynomial order Normalize M
21. device pattern digital channel Iteration D mitialze If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Note When you call this VI on a digital I O port that is part of an 8255 PPI when your iteration terminal is left at 0 the 8255 PPI goes through a configuration phase where all the ports within the same PPI chip get reset to logic low regardless of the data direction To avoid this effect connect a value other than 0 to the iteration terminal once you have configured the desired ports Write to Digital Line Sets the output logic state of a digital line to high or low on a digital channel that you specify port width 3 device digital channel line line state Iteration O initialize If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Note When you call this VI on a digital I O port that is part of an 8255 PPI when your iteration terminal is left at 0 the 8255 PPI goes through a configuration phase where all the ports within the same PPI chip get reset to logic low regardless of the data direction The data direction on other ports however is maintained To avoid this effect connect a value other than 0 to the iteration terminal once you have configured the desired ports LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 23 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 23 Easy Digital 1 0 Vis Write to Digita
22. l1 i 0 n where n is the number of elements in X FHT maps real valued sequences into real valued frequency domain sequences You can use it instead of the Fourier transform to convolve signals deconvolve signals correlate signals and find the power spectrum You can also derive the Fourier transform from the Hartley transform When the sequences to be processed are real valued sequences the Fourier transform produces complex valued sequences in which half of the information is redundant The advantage of using the FHT instead of the FFT transform is that the FHT uses half the memory to produce the same information the FFT produces Further the FHT is calculated in place and is as efficient as the FFT The disadvantage of the FHT is that the size of the input sequence must be a valid power of 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Integral x t Performs the discrete integration of the sampled signal X a initial condition Integral error final condition dt The integral F t of a function f t is defined as F t fddt Let Y represent the sampled output sequence Integral X The VI obtains the elements of Y using y E ay 4a tajpa fori 0 1 2 n 1 j 0 where n is the number of elements in X x_ is specified by initial condition when i 0 and x is specified by final condition when i n 1 initial
23. such that AX LZ Y and LAX can be an alternate representation of the original system Notice that Z is also an n element vector Triangular systems are easy to solve using recursive techniques Consequently when you obtain the L and U matrices from A you can find Z from the LZ Y system and X from the UX Zsystem In the case of m n A can be decomposed to an orthogonal matrix Q and an upper triangular matrix R so that A QR The linear system can then be represented by QRX Y You can then solve RX O Y You can easily solve this triangular system to get x using recursive techniques Note You cannot always determine beforehand whether the matrix is singular especially with large systems The Inverse Matrix VI detects singular matrices and returns an error so you do not need to verify whether you have a valid system before using this VI The numerical implementation of the matrix inversion is numerically intensive and because of its recursive nature is also highly sensitive to round off error introduced by the floating point numeric coprocessor Although the computations use the maximum possible accuracy the VI cannot always solve the system SVD Factorization Performs the singular value decomposition SVD of a given m by n real matrix A with m gt n National Instruments Corporation 45 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs SVD produces three matrices U Sp and V so
24. 32 To set the size of both buffers simultaneously combine the buffer masks by using an O Ring VISA Property Node This section describes the VISA Library attributes The VISA Property Node gets and or sets the indicated attributes The node is expandable evaluation starts from the top and proceeds downward until an error or until the final evaluation occurs To access the property node select Functions Instrument I O VISA Then select the Property Node icon located on the bottom row of the VISA palette Property Node Be ip z ga i san gee ET e hee SERIAL ab wea vied pisa fis oo pien Eir ste ron es ER HARI 6 a aa ee 5 Bn a n E5 abe a EL E E a The VISA Property Node only displays attributes for the class of the session that is wired to it You can change the class of a VISA Property Node as long as you have not wired it to a VISA session Once a VISA session is wired to a VISA Property Node it adapts to the class of National Instruments Corporation 33 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference the session and any displayed attributes that are not valid for that class become invalid indicated by turning the attribute item black Because the Property Node can be used in other contexts in LabVIEW the Property Node might default to a class other than a VISA class if you place it on a diagram by itself When you wire it to a VISA session it becomes
25. 34 11 J Join Numbers 13 4 K Kaiser Bessel Window 42 6 L Less Or Equal To 0 9 8 Less Or Equal 9 8 Less Than 0 9 8 Less 9 8 Lexical Class 9 8 Line Feed 6 20 Linear Fit 43 4 Linear Fit Coefficients 43 4 List Directory 11 17 llo Local lockout 34 11 loc Go to local 34 7 loc Place Controller in local state 34 11 Local Variable 3 4 Lock Range 11 17 Logarithm Base 2 4 18 Logarithm Base 10 4 18 Logarithm Base X 4 18 Logical Shift 13 4 LPM 16 Calibrate 29 14 LU Factorization 45 13 Make Alias 52 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Index MakeAddr 35 10 Mantissa amp Exponent 13 5 Master Slave Config 29 14 Match Pattern 6 8 Matrix Condition Number 45 13 Matrix Norm 45 13 Matrix Rank 45 14 Max amp Min 9 9 Mean 44 10 Measure Frequency 26 3 Measure Pulse Width or Period 26 4 Median 44 10 Median Filter 41 13 MIO Calibrate Windows 29 15 MIO Configure Windows 29 16 Mode 44 10 Moment About Mean 44 11 Move 11 17 MSE 44 11 Natural Logarithm 4 19 Natural Logarithm Arg 1 4 19 Network Functions avg 40 4 New Directory 11 17 New File 11 18 Nonlinear Lev Mar Fit 43 5 Normal Distribution 44 11 Normalize Matrix 46 4 Normalize Vector 46 5 Not 5 4 Not A Notifier 13 10 Not A Number Path Refnum 9 9 Not A Path 11 27 Not A Queue 13 14 Not A Refnum 11 27 Not A Rendezvous 13 16 Not A Semaphore 13 18 N
26. AESend Abort VI 52 8 AESend Close VI 52 8 AESend Do Script 52 6 AESend Finder Open 52 6 AESend Open 52 7 AESend Open Document 52 7 AESend Open Run Close VI 52 8 AESend Print Document 52 7 AESend Quit Application 52 7 National Instruments Corporation AESend Run VI 52 9 AESend VI Active 52 9 AI Acquire Waveform 15 1 AI Acquire Waveforms 15 2 AI Buffer Config 18 1 AI Buffer Read 18 2 AI Clear 16 2 AI Clock Config 18 3 AI Config 16 2 AI Continuous Scan 17 2 AI Control 18 5 AI Group Config 18 6 AI Hardware Config 18 8 AI Parameter 18 12 AI Read 16 3 AI Read One Scan 17 3 AI Sample Channel 15 2 AI Sample Channels 15 3 AI Single Scan Intermediate 16 3 AI SingleScan Advanced 18 13 AI Start 16 4 AI Trigger Config 18 14 AI Waveform Scan 17 4 AllSPoll 35 4 Amplitude and Phase Spectrum 40 2 And 5 2 And Array Elements 5 3 AO Buffer Config 22 1 AO Buffer Write 22 2 AO Clear 20 2 AO Clock Config 22 3 AO Config 20 2 AO Continuous Gen 21 2 AO Control 22 3 AO Generate Waveform 19 1 AO Generate Waveforms 19 2 AO Group Config 22 3 AO Hardware Config 22 4 AO Parameter 22 4 AO Single Update 22 4 AO Start 20 3 AO Trigger and Gate Config Windows 22 4 AO Update Channel 19 2 AO Update Channels 19 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Index AO Wait 20 3 AO Waveform Gen 21 4 AO Write 20 3 AO Write One Update 21 5 AO 6 10
27. Appendix A Error Codes Table A 3 Analysis Error Codes 20001 OutOfMemErr There is not enough memory left to perform the specified routine 20002 E ao The input sequences must be the same size 2 20003 003 SamplesGTZeroErr The number of samples must be greater than zero 20004 SamplesGEZeroErr The number of samples must be greater than or equal to zero 20005 SamplesGEOneErr The number of samples must be greater than or equal to one 20006 SamplesGETwoErr The number of samples must be greater than or equal to two 20007 SamplesGEThreeErr The number of samples must be greater than or equal to three 20008 ArraySizeErr The input arrays do not contain the correct number of data values for this VI 20009 PowerOfTwoErr The size of the input array must be a power of two size 2 0 lt m lt 23 2 20010 010 MaxXformSizeErr The maximum transform size has been exceeded 20011 DutyCycleErr The duty cycle must meet the condition 0 lt duty cycle lt 100 20012 CyclesErr The number of cycles must be greater than zero and less than or equal to the number of samples 20013 WidthLTSamplesErr The width must meet the condition 0 lt width lt samples 20014 Delay WidthErr The delay must meet the condition 0 lt delay width lt samples 2 200185 015 DtGEZeroErr dt must be greater than or equal to zero 20016 DtGTZeroErr dt must be greater than zero 20017 IndexLTSamplesErr The index must meet the conditio
28. Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference The VISA palette includes the following subpalettes Operations Event Handling Functions High Level Event Access Low Level Registry Access Serial Functions This section describes the VISA Library Reference operations VISA Library Reference Parameters Most of the VISA Library operations use the following parameters VISA session is a unique logical identifier used to communicate with a resource It is created and linked to a resource by the VISA Open function It then is used by other VISA functions to access the resource and its attributes The dup VISA session is a copy of the VISA session that is passed out of the VISA functions By passing the VISA session in and out of functions you can simplify dataflow programming by chaining functions together This is similar to the dup file refnums used by the File I O functions VISA session is set to the Instr class by default You can change the class type by popping up on the VISA session control in edit mode and selecting a different class The following classes currently are supported Instr GPIB Instr VXI GPIB VXI VME RBD Instr VXI GPIB VXI MBD Instr Serial Instr Generic Event Service Request Event Trigger Event VXI Signal Event VXI VME Interrupt Event Resource Manager LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Refer
29. Configures either the upper and lower input limits or the range polarity and gain The AI Hardware Config VI also configures the coupling input mode and number of AMUX 64T devices The configuration utility determines the default settings for the parameters of this VI Ue no change ask ID task ID out channel list empty 2 pam a a group channel settings input limits ho change ptt error out emor in no eror i alternate input limits se channel input configurati You can use this VI to retrieve the current settings by wiring taskID only or by wiring both taskID and channel list If channel list is empty the VI configures channels on a per group basis This means that the configuration applies to all the channels in the group When you specify one or more channels in channel list the VI configures channels on a per channel basis This means that the configuration applies only to the channels you specify This VI always returns the current settings for the entire group When the configuration is on a per channel basis channel list can contain one or more channels The channels in channel list must belong to the group named by taskID You specify channels the same way you specify them for the AI Group Config VI If you take multiple samples of a channel within a scan and you want to change the hardware configuration for that channel at each sample you must
30. Creates a string describing an AppleEvent logical descriptor which you use with the AESend VI logical operator create i i LAI Ga logical descriptor logical terms Dest AEDesc or AEDescListi AppleEvent logical records describe logical or Boolean expressions of multiple terms such as the AND of two AppleEvent comparison records For example you can use the output logical descriptor string as an argument to the AESend VI or as an argument to AECreate Object Specifier VI to build a more complex descriptor string See the Object Support VI Example section in this chapter for an example of its use AECreate Object Specifier Creates a string describing an AppleEvent object which you use with the AESend VI class ID container Object specifier key form ID key data LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis An object specifier is an AppleEvent record of type obj and describes a specific object It has four elements the class of the object the containing object a code indicating the form of the description and the description of the object AECreate Range Descriptor Creates a string describing an AppleEvent range descriptor record which you use with the AESend VI range start create ee Range Range descriptor ge stop Dest Range descriptor records are used in object specifiers whose key form is formRange rang They describe a rang
31. For examples of how to use the Digital I O VIs see the examples in examples dag digital digio 1lb These VIs perform counting operations The Counter VIs can be found by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Counter When you click on the Counter icon in the Data Acquisition palette the Counter palette pops up as shown in the following illustration Data Acquisition Counter Counter PULSE a a5 gt ni ea PULSE Pa E Cal i I oF 1 1 EPID da w a IHT ADU j Er Er LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 10 National Instruments Corporation Easy Counter VIs Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs There are three classes of Counter VIs found in the Counter palette the Easy Intermediate and Advanced Counter VIs The following illustrates these VI classes iL Counter oo E FULSE PULSE FREQ n a PULSE ae Jd ow nnn nyt Er i Em Advanced Counter VIs Intermediate Counter VIs The Easy Counter VIs perform simple counting operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can use each VI by itself to perform a basic counting operation Unlike intermediate and advanced level VIs Easy Counter VIs automatically alert you to errors with a dialog box that asks you to stop the execution of the VI or to ignore the error The Easy Counter VIs are actually composed of Intermediate Cou
32. GPIB 488 2 Common Function Parameters Most of the GPIB 488 2 functions use the following parameters e address contains the primary address of the GPIB device with which the function communicates If a secondary address is required use the MakeAddr function to put the primary and secondary addresses in the proper format Unless specified otherwise address and address list are data types integer and integer array respectively e The default primary address of the GPIB board is 0 with no secondary address It is designated as System Controller The default timeout value for the functions is 10 seconds If you want to change any of National Instruments Corporation 35 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions these parameters use the configuration utility included with your GPIB board You can also use the GPIB Init and SetTimeOut functions to set the primary address and to change the default timeout value at run time but these functions affect the interface only when you use it with LabVIEW For more information see the documentation supplied with your hardware interface bus refers to the GPIB bus number If you have only one GPIB interface in your computer the default bus number is 0 For additional GPIB interfaces see the software installation instructions included with your GPIB board byte count refers to the number of bytes that pass over the GPIB status is a Boolean array in which
33. If a represents the Cosine Coefficients input sequence and y represents the output sequence GenCos X the VI obtains the elements of y from m 1 y x Y 1 a cos kw for i 0 1 2 7 1 k 0 211 w n where n is the number of elements in X and m is the number of Cosine Coefficients National Instruments Corporation 42 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 42 Window VIS Hamming Window Applies a Hamming window to the input sequence X Hammingitst error If y represents the output sequence Hamming X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x 0 54 0 46 cos w fori 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in the input sequence X Hanning Window Applies a Hanning window to the input sequence X Hanning ist error If y represents the output sequence Hanning X the VI obtains the elements of y using y 0 5 x 1 cos w for i 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in X Kaiser Bessel Window Applies a Kaiser Bessel window to the input sequence X t sft a Kaiser Besselt t t beta ill error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 42 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 42 Window VIS If y represents the output sequence Kaiser Bessel X t the VI obtains the elements of y from IL B 41 0 4a Yi I aa for i 0 12 wadh where n is the number of elements in X t and Jp e is the zero order
34. LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the Intermediate Analog Input VIs Each intermediate level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run Note The AI Clear VI is an exception to this rule this VI always clears the acquisition regardless of whether error in indicates an error National Instruments Corporation 16 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs When you use any of the Intermediate Analog Input VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Time and Dialog in LabVIEW Intermediate Analog Input VI Descriptions The following Intermediate Analog Input VIs are available Al Clear Clears the analog input task associated with taskID in taskID in a taskID out error in no error error out The AI Clear VI stops an acquisition associated with taskID in and release associated internal resources including buffers Before beginning a new acquisition you must call the AI
35. PCI 6111E 0 lt n lt 2 0 lt n lt 80 aa 4451455100 4551 O lt ns 84 lt n 84 no nosupport 4452 4552 ee o tas e ee LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 20 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 12 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Trigger Config VI Part 3 a aa Source Digital EC E esenessatinee Start Trigger PFO PFI 0 9 RTSI 0 PFI 0 9 RTSI 0 6 GPCTRO GPCTRO E Series Stop Trigger PFII PFI 0 9 RTSI 0 6 E Series E Series Digital Scan Clock Gate Scan E Series Digital Scan Clock Gate Gate PFIO PFI 0 9 RTSI 0 6 5102 Devices with RTSI Start and Stop PFIO PFI 1 2 RTSI 0 6 Triggers 5102 Devices without RTSI Start and PFIO PFI1 2 Stop Triggers 50159120 5912 PFII PFI 1 2 RTSI 0 6 e 44xx Start Trigger PFIO PFIO PFI1 PFI3 PFI4 PFI6 RTSI 0 6 OSA 44xx Stop Trigger PFI1 PFIO PFI1 PFI3 PFI4 PFI6 RTSI 0 6 DSA 45xx Start and Stop Trigger dedicated PFI 0 33 RTSI 0 6 EXTTRIG pin See Table 18 9 for devices with fixed digital trigger sources National Instruments Corporation 18 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 13 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Trigger Config VI Part 4 Additional Trigger Specifications Cluster Skip Time Delay Count Limit Loo o OP nenaon o se no supor no supor mense t638 no supon no supor mense o oena
36. Returns configuration information about a scale configured in the DAQ Channel Wizard stale name scale name out NFO description eror in no error i a scale type emor out coefficients 1 coefficients 2 Note This VI is specific to computers running NI DAQ 5 0 or later LabVIEW returns an UnsupportedError message if you attempt to run this VI on computers not running NI DAQ 5 0 or later National Instruments Corporation 29 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Signal Conditioning Vis This chapter describes the data acquisition Signal Conditioning VIs which you use to convert analog input voltages read from resistance temperature detectors RTDs strain gauges or thermocouples into units of strain or temperature You can edit the conversion formulas used in these VIs or replace them with your own to meet the specific accuracy requirements of your application If you edit or replace the formulas you should save the new VI in one of your own directories or folders outside of vi 1ib You can access the Signal Conditioning VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Signal Conditioning as shown below A Ny en lar 4 sun Es E ee signal Conditioning THERFFIO ITC LIM THERMI Sea a 0 TRALH Le IL lente TRA T HEJ aral f eci A l Soar v National Instruments Corporation 30 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs Signal Cond
37. The default state that the Reset VI places the instrument in should be documented in the help information for the Reset VI In an IEEE 488 2 instrument this VI sends the command string RST to the instrument When you reset the instrument from the Initialize VI this VI is called LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 32 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs Also you can call the Reset VI separately If the instrument cannot perform reset the Reset VI should return the literal string Reset Not Supported VISA session dup VISA session eror in no error error out PREFIX Revision Query LabVIEW instrument drivers have a Revision Query VI This VI outputs the following e The revision of the instrument driver e The firmware revision of the instrument being used If the instrument firmware revision cannot be queried the Revision Query VI should return the literal string Firmware Revision Not Supported VISA session dup VISA session Instr Driver Revision efron in na error sm Instr Firmware Revision error aut PREFIX Self Test If an instrument has self test capability the LabVIEW instrument driver should contain a Self Test VI to instruct the instrument to perform a self test and return the result of that self test If the instrument cannot perform a self test the Self Test VI returns the literal string Self Test Not Supported VISA session dup VISA session Self Test E
38. but does not accept any data When it detects the END message the GPIB Controller asserts the Not Ready For Data NRED to create a handshake holdoff state If shadow handshaking is not active the GPIB Controller performs neither shadow handshaking nor a handshake holdoff If you activate the shadow handshake option the GPIB Controller participates in a data handshake as a Listener without actually reading the data It monitors the transfer for the END message and stops subsequent transfers This mechanism allows the GPIB Controller to take control synchronously on subsequent operations such as cmd or rpp After sending the gts command you should always wait for END before you initiate another GPIB command You can do this with the GPIB Wait function The ECIC error results if the GPIB Controller is not CIC LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions ist Set individual status bit syntax ist O individual status bit is cleared ist 1 individual status bit is set ist sets the sense of the individual status ist bit You use ist when the GPIB Controller is not the CIC but participates in a parallel poll conducted by a device that is the active Controller The CIC conducts a parallel poll by asserting the EOI and ATN signals which send the Identify IDY message While this message is active each device that you configured to participate in the po
39. denotes convolution For the discrete implementation of the convolution let h represent the output sequence X Y let n be the number of elements in the input sequence X and let m be the number of elements in the input sequence Y Assuming that indexed elements of X and Y that lie outside their range are zero x 0 1 lt O or i n and y 0 j lt 0 or j m then you obtain the elements of h using n l1 h Y Wik for i 0 1 2 size 1 k 0 size n m l where size denotes the total number of elements in the output sequence X Y Cross Power Computes the cross power spectrum of the input sequences X and Y The cross power S f of the signals x t and y t is defined as Sy X PYH where X f is the complex conjugate of X f XA F x t and YA F y National Instruments Corporation 39 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS This VI uses the FFT or DFT routine to compute the cross power spectrum which is given by L FEX F Y n where S represents the complex output sequence Sxy and n is the number of samples that can accommodate both input sequences X and Y The largest cross power that the VI can compute via the FFT is 27 8 388 608 or 8M When the number of samples in X and Y are equal and are a valid power of 2 n m 2 for k 1 2 3 23 where n is the number of samples in X and m is the number of samples in Y the VI makes d
40. eins 23 where n is the number of samples the VI computes the fast Fourier transform by applying the split radix algorithm The largest complex FFT the VI can compute is 27 8 388 608 8M When the number of samples in the input sequence X is not a valid power of 2 nA tor m 1 2 35 wns 23 where n is the number of samples the VI computes the discrete Fourier transform by applying the chirp z algorithm The largest complex DFT that can be computed is 2 2 1 4 194 303 4M 1 Note Because the VI performs the transform in place advantages of the FFT include speed and memory efficiency The size of the input sequence however must be a power of 2 The DFT can efficiently process any size sequence but the DFT is slower than the FFT and uses more memory because it must store intermediate results during processing Let Y be the complex output sequence and n be the number of samples in it It can be shown that which means you can interpret the n i element of Y as the i element of the sequence if it could be physically realized which represents the negative i harmonic Convolution Computes the convolution of the input sequences X and Y n ETY error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs The convolution A t of the signals x t and y t is defined as co h t x D y 0 x t y t tdt where the symbol
41. error codes or with an error state cluster Typically functions release output error codes while VIs incorporate the error cluster usually within a framework called error input output error I O National Instruments Corporation 10 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Error 1 0 and the Error State Cluster The concept of error I O is logical for the G dataflow architecture If data information can flow from one node to another so can error state information Each node that needs information about errors tests the incoming error state and responds appropriately If no error exists the node executes normally If an error does exist the node detects an error skips execution then passes its error state out to the next node which responds in the same way In this fashion notice of the first error that occurs in a sequence of operations is passed through all the nodes with each node responding to the error At the end of the flow your program reports the error to the user Error I O has an additional benefit you can use it to control the execution order of independent operations While you can use the DAQ taskID to control the order of DAQ operations for one group you cannot use it to control the order for multiple groups The DAQ taskID does not work with other types of I O operations such as file operations The following diagram from the File Utility VI Read Characters From F
42. error out VISA Write Writes data to the device Whether the data is transferred synchronously or asynchronously is platform dependent VISA session dup VISA session write buffer return count eror in no eror error out National Instruments Corporation 33 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Event Handling Functions This section describes the VISA Event Handling functions Valid classes for these functions are Instr default GPIB Instr Serial Instr VXI GPIB V XI VME RBD Instr and VXI GPIB VXI MBD Instr You can find the VISA Event Handling functions in the VISA palette which you access by selecting Functions Instrument I O VISA Event Handling nae gar Lie bie hee a wel of han ia abii leven e aHEvent Handling H bie bie iced Visa aien N cle ste Teo z room cur Sr re Teo ied a oa nat a a a a E abe Ear ee ae 42 Et 7127F High psa pasa aA A o pen oy Fmi i eee 1 a E aa EL Low isa g isa amp ROS 4 2 oww 9 mm _ _ EL VISA Disable Event Disables servicing of an event This operation prevents new event occurrences from being queued However event occurrences already queued are not lost use the VISA Discard Events VI if you want to discard queued events YISA session dup VISA session event type mecharism 1 WI_OUEUE _ emor out error in no e
43. error out sendCmds Sends GPIB command bytes bus status command string byte count error in error cut You normally do not need to use SendCmds for GPIB operation You use it when specialized command sequences not provided for in other functions must be sent over the GPIB SendDataBytes Sends data bytes to previously addressed devices bus shatus mode byte count data string p gror out eror in SendSetup Prepares particular devices to receive data bytes You normally follow a call to this function with a call to a function such as SendDataBytes to actually transfer the data to the Listeners This sequence eliminates the need to readdress the devices between blocks of sends bus status address list byte court error in error out National Instruments Corporation 35 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions GPIB 488 2 General Function Descriptions The general functions are useful for special situations MakeAddr Combines primary address and secondary address in a specially formatted packed address for devices that require both a primary and secondary GPIB address primary address packed address secondary address error out efor in SetTimeOut Changes the global timeout period for all GPIB 488 2 functions This function also sets the default timeout period for all GPIB functions Fra new timeout 10000 ey previous timeout
44. giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers you can use with your DAQ device AO Update Channel Writes a specified value to an analog output channel j Ao device ee channel 0 i value a The AO Update Channel VI writes a single update to an analog output channel If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers and output limits available with your DAQ device AO Update Channels Writes values to each of the specified analog output channels device channels 0 values The AO Update Channels VI updates multiple analog output channels with single values If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers you can use with your DAQ device LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 19 2 National Instruments Corporation Intermediate Analog Output Vis This chapter describes the Intermediate Analog Output VIs These VIs are single VI solutions to common analog output problems The intermediate level VIs are convenient but they lack flexibility Because all the VIs in this chapter rely on the advanced layer you can refer to Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs for additional information on the inputs and
45. init F LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis Butterworth Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients to implement an IIR filter as specified by the Butterworth filter model You can pass these filter coefficients IIR Filter Cluster to the IIR Cascade Filter VI to filter a sequence of data filter type sani ede le i IIR Filter Cluster high cutott freq th low cutoff freg tl a order This VI is a subVI of the Butterworth Filter VI Butterworth Filter Generates a digital Butterworth filter using sampling freq fs low cutoff freq fl high cutoff freq fh order and filter type by calling the Butterworth Coefficients VI The Butterworth Filter VI then calls the HR Cascade Filter VI to filter the X sequence using this model to get a Butterworth Filtered X sequence filter type A Filtered sampling freq ts irrar high cutett freq th low cutoff freq fl order Tit fart Cait F eee Cascade Direct Coefficients Converts IIR filter coefficients from the cascade form to the direct form Reverse Coetticients pee eT Forward Coefficients As an example you can convert a cascade filter composed of two second order stages to a direct form filter as follows Reverse Coefficients a 1 d1 412 az gt 1 0 Q1 47 43 ay Forward Coefficients bo1 bii bz bop bi baz bo by bo bs b4 See the IHR Casca
46. or initial_phase is the phase out from the previous execution of this instance of the VI if reset phase is false The VI is reentrant so you can use it to simulate a continuous acquisition from a sawtooth wave function generator If the input control reset phase is false subsequent calls to a specific instance of the VI produce the output Sawtooth Wave array containing the next samples of a sawtooth wave phase out is set to phase 7 and if reset phase is false the next time the VI executes this reentrant VI uses this value as its new phase in LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 38 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs Sinc Pattern Generates an array containing a sinc pattern samples ae Sinc Pattern amplitude 3 delay aoe error delta t If the sequence Y represents Sine Pattern the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y asinc iAt d for i Q 1 2 n 1 where sinc x SED a is amplitude A is the sampling interval delta t d is X delay and n is the number of samples The main lobe of the sinc function sinc x is the part of the sinc curve bounded by the region 1 lt x lt 1 When Ixl 1 the sinc x 0 0 and the peak value of the sinc function occurs when x 0 Using l H pital s Rule you can show that sinc 0 1 and is its peak value Thus the main lobe is the region of the sinc curve encompassed by the first set of zeros
47. p oo director names Emor ir emor out Lock Range Locks or unlocks a range of a file specified by refnum Locking a range of a file prevents both reading and writing by other users overriding permissions for the file and the deny mode associated with refnum See the File I O VI and Function Overview section in this chapter for a full discussion of permissions Unlocking a range of a file removes the override caused by locking a range so that the file s permissions and the deny mode associated with refnum determine whether other users can read from or write to that range of the file set lock F refnum pos mode 0 2 dup refnum pos offset 0 emor out Eor if count You cannot lock a range of a datalog file Move Moves the file or directory specified by source path to the location specified by target path source path j new path target path emor oul Emor n New Directory Creates the directory specified by directory path If a file or directory already exists at the specified location this function returns an error instead of overwriting the existing file or directory dup directory path error out National Instruments Corporation 11 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions New File Creates the file specified by file path and opens it for reading and writing regardless of permissions refnum emor out Open File Opens the file specified by f
48. task ID out patte be i ther atten list pate ready 3 error in no error ermar A time lirit LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 25 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis Digital Trigger Config Configures the trigger condition for starting and or stopping a digital pattern generation operation This VI is only valid when the Digital Clock Config VI has its handshake source parameter set to 1 or 4 internal or external pattern generation with external clock task ID Trig eF task ID out trigger type 0 no change Config lalolagi error aut mode 0 no change error in no error National Instruments Corporation 25 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Easy Counter VIs Note This chapter describes the Easy Counter VIs that perform simple counting operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can access the Easy Counter VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Counter The Easy Counter VIs are the VIs on the top row of the Counter palette i FULSE PULSE FREQ ee LERN ka Is Easy Counter VIs d w jnnnre m e This chapter describes the high level VIs for programming counters on the MIO TIO and other devices with the DAQ STC or Am9513 counter timer chips These VIs call the Intermediate Counter VIs to generate a single delayed TTL pulse a finite or continuous train of
49. 0 or j m Then the VI obtains the elements of h using n l1 h xix forj n 1 n 2 2 1 0 1 2 m 1 k 0 The elements of the output sequence Rxy are related to the elements in the sequence h by Rxy i_m 1 fori 0 1 2 size 1 size n m 1 where size is the number of elements in the output sequence Rxy Because you cannot index LabVIEW arrays with negative numbers the corresponding cross correlation value at t 0 is the n element of the output sequence Rxy Therefore Rxy represents the correlation values that the VI shifted n times in indexing National Instruments Corporation 39 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS The following block diagram shows one way to index the CrossCorrelation VI Samples Decimate Decimates the input sequence X by the decimating factor and the averaging binary control 7 ee Decimated Array Erol decimating factor averaging If Y represents the output sequence Decimated Array the VI obtains the elements of the sequence Y using LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Xe if ave is false yi ta for i 0 1 2 size 1 Y X im k 1f ave is true m k 0 n size trune S m where n is the number of elements in X m is the decimating factor ave is the averaging option and size is the number of elements in th
50. 10 sic Send interface clear 34 13 Simple Error Handler 10 11 Sinc 4 17 Sinc Pattern 38 7 Sine 4 17 Sine amp Cosine 4 17 Sine Pattern 38 7 Sine Wave 38 8 Solve Complex Linear Equations 45 15 Solve Linear Equations 45 16 Sort 1D Array 7 7 Spectrum Unit Conversion 40 7 Spline Interpolant 43 6 Spline Interpolation 43 7 Split 1D Array 7 7 Split Number 13 5 Split String 6 14 Spreadsheet String To Array 6 14 Square Wave 38 8 sre Unassert or assert remote enable 34 14 Standard Deviation 44 12 Stop 12 6 String Constant 6 20 String Length 6 14 String Subset 6 14 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual l 8 String To Byte Array 4 11 6 19 String To IP 48 3 String To Path 11 19 6 20 Strip Path 11 11 SVD Factorization 45 17 Swap Bytes 13 6 Swap Words 13 6 T T Distribution 44 13 Tab 6 20 Tangent 4 17 TCP Close Connection 48 3 TCP Create Listener 48 3 TCP Listen 48 2 TCP Open Connection 48 4 TCP Read 48 4 TCP Wait on Listener 48 4 TCP Write 48 4 Temporary Directory Constant 11 28 Test Complex Positive Definite 45 18 Test Positive Definite 45 18 TestSRQ 35 7 TestSys 35 8 Threshold 1D Array 7 7 Threshold Peak Detector 40 7 47 4 Tick Count ms 10 9 To Byte Integer 4 12 To Decimal 6 17 To Double Precision Complex 4 12 To Double Precision Float 4 12 To Engineering 6 17 To Exponential 6 17 To Extend Precision Complex 4 1
51. 28 3 Adjacent COUMLETS essai E S 28 9 Channel to Index VI Parameter Examples cccccccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 29 8 Channel to Index VI Parameter Examples for Sun cccccceeseeeeeeeee 29 9 Command String Device Functions ssseseesesesseseeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 34 4 Command String Controller Functions cccccesseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 4 New and Old ActiveX Automation Functions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 2 AppleEvent Descriptor String Formats cccecccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaees 52 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table A 8 Table A 9 Table A 10 Table A 11 Table A 12 Table A 13 Table A 14 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table B 6 Table B 7 Table B 8 Table B 9 Table B 10 Table B 11 Table B 12 Table B 13 Table B 14 Table B 15 Table B 16 Table B 17 Table B 18 Table B 19 Table B 20 Numeric Error Code Ranges seisnes gi i caatainn ten ceu E T E A 1 WIS A ENOC OCS nenon a a tanned aumeneaaeetaadat A 2 AMAL SIS ENOC Odos a r E ot inanedecueuensaeeonts tan leusenam A 4 Data Acquisition MI Eror COGS nriran tania A 7 APPIEE Vent EMF OCCS eyso eons vm setae uainn ards A 21 Instrument Driver Error CodeS erann iena EAA A 22 PPE Eror Code sorria EE A 23 GPIB Error CodeS
52. 34 12 PREFIX Close 32 2 PREFIX Error Message 32 2 PREFIX Error Query Error Query Multiple and Error Message 32 3 PREFIX Initialize and PREFIX Initialize VXI Reg based 32 3 PREFIX Message Based Template and Register Based Template 32 4 PREFIX Register Based Template 32 4 PREFIX Reset 32 4 PREFIX Revision Query 32 5 PREFIX Self Test 32 5 PREFIX Utility Clean UP Initialize 32 5 PREFIX Utility Default Instrument Setup 32 6 PREFIX VI Tree 32 6 Print Panel 12 5 Printable 9 10 Property Node Application Control Functions 12 5 Property Node ActiveX Automation Functions 51 3 PseudolInverse Matrix 45 14 Pulse Parameters 40 5 Pulse Pattern 38 5 Pulse Width or Period Meas Config 27 7 Q QR Factorization 45 15 Quick Scale 1D 46 6 Quick Scale 2D 46 6 Quit 12 6 R Ramp Pattern 38 5 Rational Interpolation 43 5 RcvRespMsg 35 8 Re Im To Complex 4 21 Read Characters From File 11 7 Read File 11 7 Read from Digital Line 23 1 Read from Digital Port 23 2 Read From I16 File 11 13 Read From SGL File 11 13 Read From Spreadsheet File 11 10 Read Key Boolean 11 22 Read Key Double 11 22 Read Key 132 11 23 National Instruments Corporation l 7 Index Read Key Path 11 23 Read Key String 11 23 Read Key U32 11 23 Read Lines From File 11 10 ReadStatus 35 3 Real FFT 39 18 Receive 35 3 ReceiveSetup 35 9 Refnum To Path 11 19 6 19 Release Se
53. 5 all 12 bit E Series devices and all 1200 Series devices device device oul dither Status Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the devices supported by this VI Route Signal Use this VI to route an internal signal to the specified I O connector or RTSI bus line or to enable clock sharing through the RTSI bus clock line Note This VI is supported by E Series and 54XX Series devices only task ID task ID out signal name signal source pa error out error in no error i RTSI Control Connects or disconnects trigger and timing signals between DAQ devices along the Real Time System Integration RTSI bus device Cntr device out control code trigger line usemap Er board signal ees status trigger line direction This VI is not supported for E Series devices For E Series devices multiple RTSI connections can be set directly in the analog input analog output and counter VIs and used along with the Route Signal VI Other RTSI connections must be made using the Route Signal VI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Scaling Constant Tuner Adjusts the scaling constants which LabVIEW uses to account for offset and non ideal gain to convert analog input binary data to voltage data task ID task ID out channel list x binary offsets out binary offsets actual gains out precisi
54. 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIS Complex Eigenvalues amp Vectors Finds the Eigenvalues and right Eigenvectors of a square complex Input Matrix A Input Matrix Eigenvalues matrix type y Eigenvectors output option error The eigenvalue problem is to determine the nontrivial solutions for the equation AX X where A represents an n by n Input Matrix X represents a vector with n elements and is a scalar The n values of that satisfy the equation are the Eigenvalues of A and the corresponding values of X are the right Eigenvectors of A A Hermitian matrix always has real eigenvalues Complex Inverse Matrix Finds the Inverse Matrix of a complex matrix Input Matrix Input Matris A A A Inverse Matrix Matrix Type error Let A be Input Matrix and be the identity matrix You obtain Inverse Matrix by solving the system AB I for B If A is anonsingular matrix you can show that the solution to the preceding system is unique and that it corresponds to the inverse matrix of A BSA and B is therefore the Inverse Matrix A nonsingular matrix is a matrix in which no row or column contains a linear combination of any other row or column respectively Note You cannot always determine beforehand whether the matrix is singular especially with large systems The Complex Inverse Matrix VI detects singular matrices and returns an error so you do not need to verify whet
55. AMUX 64T in use SC1 MD1 CHO 7 channel list 0 SC1 MD2 CHO0 4 SC1 MD2 CH3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 8 channel indices 0 3 Data for channel 5 is at position 3 within a scan Indices are zero based channel indices is of 0 length In this case status is non zero channel indices 0 0 channel indices 1 2 and channel indices 2 4 The first occurrence of channel 1 within a scan is at index 0 the second at index 2 and the third at index 4 channel indices 0 2 The eight bits of data from port 3 are at index 2 in the scan list channel indices 0 9 Data obtained from channel 9 on AMUX 64T device number 1 is at index 9 in the data buffer channel indices 0 11 Data obtained from channel 3 of the SCXI module in slot 2 is at index 11 in the data buffer National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Table 29 2 Channel to Index VI Parameter Examples for Sun Channel Scan List Channel List Channel Indices 1233 45 57 channel list 0 5 channel indices 0 3 Data for channel 5 is at position 3 within a scan Indices are zero based lA channel list is of 0 length channel indices is of O length In this case status is non zero 12 1 3 41 4 channel list 0 1 1 1 channel indices 0 0 The device samples channel indices 1 2 and channel 1 three times channel indices 2 4 during a scan The first occurrence
56. Advanced Functions Queue RefNum can be used with the following VIs Create Queue Looks up an existing queue or creates a new queue and returns a refnum that you can use when calling other queue VIs name Lunname dj queue size unbounded created new w Fror out De ey See Sree a Peturh EXISTING tr error in no error If you specify a size gt 0 the queue size is limited to that many elements If the Insert Queue Element VI tries to insert an element into a full queue it must wait until an element is removed with the Remove Queue Element VI The default size is 1 for an unbounded queue If a name is specified the VI first searches for an existing queue with the same name and will returns its refnum if it exists If a named queue with the same name does not already exist and the return existing input is FALSE the VI creates a new queue and return its refnum The created new output returns TRUE if the VI creates a new queue LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Destroy Queue Destroys the specified queue and returns any elements that are in the queue All Insert Queue Element and Remove Queue Element VIs that are currently waiting on this queue time out immediately and return an error queue queue out m elements error in no error error out Flush Queue Removes all elements from queue queue queve out va tu elements
57. Analog Input VIs Analog Input Utility VIs and Advanced Analog Input VIs The following illustrates these VI classes EC Analog Input Al Al Al HULT FT HULTFT 0HE E Anal t VI he T asy Analog Inpu S Ph ree tl r E H COH he l f Al I I FIG 5 5CAH CLEAR Intermediate E HE Analog Input VIs Advanced Analog Input VIs Analog Input Utility VIs Easy Analog Input VIs The Easy Analog Input VIs perform simple analog input operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can use each VI alone to perform a basic analog operation Unlike intermediate and advanced level VIs Easy Analog Input VIs automatically alert you to errors with a dialog box that asks you to stop the execution of the VI or to ignore the error The Easy Analog Input VIs provide a basic convenient interface with only the most commonly used inputs and outputs For more complex applications you should use the Intermediate Analog Input VIs and Advanced Analog Input VIs for more functionality and performance Refer to Chapter 15 Easy Analog Input VIs for specific VI information LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIS Intermediate Analog Input Vis You can find intermediate level Analog Input VIs in two different places in the Analog Input palette You can find the Intermedi
58. Ax Xi 0 5 Ax for i 0 1 2 m 1 and defines the function y x to be 1 ifxeDA y x Q elsewhere The function has unity value if the value of x falls within the specified interval Otherwise it is zero Notice that the interval A 1s centered about X and its width is A The last interval A _ is defined as X 0 5Ax Xm 0 5Ax In other words if a value is equal to max it is counted as belonging to the last interval Finally the VI evaluates the histogram sequence H using n 1l h yyy for i 0 1 2 m 1 j 0 where hj represents the elements of the output sequence Histogram h x and n is the number of elements in the input sequence X Inv Chi Square Distribution Computes the value of x such that the condition p Prob X lt x is satisfied given the probability value p of a 7 distributed random variable X with n degrees of freedom probability degrees of freedom LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis Inv F Distribution Computes the value of x such that the condition p Prob np m lt X is satisfied given the probability value p of an F distributed random variable F with n and m degrees of freedom probability D mri Inv Normal Distribution Computes the value of x such that the condition p Prob X lt x is satisfied given the probability value p of a Norm
59. B as columns Each cell must contain at least one observation and each cell must contain the same number of observations National Instruments Corporation 44 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs To perform the analysis of variance you specify an array X of observations with values 10 15 20 25 17 and 4 The array Index A specifies the level or category of factor A to which each observation applies In this case the array would have the values 0 1 1 1 0 and 0 The array Index B specifies the level or category of factor B to which each observation applies In this case the array would have the values 0 0 2 1 1 and 2 Finally there are two possible levels for factor A and three possible levels for factor B so you pass in a value of 2 for the A levels parameter and a value of 3 for the B levels parameter You can apply any one of the following models where L is the specified observations per cell e Model 1 Fixed effects with no interaction and one observation per cell per specified levels x and y of the factors A and B respectively e Model 2 Fixed effects with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell e Model 3 Either of the mixed effects models with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell e Model 4 Random effects with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell 3D ANOVA Takes an array of experimental observations made at various leve
60. Complex Conversion Logarithmic Trigonometric For examples of some of the arithmetic functions see examples general structs 11b National Instruments Corporation 4 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Polymorphism for Numeric Functions Note The arithmetic functions accept numeric input data With some exceptions noted in the function descriptions the output has the same numeric representation as the input or if the inputs have different representations the output is the wider of the inputs The arithmetic functions work on numbers arrays of numbers clusters of numbers arrays of clusters of numbers complex numbers and so on A formal and recursive definition of the allowable input type is as follows Numeric type numeric scalar array numeric type Il cluster numeric types The numeric scalars can be a floating point integer or complex number G does not allow you to use arrays of arrays Arrays can have any number of dimensions of any size Clusters can have any number of elements For functions with one input the functions operate on each element of the structure For functions with two inputs you can use the following input combinations e Similar both inputs have the same structure and the output has the same structure as the inputs e One scalar one input is a numeric scalar the other is an array or cluster and the output is an array or clust
61. Config VI Refer to Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs for description of the AI Control VI Note The AI Clear VI always clears the acquisition regardless of whether error in indicates that an error occurred When you use any of the Intermediate Analog Input VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Time and Dialog in LabVIEW For more information on this VI refer to Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Al Config Configures an analog input operation for a specified set of channels This VI configures the hardware and allocates a buffer for a buffered analog input operation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 16 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs Interchannel delay secs measurement mode structure coupling amp input config no a input lirnits no change EEEE device 1 cs taskID channels 0 oti number of channels butter size 1000 scans gfe DSF handle structure out group 0 cos Bron Out error in no error number of butters 1 allocation mode no change 0 Humber of SMU boards no You can allocate more than one buffer only with the following devices e Macintosh NB A2000 NB A2100 and
62. Corporation Contents Chapter 6 String Functions Overview of Polymorphism for String FUMNCTtIONS ccccccccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaaeaas 6 1 Polymorphism for String Functions ccccecsssssseeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 6 1 Polymorphism for Additional String to Number Functions 000008 6 2 Polymorphism for String Conversion FUNCTIONS ccccsssesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 Format Snes OMT VC Wy oaeaeei R noncuceininaaschune diets tcaticleand aimbiemnermobaduenees 6 2 SHAMS PUNCHON ESCM PU OMS at ie ssinatieshvivaisa S O EE eaten 6 6 String Conversion Function Descriptions cccccsessssssseseeseeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 6 18 SUMO Fed COMSAT occon a EA NO 6 20 Chapter 7 Array Functions Array FUNCUOM OVENI W oarnein a a a a a aa 7 2 Outo fRance Index Vallesia a T ae 7 3 Polymorphism for Array PUnCUOnS 2i0s 2500 vi iebsierwweeeiacsariaie ines paces iwainnlbareiaeladinouetels 7 3 Anay PUNCHWON DESCHPLONS eorne ea E E OOO SEa Ges 7 3 Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Cluster FUNCHONOVCIVICW eenei e NA 8 2 Polymorphism for Cluster Functions ccccccccccccecceccecceeeceeceeeeeceeeseseaeeeseaaeaeaaaeaaaaaaaagas 8 3 Seting the Order of Cluster Element Seisin nina 8 3 Closter Function DescHPIONS onransa EE 8 4 Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Comparison Funcom OV Sve Warti eae ne E A scean tees dosaasee 9 1 Boolean Comparses A E 9 1 STO
63. DAQ hardware 101 National Instruments Corporation A 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 1 102400 240 The driver interface could not locate or open the driver 10241 oldDriverError One of the driver files or the configuration utility is out of date 1 10242 242 functionNotFoundError The specified function is not located in the driver 10244 devicelnitError The driver encountered a hardware initialization error while attempting to configure the specified device 10245 osInitError The driver encountered an operating system error while attempting to perform an operation or the operating system does not support an operation performed by the driver 10246 communicationsError The driver is unable to communicate with the specified external device dupAddressError The base addresses for two or more devices are the same consequently the driver is unable to access the specified device 10249 intConfigError The interrupt configuration is incorrect given the capabilities of the computer or device 10250 duplntError The interrupt levels for two or more devices are the same 10251 dmaConfigError The DMA configuration is incorrect given the capabilities of the computer DMA controller or device 10252 dupDMA Error The DMA channels for two or more devices are the same 10253 jumperlessBoardError Unable to find one o
64. Driver Distribution LabVIEW instrument drivers are distributed in a variety of media including electronically via bulletin board and internet and on CD ROM You can download the latest versions of the LabVIEW instrument drivers from one of the National Instruments bulletin boards and if you have internet access you can download the latest instrument driver files from the National Instrument File Transfer Protocol site See the Bulletin Board Support and FTP Support sections of Appendix D Customer Communication CD ROM Instrument Driver Distribution The entire library of LabVIEW instrument drivers is available on CD ROM The instrument driver CD ROM is available from National Instruments at no charge You can retrieve the latest instrument driver list on a touch tone phone by calling the National Instruments automated fax system Fax on Demand at 512 418 1111 or by calling National Instruments National Instruments Corporation 31 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs Instrument Driver Template VIs The LabVIEW instrument driver templates are the foundation for all LabVIEW instrument driver development The templates have a simple flexible structure and a common set of instrument driver VIs that you can use for driver development The VIs establish a standard format for all LabVIEW drivers and each has instructions for modifying it for a particular instrument The
65. Easy Analog Output VIs Easy Analog Output VI Descriptions 2 0 ccccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeennensneaaaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 19 1 Chapter 20 Intermediate Analog Output Vis amin Errors an a saccades dye au Ades oe a 20 1 Analog Output VI DeSCTIptions ccccccccsseeeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaaeaaaaaaaaaagas 20 2 Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility Vis Handine PTT OT Sy acco cece siewaprmsio ac racers e EE teased atest neta E 21 1 Aaloe Output Uun Vi Descriptoms sasana ae 21 2 Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs Advanced Analog Output VI DeSCTIptions cc cccccccccccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeceeaaeeaaaaeaaaaaas 22 1 Chapter 23 Easy Digital 1 0 Vis Easy Dis ital VO DescmpuOMs scsraveseeseaavadin iscsi anal ewes sa e a a a Ea 23 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual X National Instruments Corporation Contents Chapter 24 Intermediate Digital 1 0 Vis Pati iS EOTS cetceee as uenscsns r S 24 2 Intermediate Digital I O VI Descriptions iiss soscaisoiateedaded didn tosnuaiGesavlagd able Siapueseinedisaedaeted 24 2 Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis Di ttal Port NV IDES Crip tt Ms isan tet nies E E erie 25 2 Digital Group VT DESC PUlOMs esre a EN a ia IAES 25 3 Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs Easy Counter VL DescrmpiOns is cua a e ance E E A cussaniees 26 2 Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Handin e Erro Sanse A AE emer rteer ret ce 27 2 Intermediate Counter VI DeSCri
66. Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions UNIX The nine bits of permissions correspond exactly to the nine UNIX permission bits governing read write and execute permissions for users groups and others The following illustration shows the permission bits on a UNIX system User group others permission PWR WERE WR bit 31 276343210 t read permission w write permission Ho BHECLULE permission File 1 0 Function and VI Descriptions The following functions and VIs are available from the File I O palette Build Path Creates a new path by appending a name or relative path to an existing path base path Ue appended path name or relative path Close File Writes all buffers of the file identified by refnum to disk updates the directory entry of the file closes the file and voids refnum for subsequent file operations refnum Emor ir error out Note The Close File VI handles error I O differently than other file functions it executes even when its error in indicates that an error has occurred in a preceding function LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Open Create Replace File Opens an existing file creates a new file or replaces an existing file programmatically or interactively using a file dialog box You can optionally specify a dialog prompt default file name start path or filter pattern Use this V
67. Function and VI Reference Manual 41 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis Equiripple LowPass Generates a lowpass FIR filter with equiripple characteristics using the Parks McClellan algorithm and the of taps pass freq stop freq and sampling freq The VI then filters the input sequence X to obtain the lowpass filtered linear phase sequence Filtered Data ve pe Pappa Filtered Data i error of taps pass Treg stop freq sampling freq fs The passband of the filter goes from zero DC to pass freq The transition band goes from pass freq to stop freq and the stopband goes from stop freq to the Nyquist frequency FIR Narrowband Coefficients Generates a set of filter coefficients to implement a digital interpolated FIR filter You can pass these coefficients to the FIR Narrowband Filter VI to filter the data ripple rp Sampling freq T IFlF Coefficients passband fpass error stopband fstop center freq tc attenuation dbj Ar filter type The following figures show how the narrowband filter parameters define the lowpass highpass bandpass and bandstop filters The passband ripple is shown as Sp The filter response on the Y axis is shown on a linear scale For this reason the stopband attenuation A was mapped to a linear attenuation using the following equations A 20log6 Ar 107 National Instruments Corporation 41 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapt
68. Functions Analog Output Utility VI Descriptions The following Analog Output Utility VIs are available AO Continuous Gen Generates a continuous timed circular buffered waveform for the given output channels at the specified update rate The VI updates the output buffer continuously as it generates the data If you simply want to generate the same data continuously use the AO Waveform Gen VI instead butter size 1000 updates limit settings no change device 1 channels 0 Update rate 1000 updates sec scaled data error in no error Iteration U initialize clear generation es 1 number of upd number of buf por out i You use the AO Continuous Gen VI when your waveform data resides on disk and is too large to hold in memory or when you must create your E waveform in real time Place the VI in a While Loop and wire the iteration terminal to the VI iteration input Note If your program iterates more than 2 times do not wire this VI iteration terminal to the loop iteration terminal Instead set iteration to 0 on the first loop then to any positive value on all other iterations The VI reconfigures and restarts if iteration lt 0 Also wire the condition that terminates the loop to the VI s clear acquisition input inverting the signal if necessary so that it is TRUE on the last iteration On iteration 0 the VI calls the AO Config VI to configure the channel group a
69. Handshake DIO Transfer Device Type Numbers Modes Direction Clocks Method Lab NB 8 bit Handshaking Read or write None Interrupts Lab LC port on or off port 0 may be Lab PC bidirectional SCXI 1200 DAQCard 1200 DAQPad 1200 PCI 1200 No handshaking Read or write Software unusable if polling port 0 or 1 uses handshaking PC LPM 16 8 bit 0 1 No handshaking 0 read or write None Software ports polling DAQCard 500 4 bit 0 1 No handshaking 0 write 1 read None Software DAQCard 5 16 ports polling DAQCard 700 8 bit 0 1 No handshaking 0 write 1 read None Software ports polling National Instruments Corporation B 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities 54xx Devices Table B 16 Analog Output and Digital Output Characteristics 54XX Series Devices Characteristics AT 5411 PCI 5411 Maximum Update Rate 40 MHz Update Interval 1 to 65535 DAC Type 12 bit double buffered Output Limits V 5 into 50 Q load Internal reference only 10 into unterminated high input impedance load Update Clocks Update clock 1 Triggers On rising TTL edge at trigger input connector or RTSI pin Can be also generated internally by software Digital Outputs 16 bits with clock signal Waveform Memory Depth ARB Mode 2 000 000 16 bit samples standard Direct Digital Synthesis DDS Mode 16 384 16 bit samples maximum Buffer Numbers 1 to 1 000 Buffer Iterations 1 to 65 535 Buffer
70. ID if no address is necessary determines the Controller that a specific function uses If a Controller ID is not present the functions assume Controller or bus 0 status is a 16 bit Boolean array in which each bit describes a state of the GPIB Controller If an error occurs bit 15 is set The error code field of the error out cluster is a GPIB error code only if bit 15 of status is set error in and error out terminals comprise the error clusters in each Traditional GPIB function The error cluster contains three fields The status field is a Boolean which is TRUE when an error occurs FALSE when no error occurs code field will be a GPIB error code value if an error occurs during a GPIB function source field is a string which describes where the error has occurred If the status field of the error in parameter to a function is set the function is not executed and the same error cluster is passed out By wiring the error out of each function to the error in of the next function the first error condition 1s recorded and propagated to the end of the diagram where it is reported in only one place LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions Traditional GPIB Function Behavior The GPIB Read and GPIB Write functions leave the device in the addressed state when they finish executing If your device cannot tolerate functioning in the addressed state use the GPIB
71. InvProbErr The probability must be greater than or equal to zero and less than one CategoryErr The number of categories or samples must be greater than one 20056 TableErr The contingency table must not contain a negative number 20061 One of the input selections is invalid 20062 The maximum iterations have been exceeded 20063 The polynomial coefficients are invalid 20064 This VI has not been initialized correctly 20065 The vector cannot be zero LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 6 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes 10001 m o aa beea SSS An error was an e in the input string the arrangement or ordering of the characters in the string is not consistent with the expected ordering semanticsError An error was detected in the input string the syntax of the string is correct but certain values specified in the string are inconsistent with other values specified in the string 10003 invalid ValueError The value of a numeric parameter is invalid valueConflictError The value of a numeric parameter is inconsistent with another parameter and the combination is therefore invalid 10005 badDeviceError The device parameter is invalid 10006 badLineError The line parameter is invalid 10007 badChanError A channel is out of range for the board type or input configuration the combination of channels is not allowed or you must reverse the sc
72. Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Output Channel Limits Waveform Transfer Numbers V Update Clocks Grouping Methods 12 bit O to 10 5 Update clock 1 is 0 1 or 0 Interrupts double ctrA2 or external and 1 buffered update timebase is 1 MHz or ctrBO Lab PC 12 bit 0 to 10 5 Update clock 1 is 0 1 or 0 Interrupts SCXI 1200 double ctrA2 or external and 1 DAQPad 1200 buffered update timebase DAQCard 1200 signal range is PCI 1200 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 and 100 Note The DAQCard 516 and PC 516 devices do not have analog output Table B 14 Counter Usage for Analog Input and Output Lab Series and Portable Devices Counter AI Channel AI Sample AI Scan AO Update Device Name Chip Used Clock Counter Clock Clock Lab PC DAQPad 1200 82C53 Ctr A0 amp BO Ctr Al Ctr B1 Ctr A2 SCXI 1200 DAQCard 1200 PCI 1200 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 12 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 14 Counter Usage for Analog Input and Output Lab Series and Portable Devices Continued Counter AI Channel AI Sample AI Scan AO Update Device Name Chip Used Clock Counter Clock Clock DAQCard 516 82C54 Ctr 0 SW None None PC 516 The second counter is used as an extended timebase for timed analog input or output when sample interval exceeds 65 535 ms Table B 15 Digital I O Hardware Capabilities Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Port Port
73. LabVIEW specific AppleEvent VIs send messages that only LabVIEW applications standard and run time systems recognize To access the LabVIEW Specific Apple Events VIs select Functions Communication LabVIEW Specific Apple Events en Hur Close il You should use these VIs only when communicating with LabVIEW applications You can send these messages either to the current LabVIEW application or to a LabVIEW application on a network See Table A 5 AppleEvent Error Codes of Appendix A Error Codes for error information AESend Abort VI Sends the Abort VI AppleEvent to the specified target LabVIEW application YI name i error string target ID send options x error AESend Close VI Sends the Close VI AppleEvent to the specified target LabVIEW application target ID error string save options send options error AESend Open Run Close VI Uses the Open Document Run VI VI Active and Close VI AppleEvent VIs to make a specified LabVIEW application open run and close a VI Full pathname of WI target ID For this VI you must specify the complete pathname of the VI you want to run See Chapter 12 Path and Refnum Controls and Indicators of your G Programming Reference Manual for a description of path controls and indicators available in the Controls palette LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis AESend Run VI Sends the Run VI App
74. Manual 30 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIS S Ro ce S Ra ve bridgeConfig 2 Half Bridge _ 4V RL strain e GE v o t Ra RL S Ro o S Ro o bridgeConfig 3 Half Bridge ll strain e lt x 1 Figure 30 2 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Half Bridge Configuration National Instruments Corporation 30 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs bridgeConfig 4 Full Bridge 1 V strain bridgeConfig 6 Full Bridge III 4V strain GF v 1 V v 1 Figure 30 3 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Full Bridge Configuration Convert Thermistor Reading Converts a thermistor voltage into temperature This VI has two different modes of operation for voltage excited and current excited thermistors Type of Excitation Yoltage Temperature Voltage Reference k Excitation Current LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 30 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIS This VI has two modes of operation for use with different types of thermistor circuits Figure 30 4 shows how the thermistor can be connected to a voltage reference This is the setup used in the SCXI 1303 SCXI 1322 SCXI 1327 and SCXI 1328 terminal blocks which use an onboard thermistor for cold junction compensation Figure 30 4 Circuit Diagram of a Thermi
75. On iteration 0 the VI calls the AO Config VI to configure the channel group and hardware then calls the AO Single Update VI to write the voltage to the output channels On future iterations the VI calls only the AO Single Update VI avoiding unnecessary configuration If you call the AO Write One Update VI only once to write a single value to each channel leave the iteration input unwired Its default value of 0 tells the VI to perform the configuration before writing any data Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges output limits and scanning order available with your DAQ device Note The AO Write One Update VI uses an uninitialized shift register as local memory to remember the taskID for the group of channels when calling between VIs Usually this VI appears in one place on your diagram However if you use it in more than one place the multiple instances of the VI share the same taskID All calls to this VI configure or write data to the same group If you want to use this VI in more than one place on your diagram and want each instance to refer to a different taskID for example to write data with two devices at the same time you should save a copy of this VI with a new name for example AO Write One Update R and make your new VI reentrant National Instruments Corporation 21 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Advanced Analog Output VIs This chapter contains reference descript
76. Processing palette select Function Analysis Digital Signal Processing The following illustration shows the options available on the Digital Signal Processing palette e Analysis Digital Signal Processing el Digital Signal Processing A fofofo ez YAL TRE Hilbert HiUbecect Horta Horta zz WEENIE BENII kins For examples of how to use the digital signal processing VIs see the examples located in examples analysis dspxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 39 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS Signal Processing VI Descriptions The following Signal Processing VIs are available AutoCorrelation Computes the autocorrelation of the input sequence X Aimy Ero The autocorrelation R t of a function x t is defined as R t x t x t x t x t t dt oo where the symbol denotes correlation For the discrete implementation of this VI let Y represent a sequence whose indexing can be negative let n be the number of elements in the input sequence X and assume that the indexed elements of X that lie outside its range are equal to zero xj 0 J lt O or j2n Then the VI obtains the elements of Y using n 1 y Daoa forj D 2 2 2 1 0 1 2 0 1 k 0 The elements of the output sequence Rxx are related to the elements in the sequence Y by Rxx Yi n 1 for i 0 1 Digs 455 2n 2 Notice that th
77. Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Complex Function Descriptions The following illustration displays the options available on the Complex subpalette H if Complex E gt b gt P be bin The functions Polar To Complex and Re Im To Complex create complex numbers from two values given in rectangular or polar notation The functions Complex To Polar and Complex To Re Im break a complex number into its rectangular or polar components Complex Conjugate Produces the complex conjugate of x iy Complex To Polar Breaks a complex number into its polar components r e i theta E Complex To Re Im Breaks a complex number into its rectangular components Polar To Complex Creates a complex number from two values in polar notation i i a iketa r e theta LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 20 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Re Im To Complex Creates a complex number from two values in rectangular notation gt x iy Additional Numeric Constants Descriptions The following illustration shows the options available on the Additional Numeric Constants subpalette a Additional Numernc Constants A Ce fel ol De Ge Haa egw amp amp Additional User Definable Constants You can define the following constants Listbox Symbol Ring Constant This ring constant assigns symbols to items in a listbox control Typically you wire this cons
78. Reference Manual viii National Instruments Corporation Contents SVC MVP OTS VU Sistas depute ta dees casita eter e 13 16 Occurrence PuncuOn DESerpuOns nenie E ATE R 13 19 PART l Data Acquisition VIs Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Vis Pindins Help Online for the DAQ VIS waicasssacssedeanetanncaanveicatsnonsebdunetnceasadaeanaidatusiocasbengys 14 2 he Ata oo Mpui VIS er A E A 14 3 Basy Analo om put N aonan a a RS 14 4 Intermediate Analog Input VIS sicessdedevrvsid in canattanetnsetaeniudiasicieatmaniatagrineks 14 5 Anao Tne Wy VW Srono E 14 5 Advanced Analog Input Vis cats sssccvssdeonpladesivodnsawieb xeon Wetd awe absicain a eateeone absences 14 5 Locating Analog Input VI Examples cccccccccccccccccccsecssseeeseeeeseesesseeessssenees 14 5 PTO OU UNE PS east Botta te ssaine ucatsnn a a r AE 14 6 Easy Analog Output Vis sii bs2saieratcodescaoctuadin canssaniatasregnsiesdhsaqdssencazantdungut Ena 14 7 Intermediate Analog Output VIS sesescesiocsccvdss Wenabesdacenesabonsoiwebeteacsted ns ocedlonlnewases 14 7 Anglos Output Umi VI Sannia a Dada exes a a 14 7 Advanced Analog Output VIS ccccscssssssesssesseseceeseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 14 8 Locating Analog Output VI Examples cccccccccccccccceccceeceeceeeeseeeeenaeenaaanees 14 8 Pitital Function Visceran ee E E etn cbult cians ctineieues beatbbensite unde N 14 8 E sy Dig ial OPV ISi r S 14 9 Intermediate Digital I O VIS i
79. Sample Count 256 samples minimum ARB Mode Memory depth maximum Note Buffer size should be a multiple of 8 samples DDS Mode Must be equal to 16 384 samples If you load less number of samples then you will see the contents of unfilled sections of memory also appearing in the waveform generation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 14 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 16 Analog Output and Digital Output Characteristics 54XX Series Devices Continued PLL Reference Clock Output Enable Output Impedance Low Pass Filter 16 MHz software switchable to ON or OFF 80 MSPS software switchable to ON or OFF Single Continuous Stepped and Burst Refer to your hardware user reference manual for default settings of your device Digital Half Band Interpolating Filter Trigger Operation Modes i Note Table B 17 Counter Timer Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Purpose Counters Available V 2 a z gt lt LN V 5 Q re High level or ICTRControl Counter Chip Used Timebases Available Outputs Available Output Modes Count Direction Number of Gen Available Internal Refer to 1 MHz PC LPM 16 Lab NB Lab LC Lab PC SCXI 1200 3 2 with SOURCE input at I O Connector VIdescription on modes in rising edge depending DAQCard 1200 DAQPad 1200 PC LPM 16 PCI 1200 DAQCard 500 DA
80. Seni E ant caaet Aeacest eae 52 20 Reply Paratniet ets siete yecedvereovad cause e 52 20 Possible Pri Ons srona i ddaeae eer suses 52 20 Eveni yY WNC Ve arcs tas ate aE E N 52 21 DeSCMPUON saoir wala eens 52 21 Event OS s eee oe ne Onc eC eT rer Pear ee 52 21 Event Meronen ne a eee 52 21 Event Paranie ter S cca seuss iiaee ae E E 52 21 Reply Parameters srnsinrnrien e asa 52 21 POSSI Le ENOS ore a tu cents aicn edad as 52 21 Event Close VU crssssusssiraisticen scat ssaeedraiendonslemiiae te Gldeeatois anes 52 22 PS SCT POON seda eao e aa e N 52 22 Event ClaSS ne N i 52 22 Event ID ane a a canttaes 52 22 Event Paramictoi Seana a 52 22 Reply FarameterS cerei EA E 52 22 Possible Priors 2ciicciean eee el E 52 22 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Xvi National Instruments Corporation Contents Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication Vis PRCA VID eS iD ONG Sst eins ntsayesasecstartean tsa incduath ndash ta cchae leone abt te toch get etude en aeeieas 53 2 Appendices and Index Appendix A Error Codes N mer c Enor CodeS spies sonse tects sust E E A A 1 Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities MIO and Al Device Hardware Capabilitie Ssmo aae ap nnna a iae B 1 Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Hardware Capabilities 00 cccceeeeeeeeee B 10 DARK DC VICES rif spaces tar estas cn sectiiin Godeicueenendpswantiaindga T B 14 SCXD Module Hardware Capabilities cisicai ce Ai oti tes ents dod ieee aa B 1
81. String X 9 860 Z 3 450 X ALY Vf 100 132 10 Z 3450 100 0 fe fe 0 set4942 0 42 sed Scan for Tokens Scans input string starting at offset and returns the next token found allor empty tak I F IF PPR E E il ania offset operators r OnE delimiters 8 4 Ar An ise cached delim Oper data dup string offset past token token string token indes A token is a substring of input string which is surrounded by delimiters or which matches an element in operators Typically tokens represent individual keywords numeric values or operators found when parsing a configuration file or other text based data format This function scans input string starting at offset returning the next token found See the online reference for more information about the Scan String for Tokens function and parameters Select amp Append Selects either false string or true string according to a Boolean selector and appends that string to string false string true string string selector National Instruments Corporation 6 13 output string LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Select amp Strip Examines the beginning of string to see whether it matches true string or false string This function returns a Boolean TRUE or FALSE value in selection depending on whether string matches true string or false string string Dy l
82. Tab Newline Carriage Return Form Feed or Vertical Tab Otherwise the function returns FALSE space hew tab cr If fF LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 9 10 National Instruments Corporation Time Dialog and Error Functions This chapter describes the timing functions which you can use to get the current time measure elapsed time or suspend an operation for a specific period of time Error Handling also is covered in this chapter The following illustration shows the Time amp Dialog palette that you access by selecting Functions Time amp Dialog HITime amp Dialog P on Tien os a National Instruments Corporation 10 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Time Dialog and Error Functions Overview This section introduces the Timing Dialog and Error functions Timing Functions The Date Time To Seconds and the Seconds To Date Time functions have a parameter called date time rec which is a cluster that consists of signed 32 bit integers in the following order Table 10 1 Valid Value of Elements for Date Time Cluster em Waa ofe 00 fim 008 eno p day of month 1 to 31 as output a the function 1 to 366 as input ema rwR o sfc fowom o 6 uy orwsce 1107 Suny o sara DST 0 to 1 0 for Standard Time 1 for Daylight Savings Time The Wait ms and Wait Until Next ms Multiple functions make asynchronous sy
83. Temperature Buffer CJC Yoltage ThermocoupleType CJC Sensor 0 Convert Thermocouple Reading Converts a voltage read from a thermocouple into a temperature value in degrees Celsius Pheunecoups Voltage THER O Lineanzed Temperature C Yoltage l Thermocouple ype CIC Sensor O0 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 30 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIS Scaling Constant Tuner Adjusts the scaling constants which LabVIEW uses to account for offset and non ideal gain to convert analog input binary data to voltage data task ID task ID out channel list 4 binary offsets out binary offsets actual gains aut precision voltages Status binary readings To use this VI correctly you must first take two analog input readings a zero offset reading and a known voltage reading The default binary offset for each channel in the group is 0 To determine the actual binary offset for a channel path ground the channel inputs and take a binary reading or take multiple binary readings and average them to get fractional LSBs of the offset If you use SCX ground the inputs of the SCXI channels to measure the offset of the entire signal path including both the SCXI module and the DAQ device The SCXI 1100 SCXI 1122 and SCXI 1141 modules have an internal switch you can use to ground the amplifier inputs without actually wiring the terminals to ground To use this feature type the specia
84. Therefore enabling trigger type 5 overwrites any settings made for trigger type 4 For some devices digital triggering is supported but for these devices the source is predetermined Therefore the trigger source parameter is invalid Table 18 9 shows the pin names on the I O connector to which you should connect your digital trigger signal National Instruments Corporation 18 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 9 Digital Trigger Sources for Devices with Fixed Digital Trigger Sources Posttriggering Pretriggering Start Start Stop Device Trigger Pin Trigger Pin Trigger Pin MIO 16L H MIO 16DL DH STARTTRIG STARTTRIG STOPTRIG AT MIO 16X AT MIO 16F 5 EXTTRIG EXTTRIG EXTTRIG AT MIO 64F 5 Lab and 1200 Series devices EXTTRIG EXTTRIG PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 no support no support no support DAQCard 700 NB A2000 NB A2100 EXTTRIG no support EXTTRIG NB A2150 EXTTRIG EXTTRIG EXTTRIG On the AT MIO 16X AT MIO 16F 5 and AT MIO 64F 5 the same pin is used for both the start trigger and the stop trigger Refer to your hardware user manual for more details Table 18 10 lists the default settings and ranges for the AI Trigger Config VI The first row of each table gives the values for most devices and the other rows give the values for devices that are exceptions to the rule LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 18 National Instruments Corporati
85. Y Derivative x t Performs a discrete differentiation of the sampled signal X Ki dud te dt B rio wi x Initial condition kr i a eror final condition d d The differentiation f t of a function F t is defined as d t Fi t fh SFO Let Y represent the sampled output sequence dX dt The discrete implementation is given by 1 Yi zg i Ti for i 0 1 2 4 n l where n is the number of samples in x t x _ is specified by initial condition when i 0 and X is specified by final condition when i n 1 The initial condition and final condition minimize the error at the boundaries Fast Hilbert Transform Computes the fast Hilbert transform of the input sequence X 7 HiH Hilbertin Hil kpt error The Hilbert transform of a function x t is defined as co h t H x ar oo LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Using Fourier identities you can show the Fourier transform of the Hilbert transform of x t is h t Hf j sen f XP where x t amp X f is a Fourier transform pair and 1 f gt 0 sen f 0 f 0 l f lt 0O The VI completes the following steps to perform the discrete implementation of the Hilbert transform with the aid of the FFT routines based upon the A t lt H f Fourier transform pair refer to the output format of the FFT VI for more information
86. a pure number a number with no units or a pure number to a physical number x H m s BY You can edit the string inside the unit by highlighting the string with the Operating tool then entering the text If the input is a pure number the output receives the specified units For example given an input of 13 and a unit specification of seconds s the resulting value is 13 seconds If the input is a physical number and unit is a compatible unit the output is the input measured in the specified units For example if you specify 37 meters m and unit is meters the result is 37 with no associated units If unit is feet ft the result is 121 36 with no associated units Number To Boolean Array Converts an integer number to a Boolean array of 8 16 or 32 elements where the 0 element corresponds to the least significant bit LSB of the two s complement representation of the integer String To Byte Array Converts string into an array of unsigned bytes unsigned byte array National Instruments Corporation 4 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions To Byte Integer Converts number to an 8 bit integer in the range 128 to 127 number bit integer To Double Precision Complex Converts number to a double precision complex number number double precision complex To Double Precision Float Converts number to a double precision floating point number number double precision
87. ai tas AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Makes sure LabVIEW always re enables the slave devices before the master device in a multiple buffer analog input operation Only the following devices which support multiple buffered acquisitions can use this VI e Macintosh NB A2000 NB A2100 and NB A2150 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS The master device sends a trigger or clock signal to the slave device s to control the slave device sampling In a multiple buffer acquisition you must enable the slave device before the master device to make sure the slave device always responds to a master signal If you enable the master device first it can send a signal to the slave devices before they can respond You are responsible for the initial startup order You should always start the master device last The Master Slave Configuration VI makes sure LabVIEW arms the master device last for each subsequent buffer acquired during a multiple buffer acquisition MIO Calibrate Windows
88. and VIs This chapter also describes the differences between functions and VIs Chapter 3 Structures describes the structures available in G Chapter 4 Numeric Functions describes the functions that perform arithmetic operations complex conversion logarithmic and trigonometric operations It also describes the commonly used constants like the Numeric constant Enumerated constant and Ring constant as well as additional numeric constants Chapter 5 Boolean Functions describes the functions that perform logical operations Chapter 6 String Functions describes the string functions including those that convert strings to numbers and numbers to strings Chapter 7 Array Functions describes the functions for array operations Chapter 8 Cluster Functions describes the functions for cluster operations Chapter 9 Comparison Functions describes the functions that perform comparisons or conditional tests Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions describes the timing functions which you can use to get the current time measure elapsed time or suspend an operation for a specific period of time Error Handling also is covered in this chapter Chapter 11 File Functions describes the low level VIs and functions that manipulate files directories and paths This chapter also describes file constants and the high level file VIs Part G Functions and VIS e Chapter 12 Application Control Functions describes the A
89. available in the LabVIEW development system However for more specific parameter information regarding each function and VI refer to the Online Reference which you can access by selecting Help Online Reference or to the Help window which you access by selecting Help Show Help Organization of the Product User Manual This manual covers five subject areas G functions and VIs Data Acquisition VIs Instrument I O VIs Analysis VIs and Communications VIs Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs introduces the functions and VIs available in the LabVIEW development system e Part I G Functions and VIs includes Chapters 2 through 13 which describe the functions unique to the G programming language e Part I Data Acquisition VIs includes Chapters 14 through 30 which describe the Data Acquisition DAQ VIs e Part III Instrument I O Functions and VIs includes Chapters 31 through 36 which describe the Instrument I O VIs and functions e Part IV Analysis VIs includes Chapters 37 through 47 which describe the Analysis VIs e Part V Communication VIs and Functions includes Chapters 48 through 53 which describe the Communication VIs National Instruments Corporation xxiii LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual About This Manual In addition this manual includes the following appendices and index e Appendix A Error Codes includes tables that summarize the analog and digital I O capabilities of Nationa
90. begins at a location specified by pos mode and pos offset for byte stream file and at the end of file for datalog files data header and the format of the specified file determine the amount of data written pos mode 0 2 pos offset 0 Error in data Writing Byte Stream Files If refnum is a byte stream file refnum the Write File function writes to a location specified by pos mode and pos offset in the byte stream file specified by refnum If the top level datatype of data is of variable length that is a string or an array Write File can write a header to the file that specifies the size of the data Write File sets the file mark to the byte following the last byte written convert eol determines whether the function converts the end of line markers it writes into system specific end of line markers You can wire convert eol only if data is a string The system specific end of line marker is a carriage return followed by a line feed on Windows a line feed on UNIX and a carriage return on Macintosh If header is true Write File ignores convert eol National Instruments Corporation 11 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Writing Datalog Files If refnum is a datalog file refnum the Write File function writes data as records to the datalog file specified by refnum Writing always starts at the end of the datalog file datalog files are append only Write File sets the file mark to the record
91. broinean ae aN enana Ea 27 6 setup Mode 3 in ICTR Control s str atn 27 6 Setup Mode 4an IC TR C ONTO sats a ta aa t 27 6 Setup Mode s inIC TRC On troll os idevesss bsg ienien anina aiaa 27 17 Unbuffered Mode 2 and 3 Counting seseeeeseeeseeeesesssesesssesssessssssssss 28 4 Buttered Mode Countin ianari n teeiadhenibebyabineetiuie 28 5 Unbuffered Mode 4 High Pulse Width Measurement ccccceeee 28 6 Buffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Pulse Width Measurement 28 6 Unbuffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Period Measurement ccccee 28 7 Buffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Pulse Width Measurement 28 7 Unbuffered Mode 6 High Pulse Width Measurement cccceeeee 28 7 Buffered Mode 6 High Pulse Width Measurement Counton Rising Edge Of SOUICE sisassedeisicceaceatitatucstasenmdisadicnmsetiates 28 8 Buffered Mode 7 Semi Period Measurement ecceeeeeeteeeeteeeeeees 28 8 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Quarter Bride Con suration assess iia 30 4 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Hali Brid se Cont euraon oreen an e 30 5 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Pull Brndse COmiSuralOn cise ceaccntats teen patie wean a 30 6 Circuit Diagram of a Thermistor in a Voltage Divider eee 30 7 Circuit Diagram of a Thermistor with Current Excitation 00 30 7 POW PASS Pile ies atin vette ctiain cedaacen stead pacinoiealalcianilalbinincinelaat i
92. build an array of n dimensions each array input must be of the same dimension n and each element input must have n 1 dimensions To create a 1D array LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 7 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 7 Array Functions connect scalar values to the element inputs and 1D arrays to the array inputs To build a 2D array connect 1D arrays to element inputs and 2D arrays to the array inputs Cluster To Array Converts a cluster of identically typed components to a 1D array of elements of the same type cluster For more information about clusters see Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Decimate 1D Array Divides the elements of array into the output arrays array of elements O n 2M array of elements 1 n 1 2nt 1 Index Array Returns the element of array at index If array is multidimensional you must add additional index terminals for each dimension of array n dimension array Ml oO element or index O m sub array In addition to extracting an element of the array you can slice out a higher dimensional component by disabling one or more of the index terminals Initialize Array Creates an n dimensional array in which every element is initialized to the value of element Thee SIZE element 4 gt FA initialized dimension size rar n dimension array sl l sl Wes gize n i National Instruments Corporation 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Refere
93. calibration chapter of the AT AO 6 10 User Manual for more information Channel To Index Uses the current group configuration for the specified task to produce a list of indices into the group s scan or update list for each channel specified in the channel list task ID task ID out channel list channel indices buffer number You can use this list of channel indices to locate data for a particular channel within a multiple channel buffer You can also use the indices to read or write to a group subset with the buffer read and write VIs Refer to your specific device information in Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel limitations that apply to your device National Instruments Corporation 29 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIs Table 29 1 shows possible values for the channel scan list channel list and channel indices parameters Table 29 2 shows the possible values for the Sun The channel scan list parameter is an input for the group configuration VIs Table 29 1 Channel to Index VI Parameter Examples Channel Scan List Channel List Channel Indices 1 3 4 5 7 channel list 0 5 1 3 4 5 7 channel list is of 0 length 12 eA channel list 0 1 1 1 The device samples channel 1 three times during a scan 0 1 3 4 channel list O 3 For this example channel scan list is a digital input group 0 3 channel list 0 AM1 9 One
94. channel must be one that is not already defined in another group or you will get an error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 25 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis MIO devices except for the AT MIO 16D and the AT MIO 16DE 10 as well as the NB TIO 10 LPM devices DAQCard 500 516 devices DAQCard 700 PC TIO 10 AO 2DC devices PC OPDIO 16 and AT AO 6 10 do not allow handshaking The digital port VIs are more appropriate for these devices Handshaking 1s not allowed if digital channel list is composed of channel names The AT MIO 16D and AT MIO 16DE 10 do not allow handshaking if digital channel list includes ports 0 1 and or 4 The DIO 96 devices do not allow handshaking if digital channel list includes ports 2 5 8 and or 11 The DIO 24 and Lab and 1200 Series devices do not allow handshaking if digital channel list includes port 2 The DIO 32F allows handshaking for the following configurations only e A group containing any one port e A group containing ports 0 and 1 or ports 2 and 3 in that order e A group containing ports 0 1 2 and 3 in that order Digital Mode Config Configures the handshaking characteristics for DIO 32 devices request polarity acknowledge modify amount acknowledge modify mode task ID task ID out signal mode edge mode eror in no error acknowledge polarity hardware double buffer mode
95. closing the reference when you finish using it National Instruments Corporation 12 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Open VI Reference Returns a reference to a VI specified by a name string or path to the VI s location on disk tupe speciher Vl Retnum F application reference local vi reference vi path emor in no error emor out password You can get references to VIs in another LabVIEW application by wiring an application reference obtained from the Open Application Reference function to this function In this case path input refers to the file system on the remote LabVIEW computer If you wire a reference to the local LabVIEW application you get the same behavior as if you had not wired anything to the application reference input If you intend to perform editing operations on the referenced VI and the VI has a password protected diagram you can provide the password to the password string input If you provide the incorrect password the Open VI Reference function returns an error and an invalid VI reference If you provide no password when opening a reference to a VI that is password protected you can still get the reference but you can only perform operations that do not edit the VI If you intend to call the specified VI through the Call By Reference function wire a strictly typed VI reference to the type specifier input The function ignores the value
96. directly support CINs are resizable and show datatypes for the connected inputs and outputs similar to the Bundle function The following illustration shows the CIN function Code Interface Mode The LabVIEW interface to external code is very powerful You can pass any number of parameters to or from external code and each parameter can be of any arbitrary G datatype LabVIEW provides several libraries of routines that make working with G datatypes easier These routines support memory allocation file manipulation and datatype conversion If you convert a VI that contains a CIN to another platform you need to recompile the code for the new platform because CINs use code compiled in another programming language You can write source code for a CIN so that it is machine independent requiring only a recompile to convert it to another platform For examples of CINs see examples cins For more information on the Code Interface Node see the LabVIEW Code Interface Reference Manual available in portable document format PDF only LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Call Library Function Calls standard libraries without writing a Code Interface Node CIN Under Windows you can call a dynamic link library DLL function directly In Macintosh and UNIX you can call a shared library function directly On the Macintosh 68K you must have the CFM 68K system ext
97. during the wait the element is returned and timed out returns FALSE If no element becomes available or the queue is not valid timed out returns TRUE Rendezvous Vis You can use the Rendezvous VIs to synchronize two or more separate parallel tasks at specific points of execution Each task that reaches the rendezvous waits until the specified number of tasks are waiting at which point all tasks proceed with execution You can access the Rendezvous VIs by selecting Functions Advanced Synchronization Rendezvous LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions The Rendezvous VIs use the Rendezvous RefNum control from the Controls Path amp Refnum palette aa The Rendezvous RefNum can be used with the following VIs Create Rendezvous Looks up an existing rendezvous or creates a new rendezvous and returns a refnum that you can use when calling other Rendezvous VIs name Lunnamedi rendezyous size 2 i ee a f created new return exisiting LF e O Losrror out error in Eno error The size specifies how many tasks have to meet at the rendezvous in order to continue execution The default size is 2 If name is specified the VI first searches for an existing rendezvous with the same name and returns its refnum if it exists If a named rendezvous with the same name does not already exist and the return existing input is FALSE the VI creates a n
98. edges in the signal on the specified counter s SOURCE pin or the number of cycles of a specified internal timebase signal count limit Ceontinucus 1 gate mode Cungated 0 device task ID counter counter size 16 24 bits 0 a E ar error out error in no error ewent sources timebase cou source edge Crising 0 When the internal timebase is used this VI works like the Tick Count ms function but uses a hardware counter on the DAQ device with programmable resolution You can optionally gate or trigger the operation with a signal on the counter s GATE pin Call the Counter Start VI to start the operation or enable it to be gated ICTR Control Controls counters on devices that use the 8253 54 chip including e Lab and 1200 Series devices DAQCard 500 and DAQCard 700 e Windows LPM devices 516 devices count output state device enunter read value control code r error out error in no error binary or bed In setup mode 0 as shown in Figure 27 1 the output becomes low after the mode set operation and counter begins to count down while the gate input is high The output becomes high when counter reaches the TC that is when the counter decreases to 0 and stays high until you set the selected counter to a different mode Figure 27 1 Setup Mode in ICTR Control National Instruments Corporation 27 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs In setup mode 1 a
99. emor in no eror TCP Create Listener Creates a listener for a TCP connection listener ID port emor in no eror Emor cut National Instruments Corporation 48 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 48 TCP VIs TCP Open Connection Attempts to open a TCP connection with the specified address and port address m connection ID remote pork timeout ms 0000 P error out error in no error local port TCP Read Receives up to bytes to read bytes from the specified TCP connection returning the results in data out mode standard connection ID oe connection O out bytes to read data out timeout ms 25000 f Ban epror out eror in no error TCP Wait on Listener Waits for an accepted TCP connection at the specified port listener ID in i TER listener ID out remote address timeout ms walt forever 1 P F L remote port eror in no eror mna eor out connection ID TCP Write Writes the string data in to the specified TCP connection connection ID rT connection ID out data in bytes writter timeout ms 25000 ps eor out error in no error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 48 4 National Instruments Corporation UDP Vis This chapter describes a set of VIs that you can use with User Datagram Protocol UDP a protocol in the TCP IP suite for communicating across a single network or an interconnected set of networks The f
100. empty Length is zero End of Line Consists of a constant string containing the platform dependent end of line value For Windows the value is CRLF for Macintosh the value is CR and for UNIX the value is LF Line Feed Consists of a constant string containing the ASCII LF value Tab Consists of a constant string containing the ASCH HT horizontal tab value LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 20 National Instruments Corporation Array Functions This chapter describes the functions for array operations The following illustration shows the Array palette which you access by selecting Functions Array spP PE azoa National Instruments Corporation 7 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter7 Array Functions Some of the array functions also are available from the Array Tools palette of most terminal or wire pop up menus The illustration below shows this pop up menu Array Tools PPPE If you select functions from this palette they appear with the correct number of terminals to wire to the object on which you popped up For examples of array functions see examples general arrays llb Array Function Overview Some of the array functions have a variable number of terminals When you drop a new function of this kind it appears on the block diagram with only one or two terminals You can add and remove terminals by using Add Element Input or Add Array Input and Remove Inpu
101. from writing to or triggering the instrument LabVIEW instrument drivers simplify instrument control and reduce test program development time by eliminating the need to learn the low level programming protocol for each instrument The LabVIEW instrument driver library from National Instruments contains instrument drivers for a variety of programmable instrumentation including GPIB VXI and serial If a driver for your instrument is in the library you can use it as is to control your instrument Instrument drivers are distributed with a block diagram source code so you can customize LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 31 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs them for your specific application if needed If a driver for your particular instrument does not exist try one of the following suggestions e Use a driver for a similar instrument Often similar instruments from the same manufacturer have similar if not identical instrument drivers e Modify the Instrument Driver Template VIs to create a new driver for your instrument e Use either the GPIB VXI Serial or VISA I O libraries provided with LabVIEW to send and receive commands directly to and from your instrument e Refer to Chapter 7 Getting Started with a LabVIEW Instrument Driver in the LabVIEW User Manual for information on how to start using LabVIEW instrument drivers from National Instruments Instrument
102. invalidReadError The parameters specified to read data were invalid in the context of the acquisition For example an attempt was made to read 0 bytes from the transfer buffer or an attempt was made to read past the end of the transfer buffer 10631 nolnfiniteModeError Continuous input or output transfers are not allowed in the current operating mode 10632 somelnputsIgnoredError Certain inputs were ignored because they are not relevant in the current operating mode 10633 invalidRegenModeError The specified analog output regeneration mode is not allowed for this board 10634 noContTransferInProgressError No continuous double buffered transfer is in progress for the specified resource 10635 invalidSCXIOpModeError Either the SCXI operating mode specified in a configuration call is invalid or a module is in the wrong operating mode to execute the function call 10636 noContWithSynchError You cannot start a continuous double buffered operation with a synchronous function call 10637 bufferAlreadyConfigError Attempted to configure a buffer after the buffer had already been configured You can configure a buffer only once 10680 badChanGainError All channels of this board must have the same gain badChanRangeError All channels of this board must have the same range badChanPolarityError All channels of this board must have the same polarity LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 16 National Instruments Corporation
103. it finds the maximum and minimum values mas value i mas index indices n min value min index indices National Instruments Corporation 7 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter7 Array Functions If a numeric array has one dimension the max index and min index outputs are scalar integers If a numeric array has more than one dimension these outputs are 1D arrays that contain the indices of the maximum and minimum values The function compares each datatype according to the rules referred to in Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Array Size Returns the number of elements in each dimension of array array Hae size 3 Array Subset Returns a portion of array starting at index and containing length elements array sub array index 0 Is length rea oo os tat 1 I wom Tet Array To Cluster Converts a 1D array to a cluster of elements of the same type as the array elements Pop up on the node to set the number of elements in the cluster The default is nine The maximum cluster size for this function is 256 For more information about clusters see Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Build Array Appends any number of array or element inputs in top to bottom order to create array with appended element demeni TEAR array with appended element s l PEHEE OTHE m i i a AL To change an element input to an array input pop up on the input and select Change to Array In general to
104. least one observation per level and performs a one way analysis of variance in the fixed effect model In the one way analysis of variance the VI tests whether the level of the factor has an effect on the experimental outcome A 1 Index ANCA of levels Factors and Levels A factor is a basis for categorizing data For example if you count the number of sit ups individuals can do one basis of categorization is age For age you might have the following levels Level 0 6 years old to 10 years old Level 1 11 years old to 15 years old Level 2 16 years old to 20 years old Now suppose that you make a series of observations to see how many sit ups people can do If you take a random sampling of five people you might find the following results Person 1 8 years old level 0 10 sit ups Person 2 12 years old level 1 15 sit ups Person3 16 years old level 2 20 sit ups Person4 20 years old level 2 25 sit ups Person 5 13 years old level 1 17 sit ups Notice that you have made at least one observation per level To perform an analysis of variance you must make at least one observation per level To perform the analysis of variance you specify an array X of observations with values 10 15 20 25 and 17 The array Index specifies the level or category to which each observation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis applies In this ca
105. level VIs You can access the Intermediate Digital I O VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Digital I O The Intermediate Digital I O VIs are the VIs on the second and third rows of the Digital palette as shown below National Instruments Corporation E gt Digital Fal DIG DIG DIG IIG LIHE FORT LIME PORT aE EAEz Intermediate Digital I O VIs CONFIG READ WRITE START WHIT Pe nnn nou Eru ma PaA IIO CLEAR nn 24 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 24 Intermediate Digital I O VIs Handling Errors LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the Intermediate Digital I O VIs Each intermediate level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run Note The DIO Clear VI is an exception to this rule this VI always clears the acquisition regardless of whether error in indicates an error When you use any of the Intermediate Digital I O VIs ina While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Time and F
106. list status limit p q number of listeners error Ir i error out ResetSys Performs bus initialization message exchange initialization and device initialization First the function asserts Remote Enable REN followed by Interface Clear IFC unaddressing all devices and making the GPIB board the System Controller the Controller in Charge Second the function sends the Device Clear DCL message to all connected devices This ensures that all IEEE 488 2 compatible devices can receive the Reset RST message that follows Third the function sends the RST message to all devices whose addresses are contained in the address list array This message initializes device specific functions within each device SendlFC Clears the GPIB functions with Interface Clear IFC When you issue the GPIB Device IFC message the interface functions of all connected devices return to their cleared states LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 35 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions You should use this function as part of a GPIB initialization It forces the GPIB board to be Controller of the GPIB and ensures that the connected devices are all unaddressed and that the interface functions of the devices are in their idle states shatus emor out SendLLO Sends the Local Lockout LLO message to all devices When the function sends the GPIB Local Lockout message a device cannot independen
107. not a valid notifier refnum not a notifier send Notification Sends notification to the specified notifier All Wait On Notification VIs that are currently waiting on this notifier stop waiting and return the specified notification notifier notifier out notification error in na error error out Wait On Notification Waits for the Send Notification VI to send notification to the specified notifier notifier notifier aut ignore previous TJ notification ms timeout 11 pad ee tired out error in no error i error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions If ignore previous is FALSE and a notification was sent since the last time this VI was called the VI returns immediately with the value of the old notification and with timed out as FALSE If the ignore previous input is TRUE the VI will wait timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If a notification is sent timed out will return FALSE If a notification is not sent or if notifier is not valid timed out will return TRUE Wait On Notification From Multiple Waits for the Send Notification VI to send a notification to one of the specified notifiers notifiers notifiers out ignore previous TJ Se notifications ms timeout L 1 g tee tinned out error in na error error out If ignore previous is FALSE and a notification was sent to any of the specifie
108. oaas arene 01 Presse pcrwisr o oct arenes 01 parusa roas o oss alleen snd The valid channels for the AT MIO 64E 1 in Differential Mode are 0 7 16 23 34 39 48 55 Note The Lab LC Lab NB Lab PC PCI 1200 PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 DAQCard 700 and DAQCard 1200 must scan channel lists containing multiple channels from channel n n 0 to channel 0 in sequential order including all channels between n and 0 The NB A2000 NB A2150 EISA A2000 and AT A2150 allow only the following scan lists 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 and 0 1 2 3 The NB A2100 allows the following scan lists 0 1 0 1 and 1 0 The channel scan list range shown above is for single ended mode Please refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities to determine the valid range for channels in differential mode SCXI modules in multiplexed mode must scan channels in ascending consecutive order starting from any channel on the module The module order you specify can be arbitrary SCXI modules in parallel mode must follow the DAQ device restrictions on the order of channel scan lists Refer to the Channel Port and Counter Addressing section of Chapter 3 Basic LabVIEW Data Acquisition Concepts in the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Basics Manual for information about SCXI channel string syntax National Instruments Corporation 18 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Al Hardware Config
109. occur when you have initialized your communications incorrectly or have written improper data to your external device This type of problem usually occurs during program development and disappears once you finish debugging your program However you can spend a lot of time tracking down a simple programming mistake because you have not incorporated error checks Without error checks you only know that your program does not work You do not know why the error occurred or where it is The second type of error can occur because your external device might be powered off broken down or otherwise unable to complete its normal tasks This type of problem can occur at any time but if you have incorporated error checking your program notifies you immediately when such operational failures occur The third kind of error can occur when you upgrade LabVIEW or your operating system software and you notice a bug in either a G program or a system program This type of error means you should check errors that you might have felt safe ignoring such as those from functions that close files or clear DAQ operations Be sure to check all I O operations for errors It might seem easier to ignore error checking when you must add error handling code to test and report errors The VIs described here are designed to make it easier for you to create programs with error checking and handling G functions and library VIs return errors in one of two ways with numeric
110. of channel 1 within a scan is at index 0 the second at index 2 and the third at index 4 DAQ Occurrence Config Windows Creates occurrences that are set by data acquisition events general value B general value A task ID in task ID out create clear occurrence DA ewent error in no error channel level conditions error out A DAQ event can be the completion of an acquisition the acquisition of a certain number of scans an analog signal meeting certain trigger conditions a periodic event an aperiodic externally driven event or a digital pattern match or mismatch Your VI can sleep while waiting for an occurrence to be set freeing your computer to execute other VIs When you set the create clear control to 1 create and call the VI this VI creates an occurrence Use the DAQ event control to select the event that sets the occurrence Wire the occurrence this VI produces to the Wait on Occurrence function Anything you wire to the output of the Wait on Occurrence function does not execute until the occurrence is set The occurrence is set each time the event occurs The occurrence does not clear until you set the create clear control to 0 clear and call this VI or call the Device Reset VI for the device LabVIEW returns a Not a Refnum file I O constant along with a non zero status code if it cannot create the occurrence National Instruments Corporation 29 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapte
111. of columns in A and the number of elements in X Complex Cholesky Factorization Performs Cholesky factorization of a complex positive definite matrix A Cholesky F EFF OF If the complex square matrix A is positive definite it can be factored as A R R where R is an upper triangular matrix and R is the complex conjugate transpose of R Complex Determinant Finds the determinant of a complex square matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix determinart matrix ty pe LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Let A denote a square matrix that represents the Input Matrix and let L and U be the lower and upper triangular matrices respectively of A such that A LU where the main diagonal elements of the lower triangular matrix L are arbitrarily set to one The VI finds the determinant of A by the product of the main diagonal elements of the upper triangular matrix U where A is the determinant of A and n is the dimension of A Complex Dot Product Computes the dot product of complex X Vector and Y Vector A vector Y Weotor Let X represent the input sequence X Vector and Y represent the input sequence Y Vector The VI obtains the dot product X Y using the formula n 1 Key yx i 0 where n is the number of data points Notice that the output value X Y is a complex scalar value National Instruments Corporation 45
112. of the following signals used in modem communication CTS DCD DSR DTR RI and RTS PXI Resources Specify the address type the address base and address size of devices at slots BARO through BARS PXI Settings Specify the following information device number function number subsytem manufacturer information and subsystem model code Register Based Settings Determine the following aspects of VISA register based communication National Instruments Corporation Identification of the device manufacturer Model of the device Physical slot location of the device Number of elements in block move operations at both the source and memory addresses Windows Base address size and access to space 33 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Serial Settings Specify the following number of bytes at the serial port baud rate data bits parity stop bits flow control and termination method for read and write operations Version Information Provides information about the version and the manufacturer s name of the VISA implementation as well as the version of the VISA specification VME VXE Settings Determine the necessary addresses access privileges memory space and byte orders necessary for VXI communication LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 22 National Instruments Corporation Traditional GPIB Functions This chapter describes the Traditional G
113. of this input Only the input s type the connector pane information is used By specifying this type the Open VI Reference function verifies at run time that the referenced VI s connector pane matches that of the type specifier input Note It is possible to wire a Generic VI refnum type to the type specifier input Doing this results in the same behavior as if you had not wired the type specifier input at all If you wire the type specifier input with a strictly typed VI refnum the VI must meet several requirements before the VI reference is returned successfully e The VI cannot be broken for any reason e The VI must be runnable as a subVI that is it cannot be active as a top level VI unless the VI is re entrant e The connector pane of the VI must match that of the type specifier If you forget to close this reference it closes automatically when the top level VI associated with this function finishes executing However it is good practice to conserve the resources involved in maintaining the connection by closing the reference when you finish using it LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 12 Application Control Functions If you get a strictly typed reference to a reentrant VI a dedicated data space is allocated for that reference This data space is always used in conjunction with the output VI reference This can lead to some new behaviors that you may not be accust
114. on this VI refer to your LabVIEW User Manual Analog Output VI Descriptions The following Analog Output VIs are available AO Clear Clears the analog output task associated with taskID in taskID in a taskID out eror in no error emor out The AO Clear VI always clears the generation regardless of whether error in indicates an error AO Contig Configures the channel list and output limits and allocates a buffer for analog output operation limit settings no change device ET task iD channels 0 if y number of channels buffer size 1000 updates ae DSF handle structure out group CO TT eerror out error in no error allocate mode DSF handle structure Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges and output limits available with your DAQ device LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 20 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 20 Intermediate Analog Output VIs AO Start Starts a buffered analog output operation This VI sets the update rate and then starts the generation taskID in taskID out number of buffer iterations 1 actual update rate update rate 1000 updates sec error in no error clock Cupdate clack 1 1 clock source Cinternal 1 AO Wait Waits until the waveform generation of the task completes before returning taskID in T taskID out update rate 1000 updates sec check every N updates 5 p ee Eror out emor in na eror l
115. open it When you close the file the file manager dissociates the file refnum from the file In other words the refnum is obsolete once the file is closed Refer to the LabVIEW Online Tutorial Introduction to LabVIEW for more information on path specification in G and for file function examples Byte Stream and Datalog Files G can make and access two types of files byte stream and datalog files A byte stream file as the name implies is a file whose fundamental unit is a byte A byte stream file can contain anything from a homogeneous set of one G datatype to an arbitrary collection of datatypes characters numbers Booleans arrays strings clusters and so on An ASCII text file a file containing this paragraph for example is perhaps the simplest byte stream file A similar byte stream file is a basic spreadsheet text file which consists of rows of ASCII numbers with the numbers separated by tabs and the rows separated by carriage returns National Instruments Corporation 11 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Another simple byte stream file is an array of binary 16 bit integers or single precision floating point numbers which you acquire from a data acquisition DAQ program A more complicated byte stream file is one in which an array of binary 16 bit integers or single precision floating point numbers is preceded by a header of ASCII text that describes how and when you acquire
116. outputs and how they work Locating Counter VI Examples For examples of how to use the Counter VIs open the example libraries by opening examples daq counter DAQ STC 11b examples dagq counter am9513 11b and examples daq counter 8253 11b Calibration and Configuration Vis These VIs calibrate specific devices and set and return configuration information See Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIs for information on locating these VIs and examples Signal Conditioning VIs These VIs convert analog input voltages read from resistance temperature detectors RTDs strain gauges or thermocouples into units of strain or temperature See Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs for information on locating these VIs and examples LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 12 National Instruments Corporation Easy Analog Input VIs This chapter describes the Easy Analog Input VIs which perform simple analog input operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can access the Easy Analog Input VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Input The Easy Analog Input VIs are the VIs on the top row of the Analog Input palette as shown below Easy Analog Input VIs Al Al Al Al COHFIG 5 5CAH CLEAR Paal o E UTIL F ADI b ap a Easy Analog Input VI Descriptions The following Easy Analog Input VIs are available Al Acquire Waveform Acqui
117. outputs and how they work You can access the Intermediate Analog Output VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Output The Intermediate Analog Output VIs are the VIs on the second row of the Analog Output palette as shown below iL Analog AQ AQ AQ AQ MULT FT sige OAE FT OHE FT Ele e E E rA AQ AQ Intermediate Analog Output VIs UTIL b Handling Errors LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the Intermediate Analog Output VIs Each intermediate level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run Note The AO Clear VI is an exception to this rule this VI always clears the acquisition regardless of whether error in indicates an error National Instruments Corporation 20 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 20 Intermediate Analog Output VIs When you use any of the Intermediate Analog Output VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Time and Dialog in LabVIEW For more information
118. points Bins i lower and Bins 7 upper of each interval bin are included in the interval bin depends on the value of bin inclusion in the corresponding cluster i of the Bins Histogram Finds the discrete histogram of the input sequence X The histogram is a frequency count of the number of times that a specified interval occurs in the input sequence te ELE Histogram hix A values intery als eee If the input sequence is X 0 1 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 8 then the Histogram h x of X for eight intervals is h X ag h h h hy hz he h AL 0 23201 Notice that the histogram of the input sequence X is a function of X The VI obtains Histogram h x as follows The VI scans the input sequence X to determine the range of values in it Then the VI establishes the interval width Ax according to the specified number of intervals where max is the maximum value found in the input sequence X min is the minimum value found in the input sequence X and m is the specified number of intervals National Instruments Corporation 44 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis Let represent the output sequence X Values because the histogram is a function of X The VI evaluates elements of using X min 0 5Ax iAx fori 0 1 2 m 1 The VI defines the i interval Aj to be the range of values from es 0 5 Ax up to but not including Xt 0 5 Ax Aj Xi 0 5
119. rectangular real matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix A A e F Seudolnverse Matrix tolerance You compute PseudoInverse Matrix A by using the SVD algorithm and any singular value less than the tolerance which are set to zero If Input matrix A is square and not singular A is the same as A but using the Inverse Matrix VI to compute A is more efficient than using this VI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs QR Factorization Performs the QR factorization of a real matrix A QR factorization is also called orthogonal triangular factorization It factors a real matrix A into two matrices One is an orthogonal matrix Q and the other is an upper triangular matrix R so that A QR This VI provides three methods for the factorization householder givens and fast givens You can use QR factorization to solve linear systems with more equations than unknowns Solve Complex Linear Equations Solves a complex linear system AX Y Input Matrix era Solution Vector known Wector error matris type Let A represent the m by n Input Matrix Y represent the set of m elements in the Known Vector and X represent the set of n elements in the Solution Vector that solves for the system AX Y When m gt n the system has more equations than unknowns so it is an overdetermined system Since the solution that satisfies AX Y may not exist the VI fi
120. saraaa a E A nea l 7 National Instruments Corporation V LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents PART G Functions and Vis Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview Cr PUNCHONS OVELVICW arenero a a eE Introduction to PolyMorphism ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Polymorphis M sereus nnana ei Unit Poly morphis ii sarsana aiia Numeric Conversion eseeeseeeeeeeeeesseessssssessesssssss Overflow and Underflow seeeeeeeeeeessseessssssessesssssss WE SYI earan a A Chapter 3 Structures Smuei O O cccscicacdecaecisesereashehosecinlsiaeiaivesiunesediaeitieieae Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Polymorphism for Numeric Functions cccccccccccccceeeeeeeees Polymorphism for Transcendental Functions Polymorphism for Conversion Functions Polymorphism for Complex Functions Arithmetic Function Descriptions cccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Conversion Functions DeSCTriptions ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions Descriptions Complex Function Descriptions cccccceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeees Additional Numeric Constants Descriptions ccccccceees Chapter 5 Boolean Functions Polymorphism for Boolean Functions eccceeeeeeeeeees Boolean Function Descriptions ccccceseecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual vi National Instruments
121. second or fourth order filter stages The output of one filter stage is the input to the next filter stage for all N filter stages Cascaded Fiter Stages Second Order Filtering Each second order stage stage number k 1 2 N has two reverse coefficients a a24 and three forward coefficients bog D1 D24 The total number of reverse coefficients is 2N and the total number of forward coefficients is 3N The reverse coefficients and the forward coefficients array contain the coefficients for one stage followed by the coefficients for the next stage and so on For example an IIR filter composed of two second order stages must have a total of four reverse coefficients and six forward coefficients as follows reverse coefficients 421 412 422 forward coefficients bo bi ba bop by ban Fourth Order Filtering For fourth order cascade stages the filtering is implemented in the same manner as in the second order stages but each stage must have four reverse coefficients 41 444 and five forward coefficients bog b44 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis IIR Cascade Filter with Integrated Circuit Filters the input sequence X using the cascade form of the IIR filter specified by the IIR Filter Cluster Filtered amp I Filter Cluster JE Final Filter State Initial Filter State IIR Filter Filte
122. set up an operation that requires the use of interrupts DMA is not allowed For example some DAQ events such as messaging and LabVIEW occurrences require interrupts 10696 multiRateModeError Multi rate scanning can not be used with AMUX 64 SCXI or pretriggered acquisitions rateNotSupportedError NI DAQ was unable to convert your timebase interval pair to match the actual hardware capabilities of the specified board 10698 timebaseConflictError You cannot use this combination of scan and sample clock timebases for the specified board 10699 polarityConflictError You cannot use this combination of scan and sample clock source polarities for this operation and board 10700 signalConflictError You cannot use this combination of scan and convert clock signal sources for this operation and board National Instruments Corporation A 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10701 noLaterUpdateError The call had no effect because the specified channel had not been set for later internal updates prePostTriggerError Pretriggering and posttriggering cannot be used simultaneously on the Lab and 1200 series devices noHandshakeModeError The specified port has not been configured for handshaking noEventCtrError The specified counter is not configured for event counting operation SCXITrackHoldError A signal has already been assigned to the SCXI
123. supply the settings for each instance of the channel within the scan If an element of channel list specifies more than one channel the corresponding element of the other arrays applies to all those channels The VI applies the values contained in the configuration arrays upper input limits lower input limits coupling range polarity gain and mode to the channels in the group if you configured on a per group basis or the channels in channel list if you configured on a per channel basis in the following way The VI applies the values listed first in the arrays at index 0 to the first channel in the group or the channel s listed in index 0 of channel list The VI applies the values listed second in the configuration arrays at index 1 to the second channel in the group or channel s listed in index 1 of channel list The VI continues to apply the values in this fashion until the arrays are exhausted If channels in the group or channel list remain unconfigured the VI applies the final values in the arrays to all the remaining unconfigured channels Table 18 5 gives examples of this method The parameter channel scan list which is part of the AI Group Config VI is used in the following table LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Table 18 5 Al Hardware Config Channel Configuration Configuration Basis Array Values Results Group channel scan list 1 3 4 5 7 All chann
124. that A USV where U and V are orthogonal matrices S is an n by n diagonal matrix with the elements of array S on the diagonal in decreasing order Test Complex Positive Definite Tests whether Input Matrix is a Positive Definite matrix a E pozitive definite Input Matrix Emor Test Positive Definite Tests whether Input Matrix is a Positive Definite matrix m riiai positive definite Input Matris Eror Trace Finds the trace of Input Matrix Input Matrix Let A be a square matrix that represents Input Matrix and tr A be trace The trace of A is the sum of the main diagonal elements of A n 1 tr A X ai i 0 where n is the dimension of Input Matrix LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 18 National Instruments Corporation Array Operation VIs This chapter describes the VIs that perform common one and two dimensional numerical array operations The following illustration shows the Array Operations palette which you access by selecting Functions Analysis Array Operations oH Array Operations National Instruments Corporation 46 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs Array Operation VI Descriptions The following Array Operation VIs are available 1D Linear Evaluation Performs a linear evaluation of the input array X i yhil i a b scale i offset error The output array Y i X i a b is given by Y
125. the Al Control VI Minimum Number of Control Total Scans Pretrigger Buffers to Code to Acquire Scans to Acquire Acquire Device NB A2000 0 1 4 0 n20 0 n23 1 n20 NB A2150 PC LPM 16 0 n23 DAQCard 500 reser DAQCard 700 5911 5912 Perf Pe fa oe a All Other 0 n23 n20 Devices DS Default Setting R Range Al Group Config Defines what channels belong to a group and assigns them derice task ID group C03 Arie sean width channel scan list empty 24 peo error out error in no error Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges and scanning order available with your DAQ device Table 18 4 lists default settings and ranges for the AI Group Config VI The first row of the table gives the values for most devices and the other rows give the values for devices that are exceptions to the rule LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 4 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Group Config VI Group Channel Sean List Scan List ett len ls Device Setting Range Setting Range Pos Winds Devs 0 Ossi allanol Ost Mosam eres 0 Osis alla ss AI MIO 64F 5 O lt n lt 15 all channels O lt n lt 63 AT MIO 64E 1 Lab PC PCI 1200 O lt n lt 15 all channels O lt ns lt 7 DAQCard 1200 aces 0 amis aes oer nenaon o oseis allenic ns ean ois alec o1 suave o
126. the location of files in different ways but most computer systems use a hierarchical system to specify the location of files In a hierarchical file system the computer system superimposes a hierarchy on the storage media You can store files inside directories which can contain other directories When you specify a file or directory in a hierarchical file system you must indicate the name of the file or directory as well as its location in the hierarchy In addition some file systems support the connection of multiple discrete media called volumes For example Windows systems support multiple drives connected to a system for most of these systems you must include the name of the volume to create a complete specification for the location of a file On other systems such as UNIX you do not need to specify the storage media locations for files because the operating system hides the physical implementation of the file system from you The method of identifying the target of a file function varies depending on whether the target is an open file If the target is not an open file or if it is a directory you specify a target using the path of the target The path describes the volume containing the target the directories between the top level and the target and the name of the target If the target is an open file you use a file refnum to identify the file to be manipulated The file refnum is an identifier associated with the file when you
127. the mean squared error mse of the input sequences X Values and Y Values TY Values mse ales The VI uses the following formula to find mse n 1l 1 2 mse iy i 0 where n is the number of data points Normal Distribution Computes the one sided probability p of the normally distributed random variable x p Prob X lt x where X is standard Normally distributed p is the probability and x is the value Por Tio probability National Instruments Corporation 44 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs RMS Computes the root mean square rms of the input sequence X 7 rms value error Sample Variance Computes the mean and sample variance of the values in the input sequence X mean sample variance BePrOr Note If you need to compute the sample standard deviation of X take the square root of sample variance Standard Deviation Computes the mean value and the standard deviation of the values in the input sequence X Standard deviation mean error n 1 1 2 i 0 n 1l 1 where u yx and n is the number of elements in X n i 0 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis T Distribution Computes the one sided probability p of the t distributed random variable T with the specified degrees of freedom p Prob Tp lt
128. the range and the voltage values together For more information on limit settings in LabVIEW refer to Chapter 3 Basic LabVIEW Data Acquisition Concepts in the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Basics Manual Table B 12 Analog Input Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Part 2 Max Sampling Device Scanning Triggers Rate S s Transfer Method Any single channel Software trigger pretrigger and 62 5 k Interrupts for multiple channels posttrigger with digital trigger N through 0 where N lt 7 Lab PC Any single channel Software trigger pretrigger and Interrupts SCXI 1200 for multiple channels posttrigger with digital trigger Lab PC DAQPad 1200 N through 0 where N lt 7 Interrupts DAQCard 1200 DMA PCI 1200 DAQCard 500 Any single channel Software trigger only Interrupts DAQCard 516 for multiple channels PC 516 N through 0 where N lt 7 National Instruments Corporation B 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 12 Analog Input Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Part 2 Continued Max Sampling Device Scanning Triggers Rate S s Transfer Method DAQCard 700 Any single channel Software trigger only 100 k Interrupts for multiple channels N through 0 where N 15 PC LPM 16 Any single channel Software trigger only 50k Interrupts for multiple channels N through 0 where N 15 Table B 13 Analog Output Characteristics
129. their default values Many of the DAQ function inputs are optional and do not appear in the Simple Diagram Help window These inputs typically specify rarely used options If an input is required your VI wiring remains broken until a value is wired to the input Required inputs appear in bold in the Help window recommended inputs appear in plain text and optional inputs are in gray text The default values for inputs appear in parentheses beside the input name in the Help window Note Some DAQ VIs use an enumerated data type as a control or indicator terminal If you connect a numeric value to an enumerated indicator LabVIEW converts the number to the closest enumeration item If you connect an enumerated control to anumber value the value is the enumeration index The Analog Input Vis These VIs perform analog input operations The Analog Input VIs can be found by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Input When you click on the Analog Input icon in the Data Acquisition palette the Analog Input palette pops up as shown in the following illustration Al Al HULT FT OME FT OME FT a 75 Al Al READ 5 SCAH E E hw mee UTIL F ADI F F National Instruments Corporation 14 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs There are four classes of Analog Input VIs found in the Analog Input palette The Easy Analog Input VIs Intermediate
130. to the left and the right of the sinc value Sine Pattern Generates an array containing a sinusoidal pattern samples mar Sinusoidal Pattern amplitude phasel degrees a error cycles If the sequence Y represents Sinusoidal Pattern the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y asin x for i 0 1 2 n 1 2nik To where x 730 a is the amplitude k is the number of cycles in the pattern n o is the initial phase degrees and n is the number of samples National Instruments Corporation 38 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs Sine Wave Generates an array containing a sine wave reset phase samples ne Sine Wawe amplitude phase out f error phase in If the sequence Y represents Sine Wave the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y a sin phase i for i 0 1 2 n 1 where a is amplitude and phase i initial_phase 360 0 7 f is the frequency in normalized units of cycles sample initial_phase is phase in if reset phase is true or initial_phase is the phase out from the previous execution of this instance of the VI if reset phase is false The VI is reentrant so you can use it to simulate a continuous acquisition from a sine wave function generator If the input control reset phase is false subsequent calls to a specific instance of the VI produce the output Sine Wave arr
131. track and hold trigger line or a control call was inappropriate because the specified module is not configured for one channel operation sc2040InputModeError When you have an SC 2040 attached to your device all analog input channels must be configured for differential input mode outputTypeMustBe VoltageError The polarity of the output channel cannot be bipolar when outputting currents sc2040HoldModeError The specified operation cannot be performed with the SC 2040 configured in hold mode calConstPolarityConflictError Calibration constants in the load area have a different polarity from the current configuration Therefore you should load constants from factory 10800 The operation could not complete within the time limit 10801 An error occurred during the calibration process 10802 dataNotAvailError The requested amount of data has not yet been acquired 10803 transferStoppedError The transfer has been stopped to prevent regeneration of output data 10804 earlyStopError The transfer stopped prior to reaching the end of the transfer buffer 10805 overRunError The clock source for the input task is faster than the maximum clock rate the device supports If you are allowing the driver to calculate the analog input channel clock rate the driver bases the clock rate on the board type so you should check that your board type is correct in the configuration utility 10806 noTrigFoundError No trigger value was found in the in
132. twice first for the delay to the pulse called phase 1 then for the pulse itself phase 2 If an internal timebase is chosen the VI selects the highest resolution timebase for counter to achieve the desired characteristics If an external timebase signal is chosen the user designates the delay and width as cycles of that signal You can optionally gate or trigger the operation with a signal on counter s GATE pin Call the Counter Start VI to start the pulse or enable it to be gated Down Counter or Divider Config Configures the specified counter to count down or divide a signal on the counter s SOURCE pin or on an internal timebase signal using a count value called timebase divisor The result is that the signal on the counter s OUT pin is equal to the frequency of the input signal divided by timebase divisor gate mode Cungated 0 source edge device taskID counter output high pulse 0 ral i error out error in no error timebase divisor timebase counter s SOURCE You can use this VI to generate finite pulse trains by enabling a continuous pulse generator until the desired number of pulses has occurred You can also use it in place of the Continuous Pulse Generator Config VI to generate a train of strobe or trigger signals LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 27 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Event or Time Counter Config Configures one or two counters to count
133. value with an associated unit Must be a valid unit Conversion Codes Single character that specifies how to scan or format perimeter as follows d decimal integer hex integer octal integer binary integer floating point number with fractional format floating point number with scientific notation floating point number using e format if the exponential is less than 4 or greater than Precision or f format otherwise string An lowercase L preceding the conversion Localization Codes Codes used as format separators for localization as follows comma decimal separator period decimal separator system default separator oO o o The conversion codes used in G are similar to those used in the C programming language However G uses conversion codes to determine the textual format of the parameter not the datatype of the parameter You can use the d x o b f e and g conversion codes to process any numeric G data type including complex numbers and enums For complex numbers you can use the format specifier to process both the real and imaginary parts as a single parameter You can use the s conversion code to process string or path parameters or enums National Instruments Corporation 6 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Notice that you can use either a numeric or string conversion code with an enum depending on whether you want the numeric value or sy
134. values of the primary and secondary addresses For example if primary is 2 and secondary is 3 then address is 2 3 pct Pass control syntax pet address pct passes Controller in Charge CIC authority to the device at the specified address The GPIB Controller becomes idle automatically The function assumes that the device to which pct passes control has Controller capability address is the GPIB address of the device This argument indicates both primary and secondary addresses if you use the form primary secondary where primary and secondary are the decimal values of the primary and secondary addresses For example if primary is 2 and secondary is 3 then address is 2 3 pct sends the following command sequence 1 Talk address of the device 2 Secondary address of the device if applicable 3 Take Control TCT ppc Parallel poll configure syntax ppc byte address ppc enables the instrument to respond to parallel polls byte is 0 or a valid parallel poll enable PPE command If byte is 0 the parallel poll disable PPD byte 0x70 is sent to disable the device from responding to a parallel poll Each of the 16 PPE messages selects a GPIB data line DIO1 through DIO8 and sense 1 or 0 that the device must use when it responds to the Identify IDY message during a parallel poll The device compares the ist sense and drives the indicated DIO line TRUE or FALSE address is the GPIB address of the device This a
135. would need a separate VI for voltage waveforms current waveforms temperature waveforms and so on LabVIEW has polymorphic unit capability so that one VI can perform the same calculation regardless of the units received by the inputs You create a polymorphic unit by entering x where x is a number for example 1 You can think of this as a placeholder for the actual unit When LabVIEW calls the VI the program substitutes the units you pass in for all occurrences of x in that VI LabVIEW treats a polymorphic unit as a unique unit You cannot convert a polymorphic unit to any other unit and polymorphic units propagate throughout the diagram just as other units do When the unit connects to an indicator that also has the abbreviation 1 the units match and the VI can then compile You can use 1 in combinations just like any other unit For example if the input is multiplied by 3 seconds and then wired to an indicator the indicator must be 1 s units If the indicator has different units the block diagram shows a bad wire If you need to use more than one polymorphic unit you can use the abbreviations 2 3 and so on A call to a subVI containing polymorphic units computes output units based on the units received by its inputs For example suppose you create a VI that has two inputs with the polymorphic units 1 and 2 that creates an output in the form 1 2 s Ifacall to the VI receives inputs with the unit m s to the 1 inpu
136. xx using 0 through 9 and upper case A through F Notice that for the Scan From String and Format amp Strip functions a space in the format string matches any amount of whitespace spaces tabs and form feeds in the input string The Format amp Append Format amp Strip Array To Spreadsheet String and Spreadsheet String To Array functions use only one format specifier in the format string because these functions have only one input that can be converted Any extraneous specifiers inserted into these functions are treated as literal strings with no special meaning For functions that produce a string as output such as Format Into String Format amp Append and Array To Spreadsheet String a format specifier has the following syntax Double brackets enclose optional elements I 0 Width Precision unit Conversion Code For functions that scan a string such as Scan From String Format amp Strip and Spreadsheet String to Array a format specifier has the following simplified syntax Width Conversion Code National Instruments Corporation 6 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 2 displays the string syntax available Table 6 2 String Syntax Begins the formatting specification optional Causes the parameter to be left justified rather than right justified within its width optional For numeric parameters includes the sign even when
137. 01 0 02 Lowpass filter 8 voltage or Multiplexed 8 DI and 0 05 0 1 0 2 with 4kHz or current 8 excitation 0 5 1 2 5 10 4 Hz cutoff excitation SW M1 20 50 100 frequency channels in channels 200 500 4 wire 1 000 2 000 scanning SW M mode LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 16 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 18 Analog Input Characteristics SCXI Modules Part 1 Continued Input Number of Voltage Excitation Module Channels Range V Filter Channels Mode Support SCXI 1140 8 DI sample 1 10 100 200 Multiplexed or and hold 500 parallel DS C SCXI 1141 8 DI 5 1 2 5 10 20 Elliptic Multiplexed or 50 100 lowpass filter parallel SW C with 10Hz to 25KHz cutoff frequency SW M disabled on a per channel basis IDS C dip switch selectable per channel JS C jumper selectable per channel JS M jumper selectable per module SW C software selectable per channel SW M software selectable per module 2 The SCXI 1141 has an automatic filter setting LabVIEW sets the filter frequency based on the scan rates used with the module Table B 19 Analog Output Characteristics SCXI Modules Number of Module Channels Output Voltage Range V or mA Mode Support SCXI 1124 6 voltage or 0 tol 0 to 5 0 to 10 1 5 10 software selectable Multiplexed current or 0 to 20 mA Table B 20 Relay Characteristics SCXI Modules Number of
138. 1 File Functions Read Key 132 Reads a 32 bit signed integer value associated with a key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If the key does not exist the VI returns the default value secon refnum i refnum out key ie found default value p value emor in no eror i emor out Read Key Path Reads a path value associated with key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If key does not exist the VI returns default value section refnum out i found default value p q value error in no eror emor out Read Key String Reads a string value associated with key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If key does not exist the VI returns default value section refnum refnum out kep i found default value P q hem value error in no error error cut Read Key U32 Reads a 32 bit unsigned integer value associated with key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum If key does not exist the VI returns the default value section refnum refnum out key i found default value p q value emor in no errar error out National Instruments Corporation 11 23 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Remove Key Removes a key in a specified section from the configuration data identified by refnum s
139. 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 7 lists default settings and ranges for the AI SingleScan VI Table 18 7 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al SingleScan VI NB A2000 NB A2100 1 I lt ns3 1 1 variable n20 NB A2150 DS Default Setting R Range Device Al Trigger Config Configures the trigger conditions for starting the scan and channel clocks and the scan counter additional trigger specific level 0 00 task ID Trigger task ID out trigger type 0 no change Pa ta actual trigger specificatior E error out mode 0 no change error in no error trigger source Cempty string trigger or pause condition Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for information on the triggers available with your DAQ device Refer to your E Series device user manual for a detailed description of the triggering capabilities of the device The following is a detailed description of trigger types 1 analog trigger 2 digital trigger A and 3 digital trigger B as they apply to three types of applications posttrigger pretrigger with software start and pretrigger with hardware start The other trigger types are discussed at the end of this section Application Type 1 Posttriggered Acquisition Start Trigger Only If total scans to acquire is 0 and pretrigger scans to acquire is 0 you are performing a posttriggered acquisition A trigger type of 1 or 2 analog trigger or digital trigger A resp
140. 2 02 413091 03 5472 2970 02 596 7456 5 520 2635 0348 433466 32 84 84 00 2265886 91 640 0085 08 730 49 70 056 200 51 51 02 377 1200 01635 523545 512 795 8248 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual D 2 Fax 03 9879 6277 0662 45 79 90 19 02 757 03 11 011 288 8528 905 785 0086 514 694 4399 45 76 26 02 09 725 725 55 01 48 14 24 14 089 714 60 35 2686 8505 03 6120095 02 41309215 03 5472 2977 02 596 7455 5 520 3282 0348 430673 32 84 86 00 2265887 91 640 0533 08 730 43 70 056 200 51 55 02 737 4644 01635 523154 512 794 5678 National Instruments Corporation Technical Support Form Photocopy this form and update it each time you make changes to your software or hardware and use the completed copy of this form as a reference for your current configuration Completing this form accurately before contacting National Instruments for technical support helps our applications engineers answer your questions more efficiently If you are using any National Instruments hardware or software products related to this problem include the configuration forms from their user manuals Include additional pages if necessary Name Company Address Fax ____ Phone ___ Computer brand Model Processor Operating system include version number Clock speed MHz RAM MB Display adapter Mouse __ yes ___no_ Other adapters installed Hard disk capacity MB Brand Instruments used National Instruments hardware product model R
141. 2 To Extended Precision Float 4 12 To Fractional 6 17 To Hexadecimal 6 18 To Long Integer 4 12 To Lower Case 6 15 To Octal 6 18 To Single Precision Complex 4 13 To Single Precision Float 4 13 To Unsigned Byte Integer 4 13 To Unsigned Long Integer 4 13 To Unsigned Word Integer 4 13 To Upper Case 6 15 To Word Integer 4 13 National Instruments Corporation Trace 45 18 Transfer Function 40 7 Transpose 2D Array 7 8 Triangle Wave 38 9 Triangle Window 42 7 Trigger 35 4 TriggerList 35 6 Two Button Dialog Box 10 9 Type and Creator 11 19 Type Cast 13 6 U UDP Close 49 1 UDP Open 49 1 UDP Read 49 2 UDP Write 49 2 Unbundle By Name 8 6 Unbundle 8 6 Unflatten From String 13 7 Uniform White Noise 38 10 Unit Vector 46 8 Unwrap Phase 39 19 User Definable Arithmetic Constants 4 8 V Variance 44 13 VI Library Constant 11 28 VISA Assert Trigger 33 5 VISA Clear 33 5 VISA Close 33 5 VISA Disable Event 33 10 VISA Discard Events 33 10 VISA Enable Event 33 11 VISA Find Resource 33 6 VISA In8 In16 In32 33 12 VISA Lock 33 6 VISA Map Address 33 16 VISA Memory Allocation 33 13 33 17 VISA Memory Free 33 13 33 17 VISA Move In8 Move In16 Move In32 33 14 VISA Move Out8 Move Out16 Move Out32 33 14 VISA Open 33 7 VISA Out8 Out16 Out32 33 15 VISA Peek8 Peek16 Peek32 33 17 National Instruments Corporation l 9 Index VISA Pok
142. 5 Calling Code From Other Languages in the G Programming Reference Manual National Instruments Corporation 13 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Data Manipulation Function Descriptions The following illustration displays the options available on the Data Manipulation subpalette nh f Data Manipulation iO MANT o EXF EH H t s Ie 16 Flatten To String Converts anything to a string of binary values type string is a type descriptor that describes the datatype of anything data string is the flattened form of anything For more information on type descriptors and flattened data see Flattened Data in Appendix A Data Storage Formats of the G Programming Reference Manual type string data string Join Numbers Creates a number from the component bytes or words Logical Shift Shifts x the number of bits specified by y YT ece xtc y x LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Mantissa amp Exponent Returns the mantissa and exponent of the input numeric value such that number mantissa 2 Pent Tf number is 0 both mantissa and exponent are 0 Otherwise the value of mantissa is greater than or equal to and less than 2 and the value of exponent is an integer wre mantissa u number EXF exponent Rotate Rotates x the number of bits specified by y y rotate
143. 6 Analog Output Only Devices Hardware Capabilities cccccccccccceccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 20 Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices Hardware Capabilities ccccccccccecesceeceeeeeeeees B 21 Digital Only Devices Hardware Capabilities suisst sssecacivninleadieneseacdinlatalniadendiionn B 22 Timing Only Devices Hardware Capabilities ccccessssessssssessesessnsssssssssssnsssssssnaeaas B 23 S02 Devices Hardware Capabilities ecnin acoscs ce kuanns aes NRO B 24 Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages Muluhne Interface Mess die Soepen e bnleh teach lacus tnedsantoadeenamninesescess C 1 Messace Del ilOMS xc ietonseneanntnsadesiiec n otsabeaneWotnc eeseldecsmieceds C 6 Appendix D Customer Communication Index National Instruments Corporation xvii LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents Figures Figure 27 1 Figure 27 2 Figure 27 3 Figure 27 4 Figure 27 5 Figure 27 6 Figure 28 1 Figure 28 2 Figure 28 3 Figure 28 4 Figure 28 5 Figure 28 6 Figure 28 7 Figure 28 8 Figure 28 9 Figure 30 1 Figure 30 2 Figure 30 3 Figure 30 4 Figure 30 5 Figure 41 1 Figure 41 2 Figure 41 3 Figure 41 4 Tables LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Figures and Tables Setup Mode in ICTR Controls serae nnan 27 5 setup Model in IOTR Control ekenin a a aa 27 6 Sctup Mode in IGTR C Ontt ol
144. 73807318 VI_LERROR_INV_CONTEXT Specified event context is invalid LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 2 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 2 VISA Error Codes Continued 1073807302 VI_ERROR_INV_SETUP Unable to start operation because setup 1s invalid due to attributes being set to an inconsistent state 1073807300 VI_LERROR_ALLOC Insufficient system resources to perform necessary a allocation f 1073807299 73807299 VI VLERRORINV_MASK INV_MASK Invalid buffer mask Invalid buffer mask specified 1073807298 VI_ERROR_IO Could not perform read write operation because of I O error 1073807265 VI_ERROR_NLISTENERS No Listeners condition is detected both NRFD and NDAC are deasserted 1073807264 VI_ERROR_NCIC The interface associated with this session is not currently the controller in charge 1073807257 VI_ERROR_NSUP_OPER The given session or object reference does not support this operation 1 1073807242 73807242 VI_ERROR_NSUP_WIDTH Specified width is not supported by this hardware 1073807239 VI_ERROR_INV_PROT The protocol specified is invalid ib 1073807237 73807237 VI_ERROR_INV_SIZE Invalid size of window specified 1073807232 VI_ERROR_WINDOW_MAPPED The specified session already contains a mapped window 1073807231 VI_ERROR_NIMPL_OPER The given operation is not implemented National Instruments Corporation A 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual
145. A2 form 1 2 3 23 where n is the number of samples the VI computes the inverse DFT by applying the chirp z algorithm The longest sequence with an inverse complex DFT that the VI can compute is 27 1 4 194 303 or 4M 1 Note Because the VI performs the transform in place advantages of the FFT include speed and memory efficiency The size of the input sequence however must be a power of 2 The DFT can efficiently process any size sequence but the DFT is slower than the FFT and uses more memory because it must store intermediate results during processing Inverse Fast Hilbert Transform Computes the inverse fast Hilbert transform of the input sequence X i HH Inv Hilbert 3 Hil bes rt error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs The inverse Hilbert transform of a function A t is defined as elite OO A t H hd a oo Using the definition of the Hilbert transform co h t H x gt xO an oco you obtain the inverse Hilbert transform by negating the forward Hilbert transform x t H h H h The VI completes the following steps to perform the discrete implementation of the inverse Hilbert transform with the aid of the Hilbert transform 1 Hilbert transform the input sequence X Y A X 2 Negate Y to obtain the inverse Hilbert transform H X Y Inverse FHT Computes
146. AMAGES CAUSED BY FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT THERETOFORE PAID BY THE CUSTOMER NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF DATA PROFITS USE OF PRODUCTS OR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF This limitation of the liability of National Instruments will apply regardless of the form of action whether in contract or tort including negligence Any action against National Instruments must be brought within one year after the cause of action accrues National Instruments shall not be liable for any delay in performance due to causes beyond its reasonable control The warranty provided herein does not cover damages defects malfunctions or service failures caused by owner s failure to follow the National Instruments installation operation or maintenance instructions owner s modification of the product owner s abuse misuse or negligent acts and power failure or surges fire flood accident actions of third parties or other events outside reasonable control Under the copyright laws this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording storing in an information retrieval system or translating in whole or in part without the prior written consent of National Instruments Corporation DAQCard DAQ STC DAQPad LabVIEW natinst
147. Analysis in LabVIEW for more information National Instruments Corporation 1 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIS Select A VI Tutorial The Select a VL allows you to select any VI using a file dialog box and then place it on a diagram The Tutorial VIs provide examples for you to use while working through the LabVIEW User Manual d gt Instrument Driver Library User Library Instrument drivers are a set of VIs for GPIB VISA serial and CAMAC instruments National Instruments as well as other vendors distribute these instrument drivers Any drivers you place in the instr lib appear in the palette The User Library palette automatically includes any VIs in your user lib directory making it more convenient to gain access to commonly used sub VIs you have written LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 1 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs Application Control The Application Control palette includes the Help functions Menu functions Print VIs and VI Server VIs National Instruments Corporation 1 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Part I G Functions and VIs Part I G Functions and VIs introduces the G Functions and VIs descriptions This part contains the following chapters Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview introduces the G functions
148. Band Parameters and filter type sampling freq ts Band Parameters filter type Note This VI finds the coefficients using iterative techniques based upon an error criterion Although you specify valid filter parameters the algorithm might fail to converge National Instruments Corporation 41 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis The Parks McClellan VI generates only the filter coefficients It does not perform the filtering function To filter a sequence X using the set of FIR filter coefficients h use the Convolution VI with X and h as the input sequences Band Parameters The equi ripple filters use a similar technique to filter the data LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 14 National Instruments Corporation Window VIs This chapter describes the VIs that implement smoothing windows To access the Windows palette select Function Analysis Windows The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Windows palette e Analysis P y nA u Fiat Pa For examples of how to use the window VIs see the examples located in examples analysis windxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 42 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 42 Window VIS Window VI Descriptions The following Window VIs are available Blackman Window Applies a Blackman window to the input sequence X Blackmantsi Ero If y repre
149. Calibrate Windows 29 6 Arbitrary Wave 38 2 Array Max amp Min 7 3 Array Of Strings To Path 6 19 11 15 Array Size 7 4 Array Subset 7 4 Array To Cluster 7 4 8 4 Array To Spreadsheet String 6 6 Auto Power Spectrum 40 2 AutoCorrelation 39 2 Beep 13 2 Bessel Coefficients 41 2 Bessel Filter 41 2 Blackman Window 42 2 Blackman Harris Window 42 2 Boolean Array To Number 4 10 5 3 Boolean Constant 5 5 Boolean To 0 1 4 10 5 3 Build Array 7 4 Build Cluster Array 8 4 Build Path 11 6 Bundle 8 4 Bundle By Name 8 5 Butterworth Coefficients 41 3 Butterworth Filter 41 3 Byte Array To String 4 10 6 19 Bytes at Serial Port 36 1 C cac Become active Controller 34 9 Call By Reference Node 12 2 Call Chain 12 3 Call Library Function 13 3 Cancel Notification 13 9 Carriage Return 6 20 Cascade Direct Coefficients 41 3 Case Structure 3 2 Cast Unit Bases 4 11 Channel To Index 29 7 Chebyshev Coefficients 41 4 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual l 2 Chebyshev Filter 41 4 Chi Square Distribution 44 5 Chirp Pattern 38 3 Cholesky Factorization 45 3 Close All PPC Ports 53 2 Close Application or VI Reference 12 3 Close Automation Refnum 51 2 Close Config Data 11 22 Close File 11 6 Cluster To Array 7 5 8 5 cmd Send IEEE488 commands 34 9 Code Interface Node 13 2 Complex A x B 45 3 Complex A x Vector 45 4 Complex Cholesky Factorization 45 4
150. Calibrates the AT MIO 16F 5 AT MIO 64F 5 and AT MIO 16X gain and offset values for the ADCs and the DACs You can either perform a new calibration or use an existing set of calibration constants by copying the constants from their storage location in the onboard EEPROM You can store several sets of calibration constants LabVIEW automatically loads the calibration constants stored in the EEPROM load area during startup or when you reset the device reference location CACI channel CACO channel device H dewice out calibration sawe new calibration EEPROM location oa reference channel reference voltage The load area for the AIT MIO 16F 5 is user area 5 The load area for the AT MIO 64F 5 and AT MIO 16X is user area 8 A Warning Read the calibration chapter in your device user manual before using the MIO Calibrate VI Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the AT MIO 16F 5 AT MIO 64F 5 and AT MIO 16X DAQ devices Note You should always calibrate the ADC and the DACs after you calibrate the internal reference voltage Note If the device takes analog input measurements with the wrong set of calibration constants loaded you may get erroneous data National Instruments Corporation 29 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS MIO Configure Windows Turns dithering on and off This VI supports the following devices AT MIO 16F 5 AT MIO 64F
151. Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS A2100 Config Selects the signal source used to provide data to the DACs and lets you configure the external digital trigger to be shared by data acquisition and waveform generation operations on the NB A2100 device gr device out DA source Shared trigger COMFIG status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version If LabVIEW acquires multiple data acquisition frames and generates multiple waveform cycles with a trigger required at the beginning of each cycle then the external trigger recognition synchronizes so that each trigger simultaneously initiates the acquisition of the next data frame while generating the output of the next waveform cycle A2150 Config Selects whether or not LabVIEW should drive an internally generated trigger to the NB A2150 I O connector This VI also determines whether LabVIEW should drive the NB A2150 sampling clock signal over the RTSI bus to other devices for multiple device synchronized data acquisition device eT device out io trigger drire master clock CONFIG number of slaves Slave list Sta
152. Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 6 Strings for the Match Pattern Examples Continued Characters to Be Matched Regular Expression The longest string within parentheses but et JT not containing any parentheses within it The character Pick Line amp Append Chooses a line from multi line string and appends that line to string multi line string string line index Aa output string Reverse String Produces a string whose characters are in reverse order of those in string Rotate String Places the first character of string in the last position of first char last shifting the other characters forward one position For example the string abcd becomes bcda string EZE first char last Scan From String Scans the input string and converts the string according to format string You increase the number of parameters by popping up on the node and selecting Add Parameter or by placing the Positioning tool over the lower left or right corner of the node then stretching it until you reach the desired number of parameters Use Scan From String when you know the exact format of the input string format string input string remaining string initial search location 3 offset past scan error in no error 1 at error out default 1 0 dbl 1a output 1 National Instruments Corporation 6 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 7 lists the Scan from String errors
153. Clear VI to clear any generation in progress then passes the unmodified error information to error out If an error occurs inside the AO Continuous Gen VI the AO Clear VI clears any generation in progress and passes its error information out Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges and output limits available with your DAQ device Note The AO Continuous Gen VI uses an uninitialized shift register as local memory to remember the taskID of the output operation between calls You normally use this VI in one place on a diagram but if you use it in more than one place the multiple instances of the VI share the same taskID All calls to this VI configure write data or clear the same generation Occasionally you may want to use this VI in multiple places on the diagram but have each instance refer to a different taskID for example when you want to generate waveforms with two devices simultaneously Save a copy of this VI with a new name for example AO Continuous Gen R and make your new VI reentrant National Instruments Corporation 21 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility Vis AO Waveform Gen Generates a timed simple buffered or circular buffered waveform for the given output channels at the specified update rate Unless you perform indefinite generation the VI returns control to the LabVIEW diagram only when the generation completes device channel ju Update
154. Complex Conjugate 4 20 Complex Determinant 45 4 Complex Dot Product 45 5 Complex Eigenvalues amp Vectors 45 6 Complex FFT 39 3 Complex Inverse Matrix 45 6 Complex LU Factorization 45 7 Complex Matrix Condition Number 45 7 Complex Matrix Norm 45 7 Complex Matrix Rank 45 8 Complex Matrix Trace 45 8 Complex Outer Product 45 8 Complex Polynomial Roots 47 1 Complex PseudoInverse Matrix 45 9 Complex QR Factorization 45 9 Complex SVD Factorization 45 10 Complex To Polar 4 20 Complex To Re Im 4 20 Compound Arithmetic 5 3 Concatenate Strings 6 6 Contingency Table 44 5 Continuous Pulse Generator Config 27 3 Control Help Window 12 7 Control Online Help 12 7 Convert RTD Reading 30 2 Convert Strain Gauge Reading 30 3 Convert Thermistor Reading 30 6 Convert Thermocouple Buffer 30 8 Convert Thermocouple Reading 30 8 Convert Unit 4 11 Convolution 39 4 41 4 Copy 11 15 Cosecant 4 14 National Instruments Corporation Cosine 4 14 Cosine Tapered Window 42 3 Cotangent 4 14 Count Events or Time 26 2 Counter Read 27 3 Counter Start 27 3 Counter Stop 27 3 Create Notifier 13 9 Create Queue 13 12 Create Rendezvous 13 15 Create Semaphore 13 17 Create Special Complex Matrix 45 10 Create Special Matrix 45 10 Creating AppleEvent Parameters Using Object Specifiers 52 14 Cross Power 39 5 Cross Power Spectrum 40 3 CrossCorrelation 39 6 CTR Buffer Config 28 2 CTR B
155. D National Instruments Corporation B 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 3 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Part 2 Continued NB MIO 16 SW Post 111k T k9 or H9 9 or H 9 Ea interrupts 67 k L 15 or H 15 40 k L 25 or H 25 NB MIO 16X SW Post 55 k L 18 or H 18 DMA interrupts 24 k L 42 or H 42 Sw Software Triggering also called conditional retrieval Pre Pretrigger Post Posttrigger Note For NB MIO devices software triggering actually is done in the interrupt service routine interrupts only and is different than conditional retrieval Table B 4 Internal Channel Support MIO and Al Devices AT MIO 16XE10 AT MIO 16XE 50 IntAIGnd IntRef5V IntAOGndVsAIGnd InthOCh0 NEC MIO 16XE 50 DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 IntAOChOVskRef5V IntAO0Ch1 IntAOCh1 VsRef5V DAQCard AI 16E 4 NEC AI 16E 4 IntAIGnd IntRefS5V IntAOGndVsAIGnd PCI MIO 16XE 10 PCI MIO 16XE 50 PXI 6030E IntAIGnd IntRef5V InttOGndVsAIGnd IntAOch0O PXI 6011E PCI 6031 CPCI 6030E CPCI 6011E InthOChOVskRef5V IntAOCh1 IntAOCh1 VsRefS5V VXI MIO 64XE 10 IntAOChVsAOch0O IntDevTemp PCI MIO 16E 1 PCI MIO 16E 4 PXI 6070E IntAIGnd IntRef5V IntCmRef5V IntAOGndVsAIGnd PXI 6040E PCI 6071E CPCI 6070E CPCI 6040E IntAOCh0O InthOChOVsRef5V IntAOCh1 VXI MIO 64E 1 IntAOCh1 VsRef5V InthOCh1 VsAOCh0O IntDevTemp AT AI 16XE 10 PCI 6032E PCI 6033E IntAIGnd IntRefS5
156. DC to lower stop freq The passband region goes from lower pass freq to higher pass freq and the second stopband region goes from higher stop freq to the Nyquist frequency Equiripple BandStop Generates a bandstop FIR digital filter with equi ripple characteristics using the Parks McClellan algorithm and higher pass freq lower pass freq of taps lower stop freq higher stop freq and sampling frequency fs The VI then filters the input sequence X to obtain the bandstop filtered linear phase sequence Filtered Data higher pass Treg lower pass Treg A Ei Filtered Data error of taps lower stop Treg higher stop freq sampling freq fs The first passband region of the filter goes from zero DC to lower pass freq The stopband region goes from lower stop freq to higher stop freq and the second passband region goes from higher pass freq to the Nyquist frequency Equiripple HighPass Generates a highpass FIR filter with equi ripple characteristics using the Parks McClellan algorithm and of taps stop freq high freq and sampling freq The VI then filters the input sequence X to obtain the highpass filtered linear phase sequence Filtered Data w qi Rpp Filtered Data error of taps stop treg high freg sampling freq Ts The stopband of the filter goes from zero DC to stop freq The transition band goes from stop freq to high freq and the passband goes from high freq to the Nyquist frequency LabVIEW
157. Digital I O The icon that you must select to access the Advanced Digital I O VIs is on the bottom row of the Digital I O palette as shown below National Instruments Corporation P Digital 1 0 IIG DIG IIG LIME FORT LIME POR 2 at i E L_ anne u Eru nisoe WAIT Advanced Digital I O VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 VIS Digital Port VI Descriptions The digital port VIs perform immediate digital reads and writes only DIO Port Config Establishes a digital channel configuration You can use the taskID that this VI returns only in digital port VIs device task ID out digital channel port width gt error out eror in no error lne direction map Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the ports and directions available with your DAQ device DIO Port Read Reads the digital channel identified by taskID and returns the pattern read in pattern task ID task ID out line mask pattern error in no error error out DIO Port Write Writes the value in pattern to the digital port identified by taskID task ID task ID out pattern line mask error in no error error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 25 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis Digital Group VI Descriptions The digital group VIs perform immediate handshaked or clocked digital I O Digital Bu
158. E In Range Returns TRUE if x is greater than or equal to lo and less than hi Otherwise this function returns FALSE log lt hr Note This function always operates in the Compare Aggregates mode To produce a Boolean array as an output you must execute this function in a loop structure National Instruments Corporation 9 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Less Returns TRUE if x is less than y Otherwise this function returns FALSE Less Or Equal Returns TRUE if x is less than or equal to y Otherwise this function returns FALSE Less Or Equal To 0 Returns TRUE if x is less than or equal to 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Less Than 0 Returns TRUE if x is less than 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Lexical Class Returns class number for char char class number Table 9 1 Lexical Class Number Descriptions Lexical Class Extended characters with a Command or Option key prefix codes 128 through 255 Non displayable ASCII characters codes 0 to 31 excluding 9 through 13 White space characters Space Tab Carriage Return Form Feed Newline and Vertical Tab codes 32 9 13 12 10 and 11 respectively LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 9 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Table 9 1 Lexical Class Number Descriptions Continued Class Number Lexical Class f 3 Digits
159. FFT VI executes FFT routines if the size of the input sequence is a valid power of 2 size 2 m 1 2 23 If the size of the input sequence is not a power of 2 the Real FFT VI calls an efficient Real DFT routine The output sequence Y Real FFT X is complex and returns in one complex array Y YRe jYIm LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Unwrap Phase Unwraps the Phase array by eliminating discontinuities whose absolute values exceed n Unwrapped Phase EFFO Y i Clip X i Clips the elements of Input Array to within the bounds specified by upper limit and lower limit Input Array Clipped Array upper limit lower limit i error Let the sequence Y represent the output sequence Clipped Array then the elements of Y are related to the elements of Input Array by a ia y x b lt x lt a fori 0 1 2 n 1 b x lt b where n is the number of elements in Input Array a is upper limit and b is lower limit Y i X i n Shifts the elements in Input Array by the specified number of shifts Input Array pad ee Shifted Array shifts n SRE error National Instruments Corporation 39 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Let the sequence Y represent the output sequence Shifted Array then the elements of Y are related to the elements of X by Xi shi
160. File Functions If you wire count it can be a scalar number in which case the function returns a 1D array of instances of byte stream type Or it can be a cluster of N scalar numbers in which case the function returns an N dimension array of instances of byte stream type If the wired count is a scalar number and the byte stream type is something other than an array the function returns that number of instances in a 1D array For example if the type is a single precision floating point number and count is 3 the function returns an array of three single precision floating point numbers However if the type is an array the function returns the instances in a cluster array because G does not have arrays of arrays Therefore if the type is an array of single precision floating point numbers and count is 3 the function returns a cluster array of three single precision floating point number arrays If the wired count is a cluster of N numbers the function returns an N dimension array of instances of the type The size of each dimension is the value of the corresponding number according to its cluster order The number of instances returned in this manner is the product of the N numbers Thus you can return 20 single precision floating point numbers as a 2D array of two columns and 10 rows by wiring a two element cluster with element 0 2 and element 10 to count data contains the data read from the file Refer to the previous descri
161. Functions The Format Date Time String function calculates date time string by copying time format string and replacing each of the format codes with the corresponding values in the following table Table 10 2 Format Codes for the Time Format String eer S week number of the year 00 53 with Sunday as the first day of the week weekday as a decimal number 0 6 with O representing Sunday week number of the year 00 53 with Monday as the first day of the week date representation of locale date representation of locale of locale National Instruments Corporation 10 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Characters appearing in time format string that are not part of a format code are copied to the output string verbatim Time format codes beginning with that are not recognized output the character literally Time format codes always have leading zeros as necessary to ensure a constant field width An optional modifier before the format code letter removes the leading zeros from the following format codes The modifier does not modify the behavior of any other format codes Note The amp c x X and z format codes depend on operating system locale support the output of these codes is platform dependent Interpretation of the Daylight Savings Time rule also can vary per platform Get Date Time In Seconds Returns a time zone independent number containing th
162. Functions Data Acquisition Digital I O gt Digital 1 0 DIG DIG DIG DIG o LIME FORT LIME PORT Easy Digital I O VIs EE IID DID DIJ IIO DID COHFIG READ WRITE START uaa nnn es or A Eul on non IID DID 1 ADU f CLEAR Bath Ei na HE The Easy Digital I O VIs are the VIs on the top row of the Digital I O palette For examples of how to use the Easy Digital I O VIs open the example library by opening examples daq digital digital llb Easy Digital 1 0 Descriptions The following Easy Digital I Os are available Read from Digital Line Reads the logical state of a digital line on a digital channel that you configure device line state digital channel line If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue National Instruments Corporation 23 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 23 Easy Digital 1 0 Vis Note When you call this VI on a digital I O port that is part of an 8255 PPI when your iteration terminal is left at 0 the 8255 PPI goes through a configuration phase where all the ports within the same PPI chip get reset to logic low regardless of the data direction The data direction on other ports however is maintained To avoid this effect connect a value other than 0 to the iteration terminal once you have configured the desired ports Read from Digital Port Reads a digital channel that you configure por bw i d t h g
163. Gen are single VI solutions to common analog output problems Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility VIs describes the Analog Output Utility VIs The VIs AO Continuous Generation AO Waveform Generation and AO Write One Update are single VI solutions to Part II Data Acquisition VIS common analog output problems The Analog Output Utility VIs are intermediate level VIs so they rely on the advanced level VIs e Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs contains reference descriptions of the Advanced Analog Output VIs These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Analog Output VIs e Chapter 23 Easy Digital I O VIs describes the Easy Digital I O VIs which perform simple digital I O operations e Chapter 24 Intermediate Digital I O VIs describes the Intermediate Digital I O VIs These VIs are single VI solutions to common digital problems e Chapter 25 Advanced Digital I O VIs describes the Advanced Digital I O VIs which include the digital port and digital group VIs You use the digital port VIs for immediate reads and writes to digital lines and ports You use the digital group VIs for immediate handshaked or clocked I O for multiple ports These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and the foundation of the Easy and Intermediate Digital I O VIs e Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs describes the Easy Counter VIs that perform simple counting operations
164. I O Devices Continued Port Port Handshake Transfer Device Type Numbers Modes Direction eee eos Clocks a 8 bit port No handshaking Read or write E Software Sirenin unusable if port 0 or 1 uses handshaking PC DIO 96 8 bit port es Handshaking on Read or write Interrupts PCI DIO 96 6 7 or off ports 0 3 6 NB DIO 96 and 9 may be DAQPad 6507 bidirectional 8 bit port No handshaking Read or write None Software polling unusable if port A and B of the 8255 chip use handshaking PC OPDIO 16 Optically Port 0 is output Programmed I O Plug and Play isolated write port 1 is 8 bit port input read Timing Only Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 30 Digital Hardware Capabilities Timing Only Devices Port Type Port Handshake DIO Transfer Device Numbers Modes Direction Clocks Method PC TIO 10 8 bit 0 1 No handshaking Bit wise direction None Software NB TIO 10 ports control polling National Instruments Corporation B 23 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 31 Counter Timer Characteristics Timing Only Devices Timebases Available Gate Modes Available of General Purpose Counters Available Outputs Available Output Modes Count Direction Counter Chip Available Device PC TIO 10 Am 9513 10 8 have Internal 5 MHz NB TIO 10 SOURCE only on CTRS and inputs at the CTR10 1 MHz I O 100 kHz 10 kHz connector 1 kHz 100 Hz external high l
165. I will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the AT DSP2200 DAQ device When you launch LabVIEW or reset the AT DSP2200 LabVIEW performs an offset calibration on both the analog input and output using analog ground as the reference You can use this VI to calibrate the analog input using an external reference or to recalibrate the AT DSP2200 to compensate for configuration or environmental changes DSP2200 Configure Windows Specifies data translation and demultiplexing operations that the AT DSP2200 performs on analog input and output data device device out altranslate aotranslate demux Status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the AT DSP2200 DAQ device Because software running locally on the AT amp T WE DSP32C DSP chip reads data from the ADCs and writes data to the DACs you can manipulate the data during thes
166. I with the Write File or Read File functions pattern prompt file path reinum start path Mot A Path new file path function open 0 a file size bytes error in not an error error out default name advisory dialog display Tl Pree H Read Characters From File Reads a specified number of characters from a byte stream file beginning at a specified character offset The VI opens the file before reading from it and closes it afterwards file path Tabe new file path Hot Fath if number of characters all 1 j character string start of read offset chars mark after read chars ATA T TN EOF Read File Reads data from the file specified by refnum and returns it in data Reading begins at a location specified by pos mode and pos offset and depends on the format of the specified file refnum dup refnum pos mode 0 2 fo data pos offset 0 E offset Eor ir i emor out count Fam Woe ArT Reading Byte Stream Files If refnum is a byte stream file refnum the Read File function reads data from the byte stream file specified by refnum You can wire either line mode or byte stream type when you read byte stream files but you cannot wire both If you do not wire byte stream type Read File assumes the data that begins at the designated byte offset is a string of characters If you wire byte stream type the function interprets data starting at the designated byte offset to be count in
167. IP and examples of TCP client server applications e Chapter 49 UDP VIs describes a set of VIs that you can use with User Datagram Protocol UDP a protocol in the TCP IP suite for communicating across a single network or an interconnected set of networks e Chapter 50 DDE VIs describes the LabVIEW VIs for Dynamic Data Exchange DDE for Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT These VIs execute DDE functions for sharing data with other applications that accept DDE connections e Chapter 51 ActiveX Automation Functions describes the functions for support of ActiveX automation These functions allow other ActiveX enabled applications such as Microsoft Excel to request properties and methods from LabVIEW and individual VIs e Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs describes the LabVIEW VIs for AppleEvents one form of interapplication communication IAC through which Macintosh applications can communicate with each other e Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIs describes the LabVIEW VIs for program to program communication PPC a low level form of Apple interapplication communication IAC by which Macintosh applications send and receive blocks of data TCP Vis This chapter describes Internet Protocol IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP and internet addresses and describes the LabVIEW TCP VIs Refer to Chapter 21 TCP and UDP of the LabVIEW User Manual for an overview of TCP IP and examples of TCP client serve
168. ISA High Level Register Access functions Valid classes for these functions are Instr default VXI GPIB VXI VME RBD Instr VXI GPIB VXI MBD Instr and VXI GPIB VXI VME MemAcc To access the VISA High Level Register Access functions pop up on the High Level icon on the VISA palette Lise Faw iia kan ban 22m E Gm 52 eal adam ea baa z2 Ei JE sath B 16 a2 8 16 a2 kee to sat ker kee Sze VISA In8 1n16 In32 Reads 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits of data respectively from the specified memory space assigned memory base plus offset These functions do not require VISA Map Address to be called prior to their invocation address space 416 1 VISA session dup VISA session offset 0 value eror in no error eror out wise ise 1 EE Wisa in 16 wisa in ae var LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference The following table lists the valid entries for specifying address space Address the A16 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A24 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A32 address space of the VXI MXI bus VISA Memory Allocation Returns an offset into a device s region that has been allocated for use by the session The memory can be allocated on either the device itself or on the computer s system memory If the device to which the given VISA Session refers is located on the local interface card the memory ca
169. L 2 3 4 5 6 Fourier transform the input sequence X Y F X Set the DC component to zero Yo 0 If the sequence Y is an even size set the Nyquist component to zero Yyyq 0 Multiply the positive harmonics by Multiply the negative harmonics by j Call the new sequence H which is of the form H j sgn k Y Inverse Fourier transform H to obtain the Hilbert transform of X You use the Hilbert transform to extract instantaneous phase information obtain the envelope of an oscillating signal obtain single sideband spectra detect echoes and reduce sampling rates Note Because the VI sets the DC and Nyquist components to zero when the number of elements in the input sequence is even you cannot always recover the original signal with an inverse Hilbert transform The Hilbert transform works well with bandpass limited signals which exclude the DC and the Nyquist components National Instruments Corporation 39 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 FHT Digital Signal Processing VIs Computes the fast Hartley transform FHT of the input sequence X Hin Hartleytes Horti ETO The Hartley transform of a function x t is defined as Xf x f cas 2nft dt where cas x cos x sin x If Y represents the output sequence Hartley X obtained via the FHT then Y is obtained through the discrete implementation of the Hartley integral n 1 Y L xoa for k 0 1 2 n
170. LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 35 10 National Instruments Corporation Serial Port Vis This chapter describes the VIs for serial port operations The following figure shows the Serial palette that you access by selecting Functions Instrument I O Serial SERIAL PORT For examples of how to use the Serial Port VIs see examples instr smplserl 11b Serial Port VI Descriptions The following Serial Port VIs are available Bytes at Serial Port Returns in byte count the number of bytes in the input buffer of the serial port indicated in port number pork number fom sting read requested byte count pa eror code National Instruments Corporation 36 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 36 Serial Port Vis Serial Port Break Sends a break on the output port specified by port number for a period of time at least as long as the delay input requests pork number d delay ms eror code Serial Port Init Initializes the selected serial port to the specified settings flow control etc buffer size port number baud rate data bits eror code stop bits parity Serial Port Read Reads the number of characters specified by requested byte count from the serial port indicated in port number port number a sting read requested byte count pe enor code Serial Port Write Writes the data in string to write to the serial port indicated in port number pork number stri
171. LabVIEW instrument driver templates are predefined instrument driver VIs that perform common operations such as initialization self test reset error query and so on Instead of developing your own VIs to accomplish these tasks you should use the LabVIEW instrument driver template VIs which already conform to the LabVIEW standards for instrument drivers Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs provides more information on the Instrument Driver Template VIs Introduction to VISA Library VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture is a single interface library for controlling VXI GPIB RS 232 and other types of instruments The VISA Library provides a standard set of I O routines used by all LabVIEW instrument drivers Using the VISA functions you can construct a single instrument driver VI which controls a particular instrument model across different I O interfaces An instrument descriptor string is passed to the VISA Open function in order to select which kind of I O will be used to communicate with the instrument Once the session with the instrument is open functions such as VISA Read and VISA Write perform the instrument I O activities in a generic manner such that the program is not tied to any specific GPIB or VXI functions Such an instrument driver is considered to be interface independent and can be used as is in different systems Instrument drivers that use the VISA functions perform activities specific to the instr
172. Latched or Module Channels Non latched Start up Relay Position Mode Support SCXI 1160 Leave relays in the position at power down Multiplexed SCXI 1161 Non latched Switch to the Normally Closed NC Multiplexed position when the hardware reset is set on the module You can set or reset each SCXI relay individually without affecting other relays or you can change all of the relays at once National Instruments Corporation B 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 21 Digital Input and Output Characteristics SCXI Modules Module Type of Module Number of Channels Input Voltage Range Mode Support SCXI 1162 Input 32 optically isolated 0to5 V Parallel support when connected to a DIO 24 DIO 96 or DIO 32F device Multiplexed support with any DAQ device supporting SCXI SCXI 1162HV Input 32 optically isolated AC or DC signals up to Parallel support when 240 V connected to a DIO 24 DIO 96 or DIO 32F device Multiplexed support with any DAQ device supporting SCXI SCXI 1163 Output 32 optically isolated Parallel support when connected to a DIO 24 DIO 96 or DIO 32F device Multiplexed support with any DAQ device supporting SCXI SCXI 1163R Output 32 optically isolated Parallel support when connected to a DIO 24 DIO 96 or DIO 32F device Multiplexed support with any DAQ device supporting SCXI Functionally equivalent to the SCXI 1163 bu
173. Loop Case and Sequence structures This palette also contains the global and local variable nodes and the formula node Gal LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 1 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs Numeric Functions Numeric functions perform arithmetic operations conversions trigonometric logarithmic and complex mathematical functions This palette also contains additional numeric constants such as 7 Boolean Functions Boolean functions perform Boolean and logical operations String Functions String functions manipulate strings and convert numbers to and from strings This palette also includes Additional String To Number functions and String Conversion functions Array Functions Array functions assemble disassemble and process arrays Cluster Functions Cluster functions assemble access and change elements in a cluster National Instruments Corporation 1 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIS Comparison Functions Comparison functions compare data greater than less than and so on and operations that are based on a comparison such as finding the minimum and maximum ranges for a group or array of values Time and Dialog Functions Time and Dialog functions manipulate time functions and display dialog boxes This palette also includes the VIs that perform error handling
174. Manual 11 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Read From 116 File Reads a 2D or 1D array of data from a byte stream file of signed word integers 116 The VI opens the file before reading from it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to read unscaled or binary data acquired from data acquisition VIs and written to a file with Write To 116 File 20 number of rows dup retnurn refnum pos mode rel to mark 2 pos offset bytes 0 _ mark after read bytes error in no error 20 number of columns 10 count Read From SGL File Reads a 2D or 1D array of data from a byte stream file of single precision numbers SGL The VI opens the file before reading from it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to read scaled data acquired from data acquisition VIs and written to a file with Write To SGL File file path dialog if ernpty i new file path Mot A Path i 2D number of rows 2D aray number of columna 10 cou 1D array start of read offset bytes 0 mark atter read bytes EOF Write To 116 File Writes a 2D or 1D array of signed word integers 116 to a new byte stream file or appends the data to an existing file The VI opens or creates the file before writing to it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to write unscaled or binary data from data acquisition VIs file path dialog if empty new file path Mot A Path i 2D array 1D array append to file new
175. Manual 52 22 National Instruments Corporation Program to Program Communication VIs This chapter describes the LabVIEW VIs for program to program communication PPC a low level form of Apple interapplication communication IAC by which Macintosh applications send and receive blocks of data The following illustration shows the PPC VI palette which you access by selecting Functions Communication PPC ee foe en Open Start Inform Accept Read minte End Close oe For examples of how to use the PPC VIs see the examples located in examples comm PPC Examples I1lb National Instruments Corporation 53 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIs PPC VI Descriptions The following PPC VIs are available PPC Accept Session Accepts or rejects a PPC session request based on the Boolean accept session retnum accept T session retnurn output reject info You should accept or reject the request using the PPC Accept Session VI immediately because the other computer waits hangs until the VI accepts or rejects its attempt to initiate a session or an error occurs PPC Browser For information on the PPC Browser VI see Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs of this manual Close All PPC Ports Closes all the PPC ports that the PPC Open Port VI opened port refnum jaja Close Closing a port terminates all outstanding calls associated with the port
176. Misc function to send the appropriate unaddress message or configure the NI 488 2 software to unaddress automatically for all devices on the GPIB The Traditional GPIB Read and Write functions can execute asynchronously This means other LabVIEW activity can continue while these GPIB functions operate When set to execute asynchronously a small wristwatch icon appears as part of the function icons A pop up item on the Traditional GPIB Read and GPIB Write functions allows you to switch their behavior to and from asynchronous operation SHOW Description Set Breakpoint Show Terminals Replace Cluster Tools Create Constant Create Control Create Indicator Do 1 0 synchronously Traditional GPIB Function Descriptions The following traditional GPIB functions are available GPIB Clear Sends either Selected Device Clear SDC or Device Clear DCL address string status eror in error out National Instruments Corporation 34 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions GPIB Initialization Configures the GPIB interface at address string require re addressing T er assert FEN sikh IFE T ann i system controller T address sting TTT IST bit sense T pee enor in disallow DMA F eee GPIB Misc Performs the GPIB operation indicated by command string Use this low level function when the previously described high level functions are not suitable
177. ModeError The write mode is out of range or is disallowed badWriteOffsetError Adding the write offset to the write mark places the write mark outside the internal buffer limitsOutOfRangeError The requested input limits exceed the board s capability or configuration Alternate limits were selected badBufferSpecificationError The requested number of buffers or the buffer size is not allowed for example Lab PC buffer limit is 64K samples or the board does not support multiple buffers badDAQEventError For DAQEvents 0 and 1 general value A must be greater than O and less than the internal buffer size If DMA is used for DAQEvent 1 general value A must divide the internal buffer size evenly If the TIO 10 is used for DAQEvent 4 general value A must be 1 or 2 badFilterCutoffError The cutoff frequency specified is not valid for this device obsoleteFunctionError The function you are calling is no longer supported in this version of the driver badBaudRateError The specified baud rate for communicating with the serial port is not valid on this platform badChassisIDError The specified SCXI chassis does not correspond to a configured SCXI chassis badModuleSlotError The SCXI module slot that was specified is invalid or corresponds to an empty slot invalidWinHandleError The window handle passed to the function is invalid noSuchMessageError No configured message matches the one you tried to delete badGainError The gain is inv
178. NB A2150 Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits and scanning order you can use with your National Instruments DAQ device Al Read Reads data from a buffered data acquisition scan backlog conditional retrieval off number read tasklD in al taskID out number of scans to read 1 scaled data time limit in sec no chang me A i binary data output units caled 1 1 p J e retrieval complete eror in no error error out read search position from J ISP handle structure The AI Read VI calls the AI Buffer Read VI to read data from a buffered analog input acquisition Al Single Scan Returns one scan of data from a previously configured group of channels data remaining taskID in taskID out opcode f scaled data acquisition state emor in no error error out time limit in sec no sraled 1 fic r binary data output units ecg National Instruments Corporation 16 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs If you have already started an acquisition with the AI Start VI this VI reads one scan from the acquisition buffer data or the onboard FIFO if the acquisition is not buffered If you have not started an acquisition this VI starts an acquisition retrieves a scan of data and then terminates the acquisition The group configuration determines the channels the VI samples If you do not call the AI S
179. National Instruments Corporation 30 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Part iii Instrument I O Functions and Vis Part II Instrument I O Functions and VIs describes LabVIEW instrument drivers and GPIB serial port instrument driver template and VISA VIs and functions This part contains the following chapters Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs introduces LabVIEW instrument drivers and GPIB serial port instrument driver template and VISA VIs and functions Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs describes the Instrument Driver Template VIs Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference describes the VISA Library Reference operations and attributes Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions describes the traditional GPIB functions Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions describes the IEEE 488 2 GPIB functions Chapter 36 Serial Port VIs describes the VIs for serial port operations Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument 1 0 Vis This chapter describes Lab VIEW instrument drivers and GPIB serial port instrument driver template and VISA VIs and functions You can find the Instrument Driver VIs in the Functions palette from your block diagram in LabVIEW The Instrument Driver VIs are located near the bottom of the Functions palette To access the Instrument I O palette choose Functions Instrument I O as shown in the following illustration Instrument 1 0 ae Ete ml
180. OM areas to EEPROM area 1 device device out operation EEPROF location status LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS You can load an existing set of calibration constants into the calibration DACs from a storage area in the onboard EEPROM You can copy EEPROM storage areas 2 through 5 to storage area 1 EEPROM area 5 contains the factory calibration constants LabVIEW automatically loads the calibration constants stored in EEPROM area 1 upon start up or when you reset the AT AO 6 10 Note You can also use the calibration utility provided with the AT AO 6 10 to perform a calibration procedure Refer to the calibration chapter in the AT AO 6 10 User Manual for more information Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the AT AO 6 10 DAQ devices When LabVIEW initializes the AT AO 6 10 the DAC calibration constants stored in EEPROM location 1 user calibration area 1 provide the gain and offset values that ensure proper device operation So this initialization is the same as running the AO 6 10 Calibrate VI with operation set to 1 and EEPROM location set to 1 When the AT AO 6 10 leaves the factory EEPROM location contains a copy of the calibration constants stored in EEPROM location 5 factory calibration A calibration procedure performed in bipolar mode is not valid for unipolar mode and vice versa See the
181. Othrough9 Digits 0 through 9 Uppercase characters A through Z Lowercase characters a through z All printable ASCII non alphanumeric characters Max amp Min Compares x and y and returns the larger value at the top output terminal and the smaller value at the bottom output terminal X EIE masis y EJE minis Not A Number Path Refnum Returns TRUE if number path refnum is not a number NaN not a path or not a refnum Otherwise this function returns FALSE NaN can be the result of dividing by 0 calculating the square root of a negative number and so on Nah PathHetnum Not Equal Returns TRUE if x is not equal to y Otherwise this function returns FALSE Not Equal To 0 Returns TRUE if x is not equal to 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE National Instruments Corporation 9 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Octal Digit Returns TRUE if char is an octal digit ranging from 0 through 7 Otherwise this function returns FALSE octal Printable Returns TRUE if char is a printable ASCII character Otherwise this function returns FALSE printable ASCII Select Returns the value connected to the t input or f input depending on the value of s If s is TRUE this function returns the value connected to t If s is FALSE this function returns the value connected to f White Space Returns TRUE if char is a white space character such as Space
182. PIB functions The following figure shows the Traditional GPIB Functions palette which you access by selecting Functions Instrument I O GPIB i Functions Instrument 70 For examples of how to use the Traditional GPIB functions see examples instr smplgpib 1lb National Instruments Corporation 34 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions Traditional GPIB Function Parameters Most of the Traditional GPIB functions use the following parameters address string contains the address of the GPIB device with which the function communicates You can input both the primary and secondary addresses in address string by using the form primary secondary Both primary and secondary are decimal values so if primary is 2 and secondary 1s 3 address string is 2 3 If you do not specify an address the functions do not perform addressing before they attempt to read and write the string They assume you have either sent these commands another way or that another Controller is in charge and therefore responsible for the addressing If the Controller is supposed to address the device but does not do so before the time limit expires the functions terminate with GPIB error 6 timeout and set bit 14 in status If the GPIB is not the Controller In Charge do not specify address string When there are multiple GPIB Controllers that LabVIEW can use a prefix to address string in the form ID address or
183. QCard 516 DAQCard 700 PC 516 3 2 with SOURCE input at I O Connector National Instruments Corporation only on CTRBO external Internal 1 MHz only on CTRBO external on output mode High level or rising edge depending on output mode 2 ma Camel fx vo 2 z zj Z B 15 3 2 for DAQCard 500 Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs Refer to ICTRControl VIdescription on modes in Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities SCXI Module Hardware Capabilities Table B 18 Analog Input Characteristics SCXI Modules Part 1 Input Number of Voltage Excitation Module Channels Range V Filter Channels Mode Support SCXI 1100 32 DI 10 1 2 5 10 20 Lowpass filter Multiplexed 50 100 200 or no filter 500 1 000 with 10 kHz or 2 000 4 Hz cutoff SW M l frequency JS M SCXI 1102 1 100 1 Hz lowpass Multiplexed SWIC on each channel SCXI 1120 8 DI 1 2 5 10 20 Lowpass filter SCXI 1121 Multiplexed or SCXI 1121 SCXI 1120 50 100 200 with 10 kHz or only parallel 4 DI 500 1 000 4 Hz cutoff 4 voltage or SCXI 1121 2 000 frequency current s c JS C excitation Isic channels SCXI 1120D 8 DI 0 5 1 2 5 5 SCXI 1121 Multiplexed or SCXI 1120 10 25 50 100 only 4 parallel 4 DI 250 500 1 000 voltage or SCXI 1121 current excitation Isic channels SCXI 1122 16 DI or 0
184. ROM LabVIEW automatically loads the calibration constants stored in the onboard EEPROM load area when LabVIEW launches or when you reset the device By default the EEPROM load area contains a copy of the calibration constants in the factory area LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS A2000 Calibrate Calibrates the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 A D gain and offset values or restores them to the original factory set values device device out sample clock drive dither Status You can calibrate your NB A2000 or EISA A2000 to adjust the accuracy of the readings from the four analog input channels LabVIEW automatically loads the stored calibration values when it launches or when you reset your NB A2000 or EISA A2000 AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 DAQ devices A Warning Read the calibration chapter in the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 User Manual before using the A2000 Calibrate VI If you
185. S COMPAN Oa E E A 9 2 N mernc Conipai DOsat T OA 9 2 Cluster Compari sonona ie A A E a 9 2 Comparison Modes ceai E AA 9 2 Character Compans Oai aa T AE 9 4 Polymorphism for Comparison Functions esseeeseeeeeseeesseeesesesssssessssssssssssssssssssssssesesees 9 5 Compatison Functon DescnpulOns wisi saconisida cideahacatii ad lamicechineantoasel le vamenesctontdiacets 9 6 National Instruments Corporation vii LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Time Dialog and Error Functions Overview ccccccecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeessesseeeeeseeseeeeeees 10 2 Tine Punc noNS serani E E 10 2 Error Tani Ov rv W oreore himen a e Ea 10 3 Error I O and the Error State Cluster ccccccecccsccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 10 4 Time and Dialog Function DeSCTriptions cceeeessenseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesnsnnaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 6 Error Handline Vl DescrpuOns asinina 10 10 Chapter 11 File Functions File VO V Land Bunctionm Overy 16 Wieion visser vases eiei ca emasciesitioan taken mortals 11 2 Rte MAIS VS W e NTs atau sset sn chscatian sances O a o a 11 2 Low Level File VIs and File Functions ccccccssssseeseeeceecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Byte Strcamrand Dataloo Tiles viszssasusetseriinaiecta losctuact exetacaboantSonnthvousucedaceaiaceaidi 11 3 Flow Through ParameterSs 0neeonneessssssssssssssssssesssesssrsesrssseersecreserrrerreeer
186. SC MIMS nierien ict ot sca csdwsaso E 33 21 M dom Rime S CHIN GS 2 ie sehaa het a anette anseitadeneteaata a 33 21 PX TIRES OUNCES rna ceca cede etn tenn cote Una canuiiata A aos cua ornate dea suren lec 33 21 PCI SCAM S tcuacstesaiunelied ations a dinataudenanciuatantendens 33 21 RESIS er B aSCd SUI OS ni E 33 21 DELIA S CULMS A a Mea etav ares d amantenes duhaatasavaeen Aah Glace 33 22 METSION INFOA ON eanna N 33 22 NMEN AFE S CCS S uaa dh aboeta tab n vans aa 33 22 Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions Traditional GPIB Function Parameters ccccccccceecccceeccccesscceeessceeesccseeessseeesseeeneseeees 34 2 Traditional GPIB Function Behavior ccccccceccccccscccceeecccceesccceeeccseessccseeessssenecseeeesseeees 34 3 Traditional GPIB Function Descriptions siescciessivcasacnedesencanworsinsevianehiadunlecesapeidupeseatenesseees 34 3 GPIB Device and Controller Functions seensessensesenssseessseeesserssscrssserssserssseressersseeres 34 7 Device TUNCUONS aroase E E a a A E EEAS 34 7 C ntoller PUNCHONS ceca as aaa a E A a a ees aes 34 9 Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions GPIB 488 2 Common Function Parameters cc csssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssseeees 35 1 GPIB 488 2 Function Descriptions Single Device FUunctions cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 2 GPIB 488 2 Multiple Device Function Descriptions 0cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 4 GPIB 488 2 Bus Management Functi
187. T MIO 16X 1 1 1 no 1 lt n lt 3 0 lt n lt 4 empty AT MIO 64F 5 NB A2100 Bud NB A2150 DAQCard 500 Baid DAQCard 516 DAQCard 700 National Instruments Corporation 18 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 6 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Hardware Config VI Continued Channel Input eg eo Cluster Number Channel Coupling aii Mode of AMUX List eee 5102 Devices 102 Devices oS 2 a a e empty ELR 10E 1 2 empty PCI 6111E PCI 4451 PCI 4551 PCI 4452 PCI 4552 DS Default Setting R Range Note Channels 0 and 1 and channels 2 and 3 must have the same coupling for the NB A2150 Al Parameter Configures and retrieves miscellaneous parameters associated with Analog Input of an operation of a device that are not covered with other AI VIs string in float in value in boolean in task ID in task ID out channels Operation m error out parameter name oe error in no error string aut float out value out E EE EE boolean out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Al SingleScan Returns one scan of data If you started an acquisition with the AI Control VI this VI reads one scan of the data from the internal buffer On the Macintosh and in Windows the VI reads from the onboard FIFO if the acquisition is nonbuffered If you have not st
188. The Bundle and Unbundle functions do not show the datatype for their individual input or output terminals until you wire objects to these terminals When you wire them these terminals look similar to the datatypes of the corresponding front panel control or indicator terminals Setting the Order of Cluster Elements Cluster elements have a logical order that is unrelated to their positions within the shell The first object you insert in the cluster is element 0 the second is 1 and so on If you delete an element the order adjusts automatically You can change the current order by selecting the Cluster Order option from the cluster pop up menu Clicking an element with the cluster order cursor sets the place of the element in the cluster order to the number displayed inside the Tools palette You change this order by typing a new number into that field When the order is as you want it click the Enter button to set it and exit the cluster order edit mode Click the X button to revert to the old order The cluster order determines the order in which the elements appear as terminals on the Bundle and Unbundle functions in the block diagram The Bundle By Name and Unbundle By Name functions give you more flexible access to data in clusters With these functions you can access National Instruments Corporation 8 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 8 Cluster Functions specific elements in clusters by name and access on
189. V IntAOGndVsAIGnd DAQCard AI 16XE 50 NEC AI 16XE 50 AT MIO 16E 1 AT MIO 16E 2 AT MIO 16E 3 IntAIGnd IntRef5V IntCmRef5V IntAOGndVsAIGnd AT MIO 16DE 10 AT MIO 16E 10 DAQPad 6020E IntAOCh0O IntAOChOVsRef5V IntAOCh1 NEC MIO 16E 4 IntAOCh1 VsRef5V LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 4 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B Table B 5 Analog Output Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Channel Numbers AT MIO 16E 1 AT MIO 16E 2 AT MIO 64E 3 NEC MIO 15E 4 VXI MIO 64E 1 AT MIO 16E 10 AT MIO XE 50 NEC MIO 16XE 50 DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 AT MIO 16XE 10 VXI MIO 64XE 10 OCI MIO 16E 1 CPCI 6070E PXI 6070E PCI 6071E PCI MIO 16E 4 CPCI 6040E PXI 6040E PCI MIO 16XE 50 CPCI 6011E PXI 6011E National Instruments Corporation 12 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 16 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered FIFO Size B 5 Output Limits V 0 to 10 10 Vref 0 to Vref Update Clocks Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update DAQ Hardware Capabilities Transfer Method DMA in
190. X Close All LabVIEW instrument drivers should include a Close VI The Close VI is the last VI called when controlling an instrument It terminates the software connection to the instrument and deallocates system resources Additionally you can choose to place the instrument in an idle state For example if you are developing a switch driver you can disconnect all switches when closing the instrument driver VISA session error in no error PREFIX Error Message The PREFIX Error Message VI is a template for creating an Error Message VI for your particular instrument It translates the error status information returned from a LabVIEW instrument driver VI to a user readable string r TT Gtatysz VISA session dup VISA session Type of Dialog 1 OK Mag gt Error Code 0 error in no error peed Error Message empty error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 32 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs PREFIX Error Query Error Query Multiple and Error Message If an instrument has error query capability the LabVIEW instrument driver has Error Query and Error Message VIs The Error Query VI queries the instrument and returns the instrument specific error information The Error Message VI translates the error status information returned from a LabVIEW instrument driver VI into a user readable string VISA session FREFIH dup VISA session l a Error error in
191. You do not need to reset your remote SCXI unit however you need to clear and restart your data acquisition Table A 5 AppleEvent Error Codes 1700 errAECoercionFail Data could not be coerced to the requested descriptor type Descriptor record was not found Data in an Apple event could not be read Wrong descriptor type Not a valid descriptor record Operation involving a list item failed Need a newer version of AppleEvent Manager The event is not an Apple event AEResetTimer was passed an invalid reply parameter AEResetTimer was passed an invalid reply parameter Invalid sending mode was passed User canceled out of wait loop for reply or receipt Apple event timed out No user interaction allowed Wrong keyword for a special function Handler did not get all required parameters Unknown Apple event address type errAEHandlerNotFound No handler in the dispatch tables fits the parameters to AEGetEventHandler or AEGetCoercionHandler errAEReplyNotArrived The contents of the reply you are accessing have not arrived yet errAEIllegalIndex Index is out of range in a put operation National Instruments Corporation A 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 6 Instrument Driver Error Codes Status Description Set By Invalid syntax string VISA Transition Library Error finding instruments VISA Transition Library instrument VISA Transition Libary O O E E T a Fun
192. a VISA class VISA Property Node Descriptions The following VISA Property Node categories are available Fast Data Channel Specifies the following information e Channel number e Data transfers through channel pairs e Enabling signal e Normal mode or streaming mode transfers General Settings Determine the following properties e Maximum event queue length e Unique VISA resource name e Resource lock state e Timeout value for accessing the device e Communication trigger mechanism e Information used to document the functionality in your VISA application GPIB Settings Specify the following information e What the primary and secondary addresses of a GPIB device are e Ifthe GPIB device needs to be readdressed before every transfer e Ifthe GPIB device is unaddressed after each read and write operation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 20 National Instruments Corporation Interface Information Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Provides information about the VISA interface type the board number of the interface and the board number of the parent device Message Based Settings Determine the following aspects of VISA message based communication Modem Line Settings The I O Protocol GPIB Serial VXI Whether to send an END indicator in write operations Whether to ignore an END indicator in read operations Whether to terminate read operations with a special character Determine the current state
193. a four letter code describing the parameter s meaning For example if the parameter is a direct parameter one of the most common types of parameters you must specify that the keyword is akeyDirectObject by using the four letter code four dashes Other examples of keywords include savo short for save options which is used when sending the Close VI AppleEvent to LabVIEW Documentation detailing an application s supported AppleEvents should indicate the keywords used for each parameter See the Sending AppleEvents to LabVIEW from Other Applications section of this chapter for a list of the AppleEvents that you can use with LabVIEW Following the keyword you must specify the parameter data as a string You can use AppleEvents with many different data types including strings and numbers When you specify the data string the AESend VI converts it to a desired data type based upon the way the data is formatted and optional directives that can be embedded in the string Each piece of data has a four letter type code associated with it indicating its data type The target application uses this code to interpret the data For example if comma separated items are enclosed in brackets a list of AE Descriptors is created and the list has a data type of 1ist each of the comma separated items could in turn be other items including lists You can use a number of VIs in the AppleEvents VI palette to create some of the more common parameter string
194. ace Create Constant Create Control Create Indicator Compare Elements f When you compare two arrays of unequal lengths in the Compare Elements mode LabVIEW ignores each element in the larger array whose index is greater than the index of the last element in the smaller array National Instruments Corporation 9 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 9 Comparison Functions When you use the Compare Aggregates mode to compare two arrays the following occurs 1 LabVIEW searches for the first set of corresponding elements in the two inputs that differ and uses those to determine the results of the comparison 2 If all elements are identical except that one has more elements LabVIEW considers the longer array to be greater than the shorter array 3 If no elements of the two arrays differ and the arrays have the same length the arrays are equal Therefore LabVIEW considers the array 1 2 3 to be greater than the array 1 2 and returns a single Boolean value in the Compare Aggregates mode Arrays must have the same number of dimensions for example both two dimensional and for the comparison between multidimensional arrays to make sense each dimension must have the same size For clusters using the Compare Aggregates mode LabVIEW compares using cluster order The two clusters LabVIEW compares must have the same number of elements The Comparison functions that do not have the Compare Aggregates or Compar
195. acter assuming the value supplied to mode has enabled this option send Sends data bytes to a single GPIB device bus status address byte count mode error out data string error ir National Instruments Corporation 35 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions Trigger Triggers a single device To send a single message that triggers several GPIB devices use the TriggerList function status eror out address error in GPIB 488 2 Multiple Device Function Descriptions The multiple device functions perform GPIB I O and control operations with several GPIB devices at once In general each function accepts an array of addresses as one of its inputs AllSPoll Serial polls all devices bus serial poll byte list address list error in Although the AllSPoll function is general enough to serial poll any number of GPIB devices you should use the ReadStatus function when you serial poll only one GPIB device DevClearList Clears multiple devices simultaneously bus status address list 7 emor out emor n EnableLocal Enables local mode for multiple devices bus status error out address list error in LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 35 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions EnableRemote Enables remote programming of multiple GPIB devices bus status address list error out error in
196. aesmar dadnigeione A 24 LabVIEW Function Error Codes sesraiscnan eise a aaa A 25 LabVIEW specilic PPC Error Codes iesrcckts uteuctiadtuaietshusidateiscuancstaaciies A 28 TCP and UDP Error OdeS sect a a a A 28 petial POr CENO OES esisi A 29 LabVIEW Specific Error Codes for AppleEvent Messages 04 A 29 OB TEI Or OG ES suis iste aiahceu sired E cater dsves cat amasaeedcumubestice A 29 Analog Input Configuration Programmability MIO and AI Devices B 1 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and AI Devices Part 1 B 2 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and AI Devices Part 2 B 3 Internal Channel Support MIO and AI Devices ccccceeecceeeeeeees B 4 Analog Output Characteristics MIO and AI Devices cceeeeeeees B 4 Analog Output Characteristics E Series Devices ccccccececceeeeeeeeees B 7 Digital I O Hardware Capabilities MIO and AI Devices 5 B 8 Counter Characteristics MIO and AI Devices ceceeeeeeentetteeeees B 9 Counter Usage for Analog Input and Output MIO and AI Devices B 10 Analog Input Configuration Programmability Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices ceeeeeeeccsseeccceeeeeeeeeeeees B 10 Analog Input Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Part T rirnan a aa a ea B 11 Analog Input Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Fortable Devices Par 2 oiea N EN B 11 Analog Outpu
197. affects all the channels used at the same time By Channel means you program the selection with hardware jumpers or through software on a per channel basis When a specific value for a parameter is shown that parameter value is fixed Table B 2 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Part 1 Number of Input FIFO eee cpanel see ee Gains E RRUEEAI V AE Scanning i 4 DI 2 DI 64SE 32DI PATMIO I6E 1 16E 1 AT MIO 16E 2 AT MIO 16E 10 AT MIO 16DE 10 NEC MIO 16E 4 PCI MIO 16E 1 PCI MIO 16E 4 NEC AI 16E 4 PCI 6110E PCI 6111E AT MIO 64E 3 PCI MIO 16XE 10 16SE 8DI NEC MIO 16XE 50 NEC AI 16XE 50 AT MIO 16XE 50 DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 PCI MIO 16XE 50 AT MIO 16F 5 AT MIO 64F 5 16SE 8DI 64SE 32DI AT MIO 16X 16SE 8DI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 bits 12 bits E PREN l2 5 10 20 50 100 si E 1 8 192 E 2 and E4 2 048 Lewo 0 to 10 Up to ese 10 Up to 4 Up to 2 5 0 to 10 2 048 Up to 512 10 0 to 10 Up to 512 10 0 to 10 z Up to 512 16F 5 256 Up to 512 64F 5 512 10 0 to 10 Up to 512 0 55 12 5 10 20 50 100 L235 10 20 50 100 1 2 10 100 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 2 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Part 1 Continued Number of Input FIFO Device Channels Resolution Gains Range v wor
198. ait On Listener functions incorporate new functionality TCP Write s data in parameter now accepts arrays of bytes TCP Read has a new input mode which affects how it operates The four modes are Standard Buffered CRLF and Immediate TCP Wait On Listener has a new input resolve remote address that tells whether to resolve the remote address or leave it in dot notation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 48 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 48 TCP Vis Standard has the same behavior it had in earlier versions of LabVIEW Buffered is an all or nothing read If you have not received the bytes requested at the end of a timeout no bytes are returned The unreturned bytes are saved for later read attempts CRLF is read until a carriage return and linefeed is found in the input stream You still must specify a maximum read size If the CRLF is not found within the size expressed nothing is returned If the timeout limit is reached and a CRLF is not found nothing is returned Immediate specifies to return immediately from a read when any bytes are received The following TCP IP functions are available IP To String Converts an IP network address to a string net address dot notation F String To IP Converts a string to an IP network address name EF et address TCP Close Connection Closes the connection associated with connection ID connection ID connection IO out s abort F
199. al Gece selector true string false string output sting Split String Splits the string at offset or searches for the first occurrence of search char in string beginning at offset and splits the string at that point search char E substring before char string t char substring offset 0 offset of char Spreadsheet String To Array Converts spreadsheet string to a numeric array of the dimension and representation of array type This function works for arrays of strings as well as arrays of numbers format string spreadsheet string array type 20 Dbl String Length Returns in length the number of characters bytes in string string length String Subset Returns substring of the original string beginning at offset and containing length number of length HH offset 0 substring characters string LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions To Lower Case Converts all alphabetic characters in string to lowercase characters This function does not affect non alphabetic characters string all lower case string To Upper Case Converts all alphabetic characters in string to uppercase characters This function does not affect non alphabetic characters string all upper case string Additional String To Number Function Descriptions For general information about Additional String to Number functions see Polymorphism fo
200. al and parallel poll configuration messages and device clear and trigger messages You do not use cmd to transmit programming instructions to devices The GPIB Read and GPIB Write functions transmit programming instructions and other device dependent information string contains the command bytes the Controller sends ASCH characters represent these bytes in cmd string If you must send nondisplayable characters you can enable backslash codes on the string control or string constant or you can use a format function to list the commands in hexadecimal National Instruments Corporation 34 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions dma Set DMA mode or programmed 1 0 mode syntax dma 0 use programmed I O dma use DMA dma indicates whether data transfers use DMA Some GPIB boards do not have DMA capability If you try to execute dma 1 the function returns GPIB error 11 to indicate no capability gts Go from active Controller to standby syntax gts 0 no shadow handshaking gts 1 shadow handshaking Description gts sets the GPIB Controller to the Controller Standby state and unasserts the ATN signal if it is the active Controller Normally the GPIB Controller is involved in the data transfer gts permits GPIB devices to transfer data without involving the GPIB Controller If shadow handshaking is active the GPIB Controller participates in the GPIB transfer as a Listener
201. al matrix with the elements of array S on the diagonal in decreasing order The diagonal elements are the singular values of A Create Special Complex Matrix Generates a special complex matrix based on matrix type The available matrix types are Identity Diagonal Toeplitz and Vandermonde Input Vectors matris type Special Matris matris size Input Vector error Create Special Matrix Generates a real special matrix based on matrix type The available matrix types are Identity Diagonal Toeplitz and Vandermonde Input Yectore Heels Special Matris matis SIZE Input Vector ermar Determinant Computes the determinant of a real square matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix determinant matrix type 7 error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Let A be a square matrix that represents Input Matrix and let L and U represent the lower and upper triangular matrices respectively of A such that A LU where the main diagonal elements of the lower triangular matrix L are arbitrarily set to one The VI finds the determinant of A by the product of the main diagonal elements of the upper triangular matrix U n l1 A r gt i 0 where A is the determinant of X and n is the dimension of X Dot Product Computes the dot product of X Vector and Y Vector 4 Vector ie 5 ugy T Vector tE error Let X represent the input sequen
202. alid badPretrigCountError The pretrigger sample count is invalid VI Reference Manual A 8 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued badTrigRangeError The trigger range or trigger hysteresis window is invalid 10086 badExtRefError The external reference value is invalid badTrigTypeError The trigger type parameter is invalid 10088 badTrigLevelError The trigger level is invalid 10089 badTotalCountError The total count is inconsistent with the buffer size and pretrigger scan count or with the board type 10090 badRPGError The individual range polarity and gain settings are valid but the combination specified is not allowed 10091 badIterationsError You have attempted to use an invalid setting for the iterations parameter The iterations value must be O or greater Your device might be limited to only two values 0 and 1 10092 lowScanIntervalError Some devices require a time gap between the last sample in a scan and the start of the next scan The scan interval you have specified does not provide a large enough gap for the board See the SCAN_Start function in the language interface API for an explanation 10093 fifoModeError FIFO mode waveform generation cannot be used because at least one condition is not satisfied 10100 badPortWidthError The requested digital port width is not a multiple of the hardware port width or is not attainable by the
203. alid system before using this VI The numerical implementation of the matrix inversion is numerically intensive and because of its recursive nature is also highly sensitive to round off error introduced by the floating point numeric coprocessor Although the computations use the maximum possible accuracy the VI cannot always solve for the system Solve Linear Equations Solves a real linear system AX Y Input Matrix mt Solution Vector Enown ector EJS matris type oe Let A be an m by n matrix that represents the Input Matrix Y be the set of m coefficients in Known Vector and X be the set of n elements in Solution Vector that solves the system AX Y When m gt n the system has more equations than unknowns so it is an overdetermined system The solution that satisfies AX Y may not exist so the VI finds the least square solution X which minimizes AX Y When m lt n the system has more unknowns than equations so it is an underdetermined systems It may have infinite solutions that satisfy AX Y The VI finds one of these solutions LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs In the case of m n if A is a nonsingular matrix no row or column is a linear combination of any other row or column respectively then you can solve the system for X by decomposing the input matrix A into its lower and upper triangular matrices L and U
204. ally distributed random variable X probability Inv T Distribution Computes the value of x such that the condition p Prob Ty lt x is satisfied given the probability value p of a t distributed random variable T with n degrees of freedom probability degrees of freedom National Instruments Corporation 44 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs Mean Computes the mean average of the values in the input sequence X where n is the number of elements in X Median Finds the median value of the input sequence X by sorting the values of X and selecting the middle element s of the sorted array Let n be the number of elements in the input sequence X and let S be the sorted sequence of X The VI finds median using the following identity S if nis odd median O 5 s _ 5 ifnis even andk ie n where i 2 Mode Finds the mode of the input sequence X inter yals LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis Moment About Mean Computes the moment about the mean of the input sequence X using the specified order mooment error th Let m be the desired order The VI computes the m order moment using the formula n 1 m 1 m i 0 where o is the m order moment and n is the number of elements in the input sequence X MSE Computes
205. ame and tag you must wire in separate values for item names and item tags after item specifies the position where the items are inserted after item can be a tag string of an existing item or a position index zero based integer in the menu To insert at the beginning of the menu wire a number less than 0 to after item To insert at the end of the menu wire a number larger than the number of items in the menu You can insert a separator using the application tag APP_SEPARATOR The function always ensures that the tags of all the inserted menu items are unique to the menu hierarchy by appending numbers to the supplied tags if necessary item tags out returns the actual tags of the inserted items If menu tag or after item tag is not found the function returns an error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Set Menu Item Info Sets the attributes of a menu item specified through menu and item tag Item attributes are item name the string that appears in the menu enabled false designates that the item is grayed out checked specifies whether there is a check mark next to the item and shortcut key accelerator Attributes that are not wired remain unchanged If item tag is not valid an error is returned item tag menubar HI menubar out tem name enabled REAT i eror in no error i checked or short cut National Ins
206. an order so that channel 0 is last 10008 badGroupError The group is invalid 10009 badCounterError The counter is invalid 10010 badCountError The count is too small or too large for the specified counter or the given I O transfer count is not appropriate for the current buffer or channel configuration 10011 badIntervalError The analog input scan rate is too fast for the number of channels and the channel clock rate or the given clock rate 1s not supported by the associated counter channel or I O channel 10012 badRangeError The analog input or analog output voltage range is invalid for the specified channel 10013 badErrorCodeError The driver returned an unrecognized or unlisted error code C ions oaaao O reana National Instruments Corporation A 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10033 10034 10080 10081 LabVIEW Function and Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued badClkFrequencyError The frequency is invalid badTimebaseError The timebase is invalid badLimitsError The limits are beyond the range of the board badWriteCountError Your data array contains an incomplete update or you are trying to write past the end of the internal buffer or your output operation is continuous and the length of your array is not a multiple of one half of the internal buffer size badWrite
207. an overflow error 10846 overWriteError The driver wrote new data into the input transfer buffer before the previously acquired data was read 10847 dmaChainingError New buffer information was not available at the time of the DMA chaining interrupt DMA transfers will terminate at the end of the currently active transfer buffer 10848 noDMACountAvailError The driver could not obtain a valid reading from the transfer count register in the DMA controller openFileError The configuration file could not be opened 10850 closeFileError Unable to close a file fileSeekError Unable to seek within a file readFileError Unable to read from a file National Instruments Corporation A 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10854 An error occurred accessing a file 10855 osUnsupportedError NI DAQ does not support the current operation on this particular version of the operating system 10856 osError An unexpected error occurred from the operating system while performing the given operation 10857 internalKernelError An unexpected error occurred inside the kernel while performing this operation 10880 updateRateChangeError A change to the update rate is not possible at this time because of one of the following reasons 1 When waveform generation is in progress you cannot change the interval timebase When you make several changes in a
208. andard for command and data sequences The GPIB 488 2 functions contain the same basic functionality as the traditional GPIB functions and include the following enhancements and additions e You specify the GPIB device address with an integer instead of a string Further you specify the bus number with an additional numeric control which makes dealing with multiple GPIB interfaces easier e You can determine the GPIB status error and or byte count immediately from the connector pane of each GPIB 488 2 function You no longer need to use the GPIB Status Function to obtain error and other information e The FindLstn function implements the IEEE 488 2 Find All Listeners protocol You can use this function at the beginning of an application to determine which devices are present on the bus without knowing their addresses National Instruments Corporation 31 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs e The GPIB Misc function is still available but it is no longer necessary in most cases IEEE 488 2 specifies routines for most GPIB application needs which are implemented as functions However you can mix the GPIB Misc function as well as other GPIB functions with the GPIB 488 2 functions if you need to e There are GPIB 488 2 functions with low level as well as high level functionality to suit any GPIB application You can use the low level functions in non controller situati
209. aneanianleneneans 41 8 Pre pass Eleis aa oanaauant ead ean teee 41 8 Bandpass Filte lcardiee as uscinea vested ce E E 41 8 Beans tO Fite iss aoescasctiec ceca neelan uo suate N aroun aeauencestacaees 41 9 Special Escape CodeS oarece eE EE EER EA EE 6 3 SOINE SYNTAX seta E eee 6 4 Possible Format into String Errors cccccccssesssssesssseessesesseeeseessseeeeeeees 6 7 F rmat Specife Sareen a a E INEN 6 7 Special Characters for Match Pattern eeeeeeeeeeeeeesessesssssssssssssssssssesseese 6 9 Strings for the Match Pattern Examples ccccccccccccssssessseesseeeeeeeeeees 6 10 xviii National Instruments Corporation Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Table 9 1 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 18 1 Table 18 2 Table 18 3 Table 18 4 Table 18 5 Table 18 6 Table 18 7 Table 18 8 Table 18 9 Table 18 10 Table 18 11 Table 18 12 Table 18 13 Table 25 1 Table 28 1 Table 28 2 Table 28 3 Table 29 1 Table 29 2 Table 34 1 Table 34 2 Table 51 1 Table 52 1 National Instruments Corporation X X Contents Scan drom SN ETOS ceuin A 6 12 Scam iron Smin EXample S ai N a 6 12 Lexical Class Number Descri pul Ons iis casts tention sosanchtastosit ae naanaweieet 9 8 Valid Value of Elements for Date Time Cluster cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeees 10 2 Format Codes for the Time Format String 20 cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 7 AI Buffer Config VI Device Specific Settings and Ran
210. ange of the x values This VI diciate ihe output interpolation value y using y r If the number of points is odd the degrees of poe of P and Q n X are If the number of points is even the degrees of freedom of P are 2 1 and the degrees of freedom of Q are where n is the total number of points formed by Y Array and 2 X Array National Instruments Corporation 43 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS Spline Interpolant Returns an array Interpolant of length n which contains the second derivatives of the spline interpolating function g x at the tabulated points X where i 0 1 n 1 Input arrays X Array and Y Array are of length n and contain a tabulated function LS f with XQ lt X1 lt X _1 Initial boundary and final boundary are the first derivative of the interpolating function g x at points O and n 1 respectively T Array a Arr ag Initial boundary Tinal boundary Interpolant error If initial boundary and final boundary are equal to or greater than 10 the VI sets the corresponding boundary condition for a natural spline with zero second derivative on that boundary The interpolating function g x passes through all the points Xj Vit G X yi where i 0 1 n 1 The VI obtains the interpolating function g x by interpolating every interval x x witha cubic polynomial function p x that meets the following conditions
211. annel can be used Analog Digital A Analog signal must be first in scan list if it is connected to an analog input channel A trigger type of 4 digital scan clock gating enables an external TTL signal to gate the scan clock on and off effectively pausing and resuming an acquisition Channel clock and scan clock are the same on the NB MIO 16 Therefore if the scan clock gate becomes FALSE the current scan does not complete and the scan clock ceases operation When the scan clock gate becomes TRUE the scan clock immediately begins operation again where it left off previously You wire your signal to the EXTGATE pin A trigger type of 5 analog scan clock gating enables an external analog signal to gate the scan clock on and off effectively pausing and resuming an acquisition A trigger type of 6 allows you to use the output of the analog trigger circuitry ATCOUT as a general purpose signal For example you can use ATCOUT to start an analog output operation or you can count the number of analog triggers appearing at ATCOUT Note Trigger types 1 5 and 6 on E Series devices use the same analog trigger circuitry All three types can be enabled at the same time but the last one enabled dictates how the analog trigger circuitry behaves The E Series restrictions described in the trigger applications apply to all three trigger types Trigger type 5 on E Series devices uses the digital scan clock gate and the analog trigger circuitry
212. apter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs for additional information on the inputs and outputs and how they work You can access the Analog Output Utilities palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Output Analog Output Utilities The icon that you must select to access the Analog Output Utility VIs is on the bottom row of the Analog Output palette as shown below Tr Tr Tr Tr CONFIG RITE START WAIT aa cas Analog Output Utility Vis Handling Errors LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the intermediate level Analog Output Utility VIs Each intermediate level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run National Instruments Corporation 21 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility Vis When you use any of the Analog Output Utility VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Utilities in LabVIEW For more information on this VI refer to Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error
213. arted an acquisition this VI starts an acquisition retrieves a scan of data and then terminates the acquisition The group configuration determines the channels the VI sample This VI does not support 5102 DSA and 59xx devices acquisition state task ID task ID out output type scaled Scan scakbd data opsade no charge See r binary data error in no error error out time timit no change data remaining If you do not call the AI Control VI this VI initiates a single scan using the fastest and most safe channel clock rate You can however alter the channel clock rate with the AI Clock Config VI If you run the AI Control VI with control code set to 0 Start a clock signal initiates the scans If you want externally clocked conversions you must use the AI Clock Config VI to set the clock source to external If clock sources are internal and you do not allocate memory a timed nonbuffered acquisition begins when you run the AI Control VI with control code set to 0 This type of acquisition is useful for synchronizing analog inputs and outputs in a point to point control application The following devices do not support timed nonbuffered acquisitions e Macintosh Lab NB Lab LC NB A2000 NB A2100 and NB A2150 Note In the event of a FIFO overflow during a timed nonbuffered acquisition LabVIEW restarts the device National Instruments Corporation 18 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter
214. aseaals Bus Management Functions ssoseessoersseerrerrerrrererrreresresesseesssesssss Low Level Functions cccccccccccccccssscceessccceecseeeccssesssseeesessenscseeuss General Functions s ivassancsisvevisondoaiesoovbontinscandbeins beac a a a e eaea Seral Port VU Overview sperton O O E AEA Ea S Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template Vis Introduction to Instrument Driver Template VIS ccccccccccccececceceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees Instrument Driver Template VI Descriptions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeees Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference OPCIONS sc osin tale sateen aes esta ia Decl E E tiene ieaaad VISA Library Reference Parameters ccccccccccccccccceececeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeseeessseeeees VISA Opetation DESCmiplONSsiieswssisdoasaue beet a a a matted oss Byent Mangano FOUNO Ons nern A E AA High Level Register Access PUNCUONS ss ssndatantsien Guana ieltthiaatamssnidaons Low Level Register Access FUNCTIONS ccccssssssssessesseseeeessesessseeeeeseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees VISA Seral FUNCOMS itera steric oi oe Datla A aes ea weleds VISA PrOD TA IN OGG meninin ar E VISA Property Node Desehipulons wisi eiiasi ao noe ten ta A a tess Fast Data Channie hoaa A E General SE MIMO Son e E R GPIB SODE Sas A AS Titestace Imi Orimaulon sos s Ea ane atieu ae tiseeh aus LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual xii National Instruments Corporation Contents Message Based
215. ass to the Wait on Occurrence and Set Occurrence functions LH OCCUMENCE Ordinarily only one Generate Occurrence node is connected to any set of Wait on Occurrence and Set Occurrence functions You can connect a Generate Occurrence function to any number of Wait on Occurrence and Set Occurrence functions You do not have to have the same number of Wait on Occurrence and Set Occurrence functions Unlike other synchronization VIs each Generate Occurrence function on a block diagram represents a single unique occurrence In this way you can think of the Generate Occurrence function as a constant When a VI is running every time a Generate Occurrence function executes the node produces the same value For example if you place a Generate Occurrence function inside of a loop the value produced by Generate Occurrence is the same for every iteration of the loop If you place a Generate Occurrence function on the block diagram of a reentrant VI Generate Occurrence produces a different value for each caller National Instruments Corporation 13 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Set Occurrence Triggers the specified occurrence All block diagrams that are waiting for this occurrence stop waiting Wait On Occurrence Waits for the Set Occurrence function to set or trigger the given occurrence rms timeout 1 occurence timed out ignore previous T LabVIEW Function and VI Refer
216. atalog file which tells you how many records exist in the file File Dialog Displays a dialog box with which you can specify the path to a file or directory You can use this dialog box to select existing files or directories or to select a location and name for a new file or directory prompt shart path path select mode 2 esista default nam i cancelled File Directory Info Returns information about the file or directory specified by path including its size its last modification date and whether it is a directory pies directory dup path i276 last mod emor out Flush File Writes all buffers of the file identified by refnum to disk and updates the directory entry of the file associated with refnum The file remains open and refnum remains valid refnum dup refriurr Emor ir error out Data written to a file often resides in a buffer until the buffer fills up or until you close the file This function forces the operating system to write any buffer data to the file LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions List Directory Returns two arrays of strings listing the names of all files and directories found in directory path filtering both arrays based upon pattern and filtering the file names array based upon the specified datalog type directory path dup directory path pattern p x file names datalog type
217. ate Analog Input VIs in the second row of the Analog Input palette The other intermediate level VIs are in the Analog Input Utilities palette which is discussed later The Intermediate Analog Input VIs AI Config AI Start AI Read AI Single Scan and AI Clear are in turn built from the fundamental building block layer called the Advanced Analog Input VIs These VIs offer almost as much power as the advanced level VIs and they conveniently group the advanced level VIs into a tidy logical sequence Refer to Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs for specific VI information Analog Input Utility Vis Analog Input Utility Icon You can access the Analog Input Utilities palette by choosing the Analog Input Utility icon from the Analog Input palette The Analog Input Utility VIs AI Read One Scan AI Waveform Scan and AI Continuous Scan are single VI solutions to common analog input problems These VIs are convenient but they lack flexibility These three VIs are built from the Intermediate Analog Input VIs in the Analog Input palette Refer to Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs for specific VI information Advanced Analog Input VIs Advanced Analog Input Icon You can access the Advanced Analog Input palette by choosing the Advanced Analog Input icon from the Analog Input palette These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ data acquisition software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Anal
218. ations The Digital I O VIs can be found by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Digital I O When you click on the Digital I O icon in the Data Acquisition palette the Digital I O palette pops up as shown in the following illustration Digital 1 0 fees SU Digital 170 od aca fast tite tae B oe Ll IIO IID ord oro IID CONFIGI READ wire START WAIT annt S rues En anne Eso ADU angles There are three classes of Digital I O VIs found in the Digital I O palette The Easy Digital I O VIs Intermediate Digital I O VIs and Advanced Digital I O VIs The following illustrates these VI classes LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs O Di DIG DIG LIME FORT Easy Digital I O Vis S Intermediate Digital I O VIs Advanced Digital I O VIs Easy Digital 1 0 Vis The Easy Digital I O VIs perform simple digital operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can use each VI by itself to perform a basic digital operation Unlike intermediate and advanced level VIs Easy Digital I O VIs automatically alert you to errors with a dialog box that asks you to stop the execution of the VI or to ignore the error The Easy Digital I O VIs are actually composed of Advanced Digital I O VIs The Easy Digital I O VIs provi
219. atistical profile is u 0 s where s is the absolute value of the specified standard deviation samples Gaussian Moise Pattern standard deyviation seed error To generate the pattern the VI uses a modified version of the Very Long Cycle random number generator algorithm based upon the Central Limit Theorem Given that the probability density function f x of the Gaussian distributed Gaussian Noise Pattern is 1 68 fix ity where s is the absolute value of the specified standard deviation and that you can compute the expected values E using the formula co E x xfiddx oo National Instruments Corporation 38 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs then the expected mean value u and the expected standard deviation value of the pseudorandom sequence are u E x 0 o E x py HW s The pseudorandom sequence produces approximately 2 samples before the pattern repeats itself Impulse Pattern Generates an array containing an impulse pattern samples ae Impulse Pattern amplitude delay E error If Impulse Pattern is represented by the sequence X the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula a ifi d fori 0 1 2 n 1 0 elsewhere where a is amplitude d is delay and n is the number of samples Periodic Random Noise Generates an array containing periodic random noise PRN samples Perio
220. atrix Normalizes the 2D input Matrix using its statistical profile u where u is the mean and O is the standard deviation to obtain a Normalized Matrix whose statistical profile is 0 1 Normalized Matrix standard deviation mear EM LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 46 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs where B represents the 2D output sequence Normalized Matrix A represents the 2D input sequence Matrix with n rows and m columns and aij is the element of A on the i row and j column Normalize Vector Normalizes the input Vector using its statistical profile u oO where u is the mean and O is the standard deviation to obtain a Normalized Vector whose statistical profile is 0 1 no oe as Standard deviation ector an error The VI obtains Normalized Vector using yan 0 n l1 Lx u n where Y represents the output sequence Normalized Vector and X represents the input sequence Vector of length n and x is the i element of X National Instruments Corporation 46 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs Quick Scale 1D Determines the maximum absolute value of the input array X and then scales X using this value T i Max maxis error where s is the maximum absolute value in X You can use this VI to normalize sequences within the range 1 1 This VI is particularly useful if the sequen
221. ay containing the next samples of a sine wave phase out is set to phase n and if reset phase is false the next time the VI executes this reentrant VI uses this value as the new phase in Square Wave Generates an array containing a square wave reset phase samples oa Square Wawe amplitude e eh ae ish phase out f error phase in duty cycle L If the sequence Y represents Square Wave the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y a square phase i for i 0 1 2 n 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 38 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs where a is amplitude n is the number of samples duty lt BECA 1 0 O lt p lt SY 360 square phase i duty nea lt 1 0 T360 lt p lt 360 where p phase i modulo 360 0 duty duty cycle phase i initial_phase f 360 0 7 f is the frequency in normalized units of cycles sample initial_phase is phase in if reset phase is true or initial_phase is the phase out from the previous execution of this instance of the VI if reset phase is false The VI is reentrant so you can use it to simulate a continuous acquisition from a square wave function generator If the input control reset phase is false subsequent calls to a specific instance of this VI produce the output Square Wave array containing the next samples of a Square wave phase out is set to phase n and if reset p
222. baud rate 9600 resource name 4 write buffer ION eee bytes to read 1024 pik J ai timeout 10sec eror in no error data bits 8 stop bits F 1 stop bit flow contral O M ore error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Easy VISA Write and Read Writes a command string to the specified device then reads the response data bytes to read 1024 resource name Lisa read butter write buffer IDE yi write retum count timeout 10sec F read retum count eror in no error H eor out Easy VISA Write Writes a command string to the specified device resource name l write buffer IDM 2 E wite retum count timeout 10sec p mi error out emor in no error VISA Assert Trigger Asserts a software or hardware trigger depending on the interface type YISA session dup VISA session protocol default 0 emor in no error error out VISA Clear Performs an IEEE 488 1 style clear of the device For VXI this is the Word Serial Clear command for GPIB systems this is the Selected Device Clear command For Serial this sends the string CLS In YISA session dup WISA session eror in no error emor out VISA Close Closes a specified device session or event object VISA Close accepts all available classes For a listing of available classes see the VISA Library Reference Parameters se
223. bed in Inside Macintosh Volume VI and the AppleEvent Registry is a prerequisite for sending these AppleEvents to LabVIEW from other applications You can send these events between two or more LabVIEW applications by using the utility VIs described in the Sending AppleEvents section in Chapter 24 AppleEvents of the LabVIEW User Manual The LabVIEW specific AppleEvents are described in later sections in a format similar to that used in the AppleEvent Registry Replies to AppleEvents If LabVIEW is unable to perform an AppleEvent the reply contains an error code If the error is not a standard AppleEvent error the reply also contains a string describing the error Appendix A Error Codes summarizes the Lab VIEW specific errors that can be returned in a reply to an AppleEvent LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis Event Run VI Description Tells LabVIEW to run the specified VI s Before executing this event the LabVIEW application must be running and the VI must be open you can open the VI using the Open Documents AppleEvent Event Class LBVW Custom events use the Applications creator type for the event class Event ID COV I Sess Event Parameters Vior List of VIs keyDirectObject typeChar char required or list of typeChar list Reply Parameters foe DC Possible Errors kLVE_InvalidState 1000 The VI is ina stat
224. been processed beyond peaks valleys locations This delay has implications only for real time processing The VI must be notified when the first and last blocks are passed into the VI so that the VI can initialize and then release data internal to the peak detection algorithm National Instruments Corporation 47 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIS Threshold Peak Detector Analyzes the input sequence X for valid peaks and keeps count of the number of peaks encountered and a record of Indices which locates the points that exceed threshold in a valid peak A peak is valid where the elements of X exceed threshold and then return to a value less than or equal to threshold and the number of elements that exceed threshold is at least equal to width rm aie feo Indices threshold AT PYE IP count width error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 47 4 National Instruments Corporation Part V Communication Vis and Functions Part V Communication VIs and Functions describes how LabVIEW handles networking and interapplication communications and introduces the Communication VIs and functions This part contains the following chapters e Chapter 48 TCP VIs describes Internet Protocol IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP and internet addresses and describes the LabVIEW TCP VIs Refer to Chapter 21 TCP and UDP VIs of the LabVIEW User Manual for an overview of TCP
225. ble 6 5 Special Characters for Match Pattern Continued tae A Character Interpreted by the Match Pattern Function as Matches the longest number of instances of the expression preceding there must be at least one instance to constitute a match gt the longest number of instances of the expression gt in regular expression including zero instances If is the last character of regular expression it anchors the match to the last element of string The match fails unless regular expression matches up to and including the last character in the string If is not last it is treated as a regular character Table 6 6 shows examples of the Strings for the Match Pattern functions Table 6 6 Strings for the Match Pattern Examples Characters to Be Matched Regular Expression VOLTS All uppercase and lowercase versions of volts that is VOLTS Volts volts and so on A space a plus sign or a minus sign A sequence of one or more digits POS 2 It Zero or more Spaces s or that is a space followed by an asterisk One or more Spaces Tabs New Lines or Pee Nae a AS ae Carriage Returns One or more characters other than digits Pe O29 The word Level only if it begins at the Level offset position in the string The word Volts only if it appears atthe end Volts of the string The longest string within parentheses LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 10 National Instruments Corporation
226. bytes Casting a string to LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions a 1D array converts the string from machine independent form to the native form for that platform Unflatten From String Converts binary string to the type wired to type This function performs the inverse of Flatten To String binary string should contain flattened data of the type wired to type For more information on type descriptors and flattened data see Flattened Data in Appendix A Data Storage Formats of the G Programming Reference Manual binary string type Memory VI Descriptions The following illustration displays the options available on the Memory subpalette In Out Fort Fort In Port Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 Reads a byte or word integer from a specific register address Because this VI is not available on all platforms VIs using this subVI are not portable register address read a byte or a word F bpte Out Port Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 Writes a byte or word integer to a specific register address Because this VI is not available on all platforms VIs using this subVI are not portable register address write a byte or a word F b value National Instruments Corporation 13 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Synchronization is You can synchronize tasks executing in parallel by using t
227. cation Control functions To access the Application Control palette shown in the following illustration select Functions A pplication Control Application Control i Application Control Lantra Geje gna pm The Application Control palette include the following subpalettes e Help functions e Menu functions National Instruments Corporation 12 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Application Control Functions The following Application Control functions are available Call By Reference Node The Call By Reference node is very similar to a subVI node you can use either to call a VI However there is a significant difference With a subVI node you determine what VI is called when you drop the node on the diagram With the Call By Reference node the end user determines what VI is called at runtime via the reference input The Call By Reference node could call a VI that resides on a different computer At the top of the Call By Reference node are four terminals an input output pair of flow through VI reference terminals and an input output pair of flow through error clusters The VI reference input accepts wires only from strictly typed VI references Below these terminals is an area within which a connector pane resides that is identical to that of a VI with its terminals showing rather than its icon The connector pane of the strictly typed VI reference input det
228. ccess Rights function ignores new owner and new group and returns empty strings for owner and group because Macintosh does not support owners or groups for files Array Of Strings To Path Converts array of strings into a relative or absolute path Copy Copies the file or directory specified by source path to the location specified by target path If you copy a directory this function copies all its contents recursively source path target path error in Delete Deletes the file or directory specified by path If path specifies a directory that is not empty or if you do not have write permission for both the file or directory specified by path and its parent directory this function does not remove the directory and returns an error Sim cath OUP pal i l emor out EOF Sets and returns the logical EOF end of file of the file identified by refnum pos mode and pos offset specify the new location of the EOF If you do not specify pos mode or pos offset this function returns the current unchanged EOF This function always returns the location of the EOF relative to the beginning of the file refnum pos mode 0 1 pos offset 0 error iri National Instruments Corporation 11 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions You cannot set the EOF of a datalog file If refnum identifies a datalog file you cannot wire pos mode and pos offset However you still can get the EOF of a d
229. ce X Vector and Y represent the input sequence Y Vector The VI obtains the dot product X Y using the formula n l1 Are X i gt i 0 where n is the number of data points Notice that the output value X Y is a scalar value EigenValues amp Vectors Finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors right of a square real Input Matrix Input Matrix Eigenvalues matrix type E y Eigenvectors output option error National Instruments Corporation 45 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIS The eigenvalue problem is to determine the nontrivial solutions to the equation AX X where A is an by n Input Matrix X is a vector with n elements and is a scalar The n values of that satisfy the equation are the Eigenvalues of A and the corresponding values of X are the right Eigenvectors of A A symmetric real matrix always has real eigenvalues and eigenvectors Inverse Matrix Finds the Inverse Matrix of the Input Matrix Input Matris A A Inverse Matrix matrix type error Let A be the Input Matrix and I be the identity matrix You obtain the Inverse Matrix value by solving the system AB for B If A is a nonsingular matrix you can show that the solution to the preceding system is unique and that it corresponds to the Inverse Matrix of A BSA and B is therefore an Inverse Matrix A nonsingular matrix is a matrix in which no row or column contains a linear combination of any oth
230. ce data generation has started only the transfer buffers originally written to can be updated If DMA is active and a single transfer buffer contains interleaved channel data new data must be provided for all output channels currently using the DMA channel LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 14 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued final data block has already been loaded transferInProgError A transfer is already in progress for the specified resource or the operation is not allowed because the device is in the process of performing transfers possibly with different resources 10610 transferPauseError A single output channel in a group cannot be paused if the output data for the group is interleaved badDirOnSomeLinesError Some of the lines in the specified channel are not configured for the transfer direction specified For a write transfer some lines were configured for input For a read transfer some lines were configured for output 10612 badLineDirError The specified line does not support the specified transfer direction 10613 badChanDirError The specified channel does not support the specified transfer direction 10614 badGroupDirError The specified group does not support the specified transfer direction masterClkError The clock configuration for the clock master is invalid slaveClkError The clock configuration for the cl
231. ce is a zero mean sequence Quick Scale 2D Determines the maximum absolute value of the input array X and then scales X using this value Kj Maxtk masis error The output array Yij Xij Max X is given by y S 9 where s denotes the maximum absolute value in X You can use this VI to normalize sequences within the range 1 1 This VI is particularly useful if the matrix is a zero mean matrix LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 46 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs Scale 1D Determines scale and offset and then scales the input array X using these values Y CH offset scale scale ottset error The output array Y is given by X offset VS Se scale scale 0 5 max min and offset min scale where max denotes the maximum value in X and min denotes the minimum value in X You can use this VI to normalize any numerical sequence with the assurance that the range of the output sequence is 1 1 Scale 2D Determines scale and offset and then scales X using these values H of feet scale scale offset error The two dimensional output array Y X offset scale is given by y X offset scale scale 0 5 max min and offset min 0 5 scale where max denotes the maximum value in X and min denotes the minimum value in X You can use this VI to normalize any numerical sequence with the assurance that the ran
232. ces of the expression preceding Cancels the interpretation of special characters for example matches a question mark You can also use the following constructions for the space and non displayable characters b backspace form feed newline space carriage return any character where xx is the hex code using 0 through 9 and upper case A through F E tab matches that portion of string that begins with the character at offset If is not the first character it is treated as a regular character Encloses alternates For example abc matches a b or c The following character has special significance when used within the brackets dash Indicates a range when used between digits or lowercase or uppercase letters for example 0 5 a g or L Q The following characters have significance only when they are the first character within the brackets Excludes the set of characters including nondisplayable characters O 9 matches any character other than 0 through 9 Excludes the set with respect to all the displayable characters and the space characters O 9 gives the space characters and all displayable characters except 0 through 9 a If is the first character of regular expression it anchors the match to the offset in string The match fails unless regular expression National Instruments Corporation 6 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Ta
233. ch pulse See mode 6 for another way to measure pulse width with a DAQ STC device Figure 28 4 Buffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Pulse Width Measurement To measure period set gate mode to rising or falling edge Figure 28 5 shows unbuffered mode 4 pulse width measurement You may start either an Am9513 or a DAQ STC counter at any time The counter begins counting at the start of the next period The Am9513 counter measures periods continuously With unbuffered counting the DAQ STC stops counting after one measurement LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 28 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs Start Gale Fa re r Timebase uL rnrn na rmn na sry Am 9513 SSS ee ee DACI STC S SSSSsSsS auuu Figure 28 5 Unbuffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Period Measurement Figure 28 6 shows buffered mode 4 period measurement which is available only with DAQ STC devices The measured value is stored into the buffer at the end of each period Start Measured Measured Measured Fenod am Period mei Pernod 1 Z 2 4 Figure 28 6 Buffered Mode 4 Rising Edge Pulse Width Measurement Use mode 5 to configure for pulse generation when you also need to configure gate mode output type or output polarity to non default values Otherwise avoid calling the CTR Mode Config VI and use only the CTR Pulse Config VI for pulse generation See the CTR Pulse Config VI for ad
234. com National Instruments NI DAQ PXI RTSI and SCXI are trademarks of National Instruments Corporation Product and company names listed are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies WARNING REGARDING MEDICAL AND CLINICAL USE OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS National Instruments products are not designed with components and testing intended to ensure a level of reliability suitable for use in treatment and diagnosis of humans Applications of National Instruments products involving medical or clinical treatment can create a potential for accidental injury caused by product failure or by errors on the part of the user or application designer Any use or application of National Instruments products for or involving medical or clinical treatment must be performed by properly trained and qualified medical personnel and all traditional medical safeguards equipment and procedures that are appropriate in the particular situation to prevent serious injury or death should always continue to be used when National Instruments products are being used National Instruments products are NOT intended to be a substitute for any form of established process procedure or equipment used to monitor or safeguard human health and safety in medical or clinical treatment Contents About This Manual Organization of the Product User Manual cccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees XXV Conventions Use
235. command string output string error ir a Bron out Table 34 1 Command String Device Functions Table 34 2 Command String Controller Functions gts 0 1 Go from active Controller to standby ist 0 1 Set individual status bit Local lockout Place Controller in local state LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions Table 34 2 Command String Controller Functions Continued om arete eonte aoo tit de nd ere To specify the GPIB Controller used by this function use a command string in the form ID xxx where ID is the GPIB Controller bus number and xxx is the three character command and its corresponding arguments if any If you do not specify a Controller ID LabVIEW assumes 0 GPIB Read Reads byte count number of bytes from the GPIB device at address string timeout me 468 2 global address string byte count mode 0 erar in You use the SetTimeOut function to change the default value the 488 2 global timeout of timeout ms Initially timeout ms defaults to 10 000 See the description of the SetTimeOut function in Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions for more information GPIB Serial Poll Performs a serial poll of the device indicated by address string address string serial poll byte me skatus error ir error out National Instruments Corporation 34 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual C
236. condition and final condition minimize the overall error by increasing the accuracy at the boundaries especially when the number of samples is small Determining boundary conditions before the fact enhances accuracy Inverse Complex FFT Computes the inverse Fourier transform of the complex input sequence FFT X You can use this VI to perform an inverse FFT on an array of one of the LabVIEW complex numeric representations National Instruments Corporation 39 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs If Y represents the output sequence then Y F71 Xx You can use this VI to perform the following operations when FFT X has one of the complex LabVIEW data types e The inverse FFT of a complex valued sequence X e The inverse DFT of a complex valued sequence X This FFT VI first analyzes the input data and based on this analysis inverse Fourier transforms the data by executing one of the preceding options All these routines take advantage of the concurrent processing capabilities of the CPU and FPU When the number of samples in the input sequence X is a valid power of 2 r 2 form 1 25 35 45 23 where n is the number of samples the VI computes the inverse FFT by applying the split radix algorithm The longest sequence with an inverse complex FFT that the VI can compute is 273 8 388 608 8M When the number of samples in the input sequence X is not a valid power of 2 M
237. connect the negative output of your reference voltage source to the AIGND line as well as to the analog input channel 8 Get DAQ Device Information Returns information about a DAQ device task ID or device task ID out Information type Information string error in no error bas error Ot Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the transfer methods available with your DAQ device National Instruments Corporation 29 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Get SCXI Information Returns the SCXI chassis configuration information that you set using the configuration utility or the Set SCXI Information VI chassis type device string p chassis address tas lot information communication mode Status commMOhi ation path LPM 16 Calibrate Calibrates the PC LPM 16 or PC LPM 16PnP converter The calibration calculates the correct offset voltage for the voltage comparator adjusts positive linearity and full scale errors to less than 0 5 LSB each and adjusts zero error to less than 1 LSB device device out Status Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 or DAQCard 700 device Master Slave Config Configures one device as a master device and any remaining devices as slave devices for multiple buffered analog input operations mk Master TaskiD Out Haster TaskibD Config Slave TaskID List
238. continuous pulse trains to count events or elapsed time to divide down a signal and to measure pulse width or period The Easy Counter VIs call the Intermediate Counter VIs for several pulse generation counting and measurement operations This chapter also describes the ICTR Control VI that you use with Lab and 1200 Series and PC LPM devices that contain the 8253 54 counter timer chip You can access the Intermediate Counter VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Counter Intermediate Counter The Intermediate Counter VIs are the VIs on the second row of the Counter palette as shown below iL Counter on E r fae PULSE TRAIN ioe pulse of l 1 eh i ERIC d3 ow j_nnrt mrt e Sr F ar F Intermediate Counter Vis National Instruments Corporation 2 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Handling Errors LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the Intermediate Counter VIs Each intermediate level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run When you use any of the Intermediate Counter VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wir
239. cquisition The VI stores the measurements in the buffer as they are acquired and the AI Read VI retrieves them from the buffer scales them and returns all the data as an array of scaled values On the last iteration when clear acquisition is TRUE or if an error occurs the VI also calls the AI Clear VI to clear the acquisition in progress If you call the AI Waveform Scan VI only once you can leave iteration and clear acquisition unwired Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits scanning order triggers and clocks you can use with your National Instruments DAQ device Note These VIs use an uninitialized shift register as local memory to remember the taskID for the group of channels between VI calls You normally use one VI in one place on your diagram but if you use it more than once the multiple instances of the VI share the same taskID All calls to one of these VIs configure read data from or clear the same acquisition Occasionally you may want to use each VI in multiple places and have each instance refer to a different taskID for example when you measure two devices simultaneously Save a copy of the VI with a new name for example AI Waveform Scan R and make your new VI reentrant LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 17 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs Note For all Analog Input Utility VIs if your program iterates more than 2 _ 1 tim
240. cribed in Application Type 1 and the stop trigger as described in Application Type 2 Refer to Tables 18 11 and 18 12 to determine the default pin to which you connect your trigger signal On some devices you can specify an alternative source through the trigger source parameter a acquired data _ tigger stop tga In the above illustration total scans to acquire is 1000 and pretrigger scans to acquire is 900 The start trigger can come from digital trigger B or an analog trigger trigger or pause condition 1 Trigger on rising edge or slope level 5 5 window size 0 2 The stop trigger can come from digital trigger A or an analog trigger trigger or pause condition 1 Trigger on rising edge or slope level 4 0 window size 0 2 Notice that some of the data after the start trigger has been discarded because all 900 pretrigger scans have been collected and the stop trigger is more than 900 scans away from the start trigger LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs When using analog triggering on E Series devices there are several restrictions that apply as shown in Table 18 8 Table 18 8 Restrictions for Analog Triggering on E Series Devices Start Stop Trigger Trigger Restrictions Digital B Analog Analog signal must be connected to PFIO unless you are scanning only one channel in which case the input to that ch
241. ction and VI Reference Manual Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs range of 5 to 5 V is 2 44 mV The VI returns an array of the actual gain values that the VI stores for each channel Note When you take readings to determine the offset and actual gain you should use the same input limits settings and clock rates that you use to measure your input signals LabVIEW uses the following equation to scale binary readings to voltage ach aed ooh te vines voltage resolution binary reading binary offset gain When you run the AI Group Config VI it sets the attributes of all the channels in the group to their defaults including the binary offset and gain values You can wire channel list if you want to adjust the scaling constants for a subset of the channels in the group If you leave channel list unwired the VI adjusts the scaling constants for all channels in the group The VI uses the same method as the AI Hardware Config VI to apply values in the binary offsets precision voltages and binary readings input arrays That is if you wired channel list to this VI the first element at index 0 of the input arrays binary offsets precision voltages and binary readings apply to the channels listed at index 0 of channel list If you leave channel list unwired the first values of the input arrays apply to the first channel in the group The VI applies the values of each input array to channel list channels or the group in this manner u
242. ction earlier in this chapter YISA session eror in no error National Instruments Corporation 33 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference VISA Find Resource Queries the system to locate the devices associated with a specified interface expression find list l return Count error in no error lt error out The following tables show the expression parameter descriptions for the VISA Find Resource VI All VXI 2 VXI 0 9 2 INSTR Serial ASRL 0 9 INSTR 7 VXI VXI MEMACC GPIB VXI GPIB VXI MEMACC All VXI xVXI 0 9 MEMACC MEMACC VISA Lock Establishes locked access to the specified resource lock toe exclusive 1 VISA session dup YISA session timeout 0 g access kep requested key P error out eror in no error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference For more information about VISA locking and shared locking refer to Chapter 8 LabVIEW VISA Tutorial in the LabVIEW User Manual VISA Open Opens a session to the specified device and returns a session identifier that can be used to call any other operations of that device timeout 0 YISA session for class YISA session resource name Tae ACCEL mode _ aT error out error in no error The following table shows the grammar for the address string Optiona
243. ction not supported by controller VISA Transition Library Developer specified error codes LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 22 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 7 PPC Error Codes Faeroe iiaa O O Toolbox has not been initialized 902 e Invalid or inappropriate locationKindSelector in locationName 903 noPortErr Invalid port name Unable to open port or bad portRefNum 904 noGlobalsErr The system is unable to allocate memory This is a critical error and you should restart 205 05 localOnlyErr Network activity is currently disabled O o eO rororo sessTableErr PPC Toolbox is unable to create a session 909 badReqErr Bad parameter or invalid state for this operation 910 portNameExistsErr Another port is already open with this name perhaps in another application noMachineNameErr User has not named his Macintosh in the Network Setup Control Panel E 922 noDefaultUserErr User has not specified owner name in Sharing Setup Control Panel notLoggedInErr The default userRefNum does not yet exist 926 nolnformErr PPCStart failed because destination did not have an inform pending p927 27 authFailErr User s password is wrong National Instruments Corporation A 23 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 7 PPC Error Codes Continued badServiceMesthodErr Service method is other than ppcServiceRealTime guestNotAllo
244. ctrum Stimulus National Instruments Corporation 40 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Filter Vis This chapter describes the VIs that implement IIR FIR and nonlinear filters To access the Filters palette select Function Analysis Filters The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Filters palette e Analysis Filters For examples of how to use the Filter VIs see the examples located in examples analysis fltrxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 41 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis Filter VI Descriptions The following Filter VIs are available Bessel Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients to implement an IIR filter as specified by the Bessel filter model You can then pass these coefficients to the IIR Cascade Filter VI filter ty pe sampung er ed te IIF Filter Cluster high cutoff freq th a low cutott freq fl iia order The Bessel Coefficients VI is a subVI of the Bessel Filter VI Bessel Filter Generates a digital Bessel filter using filter type sampling freq fs high cutoff freq fh low cutoff freq fl and order by calling the Bessel Coefficients VI The VI then calls the IIRCascade Filter to filter the X sequence using this model to obtain a Bessel Filtered X sequence filter type Se Filtered 3 sampling freq fs r error high cutoff freq th ae low cutoff freg fl order Inity cont
245. d Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits and scanning order available with your DAQ device National Instruments Corporation 17 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs Al Waveform Scan Acquires the specified number of scans at the specified scan rate and returns all the data acquired You can trigger the acquisition time limit in sec compute trigger and clack no trig coupling amp put contig ne input limiis ne change device chamnels 0 gt number of scans scan rate 1000 scans sec error in ao error iteration init 0 clear acquisition Yes T number of AHUS boards Cro actual sean period sec error out i The AI Waveform Scan VI acquires a specified number of scans from a channel group at a specified scan rate If you place this VI in a loop to take multiple acquisitions from the same group of channels wire the iteration terminal of the loop to the VI iteration input iteration terminal Also wire the condition that terminates the loop to the VI clear acquisition input inverting the signal if necessary so that it reads TRUE on the last iteration On iteration zero this VI calls the AI Config VI to configure the channel group and hardware and allocate a data buffer On each iteration this VI calls the AI Start and AI Read VIs The AI Start VI sets the scan rate and trigger conditions and starts the a
246. d Array Elements Returns TRUE if all the elements in Boolean array are true otherwise it returns FALSE Boolean array ae Pea logical AND Boolean Array To Number Converts Boolean array to an unsigned long integer by interpreting it as the two s complement representation of an integer with the Oth element of the array being the least significant bit Boolean array number Boolean To 0 1 Converts a Boolean value to a word integer 0 and 1 for the input values FALSE and TRUE respectively Boolean isinisisi 1 Compound Arithmetic Performs arithmetic on two or more numeric cluster or Boolean inputs wale sum product value L AMD or OR of walues You choose the operation multiply AND or OR by popping up on the function and selecting Change Mode You can invert the inputs or the output of this function by popping up on the individual terminals and selecting Invert For Add select Invert to negate an input or the output For Multiply select Invert to use the reciprocal of an input or to produce the reciprocal of the output For AND or OR select Invert to logically negate an input or the output Note You add inputs to this node by popping up on an input and selecting Add Input or by placing the Positioning tool in the lower left or right corner of the node and dragging it National Instruments Corporation 5 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 5 Boolean Functions Exclusive Or Com
247. d VIs Many Functions palette chapters include information about function examples G Functions Overview For brief descriptions of each of the eleven G Function and VI palettes available refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs Introduction to Polymorphism The following sections provide some general information about polymorphism in G functions Polymorphism Polymorphism is the ability of a function to adjust to input data of different types or representations Most functions are polymorphic VIs are not polymorphic All functions that take numeric input can accept any numeric LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 2 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview representation except some functions that do not accept complex numbers Functions are polymorphic to varying degrees none some or all of their inputs may be polymorphic Some function inputs accept numbers or Boolean values Some accept numbers or strings Some accept not only scalar numbers but also arrays of numbers clusters of numbers arrays of clusters of numbers and so on Some accept only one dimensional arrays although the array elements may be of any type Some functions accept all types of data including complex numbers Unit Polymorphism If you want to create a VI that computes the root mean square value of a waveform you have to define the unit associated with the waveform You
248. d in This Manial cccc cece ccceccccssecccccecceeescccsesssccseessseeeeseesssseeeess XXVI1 Related Documentations a a a Gea ees xxvii Customer COMMUNIC A Oera a e E a E e a a a a Ta xxviii Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIs locating the G Punctions and VIsSsereni rin a A a a a a l 1 Puncion and VEOVEIVI CWS viiescvsin odie cuss cedarccusdiadsacindliadaatneipelantneaduannamineatiieumcsumiediaciols 1 2 SLU LUG Sn deceit madeline actus Padaa a a 1 2 INUIMETIC PUNCHOMNS 03 atandrci2 T deaubana chun aeateatte 1 3 POO le al ECION S ea EEE uma derddtiaaucnarenised 1 3 SDS PUNC HONS ome E R 1 3 Amay PUN ONS ein a a dawnt eattieaatneanlie 1 3 CUSE FUNC OMS rani E R a casas tuadacden 1 3 Compans Fune UON Seena a case Oia ior rrccmetotheitecewndess 1 4 Time and Dials FUNCOMS xcziss a toscsaca ties a toda diasaceieicinoiaaieaneapieds 1 4 Pile FUNCIONS e cece meenea lone eiat ansaid need aaa Ae 1 4 Advanced PUNCHONS 23 taadactt ante itl detente T T 1 4 NAO ic certctne tiie A TAE esdasentaehed tein deste bea dedencutetsedteds 1 5 strument VO saninin sedis tosis sina ale ndonsiindenioGeliamAlnaenciets 1 5 Commana gisa cade ieee Sarasin ducsotes A S 1 5 ADASI W na st ect canst Ged aniat aed oselebe seus eounndnata ne ienuindcauedenemainannecel Sane 1 5 SS OV eE ated rcs E 1 6 SP UICORT Al sec teatars ata suitdrecletrs had rouicand soame dewaceed a a a 1 6 Instrument Driver LIDAN aiea aT 1 6 User EID aa a T A D 1 6 APPHCAUON C ONTO
249. d left by y x Rotate Left With Carry Rotates each bit in the input value to the left from least significant to most significant bit inserts carry in the low order bit and returns the most significant bit m b carry out valle Rotate Right With Carry Rotates each bit in value to the right from most significant to least significant inserts carry in the high order bit and returns the least significant bit lsb carry out value Split Number Breaks a number into its component bytes or words _ f te lols National Instruments Corporation 13 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions The following illustration shows an example of how to use the Split Number function The function splits the signed 32 bit number 100 000 into the high word component 1 and the low word component 34 464 u32 100000 Swap Bytes Swaps the high order 8 bits and the low order 8 bits for every word in anything bite swapped Swap Words Swaps the high order 16 bits and the low order 16 bits for every long integer in anything word swapped Type Cast Casts x to the datatype type type H eh itype ix Casting data to a string converts it into machine independent big endian form That is the function puts the most significant byte or word first and the least significant byte or word last removes alignment and converts extended precision numbers to 16
250. d notifiers since the last time this VI was called the VI returns immediately with the value s of the old notification s and with timed out FALSE If the ignore previous input is TRUE the VI will wait ms timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If at least one notification is sent timed out will return FALSE If no notification is sent timed out will return TRUE Queue Vis You can use the Queue VIs to pass an ordered sequence of data elements from one task to another separate parallel task In particular you use these VIs when you want one task to wait until another task provides it with some data You can also use these VIs when you want one task to wait until another task has processed some data that the first task has provided The queue VIs differ from the notification VIs in that the data sent is buffered That is if there is no One waiting to read from the queue when an element is inserted the element stays in the queue until it is explicitly removed Also when data is inserted into a queue and there are two VIs waiting to remove it from the queue only one of them receives the data You can access the Queue VIs by selecting Functions Advanced Synchronization Queue x ae ogo 7 ey z B ig BS mie SH CE B The Queue VIs use the Queue RefNum control from the Controls Path amp Refnum palette National Instruments Corporation 13 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13
251. d operations most of the analysis VIs process large blocks of data in the form of 1D arrays or vectors and 2D arrays or matrices Normal lower case letters represent scalars or constants For example a T b 1 234 Capital letters represent arrays For example X A Y aX b In general X and Y denote 1D arrays and A B and C represent matrices Array indexes in LabVIEW are zero based The index of the first element in the array regardless of its dimension is zero The following sequence of numbers represents a 1D array X containing n elements X Xo Xis Xa wens Xn it The following scalar quantity represents the ith element of the sequence X Xe O lt i lt n l LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 37 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW The first element in the sequence is Xo and the last element in the sequence 1S X 1 for a total of n elements The following sequence of numbers represents a 2D array containing n rows and m columns doo Ao 42 Gom 1 Gig Qi An gt A A a Gn An Am 1 Gn 10 n 11 n 2 An 1m 1 The total number of elements in the 2D array is the product of n and m The first index corresponds to the row number and the second index corresponds to the column number The following scalar quantity represents the element located on the i row and the j column aj j 0 lt si lt nandO0sj lt m The first element in A i
252. d the data That header could alternatively be a cluster of acquisition parameters such as arrays of channels and scale factors the scan rate and so forth An Excel worksheet file as opposed to an Excel text file is also a more complicated form of byte stream file because it contains text interspersed with Excel specific formatting data that does not make sense when you read it as text In summary you can make a byte stream file that consists of one each of all of the G datatypes Byte stream files can be created using high level File VIs and low level File VIs and functions A datalog file on the other hand consists of a sequence of identically structured records Like byte stream files the components of a datalog record can be any G datatype The difference is that all the datalog records must be the same type Datalog files can only be created using low level file functions You write a byte stream file typically by appending new strings numbers or arrays of numbers of any length to the file You can also overwrite data anywhere within the file You write a datalog file by appending one record at a time You cannot overwrite the record You read a byte stream file by specifying the byte offset or index and the number of instances of the specified byte stream type you want to read You read a datalog file by specifying the record offset or index and the number of records you want to read You use byte stream files typically for tex
253. de Filter VI for information about cascade form filtering the IIR Filter VI for information on direct form filtering National Instruments Corporation 41 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis Chebyshev Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients to implement an IIR filter as specified by the Chebyshev filter model You can pass these coefficients to the IIR Cluster Filter VI to filter a sequence of data filter type eae ies To IIR Filter Cluster high cutoff freg th S low cutoff treq fl error rippletdBs order The Chebyshev Coefficients VI is a subVI of the Chebyshev Filter VI Chebyshev Filter Generates a digital Chebyshev filter using sampling freq fs low cutoff freq fl high cutoff freq fh ripple order and filter type by calling the Chebyshev Coefficients VI The Chebyshev Filter VI filters the X sequence using this model to obtain a Chebyshev Filtered X sequence by calling the HR Cascade Filter VI filter type a T Filtered sampling freq ts ee high cutoff freg th low cutott freq Tl rippletdB3 order init cont Cinit Fy Convolution For information about Convolution see Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis Elliptic Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients to implement a digital elliptic HR filter You can pass these coeffic
254. de a basic convenient interface with only the most commonly used inputs and outputs For more complex applications you should use the intermediate or advanced level VIs for more functionality and performance Refer to Chapter 23 Easy Digital I O VIs for specific VI information Intermediate Digital 1 0 Vis You can find intermediate level Digital I O VIs in the second and third rows of the Digital I O palette The Intermediate Digital I O VIs are in turn built from the fundamental building block layer called the Advanced Digital I O VIs These VIs offer almost as much power as the advanced level VIs and they conveniently group the advanced level VIs into a tidy logical sequence Refer to Chapter 24 Intermediate Digital I O VIs for specific VI information National Instruments Corporation 14 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis Advanced Digital I O Icon You can access the Advanced Digital I O palette by choosing the Advanced Digital I O icon from the Digital I O palette These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Digital I O VIs Because all these VIs rely on the advanced level VIs you can refer to Chapter 25 Advanced Digital I O VIs for additional information on the inputs and outputs and how they work Locating Digital 1 0 VI Examples Counter VIs
255. de the stop trigger Refer to Table 18 10 parts 2 and 3 to determine the default pin to which you connect your trigger signal On some devices you can specify an alternative source through the trigger source parameter l acquired data l National Instruments Corporation 18 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs In the previous illustration total scans to acquire is 1000 and pretrigger scans to acquire is 900 The stop trigger can come from digital trigger A or an analog trigger trigger or pause condition 1 Trigger on rising edge or slope level 3 7 window size 0 5 With E Series devices if you are using an analog trigger and the analog signal is connected to an analog input channel that channel must be the only channel in the scan list no multiple channel scan allowed This restriction does not apply if you connect the analog signal to PFIO Application Type 3 Pretriggered Acquisition Start and Stop Trigger Application Type 3 is used infrequently Unless you plan to provide both a start trigger and a stop trigger skip this section On MIO devices you can enable both the start trigger and the stop trigger You must call the AI Trigger Config VI twice to do this In this case a digital or analog trigger signal starts the acquisition rather than a software strobe This is a hardware start pretriggered acquisition You provide both the start trigger as des
256. de works the same way as Attribute nodes If you want to add items to the node pop up and select Add Element or click and drag the node to expand the number of items in the node When this node executes properties are handled in the order from top to bottom If an error occurs on one of the properties the node stops at that property and returns an error No further properties are handled The error string reports which property caused the error Remember if the small direction arrow on a property is on the left you are setting the property value If the small direction arrow on the property is on the right you are getting the property value Each property name has a short or long name which can be changed by popping up and selecting Name Format Another name format is no name where only the type is displayed for each property National Instruments Corporation 12 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 12 Quit Stop Application Control Functions dup reference error in no error socal Vicor BOR OUT attribute 1 attribute Bhide Y ee gra I Stops all executing VIs and ends the current session of LabVIEW This function shuts down only LabVIEW the function does not affect other applications The function stops all running VIs the same way the Stop function does quit T Stops the VI in which it executes just as if you clicked the Stop button in the toolbar If you wired the input stop occurs only if
257. dic Random Moize spectral amplitude emor zegd The output array contains all frequencies which can be represented with an integral number of cycles in the requested number of samples Each frequency domain component has a magnitude of spectral amplitude and random phase You can think of the output array of PRN as a summation of sinusoidal signals with the same amplitudes but with random phases The unit of spectral amplitude is the same as the output Periodic Random Noise and is a linear measure of amplitude similar to other signal generation VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 38 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs The VI generates the same periodic random sequence for a given positive seed value The VI does not reseed the random phase generator if seed is negative The output sequence is bounded by an amplitude of spectral amplitude samples You can use PRN to compute the frequency response of a linear system in one time record instead of averaging the frequency response over several time records as you must for nonperiodic random noise sources You do not need to window PRN before performing spectral analysis PRN is self windowing and therefore has no spectral leakage because PRN contains only integral cycle sinusoids Pulse Pattern Generates an array containing a pulse pattern samples Pulse Pattern amplitude mi delay width If the sequence X represent
258. ditional information about this operation Use mode 6 with level gating to measure the pulse width of the selected signal This mode is available only with DAQ STC devices Mode 6 differs from mode 4 in that the measurement of a high low pulse does not begin until the first falling rising edge of the signal after you start the counter If you use unbuffered counting the counter continues to measure pulses until you call the CTR Control VI to read the most recently measured value at which time the counter stops Unbuffered mode 6 counting is illustrated in Figure 28 7 Start Counter Read D Aca TC Figure 28 7 Unbuffered Mode 6 High Pulse Width Measurement National Instruments Corporation 28 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs With buffered mode 6 counting the measured value is stored into the buffer at the end of each pulse as illustrated with Figure 28 8 Call the CTR Buffer Read VI to read the values Figure 28 8 Buffered Mode 6 High Pulse Width Measurement Count on Rising Edge of Source Use mode 7 to measure every phase of the selected signal using buffered counting This mode is available only with DAQ STC devices The count value is stored in the buffer on each low to high and high to low transition Use the CTR Buffer Read VI to read the values To measure period with this mode sum successive pairs of signals To measure phase use every other value LabVIEW igno
259. ds Scanning AT MIO 16 L 16SE 8DI 12 bits L 1 10 Up to 16 AT MIO 16 H 100 500 AT MIO 16D L H 1 2 AT MIO 16D H 4 8 NB MIO 16 16SE 8DI MIO 16 12 L 1 10 10 5 16 Up to 16 NB MIO 16X MIO 16X 16 100 500 Oto 10 MIO 16 MIO 16 H 1 2 Oto 5 Rev G 512 groups of 2 4 8 4 8 and 16 You can determine the limit settings of your device by multiplying the range and the voltage values together For more information on limit settings in LabVIEW refer to Chapter 3 Basic LabVIEW Data Acquisition Concepts in the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Basics Manual 2 Scanning channels in any order The valid channels for the AT MIO 64E 3 in Differential Mode are 0 7 16 23 32 39 and 48 55 The valid channels for the AT MIO 64F 5 in Differential Mode are 0 7 and 16 39 Table B 3 Analog Input Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Part 2 AT MIO 16E 1 SW Pre Post and E 1 1 M DMA interrupts AT MIO 16E 2 Analog on E 1 E 2 E 2 and E 3 500 k AT MIO 64E 3 E 3 E 4 PCI 6110E E 4 250 k AT MIO 16E 10 and PCI 6111E E 10 and DE 10 100 k AT MIO 16DE 10 PCI 6110E and PCI 6111E PCI MIO 16E 1 5M PCI MIO 16XE 10 NEC AI 16E 4 NEC MIO 16E 4 PCI MIO 16E 4 PCI 6110E PCI 6111E All MIO 16XE 50 Devices SW Pre Post 20 k DMA interrupts on NEC AI 16XE 50 DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 AT MIO 16F 5 SW Pre Post 200 k DMA interrupts AT MIO 64F 5 AT MIO 16X SW Pre Post 100 k DMA interrupts AT MIO 16 16
260. e Poke16 Poke32 33 17 VISA Read 33 8 VISA Read STB 33 9 VISA Status Description 33 9 VISA Unlock 33 9 VISA Unmap Address 33 18 VISA Wait On Event 33 11 VISA Write 33 9 Volume Info 11 20 W Wait ms 10 9 Wait at Rendezvous 13 16 Wait for GPIB RQS 34 6 Wait On Notification 13 10 Wait On Notification From Multiple 13 11 Wait On Occurrence 13 20 Wait Until Next ms Multiple 10 10 Wait ms 27 7 WaitSRQ 35 8 While Loop 3 3 White Space 9 10 Write Characters To File 11 11 Write File 11 11 Write Key Boolean 11 24 Write Key Double 11 24 Write Key 132 11 25 Write Key Path 11 25 Write Key String 11 25 Write Key U32 11 26 Write to Digital Line 23 2 Write to Digital Port 23 3 Write To I16 File 11 13 Write To SGL File 11 14 Write To Spreadsheet File 11 12 Y Y i Clip X i 39 19 Y i X i n 39 19 Z Zero Padder 39 20 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual
261. e no chang analog chan amp level 0 0 additional trig parame Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits scanning order triggers and clocks you can use with your National Instruments DAQ device LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 16 4 National Instruments Corporation Analog Input Utility Vis This chapter describes the Analog Input Utility VIs These VIs AI Read One Scan AI Waveform Scan and AI Continuous Scan are single VI solutions to common analog input problems The Analog Input Utility VIs are intermediate level VIs so they rely on the advanced level VIs You can refer to Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs for additional information on the inputs and outputs and how they work You can access the Analog Input Utilities palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Input Analog Input Utilities The icon that you must select to access the Analog Input Utility VIs is on the bottom row of the Analog Input palette as shown below Al Al Al Al HULT FT AULT FT ORME FT OE la F i FT ares E a Al Al Al Al COHFIG 5 5SCAH CLEAR mt o l D L maa Ae Analog Input Utility Vis National Instruments Corporation 17 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs Handling Errors LabVIEW makes error handling easy with the intermediate level Analog Input Utility VIs Each intermedia
262. e A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued badScanListError The scan list is invalid for example you are mixing AMUX 64T channels and onboard channels scanning SCXI channels out of order or have specified a different starting channel for the same SCXI module Also the driver attempts to achieve complicated gain distributions over SCXI channels on the same module by manipulating the scan list and returns this error if it fails userOwnedRsrcError The specified resource is owned by the user and cannot be accessed or modified by the driver unknownDeviceError The specified device is not a National Instruments product or the driver does not support the device for example the driver was released before the device was supported 10402 deviceNotFoundError No device is located in the specified slot or at the specified address 10410 relatedLCGBusyError A related line channel or group is in use if the driver configures the specified line channel or group the configuration data or handshaking lines for the related line channel or group will be disturbed 10412 noGroupAssignError No group is assigned or the specified line or channel cannot be assigned to a group 10413 groupAssignError A group is already assigned or the specified line or channel is already assigned to a group 10414 reservedPinError The selected signal requires a pin that is reserved and configured only by NI DAQ You cannot configure this pin yo
263. e Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 DAQ devices After system startup LabVIEW configures the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 as follows e sample clock drive 0 Sample clock signal does not drive SAMPCLK line e dither 0 Dither disabled A2100 Calibrate Selects the desired calibration reference and performs an offset calibration cycle on the ADCs on the NB A2100 or the NB A2150 device gr device out 4D group referente CAL status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version NI DAQ driver software calibrates the two A D channels using the analog input ground as the reference for each channel when you turn on the computer LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 4 National Instruments Corporation
264. e Elements modes compare arrays in the same manner as strings one element at a time starting with the 0 element until an inequality occurs Character Comparison You can use the functions that compare characters to determine the type of a character The following functions are character comparison functions e Decimal Digit e Hex Digit e Lexical Class e Octal Digit e Printable e White Space If the input is a string the functions test the first character If the input is an empty string the result is FALSE If the input is a number the functions interpret it as a code for an ASCH character See Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages for the numbers that correspond to each ASCII character LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 9 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Polymorphism for Comparison Functions The functions Equal Not Equal and Select take inputs of any type as long as the inputs are the same type The functions Greater or Equal Less or Equal Less Greater Max amp Min and In Range take inputs of any type except complex path or refnum as long as the inputs are the same type You can compare numbers strings Booleans arrays of strings clusters of numbers clusters of strings and so on You cannot however compare a number to a string or a string to a Boolean and so on The functions that compare values to zero accept numeric scalars clust
265. e PREFIX Message Based Template e PREFIX Register Based Template The templates contain the following support VIs e PREFIX Utility Clean Up Initialize e PREFIX Utility Default Instrument Setup They also contain PREFIX VI Tree a VI Example Tree National Instruments Corporation 32 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs Rather than developing your own VIs to accomplish these tasks you can use the LabVIEW instrument driver template VIs which already conform to the LabVIEW standards for instrument drivers The template VIs are IEEE 488 2 compatible and work with IEEE 488 2 instruments with minimal modifications For non EEE 488 2 instruments use the template VIs as a shell or pattern which you can modify by substituting your corresponding instrument specific commands where applicable After modifying the VIs you have the base level driver that implements all of the template instrument driver VIs for your particular instrument Additionally Lab VIEW instrument drivers developed from the template VIs are similar to other instrument drivers in the library Therefore you have a higher level of familiarity and understanding when you work with multiple instrument drivers Instrument Driver Template VI Descriptions The following Instrument Driver Template VIs are available Note To develop your own Instrument Driver VI follow the instructions on the front panel of the Template VI PREFI
266. e VIs open or create a file write or read to it and close it If an error occurs these VIs display a dialog box that describes the problem and gives you the option to halt execution or to continue The high level file VIs are located on the top row of the palette and consist of the following VIs e Binary File VIs located in the subpalette e Read Characters from File e Read from Spreadsheet File e Read Lines from File e Write Characters to File e Write to Spreadsheet File Low Level File Vis and File Functions The low level file VIs and functions perform one file operation at a time These VIs and functions perform error detection in addition to their other functions The most commonly used low level file functions and VIs are located on the second row of the palette The remaining low level functions are located in the Advanced File Functions subpalette The principal low level file operations involve a three step process First you create or open a file Then you write data to the file or read data from the file Finally you close the file Other file operations include creating LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions directories moving copying or deleting files flushing files listing directory contents changing file characteristics and manipulating paths When creating or opening a file you must specify its location Different computers describe
267. e added to make the string easier to read For further information about the Object Support Library consult the AppleEvent Registry obj want type line Brom Ob 4 want type line from Doc Name form test seld logi term cmpd relo OD Tl Apr ODIAZsOD a 4 want type word from exmn form indx seld 1 by cmpd relo Obi is obj2 obj want type word from exmn form indx seld 2 J logc AND by form indx seld 1 National Instruments Corporation 52 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Sending AppleEvents to LabVIEW from Other Applications LabVIEW responds to required AppleEvents which Apple expects all System 7 applications to support and to LabVIEW specific AppleEvents designed specifically for LabVIEW Both categories are described in the following sections Required AppleEvents LabVIEW responds to the required AppleEvents which are Open Application Open Documents Print Documents and Quit Application These events are described in Inside Macintosh Volume VI LabVIEW Specific AppleEvents LabVIEW also responds to the LabVIEW specific AppleEvents Run VI Abort VI VI Active and Close VI With these events and the Open Documents AppleEvent you can use other applications to programmatically tell LabVIEW to open a VI run it and close it when it is finished A thorough understanding of AppleEvents as descri
268. e at the rendezvous during the wait timed out returns FALSE If enough tasks do not arrive or the rendezvous is not valid timed out returns TRUE Semaphore Vis Semaphores also known as Mutex are used to limit the number of tasks that may simultaneously operate on a shared protected resource A protected resource or critical section may include writing to global variables or communicating with external instruments You can use the Semaphore VIs to synchronize two or more separate parallel tasks so that only one task at a time executes a critical section of code protected by a common semaphore In particular you use these VIs when you want other VIs or parts of block diagram to wait until another VI or part of a block diagram is finished with the execution of a critical section You can access the Semaphore VIs by selecting Functions Advanced Synchronization Semaphore LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions The semaphore VIs use the Semaphore RefNum control from the Controls Path amp Refnum palette The Semaphore RefNum can be used with the following VIs Acquire Semaphore Acquires access to a semaphore semaphore semaphore out mz timeout 1 timed out error in no error error out If the semaphore is already acquired by the maximum number of tasks the VI waits timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If t
269. e before reading from it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to read a spreadsheet file saved in text format This VI calls the Spreadsheet String to Array function to convert the data format 7 3f new file path Mot 4 Path i file path dialog if empty all rows number of rows all 1 first row t chars 2 mark after read chars row no lim transpose no F Read Lines From File Reads a specified number of lines from a byte stream file beginning at a specified character offset The VI opens the file before reading from it and closes it afterwards file path dialog if empty new file path Not A Path i number of lines Call 1 n line string start of read offset chars mark after read chars mas characters per line ienne EOF LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Strip Path Returns the name of the last component of a path and the stripped path that leads to that component stripped path path alg name Write Characters To File Writes a character string to a new byte stream file or appends the string to an existing file The VI opens or creates the file before writing to it and closes it afterwards file path dialog if empty new file path Not A Path if cancelled character string append to file new file F Write File Writes data to the file specified by refnum Writing
270. e current zone Search entire network must be FALSE A specific zone Zone must specify the zone to be searched Server must be unwired Search entire network must be FALSE The entire network Search entire network must be TRUE The VI ignores Zone and Server PPC Browser Invokes the PPC Browser dialog box for selecting an application on a network or on the same computer location NBF type prompt selected target ID Application lst label default specified default target ID EFF OF National Instruments Corporation 52 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs You can use this standard Macintosh dialog box to select a zone from the network an object in that zone in System 7 this is typically the name of a person s computer and an application The VI then returns the target ID cluster Prompt Application List Label Macintoshes bowlorama File Sharing Extension Finder L Gregg s Mac aby lew AppleTalk Zones z ist amp 2nd Floors fn oe ard Floor 4th Floor Sth floor Phase AppleEvent VI Descriptions The following AppleEvent VIs are available Cancel AESend Do Script Sends the Do Script AppleEvent to a specified target application Script error string target ID i send options error AESend Finder Open Sends the AppleEvent to open specified applications or documents to the System 7 Finder on the specified machine Full path of fo
271. e following table lists the valid entries for specifying address space Address the A16 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A24 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A32 address space of the VXI MXI bus VISA Memory Allocation For information about the VISA Memory Allocation function see the High Level Register Access Functions section of this chapter VISA Memory Free For information about the VISA Memory Free function see the High Level Register Access Functions section of this chapter VISA Peek8 Peek16 Peek32 Reads an 8 bit 16 bit or 32 bit value respectively from the address location specified in offset The address must be a valid memory address in the current process mapped by a previous VISA Map Address function call YISA session dup VISA session offset 0 value eror in no eror eror out bis Lice ql visa Peek 16 Visa Peek 32 4 VISA Poke Poke16 Poke32 Writes an 8 bit 16 bit or 32 bit value respectively to the specified address and stores the content of the value to the address pointed to by offset The address must be a valid memory address in the current process mapped by a previous VISA Map Address function call YISA session dup VISA session offset 0 value 0 error out error in no error emy visa Poke 16 Visa Poke a2 32mm National Instruments Corporation 33 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Refe
272. e nonzero and either all positive or all negative 20037 SizeGTOrderErr The number of data points in the Y Values array must be greater than two 2 20038 038 IntervalsErr The number of intervals must be greater than zero 20039 MatrixMulErr The number of columns in the first matrix is not equal to the number of rows in the second matrix or vector 2 20040 040 SquareMatrixErr The input matrix must be a square matrix National Instruments Corporation A 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 3 Analysis Error Codes Continued 20041 The system of equations cannot be solved because the input matrix is singular 20042 The number of levels is out of range 20043 The level of factors is out of range for some data 20044 Zero observations were made at some level of a factor 20045 DataErr The total number of data points must be equal to the product of the levels for each factor and the observations per cell 20046 There is an overflow in the calculated F value 20047 BalanceErr The data is unbalanced All cells must contain the same number of observations ModelErr The Random Effect model was requested when the Fixed Effect model was required PoleErr The interpolating function has a pole at the requested value All values in the first column in the X matrix must be 1 The degrees of freedom must be one or more ProbabilityErr The probability must be between zero and one
273. e number of elements in the output sequence Rxx is 2n 1 Because you cannot use negative numbers to index LabVIEW arrays the corresponding correlation value at t 0 is the n element of the output sequence Rxx Therefore Rxx represents the correlation values that the VI shifted n times in indexing The following block diagram shows one way to display the correct indexing for the autocorrelation function LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS Samples AuUtoCorrelation Complex FFT Computes the Fourier transform of the input sequence X You can use this VI to perform an FFT on an array of complex numeric representations If Y represents the complex output sequence then Y F X You also can use this VI to perform the following operations when X has one of the complex LabVIEW data types e The FFT of a complex valued sequence X e The DFT of a complex valued sequence X National Instruments Corporation 39 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS This VI first analyzes the input data and based on this analysis it calculates the Fourier transform of the data by executing one of the preceding options All these routines take advantage of the concurrent processing capabilities of the CPU and FPU When the number of samples in the input sequence X is a valid power of 2 n 2 for m 5 2 3
274. e number of seconds that have elapsed since 12 00 a m Friday January 1 1904 Universal Time seconds since Idan 304 Get Date Time String Converts a time zone independent number calculated to be the number of seconds that have elapsed since 12 00 a m Friday January 1 1904 Universal Time to a date and time string in the configured time zone for your computer date format 0 date string seconds nov want seconds F time string One Button Dialog Box Displays a dialog box that contains a message and a single button The button name control is the name displayed on the dialog box button me age L Ebbe e Py Dutton name UF LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 10 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Seconds To Date Time Converts a time zone independent number calculated to be the number of seconds that have elapsed since 12 00 a m Friday January 1 1904 Universal Time to a cluster of nine signed 32 bit integers that specify the local time second minute hour day of the month month year day of the week day of the year and Standard or Daylight Savings Time in the configured time zone for your computer The Standard or Daylight Savings time parameter is set according to the operating system setting for Daylight Savings and indicates whether the date time cluster was adjusted due to Daylight Savings Time seconds nov date time rec
275. e of objects with two object specifiers the start and the end of the range AECreate Descriptor List Creates a string describing a list of AppleEvent descriptors which you can then use with the AESend VI You commonly use Descriptor lists when you create the operands for a logical descriptor Array of AE Descriptors back HE Descriptor List List AECreate Record Creates a string describing an AppleEvent descriptor record which can then be used with the AESend VI You can use a record descriptor to bundle descriptors of different types Each descriptor has its own keyword or name and value ty oe ETA ee Create 4E Record keywords and values sen Record National Instruments Corporation 52 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Object Support VI Example The following example creates an AppleEvent parameter using the object support VIs This example creates an AppleEvent parameter to be sent to a word processor instructing the word processor to return the first line of a specified document with the first word April and the second word is Desi cond 1 AMC tines of Doc Mame that meet first line of partial cond 1 AND cond 2 gt partial Parameters T create AET Deter oO List LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis The following string that the previous diagram creates is quite complicated tabs ar
276. e output sequence Decimated Array Deconvolution Computes the deconvolution of the input sequences X Y and Y The VI can use Fourier identities to realize the convolution operation because x t y t X f Y is a Fourier transform pair where the symbol x denotes convolution and the deconvolution is the inverse of the convolution operation If A t is the signal resulting from the deconvolution of the signals x t and y t the VI obtains A t using the equation where X f is the Fourier transform of x t and Y f is the Fourier transform of y t The VI performs the discrete implementation of the deconvolution using the following steps 1 Compute the Fourier transform of the input sequence X Y 2 Compute the Fourier transform of the input sequence Y 3 Divide the Fourier transform of X Y by the Fourier transform of Y Call the new sequence H 4 Compute the inverse Fourier transform of H to obtain the deconvoluted sequence X Note The deconvolution operation is a numerically unstable operation and it is not always possible to solve the system numerically Computing the deconvolution via National Instruments Corporation 39 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS FFTs is perhaps the most stable generic algorithm not requiring sophisticated DSP techniques However it is not free of errors for example when there are zeros in the Fourier transform of the input sequence
277. e quality products to meet your needs Title LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Edition Date January 1998 Part Number 321526B 01 Please comment on the completeness clarity and organization of the manual If you find errors in the manual please record the page numbers and describe the errors Thank you for your help Name Title Company Address E Mail Address Phone ___ Fax ___ Mail to Technical Publications Fax to Technical Publications National Instruments Corporation National Instruments Corporation 6504 Bridge Point Parkway 512 794 5678 Austin Texas 78730 5039 Index Numbers Symbols 1200 Calibrate 29 2 1D ANOVA 44 2 1D Linear Evaluation 46 2 1D Polar To Rectangular 46 2 1D Polynomial Evaluation 46 2 1D Rectangular To Polar 46 3 2D ANOVA 44 3 2D Linear Evaluation 46 3 2D Polynomial Evaluation 46 4 3D ANOVA 44 4 A A x B 45 2 A x Vector 45 2 A2000 Calibrate 29 3 A2000 Configure 29 4 A2100 Calibrate 29 4 A2100 Config 29 5 A2150 Calibrate Macintosh 29 6 A2150 Config 29 5 AC amp DC Estimator 40 2 Access Rights 11 14 Acquire Semaphore 13 17 ActiveX Variant to G Data 51 4 Additional User Definable Constants 4 21 Adjacent Counters 27 2 AECreate Comp Descriptor 52 14 AECreate Descriptor List 52 15 AECreate Logical Descriptor 52 14 AECreate Object Specifier 52 14 AECreate Range Descriptor 52 15 AECreate Record 52 15 AESend 52 13
278. e scan backlog output tells you how much data acquired by the VI but remains unread If the backlog increases steadily your new data may eventually overwrite old data Retrieve data more often or adjust the buffer size the scan rate or the number of scans to read to fix this problem Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits and scanning order you can use with your National Instruments DAQ device Al Read One Scan Measures the signals on the specified channels and returns the measurements in an array of scaled or binary values coupling amp input config no change 0 input limits no change f F P AH output units sealed 1 Bl binary data error 1h Lho error error out iteration Cinit 0 number of AMUS boards 0 i The AI Read One Scan VI performs an immediate measurement of a group of one or more channels If you place the VI in a loop to take multiple measurements from a group of channels wire the loop iteration terminal to the VI iteration parameter iteration terminal On iteration 0 this VI calls the AI Config VI to configure the channel group and hardware then calls the AI Single Scan VI to measure and report the results On subsequent iterations the VI avoids unnecessary configuration and calls only the AI Single Scan VI If you call the AI Read One Scan VI once to take a single measurement from the group of channels the iteration parameter can remain unwire
279. e that does not allow it to run kLVE_FPNotOpen 1001 The VI front panel is not open kLVE_CtrlErr 1002 The VI has controls on its front panel that are in an error state kLVE_VIBad 1003 The VI is broken kLVE_Not InMem 1004 The VI is not in memory National Instruments Corporation 52 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Event Abort VI Description Tells LabVIEW to abort the specified VI s Before executing this event the LabVIEW application must be running and the VI must be open you can open the VI using the Open Documents AppleEvent This message can only be sent to VIs that are executed from the top level subVIs are aborted only if the calling VI is aborted Event Class LBVW Custom events use the Applications creator type for the event class Event ID RsVI Event Parameters Vior List of VIs keyDirectObject typeChar char required or list of typeChar list Reply Parameters Required Description Keyword Default Type C a Possible Errors kLVE_ Ee a ate Er 000 areca ire arena VI is in a State that does not allow it to run 1001 The VI front panel is not open 1004 The VI is not in memory LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 20 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis Event VI Active Description Requests information on whether a specific VI is currently running Before executing th
280. e the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Utilities in LabVIEW For more information on this VI refer to your LabVIEW User Manual Intermediate Counter VI Descriptions The following Intermediate Counter VIs are available Adjacent Counters Identifies the counters logically adjacent to a specified counter of an MIO or TIO device It also returns the counter size number of bits and the timebases timebases counter device g counter i counter 717 iu counter 1 counter DE counter i counter 1 counter counter size bits Devices with the Am9513 chip have one or two sets of five 16 bit counters 1 5 6 10 that can be connected in a circular fashion For example the next higher counter to counter 1 called counter 1 is 2 and the next lower one called counter 1 is 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 27 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Continuous Pulse Generator Config Configures a counter to generate a continuous TTL pulse train on its OUT pin gate mode Cungated 0 device FILS task ID counter actual frequency HZ1 pulse polarity Chigh 0 pg tl ag actual duty cycle error in no error error out frequency Hz duty cycle 0 5 The signal is created by repeatedly decrementing the counter twice first for the delay to the
281. e transfers When you write analog input data to DSP memory you can write the data as unscaled 16 bit integers unscaled 32C floating point numbers or scaled 32C floating point voltages You can use the demux option only when you write analog input data to DSP memory When you National Instruments Corporation 29 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS enable demux the device writes data from channel 0 consecutively into DSP memory beginning at the start of each buffer and writes channel data consecutively beginning at the half way point of each buffer When the device writes analog input data to PC memory it can write the data as unscaled 16 bit integers unscaled IEEE single precision floating point numbers or scaled IEEE single precision voltages If aotranslate is 0 the source data must be in a format suitable for the DACs 16 bit integer DAC values If aotranslate is 1 or 3 the source data are DAC values in 32C format in DSP memory or in IEEE single precision format in PC memory If aotranslate is 2 or 4 the source data are voltages in 32C format in DSP memory or in IEEE single precision format in PC memory E Series Calibrate Use this VI to calibrate your E Series device and to select a set of calibration constants to be used by LabVIEW task ID task ID out operation calibration constants pam error out error in no error reference voltage tp Warning Read the calib
282. each bit describes a state of the GPIB Controller If an error occurs the GPIB functions set bit 15 GPIB error is valid only if bit 15 of status is set error in error out See the GPIB Traditional Function Parameters section of Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions GPIB 488 2 Function Descriptions Single Device Functions DevClear Clears a single device To send the Selected Device Clear SDC message to several GPIB devices use the DevClearList function PPollConfig Single device functions perform GPIB I O and control operations with a single GPIB device In general each function accepts a single device address as one of its inputs Configures a device for parallel polls shatus addres error out dataline LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 35 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 35 PassControl Passes control to another device with Controller capability shatus address eror out Bor in ReadStatus Serial polls a single device to get its status byte seal poll response status error out Receive Reads data bytes from a GPIB device bus data string address tatus mode byte count count w gor out error in Receive terminates when the function does one of the following e reads the number of bytes requested e detects an error e exceeds the time limit e detects the END message EOI asserted GPIB 488 2 Functions e detects the EOS char
283. econds since last call startfrestart F may ne l stop F nol T Fs To count events set event source timebase to 0 0 and connect the signal you want to count to the SOURCE pin of the counter To count time set this control to the timebase frequency you want to use Generate Delayed Pulse Configures and starts a counter to generate a single pulse with the specified delay and pulse width on the counter s OUT pin A single pulse consists of a delay phase phase 1 followed by a pulse phase phase 2 and then a return to the phase 1 level If an internal timebase is chosen the VI selects the highest resolution timebase for the counter to achieve the desired characteristics If an external timebase signal is chosen the user indicates the delay and width as cycles of that signal Execute the Counter Start VI with this VI s taskID to generate another pulse You can optionally gate or trigger the pulse with a signal on the counter s GATE pin timebase source internal 0 gate mode Cungated 0 device task IB counter E actual delay s or cycles pulse polarity Chigh 0 actual width s or cycles pulse delay s or cycles pulse width s or cycles LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 26 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs Generate Pulse Train Configures the specified counter to generate a continuous pulse train on the counter s OUT pin or to generate a finite length pulse trai
284. ect the hypothesis National Instruments Corporation 44 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs erf x Evaluates the error function at the input value erfc x Evaluates the complementary error function at the input value ertcls F Distribution Computes the one sided probability p of the F distributed random variable F with the specified n and m degrees of freedom F probability Dist error p Prob ae x where F is F distributed p is the probability n specifies the first degree of freedom m specifies the second degree of freedom and x is the value General Histogram Finds the discrete histogram of the input sequence X based on the given bin specifications a Hi Histogram Bins m ae ATS max foo FF outside min error bins inclusion LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis The VI obtains Histogram as follows First the VI establishes all the intervals also called bins based on the information in the input array Bins The intervals bins are Aj Bins i lower Bins i upper i 0 1 2 A 1 where Bins 7 lower is the value lower in the ith cluster of array Bins Bins 7 upper is the value upper in the ith cluster of array Bins k is the number of elements in Bins which consists of the number of total intervals bins Whether the two ending
285. ection reinum refnum out key found error in ho eror oe Remove Section Removes a section from the configuration data identified by refnum sector refnum refnum out l i found eror in no error w Bor out Write Key Boolean Writes a Boolean value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If Key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds the key value pair to the end of the specified section If section does not exist the VI adds section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data refnum out eror in fno errar Write Key Double Writes a 64 bit floating point number value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds the key value pair to the end of the specified section If section does not exist the VI adds the section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data refnum out emor out emor in mo errar LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 24 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Write Key 132 Writes a 32 bit signed integer value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds t
286. ectively starts the acquisition digital trigger B is illegal You provide a start trigger Refer to Table 18 10 parts 2 and 3 to determine the default pin to which you connect your trigger signal On some devices you can specify an alternative source through the trigger source parameter LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs With E Series devices if you are using an analog trigger and the analog signal is connected to one of the analog input channels that channel must be first in the scan list This restriction does not apply if you connect the analog signal to PFIO acquired data I In the above illustration total scans to acquire is 1000 and pretrigger scans to acquire is 0 The start trigger can come from digital trigger A or an analog trigger trigger or pause condition 1 Trigger on a rising edge or slope level 5 5 window size 0 2 Application Type 2 Pretriggered Acquisition For All Trigger Types If total scans to acquire and pretrigger scans to acquire are both gt 0 a trigger type of 1 or 2 analog trigger or digital trigger A respectively starts the acquisition of posttrigger data after the pretrigger data is acquired The trigger is called a stop trigger because the acquisition does not stop until the trigger occurs A software strobe starts the acquisition This is a software start pretrigger acquisition You provi
287. eeeeree 11 4 Error VO m Fie VO Funcions isene orroe E naa 11 5 PST S STO ING sig e E T E unico oo esoacuseee 11 5 File VO Function and Vl Desem pi OMs serioa O ENN aiai 11 6 Binary Pile VI Descr pros xajavicssceisawasene no aveat shar tawensees eacuanen E a ae 11 12 Advanced File Function Descriptions osuisi noreo a E Aana 11 14 OMe Ura Om Fie WIS 525s ta a secunsia tons sad ouidescin esaienadead babieesniieanman euatlawedialecleantnceoaeintaiest 11 20 Pale Constants Descriptio Sasse gat sti taccdecaatradaaxinaseaenmncnnecswetecsa a 11 26 Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Application Control Punic tlONs wx s1 5 105 5050 ts a S 12 2 Help Funcion Descriptions saas a n a labors unssiackasanien 12 7 Menu PUN CUO S ehai E A S nell 12 8 Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Advanced Function Descriptions sessseesssesssssssesssssssssssssssessssssssesesseeceseerresrrereereeseereseee 13 2 Data Manipulation Function Descriptions sssseeesseererrereresrersssssssssssnssssssssssssssssees 13 4 Memory VIL Desi p MOUS ics si cco horse eocessanessatessaressntarsansses anes E EE 13 7 SIC MEOMIZ ATOM VIS io cis te cheotiias Bsa tities wn one pads os ieunecuac a dames eam tonied eat acaameen teats 13 8 IN OUIITC AUTOM NEIS oo222 255 ae cs seats co aaeaeacanaces E A ott nsausase cage ieceaey 13 8 CVU US V Dena seats apa abeaes aeaeaica casa bose nen eae eee eee 13 11 RCC Ay OU cate eases A E E AE NENO 13 14 LabVIEW Function and VI
288. eet in your lab device user manual for details on these modes and their associated timing diagrams Pulse Width or Period Meas Config Configures the specified counter to measure the pulse width or period of a TTL signal connected to its GATE pin timebase Hz device counter type of measurement high p error in no error The measurement is done by counting the number of cycles of the specified timebase between the appropriate starting and ending events To accurately measure pulse width the pulse must occur after counter is started Call the Counter Start VI to start the operation You can also use this VI to measure the frequency of low frequency signals For more accurate measurements use a faster timebase Wait ms Calls the Wait ms function only if no input error exists milliseconds to wait millisecond timer value seconds ta wait unused 0 f gt second timer walue error in no error error out This VI is useful when you want to wait between calls to I O subVIs that use the error I O mechanism without it you need to use a Sequence Structure to control the execution order National Instruments Corporation 27 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Advanced Counter Vis This chapter describes the VIs that configure and control hardware counters You can use these VIs to generate variable duty cycle square waves to count events or time and to measure periods and frequencies You can access t
289. els in the group have channel list is empty lower input limit 0 1 0 upper input limit 0 1 0 Group channel scan list 1 3 4 5 7 channel list is empty lower input limit 0 1 0 upper input limit 0 1 0 lower input limit 1 0 0 upper input limit 1 5 0 lower input limit 2 10 0 upper input limit 2 10 0 Group channel scan list 1 3 4 5 7 channel list 0 1 channel list 1 3 5 lower input limit 0 1 0 upper input limit 0 1 0 input limits of 1 0 to 1 0 Channel has input limits of 1 0 to 1 0 Channel 3 has input limits 0 0 to 5 0 Channels 4 5 and 7 have input limits of 10 0 to 10 0 Channels 1 3 4 and 5 have input limits of 1 0 to 1 0 Channel 7 has the default input limits set by the configuration utility It is unchanged because Advanced Analog Input VIs it is not listed in channel list Channel Group channel scan list 1 3 4 5 7 Channel 1 has input limits of channel list 0 1 1 0 to 1 0 Channels 3 4 channel list 1 3 5 and 5 have input limits of 0 0 lower input limit 0 1 0 to 5 0 Channel 7 has the upper input limit 0 1 0 default input limits set by the lower input limit 1 0 0 configuration utility upper input limit 1 5 0 Group Group channel scan list 0 1 0 1 channel list is empty lower input limit 0 1 0 upper input limit 0 1 0 lower input limit 1 1 0 upper
290. em pop up on the constant and choose Add Item Before or Add Item After The value of the Ring constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant Conversion Functions Descriptions The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Conversion subpalette He 1132 1032 JSGL JDBL JEXT JGSG JCOE IGHT The following functions convert a numeric input into a specific representation e To Byte Integer e To Double Precision Complex e To Double Precision Float e To Extended Complex e To Extended Precision Float e To Long Integer e To Single Precision Complex e To Single Precision Float e To Unsigned Byte Integer e To Unsigned Word Integer e To Unsigned Long Integer e To Word Integer National Instruments Corporation 4 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions When these functions convert a floating point number to an integer they round the output to the nearest integer or the nearest even integer if the fractional part is 0 5 If the result is out of range for the integer these functions return the minimum or maximum value for the integer type When these functions convert an integer to a smaller integer they copy the least significant bits without checking for overflow When they convert an integer to a larger integer they extend the sign of a signed integer and pad an unsigned integer with zeros Use caution when you conv
291. ence PXI Instr VXI GPIB VXI VME MemAcc Note The Generic Event Service Request Event Trigger Event VXI Signal Event VXI VME Interrupt Event and Resource Manager classes can only be passed in as a VISA session with the VISA Close function and the VISA Property Node National Instruments Corporation VISA functions vary in the class of VISA session that can be wired to them The valid classes for each function are indicated in the documentation For example the functions on the High Level Register Access and Low Level Register Access palettes do not accept VISA sessions of class GPIB Instr or Serial Instr If you wire VISA session to a function that does not accept the class of the session or if you wire two VISA sessions of differing classes together your diagram will be broken and the error will be reported as a Class Conflict error in and error out terminals comprise the error clusters in each VISA function An error cluster contains three fields The status field is a Boolean that is TRUE when an error occurs and FALSE when no error occurs code field is a VISA error code value if an error occurs during a VISA function Appendix A Error Codes lists the VISA Reference Library error codes source field is a string that describes where the error has occurred By wiring the error out of each function to the error in of the next function the first error condition is recorded and propagated to the end of the diagram where it
292. ence Manual 13 20 National Instruments Corporation Data Acquisition Vis Part II Data Aquisition VIs introduces the collection of VIs that work with your data aquisition DAQ hardware devices This part contains the following chapters Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs contains basic information about the data acquisition DAQ VIs and shows where you can find them in LabVIEW Chapter 15 Easy Analog Input VIs describes the Easy Analog Input VIs which perform simple analog input operations Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs describes the Intermediate Analog Input VIs Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs describes the Analog Input Utility VIs These VIs AI Read One Scan AI Waveform Scan and AI Continuous Scan are single VI solutions to common analog input problems The Analog Input Utility VIs are intermediate level VIs so they rely on the advanced level VIs Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs contains reference descriptions of the Advanced Analog Input VIs These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Analog Input VIs Chapter 19 Easy Analog Output VIs describes the Easy Analog Output VIs in LabVIEW which perform simple analog output operations Chapter 20 Intermediate Analog Output VIs describes the Intermediate Analog Output VIs These VIs AO Write One Update AO Waveform Gen and AO Continuous
293. ension installed for the Call Library Function node to operate This node supports a large number of datatypes and calling conventions You can use it to call functions from most standard and custom made libraries The Call Library Function node shown in the following illustration looks similar to a Code Interface node return value param 1 new value of param 1 param z a new value of param 2 The Call Library Function consists of paired input output terminals with input on the left and output on the right You can use one or both The return value for the function is returned in the right terminal of the top pair of terminals of the node If there is no return value then this pair of terminals is unused Each additional pair of terminals corresponds to a parameter in the functions parameter list You pass a value to the function by wiring to the left terminal of a terminal pair You read the value of a parameter after the function call by wiring from the right terminal of a terminal pair If you select Configure from the pop up menu of the node you see a Call Library Function dialog box from which you can specify the library name or path function name calling conventions parameters and return value for the node When you click on OK the node automatically increases in size to have the correct number of terminals It then sets the terminals to the correct datatypes For more information on Call Library Function refer to Chapter 2
294. ent rising or falling edges of a TTL signal connected to counter s GATE pin The method used gates an internal timebase clock with the signal being measured This VI is useful in measuring the period or frequency 1 period of relatively low frequency signals when many timebase cycles occur during the gate Use the Measure Frequency VI to measure the period or frequency of relatively high frequency signals time limit Lcomputed 1 count device gt pulse width period s counter ype of measurement hee gounter overflow icaw atone wmaitnmiins timeout The VI iterates until a valid measurement timeout or counter overflow occurs A valid measurement exists when count 4 without a counter overflow If counter overflow occurs lower timebase If you start a pulse width measurement during the phase you want to measure you get an incorrect low measurement Therefore make sure the pulse does not occur until after counter is started This restriction does not apply to period measurements LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 26 4 National Instruments Corporation Intermediate Counter Vis This chapter describes Intermediate Counter VIs you can use to program counters on MIO TIO and other devices with the DAQ STC or Am9513 counter chips These VIs call the Advanced Counter VIs to configure the counters for common operations and to start read and stop the counters You can configure these VIs to generate single pulses and
295. er e Array of one input is a numeric array the other is the numeric type itself and the output is an array For similar inputs G performs the function on the respective elements of the structures For example G can add two arrays element by element Both arrays must have the same dimensionality You can add arrays with differing numbers of elements the output of such an addition has the same number of elements as the smallest input Clusters also must have the same number of elements and the respective elements must have the same Structure You cannot use the multiply function to do matrix multiplication If you use the multiply function with two matrices G takes the first number in the first row of the first matrix multiplies it by the first number in the first row of the second matrix and so on LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions For operations involving a scalar and an array or cluster G performs the function on the scalar and the respective elements of the structure For example G can subtract a number from all elements of an array regardless of the dimensionality of the array For operations that involve a numeric type and an array of that type G performs the function on each array element For example a graph is an array of points and a point is a cluster of two numeric types x and y To offset a graph by 5 units in the x direction and 8 un
296. er 41 Filter Vis r pass stop Figure 41 1 Lowpass Filter a re ee ee ee Tstop pass Figure 41 2 Highpass Filter Figure 41 3 Bandpass Filter LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis Figure 41 4 Bandstop Filter FIR Narrowband Filter Filters the input sequence X using the IFIR filter specified by IFIR Coefficients as designed by the FIR Narrowband Filter Coefficients VI as Filtered s FIR Coefficients FIR Windowed Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients you need to implement a FIR windowed filter filter type sampling freq fs 2 FIA Windowed Coetticients high cutoff freq fh Ee low cutoff freg Fl taps window Erol FIR Windowed Filter Filters the input data sequence X using the set of windowed FIR filter coefficients specified by sampling freq fs low cutoff freq fl high cutoff freq fh and number of taps filter type ka sampling freq fs Te Filtered Data low cutoff freg fl eror high cutoff freg th taps window National Instruments Corporation 41 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis IIR Cascade Filter Filters the input sequence X using the cascade form of the IIR filter specified by the IIR Filter Cluster Filtered s NWA Filter Cluster Inity corit init F This IIR implementation is called cascade because it is a cascade of
297. er row or column respectively Note The numerical implementation of the matrix inversion is not only numerically intensive but because of its recursive nature is also highly sensitive to round off errors introduced by the floating point numeric coprocessor Although the computations use the maximum possible accuracy the VI cannot always solve for the system You cannot always determine beforehand whether the matrix is singular especially with large systems The Inverse Matrix VI detects singular matrices and returns an error so you do not need to verify whether you have a valid system before using this VI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs LU Factorization Performs the LU factorization of a real square matrix A LU factorization factors the square matrix A into two triangular matrices One is a lower triangular matrix L with ones on the diagonal The other is an upper triangular matrix U so that PA LU where P is a permutation matrix which serves as the identity matrix with some rows exchanged Factorization serves as a key step for inverting a matrix computing the determinant of a matrix and solving a linear equation Matrix Condition Number Computes the condition number of a real matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix condition number norm type Be error The condition number of a matrix measures the sensitivity of a system solu
298. er than 1 the result is NaN Inverse Tangent Computes the arctangent of x in radians which can be between 2 2 and 7 2 Inverse Tangent 2 Input Computes the arctangent of y x in radians This function can compute the arctangent for angles in any of the four quadrants of the x y plane whereas the Inverse Tangent function computes the arctangent in only two quadrants atari Secant Computes the secant of x where x is in radians LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Sinc Computes the sine of x divided by x where x is in radians x zinis Sine Computes the sine of x where x is in radians Sine amp Cosine Computes both the sine and cosine of x where x is in radians Use this function only when you need both results Tangent Computes the tangent of x where x is in radians Logarithmic Functions Descriptions The following illustration shows the options for the Logarithmic subpalette gt Logarithmic National Instruments Corporation 4 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Exponential Computes the value of e raised to the x power enpi Exponential Arg 1 Computes 1 less than the value of e raised to the x power When x is very small this function is more accurate than using the Exponential function then subtracting 1 from the output emplis 1
299. ere com as your password The support files and documents are located in the support directories National Instruments Corporation D 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Fax on Demand Support Fax on Demand is a 24 hour information retrieval system containing a library of documents on a wide range of technical information You can access Fax on Demand from a touch tone telephone at 512 418 1111 E Mail Support Currently USA Only You can submit technical support questions to the applications engineering team through e mail at the Internet address listed below Remember to include your name address and phone number so we can contact you with solutions and suggestions support natinst com Telephone and Fax Support National Instruments has branch offices all over the world Use the list below to find the technical support number for your country If there is no National Instruments office in your country contact the source from which you purchased your software to obtain support Country Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada Ontario Canada Quebec Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong Israel Italy Japan Korea Mexico Netherlands Norway Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom United States Telephone 03 9879 5166 0662 45 79 90 0 02 757 00 20 O11 288 3336 905 785 0085 514 694 8521 45 76 26 00 09 725 725 11 01 48 14 24 24 089 741 31 30 2645 3186 03 612009
300. erence Manual 37 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW The Analysis VIs use in place data processing algorithms That is the algorithms allocate minimal data space and process the data within that space In place processing minimizes memory requirements so you can process larger data blocks The only memory limitation for these VIs is the amount of RAM available in your computer Refer to your LabVIEW User Manual for instructions on configuring the memory allocation for LabVIEW The analysis VIs are powerful enough for experts to build sophisticated analysis applications quickly and efficiently At the same time they are simple enough for novices to analyze data without being expert programmers in DSP digital filters statistics or numerical analysis Analysis VI Organization After installation the ten analysis VI libraries appear in the Functions palette The Analysis palette includes the following subpalettes e Signal Generation contains VIs that generate digital patterns and waveforms e Digital Signal Processing contains VIs that perform frequency domain transformations frequency domain analysis time domain analysis and other transforms such as the Hartley and Hilbert transforms e Measurement contains VIs that perform measurement oriented functions such as single sided spectrums scaled windowing and peak power and frequency estimation e Filters contains VIs that perfor
301. ermines the pattern and data types of this connector pane You should wire to these terminals just as you would to a normal subVI As long as none of the terminals of the connector pane have wires attached to them the connector pane adapts automatically to the connector pane of the input VI reference However if any of them are wired the node does not adapt automatically and you must explicitly change the connector pane possibly breaking those wires by popping up on the node and selecting the Adapt To Reference Input menu item At run time there is a small amount of overhead in calling the VI that is not necessary in a normal subVI call This overhead comes from validating the VI reference and a few other details However for a call to a VI in the local LabVIEW this overhead should be insignificant for all but the smallest subVIs Calling a VI located in another LabVIEW application across the network involves considerably more overhead The reference input determines the VI that is called by the Call by Reference node reference dup reference error in no error mee EPR OUT LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Call Chain Returns a reference to a LabVIEW application or a VI call chain Close Application or VI Reference Closes an open VI or the TCP connection to an open copy of LabVIEW application or vi reference error in no er
302. erpolated value of Wave Table int x and Wave Table int x 1 modulo m phase i initial_phase f 360 0 7 where f is the frequency in normalized units of cycles sample initial_phase is phase in if reset phase is true or initial_phase is the phase out from the previous execution of this VI if reset phase is false The VI is reentrant so you can use it to simulate a continuous acquisition from an arbitrary wave function generator If the input control reset phase is false subsequent calls to a specific instance of this VI produce the output Arbitrary Wave array containing the next samples of the arbitrary wave phase out is set to phase n and this reentrant VI uses this value as its new phase in if reset phase is false the next time the VI executes LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 38 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs Chirp Pattern Generates an array containing a chirp pattern samples Chirp Pattern amplitude f If the sequence Y represents Chirp Pattern the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y A sin a 2 i b i for i 0 1 2 n 1 where A is amplitude a 27 f2 f1 n b 27f1 f1 is the beginning frequency in normalized units of cycles sample f2 is the ending frequency in normalized units of cycles sample and n is the number of samples Gaussian White Noise Generates a Gaussian distributed pseudorandom pattern whose st
303. error in Eno error error out Get Queue Status Returns current status information of queue queue size name queue queve out return elements LF pending to remove error in no error Pa pending ta insert error out slemets in queue elements Insert Queue Element Inserts an element into a queue at begining ee queue queue out queue element ms timeout L 1 error in fno error timed out Soerror aut The at begining parameter specifies whether the element is inserted at the end default or the front of the queue If the queue is full the VI waits timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If space becomes available during the wait the element is inserted and timeout returns FALSE If the queue remains full or the queue is not valid timeout returns TRUE National Instruments Corporation 13 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Not A Queue Returns TRUE if queue is not a valid queue refnum not a queue Remove Queue Element Removes an element from a queue from end CF queue queue out queue element T timed out error out rms timeout 11 error in no error The from end parameter specifies whether the returned element is taken from the front default or the end of the queue If the queue is empty the VI waits timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If an element becomes available
304. ers and arrays of numbers These functions release Boolean values as output in the same data structure as the input The Not A Number Path Refnum function accepts the same input types as functions that compare values to zero This function also accepts paths and refnums Not A Number Path Refnum outputs Boolean values in the same data structure as the input See Chapter 11 File Functions and Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs for more information about these functions The functions Decimal Digit Hex Digit Octal Digit Printable and White Space accept a scalar string or number input clusters of strings or non complex numbers arrays of strings or non complex numbers and so on The output consists of Boolean values in the same data structure as the input The function Empty String Path accepts a path a scalar string clusters of strings arrays of strings and so on The output consists of Boolean values in the same data structure as the input You can use the Equal Not Equal Not A Number Path Refnum Empty String Path and Select functions with paths and refnums but no other comparison functions accept paths or refnums as inputs Comparison functions that use arrays and clusters normally produce Boolean arrays and clusters of the same structure You can pop up and change to Compare Aggregates in which case the function releases a single Boolean value as output The function compares aggregates by c
305. ers for CTR Group Config Devices Device Type Valid Numbers CTR Mode Config Configures one or more counters for a designated counter operation and selects the source signal gating mode and output behavior on terminal count TC OUIce task ID task ID out counter list contig mode r emor out limebase source eror in no error timebase signal IDE LI National Instruments Corporation 28 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs This VI does not start the counters Use CTR Control VI with control code 1 Start to start the counters If you are using a counter for pulse generation you do not have to call this VI unless you want to change gate mode or output behavior Modes 3 4 and 6 can be used with or without buffered counting Mode 7 must be used with buffered counting With buffered counting call the CTR Buffer Config VI before or after the CTR Mode Config VI and before the CTR Control VI to start the operation then call the CTR Buffer Read VI to read the buffered count values With buffered or unbuffered operations call the CTR Control VI to read the most recently acquired unbuffered count value Unless otherwise stated the following figures show timing and counter values for operations in which gate mode is set to high level or rising edge and source edge is set to rising edge Use mode 1 to reset all the CTR Mode Config VI paramete
306. ers of numbers or Boolean values and so on National Instruments Corporation 5 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 5 Boolean Functions A formal and recursive definition of the allowable input type is as follows Logical type Boolean scalar numeric scalar II array logical type Il cluster logical types except that complex numbers and arrays of arrays are not allowed Logical functions with two inputs can have the same input combinations as the arithmetic functions However the logical functions have the further restriction that the base operations can only be between two Boolean values or two numbers For example you cannot have an AND between a Boolean value and a number See the example below for an illustration of some combinations of Boolean values for the And function Similar One Scalar Boolean scalar Boolean scalar Boolean scalar Boolean scalar Boolean array Boolean array Boolean arra Y Boolean array Boolean array Boolean scalar eo Boolean cluster Boolean cluster ooo cluster ist cluster aa GIUSTE Array of array of clusters cluster array of clusters Boolean Function Descriptions The following Boolean functions are available And Computes the logical AND of the inputs wand y Note This function performs bit wise operations on numeric inputs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 5 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 5 Boolean Functions An
307. ert numbers to smaller representations particularly when converting integers because the G conversion routines do not check for overflow Boolean Array To Number Converts Boolean array to an unsigned long integer by interpreting it as the two s complement representation of an integer with the 0 element of the array being the least significant bit Boolean array number Boolean To 0 1 Converts a Boolean value to a word integer 0 and 1 for the input values FALSE and TRUE respectively Boolean rere Boolean can be a scalar an array or a cluster of Boolean values an array of clusters of Boolean values and so on See the Polymorphism for Boolean Functions section in Chapter 5 Boolean Functions Byte Array To String Converts an array of unsigned bytes into a string unsigned byte array LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Cast Unit Bases Changes the units associated with the input to the units associated with unit and returns the results at the output terminal Use this function with extreme caution Because the Cast Unit Bases function works with bases you must understand the conversion from an arbitrary unit to its bases before you can use this function effectively This function can change base units such as changing meters to grams unit none a Convert Unit Converts a physical number a number that has a unit to
308. es You can calibrate certain DAQ devices with the device specific VIs but this is not always necessary because National Instruments calibrates all devices at the factory You can access the Calibration and Configuration VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Calibration and Configuration as shown below H oon ot il a ER Device Setting and ER Channel Configuration Yls ir ma a E Seried Cali Hee atte Calibration is Baad Other Calibration an Configuration ls SCI National Instruments Corporation 29 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS The following VIs only exist in the DAQ VI Library A2000 Calibrate A2000 Configure A2100 Calibrate A2100 Config A2150 Calibrate A2150 Config DSP 2200 Calibrate DSP 2200 Configure Calibration and Configuration VI Descriptions The following Calibration and Configuration VIs are available 1200 Calibrate This VI calibrates the gain and offset values for the ADCs and DACs on 1200 Series devices i e DAQPad 1200 DAQCard 1200 etc CACI channel CACO channel device device out calibration save new calibration status EEPROM location ADC Calibration Cluster You can perform a new calibration and optionally save the new calibration constants in one of four user areas in the onboard EEPROM or load an existing set of calibration constants by copying them from their storage location in the onboard EEP
309. es do not wire the iteration input to the loop iteration terminal Instead set iteration to 0 on the first loop then to any positive value on all other iterations The VI reconfigures and restarts if iteration lt 0 National Instruments Corporation 17 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Advanced Analog Input VIs This chapter contains reference descriptions of the Advanced Analog Input VIs These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Analog Input VIs You can access the Advanced Analog Input palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Input Advanced Analog Input The icon that you must select to access the Advanced Analog Input VIs is on the bottom row of the Analog Input palette as shown below Al Al OME FT OME FT ei E aA READ s SCAN CLEAR Advanced Analog Input VIs Advanced Analog Input VI Descriptions The following Advanced Analog Input VIs are available Al Buffer Config Allocates memory for LabVIEW to store analog input data until the AI Buffer Read VI can deliver it to you LabVIEW refers to the buffer s allocated by the AI Buffer Config VI as internal buffers because you do not have direct access to them task ID i task ID out Scans per buffer 1 no ch DSP memory handle out number of buffers 1 peo e error out error in no error allocation mode C0 no change DSP memory handle CO
310. evel low level rising edge falling edge 5102 Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 32 Analog Input Configuration Programmability 5102 devices By Channel By Channels Table B 33 Analog Input Characteristics Number Input FIFO Device of Channels Resolution Gains Range V Words Scanning 5102 8 bits 1 5 20 100 5 663 000 1 or 2 channels devices in any order without repetitions Table B 34 Analog Input Characteristics Part 2 5102 devices SW Pre Post Analog 20 000 000 real time LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 24 National Instruments Corporation GPIB Multiline Interface Messages This appendix lists multiline interface messages which are commands that IEEE 488 defines Multiline interface messages manage the GPIB they perform tasks such as initializing the bus addressing and unaddressing devices and setting device modes for local or remote programming These multiline interface messages are sent and received with ATN TRUE The following list includes the mnemonics and messages that correspond to the interface functions For more information on these messages refer to the ANSI IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation Multiline Interface Messages National Instruments Corporation C 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages a o a a LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Man
311. evision Configuration National Instruments software product Version Configuration The problem is List any error messages The following steps reproduce the problem LabVIEW Hardware and Software Configuration Form Record the settings and revisions of your hardware and software on the line to the right of each item Complete a new copy of this form each time you revise your software or hardware configuration and use this form as a reference for your current configuration Completing this form accurately before contacting National Instruments for technical support helps our applications engineers answer your questions more efficiently National Instruments Products DAQ hardware Interrupt level of hardware DMA channels of hardware Base I O address of hardware Programming choice HiQ NI DAQ LabVIEW or LabWindows version Other boards in system Base I O address of other boards DMA channels of other boards Interrupt level of other boards Other Products Computer make and model Microprocessor Clock frequency or speed Type of video board installed Operating system version Operating system mode Programming language Programming language version Other boards in system Base I O address of other boards DMA channels of other boards Interrupt level of other boards Documentation Comment Form National Instruments encourages you to comment on the documentation supplied with our products This information helps us provid
312. ew rendezvous and return its refnum The created new output returns TRUE if the VI creates a new rendezvous Destroy Rendezvous Destroys the specified rendezvous All Wait at Rendezvous VIs that are currently waiting on this rendezvous time out immediately and return an error rendez yous rendezyous out error in no error error out Get Rendezvous Status Returns current status information of a rendezvous name rendezvous rendezyous out waiting error in no error ay size error out National Instruments Corporation 13 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Not A Rendezvous Returns TRUE if rendezvous is not a valid rendezvous refnum rendez yous not a rendezyous Resize Rendezvous Changes the size of rendezvous by size change and returns new size rendezyrous rendezyous out size change 0 new size error in no error error out If the number of tasks currently waiting at rendezvous is less than or equal to new size the first size tasks stop waiting and continue execution Wait at Rendezvous Waits until a sufficient number of tasks have arrived at the rendezvous rendezyous rendezyous out msz timeout 1 timed out error in no error Saerror out If the number of tasks including the new one waiting at rendezvous is less than the rendezvous size the VI waits timeout milliseconds default 1 or forever before timing out If enough tasks arriv
313. exist requires System 7 0 or later or could not be initialized errNoGlobals The CIN in the PPC VI could not get its globals errAuthRequired The target specified in the PPC Start Session VI required authentication but the authentication dialog was not allowed 5 errbadState The PPC Start Session VI found itself in an unexpected state Table A 11 TCP and UDP Error Codes C o Senn OOO re oeann s oaee C e omaan O commensa soer O LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 28 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 12 Serial Port Error Codes EPAR Serial port parity error EFRM Serial port framing error Serial port timeout bytes not received at serial port 65 Table A 13 LabVIEW Specific Error Codes for AppleEvent Messages 1000 kLVE_InvalidState The VI is in a state that does not allow it to run kLVE_FPNotOpen The VI front panel is not open 1002 kLVE_CtrlErr The VI has controls on its front panel that are in an error state kLVE_NotInMem The VI is not in memory Table A 14 DDE Error Codes Fn DDEML_ADVACKTIMEOUT Request for a synchronous advise transaction has timed out DDEML_BUSY Response set the DDE_FBUSY bit DDEML_DATAACKTIMEOUT Request for a synchronous data transaction has timed out 14006 DDEML_DDL_NOT_INITIALIZED DDEML called without first calling DdeInitialize or was passed an invalid instance identifier 14007 DDEML_DLL_USAGE A monit
314. f you do not use this VI the first VI that accesses an SCXI chassis automatically tries to load information from the configuration file Channel Configuration VIs The following illustration shows the Channel Configurations VIs palette e HDAG GET HaMes INFO AAAA Scale THFO WE Get DAQ Channel Names Returns an array of all the channel names in the default configuration file A corresponding array of the channels configured physical units is also returned Using channel type you can chose to retrieve all channels or only analog input and analog output or digital I O channels channel type channel names l ee Channel units error in no error emor out Note This VI is specific to computers running NI DAQ 5 0 or later LabVIEW returns an UnsupportedError message if you attempt to run this VI on computers not running NI DAQ 5 0 or later LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Get Channel Information Returns configuration information about a channel configured in the DAQ Channel Wizard channel name channel name out Information type Information string eror in no error 9 M information value eor Out Note This VI is specific to computers running NI DAQ 5 0 or later LabVIEW returns an UnsupportedError message if you attempt to run this VI on computers not running NI DAQ 5 0 or later Get Scale Information
315. ferent for each version You can use these functions with all GPIB Controllers accessible by LabVIEW unless stated otherwise in the function description below An ECMD error 17 results when you execute a function for a GPIB Controller without the specified capability The function syntax is strict Each function recognizes only lowercase characters and allows only one space between the function name and the arguments Device Functions loc Go to local syntax loc address loc temporarily moves devices from a remote program mode to a local mode address is the GPIB address of the device This argument indicates both primary and secondary addresses if you use the form primary secondary where primary and secondary are the decimal values of the primary and secondary addresses For example if primary is 2 and secondary is 3 then address is 2 3 loc sends the Go To Local GTL message to the GPIB device off Take device offline syntax off address off takes the device at the specified GPIB address offline This is only needed when sharing a device with another application which is using the NI 488 GPIB Library address is the GPIB address of the device This argument indicates both primary and secondary addresses if you use the form primary secondary National Instruments Corporation 34 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions where primary and secondary are the decimal
316. ffer Config Allocates memory for a digital input or output buffer task ID task ID out of scans updates allocation mode error out error in no error Digital Buffer Control Starts an input or output operation task ID task ID out control code of scans updates error in no error data overwrite regen error out Digital Buffer Read Returns digital input data from the internal data buffer task ID task ID out number to read k fo mark locations read location number read time limit port data error in no error error out scan backlog Digital Buffer Write Writes digital output data to the buffer created by the Digital Buffer Config VI The write always begins at the write mark After a write the write mark points to the update following the last update written task ID i task ID out digital dat Laie ai Update progress Serr or out write location error in no error time limit Macintosh Fill the buffer with data before you use the Digital Buffer Control VI to begin the digital output operation You can call the Digital Buffer Write VI after the transfer begins to retrieve status information National Instruments Corporation 25 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 25 Advanced Digital 1 0 VIS The total number of updates written to a buffer before you start it can be less than the number of updates you allocated the buffer to hold when you called t
317. file F National Instruments Corporation 11 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Write To SGL File Writes a 2D or 1D array of single precision numbers SGL to a new byte stream file or appends the data to an existing file The VI opens or creates the file before writing to it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to write scaled data from data acquisition VIs without changing the representation file path dialog if empty 2D array 1D array append to file new file F new file path Not 4 Path if cancelled Advanced File Function Descriptions The following functions are available on the Advanced File Functions subpalette Ps OFEH Se ae Da atl Se ae PLE f eos Ze Je MOL Je SE Aa Access Rights Sets and returns the owner group and permissions of the file or directory specified by path If you do not specify new owner new group or new permissions this function returns the current settings unchanged path dup path NEW OWNET OWNET new group E group new permissions p g permission Error in i i emor out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Windows The Access Rights function ignores new owner and new group and returns empty strings for owner and group because Windows does not support owners and groups Macintosh If path refers to a file the A
318. fined simply as the high level phase of a signal when gate mode is set to high level gating This definition differs from that of a high pulse using pulse generation mode 5 which consists of a low level delay phase followed by a high level pulse phase Low pulses are similarly defined by switching the words high and low National Instruments Corporation 28 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs To measure pulse width set gate mode to high or low level Figure 28 3 shows unbuffered mode 4 pulse width measurements You can start an Am9513 counter at any time and it measures pulses until you stop it If you start it in the middle of the pulse you want to measure for example during a high pulse for high level gating LabVIEW returns a short count for that measurement You must start a DAQ STC counter only when the signal is in the opposite polarity from the selected gate level for example a low level phase for high level gating Otherwise the VI returns error number 10890 With unbuffered counting the DAQ STC stops counting after one measurement Mode 5 configures the counter for pulse generation Use the CTR Pulse Config VI to specify the pulse you want to generate Figure 28 3 Unbuffered Mode 4 High Pulse Width Measurement Figure 28 4 shows the buffered mode 4 pulse width measurement which is available only with DAQ STC devices The measured value is stored into the buffer at the end of ea
319. float To Extend Precision Complex Converts number to an extended precision complex number number G2T extended precision complex To Extended Precision Float Converts number to an extended precision floating point number number extended precision float To Long Integer Converts number to a 32 bit integer in the range 292 number 1132 32bit integer LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions To Single Precision Complex Coverts number to a single precision complex number number i G single precision complex To Single Precision Float Converts number to a single precision floating point number number single precision float To Unsigned Byte Integer Converts number to an 8 bit unsigned integer in the range 0 to 255 number unsigned Sbit integer To Unsigned Long Integer Converts number to a 32 bit unsigned integer in the range 0 to Dak number J032 _ unsigned 32bit integer To Unsigned Word Integer Converts number to a 16 bit unsigned integer in the range 0 to 65 535 number unsigned 16bit integer To Word Integer Converts number to a 16 bit integer in the range 32 768 to 32 767 number 16bit integer National Instruments Corporation 4 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions Descriptio
320. following the last record written The convert eol header pos mode and pos offset parameters do not apply with datalog files and you cannot wire them The data parameter functions in the following manner for datalog files data must be either a datatype that matches the datatype specified when you open or create the file or an array of such datatypes In the former case this function writes data as a single record in the datalog file Representation of numeric data is coerced to the representation of the datatype if necessary In the latter case this function writes each element of data as a separate record in the datalog file in row major order Write To Spreadsheet File Converts a 2D or 1D array of single precision SGL numbers to a text string and writes the string to a new byte stream file or appends the string to an existing file You can optionally transpose the data This VI opens or creates the file before writing to it and closes it afterwards You can use this VI to create a text file readable by most spreadsheet applications This VI calls the Array to Spreadsheet String function to convert the data format 2 30 file path dialog if empty new file path Not 4 Path i append to file new file F l transpose ro F IEE EET delimiter T ab Binary File VI Descriptions The following VIs are available from the Binary File VIs subpalette Eite frie E E cat Ce LabVIEW Function and VI Reference
321. for normal scanning operations and Ctr 1 is used for AMUX 64T and SCXI hardware scanning Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 10 Analog Input Configuration Programmability Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Lab LC By Group By Device By Device SE DC Lab NB SCXI 1200 By Group By Group By Group By Group DC DAQPad 1200 DAQCard 1200 PCI 1200 Note By Device means you Select the value of a parameter with hardware jumpers and the selection affects any group of channels on the device By Group means you program the selection through software and the selection affects all the channels used at the same time By Channel means you program the selection with hardware LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 10 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities jumpers or through software on a per channel basis When a specific value for a parameter is shown that parameter value is fixed Table B 11 Analog Input Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices Part 1 Number of Resolution Input FIFO Device Channels bits Gains Range V samples Lab LC 8SE 12 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 5 0 to 10 16 Lab NB 2 Lab PC 8SE 4DI 1 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 5 0 to 10 2 048 SCXI 1200 Lab PC 512 DAQPad 1200 DAQCard 1200 PCI 1200 z PC LPM 16 16SE 12 1 5 2 5 0 to 10 0to5 You can determine the limit settings of your device by multiplying
322. fts ifO lt i shifts lt n fori 0 1 2 n 1 Js 0 elsewhere where n is the number of elements in Input Array Note This VI does not rotate the elements in the array The VI disposes of the elements of the input sequence shifted outside the range and you cannot recover them by shifting the array in the opposite direction Zero Padder Resizes the input sequence Input Array to the next higher valid power of 2 sets the new trailing elements of the sequence to zero and leaves the first n elements unchanged where n is the number of samples in the input sequence Input Array A cero Padded Array This VI is useful when the size of the acquired data buffers is not a power of 2 and you want to take advantage of fast processing algorithms in the analysis VIs These algorithms include Fourier transforms power spectrum and FHTs which are extremely efficient for buffer sizes that are a power of 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 20 National Instruments Corporation Measurement VIs This chapter describes the Measurement VIs which are streamlined to perform DFT based and FFT based analysis with signal acquisition for frequency measurement applications as seen in typical frequency measurement instruments such as dynamic signal analyzers To access the Measurement palette select Function Analysis Measurement The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Measurement palette e Analysi
323. functions that perform comparisons or conditional tests The following illustration shows the Comparison palette that you access by selecting Functions Comparison ne GE eE epee s gt fe fe fe fa Pal fe pe e P gt fe p gt gt rrr Comparison Function Overview This section introduces the Comparison functions Boolean Comparison The Comparison functions treat the Boolean value TRUE as greater than the Boolean value FALSE National Instruments Corporation 9 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 9 Comparison Functions String Comparison These functions compare strings according to the numerical equivalent of the ASCII characters Therefore a with a decimal value of 97 is greater than A 65 which is greater than the numeral 0 48 which is greater than the space character 32 These functions compare characters one by one from the beginning of the string until an inequality occurs at which time the comparison ends For example LabVIEW compares the strings abcd and abef until it finds c which has a value less than the value of e The presence of a character is greater than the absence of one Therefore the string abcd is greater than abc because the first string is longer The functions that test the category of a string character for example the Decimal Digit and Printable functions evaluate only the first character of the string Numeric Comparison Most of the C
324. g read specification no change Note When the VI reads from the trigger mark it does not return data until the acquisition completes for the buffer containing the trigger LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Al Clock Config Sets the channel and scan clock rates configuration mode retrigger mode task ID task ID out which clock aa actual clock rate specification error out clock frequenc error in no rite clock source alternate clock rate specification Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the clocks available with your DAQ device For devices that have only a channel clock Lab LC Lab NB NB MIO 16 Lab PC PCI 1200 PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 DAQCard 700 and DAQCard 1200 you cannot set independent channel and scan clock rates Setting one resets the other because the channel rate equals scan rate number of channels to scan For devices that have no channel clock NB A2000 NB A2100 and NB A2150 setting the channel clock produces an error If you specify a value of 0 for the scan clock rate interval scanning turns off and channel scanning or round robin scanning proceeds at the channel clock rate This option is meaningful only for devices with independent channel and scan clocks The clock rate is the rate at which LabVIEW samples data or acquires scans You can express the clock rate three wa
325. ge of the output sequence is 1 1 National Instruments Corporation 46 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs Unit Vector Finds the norm of the Input Vector and obtains its corresponding Unit Vector by normalizing the original Input Vector with its norm Unit Vector Input ven tor norm errar Let X represent the input Input Vector norm is given by DER S E where IIXII is norm and the VI calculates Unit Vector U using X U Ixi LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 46 8 National Instruments Corporation Additional Numerical Method Vis This chapter describes the VIs that use numerical methods to perform root finding numerical integration and peak detection The following illustration shows the Additional Numerical Methods palette which you access by selecting Functions Analysis Additional Numerical Methods e HAnalysis Additional Numerical Methods eV Additional Numerical Method Ban Heada ath THESE aifimeric peak roots integral detect Additional Numerical Method VI Descriptions The following Additional Numerical Method VIs are available Complex Polynomial Roots Finds the complex roots of a complex polynomial ean Polynomial Roots Poly norniial THH K roots error National Instruments Corporation 47 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIS T
326. ges 5 18 2 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for Controls inthe Al Clock Conie Vierra Mein Sass 18 4 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Control VI 18 6 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Group Config VI 18 7 AI Hardware Config Channel Configuration cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 18 9 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Hardware Config VI 18 11 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI SingleScan VI 18 14 Restrictions for Analog Triggering on E Series Devices 000088 18 17 Digital Trigger Sources for Devices with Fixed Digital Trigger Sources satis taihie licen cies ieee 18 18 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Trigger Config VI Part 1 cccceeeceesesccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 18 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Trigger Config VI Part 2 cccccccccesesscsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeens 18 20 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Trigger Config VI Part 3 ccccccccesessececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 18 20 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the AI Trigger Config VI Part 4 cccccccccsssssececcceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeens 18 21 Device Specific Parameters and Legal Ranges for Devices 25 6 Counter Chips and Their Available DAQ Devices cccceeeeeeeteeees 28 2 Valid Counter Numbers for CTR Group Config Devices 0008
327. hapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions GPIB Status Shows the status of the GPIB Controller indicated by address string after the previous GPIB operation status GPIB error address string ii byte count emor out GPIB Trigger Sends GET Group Execute Trigger to the device indicated by address string address string Emor ir GPIB Wait Waits for the state s indicated by wait state vector at the device indicated by address string timeout ms 458 2 global address string walt state vector emor in Wait for GPIB RQS Waits for the device indicated by address string to assert RQS l address string poll response byte timeout me 4858 2 global emorni emor in GPIB Write Writes data to the GPIB device identified by address string timeout me 468 2 global address string Jau data m Emor out mode 0 Eor in LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions GPIB Device and Controller Functions This section describes the functions listed in the GPIB Misc function description The device functions send configuration information to a specific instrument device The GPIB Controller functions configure the Controller or send IEEE 488 commands to which all instruments respond Notice that there are both device and Controller versions of the ppe and loc commands The syntax and use of the commands are slightly dif
328. hapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions off Take controller offline syntax off off takes the controller offline This is only needed when sharing the controller with another application which is using the NI 488 Library ppc Parallel poll configure enable and disable syntax ppc byte ppc configures the GPIB Controller to participate in a parallel poll by setting its Local Poll Enable LPE message to the value of byte If the value of byte is 0 the GPIB Controller unconfigures itself Each of the 16 Parallel Poll Enable PPE messages selects the GPIB data line DIO1 through DIO8 and sense 1 or 0 that the device must use when responding to the Identify IDY message during a parallel poll The device interprets the assigned message and the current value of the individual status ist bit to determine if the selected line is driven TRUE or FALSE For example if PPE 0x64 DIOS is driven TRUE if ist is 0 and FALSE if ist is 1 If PPE 0x68 DIO1 PPE message is in effect You must know which PPE and PPD messages are sent and determine what the responses indicate ppu Parallel poll unconfigure syntax ppu ppu disables all devices from responding to parallel polls ppu sends the Parallel Poll Unconfigure PPU command rpp Conduct parallel poll syntax rpp rpp conducts a parallel poll of previously configured devices by asserting the ATN and EOI signals which sends the IDY message rpp places the pa
329. hase is false the next time the VI executes this reentrant VI uses this value as its new phase in Triangle Wave Generates an array containing a triangle wave preset phase whi eeaeee E samples Triangle Wawe amplitude phase out f error phase in If the sequence Y represents Triangle Wave the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y a tri phase i for i 0 1 2 n 1 where a is amplitude n is the number of samples d 0 lt p lt 90 90 e tri phase i 255 90 lt p lt 270 p P 4 270 lt p lt 360 90 p National Instruments Corporation 38 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs where p phase z modulo 360 0 phase i initial_phase 360 0 7 f is the frequency in normalized units of cycles sample initial_phase is phase in if reset phase is true or initial_phase is the phase out from the previous execution of this instance of the VI if reset phase is false The VI is reentrant so you can use it to simulate a continuous acquisition from a triangle wave function generator If the input control reset phase is false subsequent calls to a specific instance of the VI produce the output Triangle Wave array containing the next samples of a triangle wave phase out is set to phase n and if reset phase is false the next time the VI executes this reentrant VI uses this value as its new phase in Uniform White Noise Generates a
330. he Advanced Counter palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Counter Advanced Counter The icon that you must select to access the Advanced Counter VIs is on the bottom row of the Counter palette as shown below ee Ss 1 Ke Ht ERIO Tay ADU fe Sr _ air Advanced Counter VIs Note Use only the inputs that you need on each VI when working with data acquisition Leave the rest of the inputs unwired and LabVIEW sets them to their default values In the Help window the most important terminals are labeled in bold and the least commonly used are in brackets Values given in parentheses are default values The following lists the type of counter chips that your device must have to work with your version of LabVIEW e DAQ STC Counter Chip e Am9513 Counter Chip e 8253 54 Counter Chip National Instruments Corporation 28 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs The ICTRControl VI is the only VI that works with devices that contain the 8253 54 counter chip Refer to Table 28 1 for the counter chips used with the various devices Table 28 1 Counter Chips and Their Available DAQ Devices Counter Chip DAQ Device Am9513 ATI MIO 16 AT MIO 16D AT MIO 16F 5 ATI MIO 16X AT MIO 64F 5 PC TIO 10 All AO 2DC Devices EISA A2000 NB MIO 16 NB MIO 16X NB DMA 8 G NB DMA2800 NB TIO 10 NB A2000 DAQ STC All E Series Devices 5102 Devices 8253 54 All Lab and 1200 Ser
331. he Digital Buffer Config VI The VI generates only the updates written to the buffer Digital Clock Config Configures a DIO 32 device to produce handshake signals based on the output of a clock for timed digital I O alternate clk rate pE A config mode task ID task ID out ock source clock information LZ i li cle 1i k frei Wench To lt error out error in no error gating mode Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the clocks available with your DAQ device The following example illustrates how to use the three timebase parameters to specify a clock rate Assume these parameters have the following settings timebase source 1 timebase signal 1 000 000 0 Hz timebase divisor 25 In this case the ticks per second rate is 1 000 000 0 divided by 25 so LabVIEW updates the digital group 40 000 times per second Digital Group Config Defines a digital input or output group You can use the taskID this VI returns only in the digital group VIs device task ID out grap grop see digital channel list pm handshaking eror in no eror Bor Out group direction Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the ports and directions available with your DAQ device Note The same digital channel cannot belong to two different groups If you configure a group to use a specified digital channel that digital
332. he Easy Analog Output VIs perform simple analog output operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can use each VI by itself to perform a basic analog output operation Unlike intermediate and advanced level VIs Easy Analog Output VIs automatically alert you to errors with a dialog box that asks you to stop the execution of the VI or to ignore the error The Easy Analog Output VIs provide a basic convenient interface with only the most commonly used inputs and outputs For more complex applications you should use the Intermediate Analog Output VIs and Advanced Analog Output VIs for more functionality and performance Refer to Chapter 19 Easy Analog Output VIs for specific VI information Intermediate Analog Output Vis You can find intermediate level Analog Output VIs in two different places in the Analog Output palette You can find the Intermediate Analog Output VIs in the second row of the Analog Output palette The other intermediate level VIs are in the Analog Output Utilities palette which is discussed later The Intermediate Analog Output VIs AO Config AO Write AO Start AO Wait and AO Clear are in turn built from the fundamental building block layer called the Advanced Analog Output VIs These VIs offer almost as much power as the advanced level VIs and they conveniently group the advanced level VIs into a tidy logical sequence Refer to Chapter 20 Intermedia
333. he SCXI channel only as in the following example SCL MDA Leh Os 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs This specification indicates that LabVIEW should alter SCXI settings only Additionally gain applies only to the SCXI channel The third way is to specify the acquisition device channel only as in the following example OBO In this case LabVIEW alters only DAQ device settings The gain parameter applies to the onboard channel only Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges input limits and scanning order available with your DAQ device Tables 18 6 through 18 9 list default settings and ranges for the AI Hardware Config VI A tilde indicates that the parameter is configurable on a per group basis only This means you cannot configure it by channel The first row of these tables gives the values for most devices and the other rows give the values for devices that are exceptions to the rule If you did not set the default settings with the configuration utility use the default settings shown in these tables Table 18 6 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Hardware Config VI Channel Input Configuration Cluster Number Channel Coupling Input Mode of AMUX List Device Pee TTT Pia o Pt e NB A2000 empty PC LPM 16 empty Lab LC Lab NB Lab and 1200 1 lt n lt 3 empty Series devices A
334. he Synchronization VIs You can also use the Synchronization VIs to pass data between parallel tasks You access the Synchronization palette by choosing Functions Advanced Synchronization The following illustration displays the options available on the Synchronization palette The Synchronization palette consists of five subpalettes e Notification VIs e Queue VIs e Rendezvous VIs e Semaphore VIs s Occurrence Functions Notification VIs You can use the Notification VIs to pass data from one task to one or more separate parallel tasks In particular you use these VIs when you want one or more VIs or parts of block diagrams to wait until another VI or part of a block diagram sends them some data The Notification VIs differ from the Queue VIs in that the data sent is not buffered That is if there is no one waiting on a notification when it is sent the data will be lost if another notification is sent Also more than one Wait On Notification VI can receive the same data LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions You can access the notification VIs by selecting Functions Advanced Synchronization Notification 2 Notification The notification VIs use the Notifier RefNum control from the Controls Path amp Refnum palette e The Notifier RefNum can be used with the following VIs Cancel Notification Cancels and returns a previ
335. he cluster input If you are creating a cluster for a cluster indicator you can wire a local variable of that indicator to the cluster input If you are creating a cluster for a cluster control of a subVI you can place a copy of that control possibly hidden on the front panel of the VI and wire the control to the cluster input Cluster To Array Converts a cluster of identically typed components to a 1D array of elements of the same type Index amp Bundle Cluster Array Indexes a set of arrays and creates a cluster array in which the i element contains the i element of each input array array of ce array of y array of cluster of x Y pep X ee De teers array gF y wineh ie This function is equivalent to the following block diagram and is useful for converting a cluster of arrays to an array of clusters National Instruments Corporation 8 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Unbundle Disassembles a cluster into its individual components component clusters Eee anant Unbundle By Name Returns the cluster elements whose names you specify You select the element you want to access by popping up on the name output terminals and selecting a name from the list of elements in the cluster component 1 cluster component 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 8 6 National Instruments Corporation Comparison Functions This chapter describes the
336. he event class and event ID together as an eight character string For example to send the Open Documents AppleEvent pass the AESend VI the eight character code coreodoc If you are sending the AppleEvent to another application you have to specify target ID and send options as described earlier in this chapter National Instruments Corporation 52 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs You also can specify an array of parameters if the target application needs additional information to execute the specified AppleEvent Because the data structure for AppleEvent parameters is inconvenient for use in LabVIEW diagrams the AESend VI accepts these parameters as ASCII strings These strings must conform to the grammar described in the next section You can use this grammar to describe any AppleEvent parameter The AESend VI interprets this string to create the appropriate data structure for an AppleEvent and then sends the event to the specified target Creating AppleEvent Parameters In many cases an AppleEvent parameter is a single value however it can be quite complex with a hierarchical structure containing components that in turn can contain other components In LabVIEW a parameter is constructed as a string which has a simple grammar with which you can describe all kinds of data that an AppleEvent parameter can be including complex structures An AppleEvent parameter string begins with a keyword
337. he input sequence X Values a is the amplitude and T is the damping constant The VI obtains mse using the formula n 1 l 2 mse Uo i 0 where f is the output sequence Best Exponential Fit y is the input sequence Y Values and n is the number of data points Exponential Fit Coefficients Finds the set of exponential coefficients amplitude and damping which describe the exponential curve that best represents the input data set Y Values A values This VI is a subVI of the Exponential Fit VI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 43 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS The general form of the exponential fit is given by F ae where F is the sequence representing the best fitted values X represents the input sequence X Values a is amplitude and T is the damping constant General LS Linear Fit Finds the Best Fit k dimensional plane and the set of linear coefficients using the least chi square method for observation data sets Xo Xi Xip 4 Yi Where i 0 1 2 1 nis the number of your observation data sets Standard Deviation H en Le Coefficients Y Values tae Best Fit covariance selector i me algorithm error Covariance You can use this VI to solve multiple linear regression problems You can also use it to solve for the linear coefficients in a multiple function equation General Polynomial Fit Finds the polynomial curve values and the set of P
338. he key value pair to the end of the specified section If section does not exist the VI adds section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data sector refnum i refnum out kep value mm error cut error in no erar Write Key Path Writes a path value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds the key value pair to the end of the specified section If section does not exist the VI adds section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data refnum out emor in no eror Write Key String Writes a string value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds the key value pair to the end of the specified section If section does not exist the VI adds section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data reinum out error in no eror National Instruments Corporation 11 25 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Write Key U32 Writes a 32 bit unsigned integer value associated with key in a specified section of the configuration data identified by refnum If key exists the VI replaces the existing value If key does not exist the VI adds the key value pair to the end of
339. he method the associated parameters appear below it You can read or write to parameter values Parameters with a white background are required inputs and the parameters with a gray background are optional inputs error in Cra error See POR Out Auto Reiru Iri dup Auto Refturtt He If the input parameters are of variant type then you can wire in G data types and they will automatically be converted to variant data types and indicated by a coercion dot If an output is of a variant type use the ActiveX Variant to G function to convert to G type if needed Property Node Sets writes or gets reads ActiveX object property information To select an ActiveX class object pop up and choose Select ActiveX Class or wire an automation refnum to the input To select a property related to that object pop up on the second line of the node and select Properties To set property information pop up and select Change to Write and to get property information pop up and select Change to Read Some properties are read or write only so Change to Write or Change to Read respectively appears dimmed in the pop up menu The Property Node works the same way as Attribute Nodes If you want to add items to the node pop up and select Add Element or click and drag the node to expand the number of items in the node The properties are changed in the order from top to bottom Remember if the small direction arrow on a property is on the left you are setti
340. he number of elements in X dg 7938 18608 a 9240 18608 and a gt 1430 18608 National Instruments Corporation 42 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 42 Window VIS Exponential Window Applies an exponential window to the input sequence X Exponentialit final value error If y represents the output sequence Exponential X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x exp ai fori O0 1 2 n 1 q PO nd where f is final value and n is the number of samples in X You can use this VI to analyze transients Flat Top Window Applies a flat top window to the input sequence X Flattop error If y represents the output sequence Flattop X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x 0 2810639 0 5208972 cos w 0 1980399 cos 2w for i 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in X Force Window Applies a force window to the input sequence X Force x duty cycle error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 42 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 42 Window VIS If y represents the output sequence Force X the VI obtains the elements of y from x fOsi lt d y for 1 0 1 2 n 1 0 elsewhere d 0 01 n duty cycle where n is the number of elements in X You also can use this VI to analyze transients General Cosine Window Applies a general cosine window to the input sequence X Cosine Coefficients
341. he same set of numbers the output is 5 If threshold y is 14 2 start index is 5 and the values in the array starting at index 5 are 9 1 10 3 12 9 and 15 5 threshold y falls between elements 7 and 8 because 14 2 is midway between 12 9 and 15 5 The value for fractional index or x is 7 5 that is halfway between 7 and 8 If the array input consists of an array of points where each point is a cluster of x and y coordinates the output is the interpolated x value corresponding to the interpolated position of threshold y rather than the fractional index of the array If the interpolated position of threshold y is midway between indices 4 and 5 of the array with x values of 2 5 and 0 respectively the output is not an index value of 4 5 as it would be for a numeric array but rather an x value of 1 25 Transpose 2D Array Rearranges the elements of 2D array such that 2D array i j becomes transposed array i 2D aray transposed arap Xi Xi LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 7 8 National Instruments Corporation Cluster Functions This chapter describes the functions for cluster operations The following illustration shows the Cluster palette that you access by selecting Functions Cluster ix x ste National Instruments Corporation 8 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Some of the cluster functions also are available from the Cluster Tools palette of most te
342. he semaphore becomes available during the wait timed out returns FALSE If the semaphore does not become available or the semaphore is not valid timed out returns TRUE Create Semaphore Looks up an existing semaphore or creates a new semaphore and returns a refnum that you can use when calling other semaphore VIs name Lunnamedi semaphore size 1 nee created new return exisiting LF e poo karra error in na error size specifies how many tasks may acquire the semaphore at the same time The default size is 1 If a name is specified the VI first searches for an existing semaphore with the same name and returns its refnum if it exists If a named semaphore with the same name does not already exist National Instruments Corporation 13 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions and the return existing input is FALSE the VI creates a new semaphore and return its refnum The created new output returns TRUE if the VI creates a new semaphore Destroy Semaphore Destroys the specified semaphore All Acquire Semaphore VIs that are currently waiting on this semaphore will time out immediately and return an error semaphore semaphore out error in no error error out Get Semaphore Status Returns current status information of a semaphore name semaphore semaphore out size error in no error aay 4 waiting error aut Not A Semaphore Returns TRUE if semaphore is not a valid semap
343. he value of x must be in the range of X values The points are formed by the input arrays X and Y and n is the total number of points On the interval x x the output interpolation value y is defined by y Ay By 1 Cy Dy 1 and X44 7x i 1 i National Instruments Corporation 43 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS B 1 A os s a A x 41 e D E B Baa LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 43 8 National Instruments Corporation Probability and Statistics Vis This chapter describes the VIs that perform probability descriptive statistics analysis of variance and interpolation functions To access the Probability and Statistics palette choose Functions Analysis Probability and Statistics as shown in the following illustration elAnalysis Probability and Statistics E Leer and Statistics T x LEE L deel For examples of how to use the statistics VIs see the examples located in examples analysis statxmpl 11b Note These VIs are not available in the Base Analysis package National Instruments Corporation 44 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs Probability and Statistics VI Descriptions The following Probability and Statistics VIs are available 1D ANOVA Takes an array X of experimental observations made at various levels of a factor with at
344. hen the power or amplitude spectrum of Windowed Waveform is computed all windows provide the same level within the accuracy constraints of the window This VI also returns important Window Constants for the selected window These constants are useful when you use VIs that perform computations on the power spectrum such as the Power amp Frequency Estimate and Spectrum Unit Conversion VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 40 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 40 Measurement VIs Spectrum Unit Conversion Converts either the power amplitude or gain amplitude ratio spectrum to alternate formats including Log decibel and dbm and spectral density signal unit Spectrum spectrum spectrum type log linear t it display unit a dt window constants Threshold Peak Detector For information on the this VI see Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIs Transfer Function Computes the transfer function also known as the frequency response from the time domain Stimulus Signal and Response Signal from a network under test Stimulus Signal Frequency Response Mag gain Response Signal i Frequency Response Phase radians dt i df This VI computes the transfer function of a system based on the real signals X Stimulus Signal and Y Response Signal The output is the amplitude gain of the network which is unitless The VI computer frequency response is Cross Power Stimulus Response Power Spe
345. her you have a valid system before using this VI The numerical implementation of the matrix inversion is not only numerically intensive but because of its recursive nature it is also highly sensitive to round off error introduced by the floating point numeric coprocessor Although the LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs computations use the maximum possible accuracy the VI cannot always solve for the system Complex LU Factorization Performs the LU factorization of a complex square matrix A LU factorization factors the square matrix A into two triangular matrices one is a lower triangular matrix L with ones on the diagonal and the other is an upper triangular matrix U so that PA LU where P is a permutation matrix which consists of the identity matrix with some rows exchanged Factorization is the key step for inverting a matrix computing the determinant of a matrix and solving a linear equation Complex Matrix Condition Number Computes the condition number of a complex matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix condition number norm ty pe The condition number of a matrix measures the sensitivity of the solution of a system of linear equations to errors in the data It gives an indication of the accuracy of the results from the matrix inversion and linear equation solutions Complex Matrix Norm Computes the norm of a complex matrix Inp
346. hing it until you reach the desired number of arguments LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions format string initial string resulting string error in no error he agate error out argument 1 0 el I SS spunea Tha Table 6 3 shows the errors that can appear in error out by the Format Into String function Table 6 3 Possible Format into String Errors Format specifier type The datatype of a format specifier in the format string mismatch does not match the datatype of the corresponding input argument Unknown format The format string contains an invalid format specifier specifier Too few format There are more arguments than format specifiers specifiers Too many format There are more format specifiers than arguments specifiers Note If an error occurs the source component of the error out cluster contains a string of the form Format Into String arg n Where nis the first argument for which the error occurred If you wire a block diagram constant string to format string G checks for errors in format string at compile time You must correct these errors before you can run the VI In this case no errors can occur at run time Format Specifier Examples In Table 6 4 the underline character _ represent spaces in the output The last three entries are examples of physical quantity inputs Table 6 4 Format Specifiers Format S
347. his VI uses a modified complex Newton method to determine the n complex roots some of which may be real with a zero imaginary part of the general complex polynomial dorar mae a Numeric Integration Performs a numeric integration on the input array of data using one of four popular numeric integration methods Input Array Hwdi result At Humeric integration method ntegrak error Note If the number of points provided for a certain chosen method does not contain an integral number of partial sums then the method is applied for all possible points For the remaining points the next possible lower order method is used For example if the Bode method is selected the following table shows what this VI evaluates for different numbers of points Number of Points Partial Evaluations Performed So if 227 points were provided and the Bode Method was chosen the VI would arrive at the result by performing 56 Bode Method partial evaluations and one Simpsons 3 8 Method evaluation Each of the methods depend on the sampling interval dt and compute the integral using successive applications of a basic formula in order to perform partial evaluations which depend on some number of adjacent points The number of points used in each partial evaluation represents the order of the method The result is the summation of these successive partial evaluations LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 47 2 National Instruments Corporatio
348. hore refnum semaphore not 4 semaphore Release Semaphore Releases access to a semaphore semaphore semaphore out error in na error error aut If there is an Acquire Semaphore VI waiting for this semaphore it stops waiting and continues execution If you call the Release Semaphore VI on a semaphore that you have not acquired you effectively increment the semaphore size LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 13 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Occurrence Function Descriptions You can use the occurrence functions to control separate synchronous activities In particular you use these functions when you want one VI or part of a block diagram to wait until another VI or part of a block diagram finishes a task without forcing LabVIEW to poll You can perform the same task using global variables with one loop polling the value of the global until its value changes However global variables add overhead because the loop that pulls the global variable uses execution time With occurrences the polling loop is replaced with a Wait on Occurrence function and does not use processor time When some diagram sets the occurrence LabVIEW activates all Wait on Occurrence functions in any block diagrams that are waiting for the specified occurrence The following illustration displays the options available on the Occurrences subpalette Generate Occurrence Creates an occurrence that you can p
349. i retrieval complete error in no error emor out DIO Single Read Write Reads or writes digital data to the digital channels specified in the digital channel list This single VI configures and transfers data When you use this VI in a loop wire the iteration counter to the iteration input so that configuration takes place only once number to read device scans read digital channel list number transfered group direction r a ready state operation code i eror out error in no error updates to write time limit 1 sec Iteration O iritialize a National Instruments Corporation 24 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Intermediate Digital I O VIs DIO Start Starts a buffered digital I O operation This VI calls the Digital Clock Config VI to set the clock rate if the internal clock produces the handshake signals and then starts the data transfer by calling the Digital Buffer Control VI taskID in taskiD out number of scans updates to handshake source error out clock frequency error in no error DIO Wait Waits until the digital buffered input or output operation completes before returning For input the VI detects completion when the acquisition state returned by the Digital Buffer Read VI finishes with or without backlog For output the VI detects completion when the generation co
350. iage return followed by a line feed on Windows a carriage return on Macintosh and a line feed on UNIX The G end of line marker is a line feed If convert eol is TRUE the function converts all end of line markers it encounters into line feeds If convert eol is FALSE the function does not convert the end of line markers it reads convert eol defaults to FALSE data is the string of characters read from the file Reading Binary Data To read binary data from a byte stream file wire the type of the data to byte stream type In this case count and data function in the manner described in the following paragraphs and you do not have to wire line mode or convert eol byte stream type can be any datatype Read File interprets the data starting at the designated byte offset to be count instances of that type If the type is variable length that is an array a string or a cluster containing an array or string the function assumes that each instance of the type contains the length or dimensions of that instance If they do not the function misinterprets the data If Read File determines that the data does not match the type it sets the value of data to the default value for its type and returns an error count is the number of instances of byte stream type to read If count is unwired the function returns a single instance of byte stream type LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11
351. ications can communicate with each other You also can use LabVIEW with a low level form of IAC called program to program communication PPC AppleEvents are a high level method of communication in which applications use messages to request other applications to perform actions or return information An application can send these messages to itself other applications on the same machine or other applications located anywhere on a network Apple has defined a large vocabulary for messages to help standardize this form of interapplication communication You can combine words in this vocabulary to form complex messages This vocabulary is described in detail in the AppleEvent Registry a document available from Apple Computer Inc Most applications written for System 7 including LabVIEW respond to some subset of AppleEvents PPC is a low level form of IAC by which applications send and receive blocks of data PPC provides higher performance than AppleEvents because the overhead required to transmit information is lower However because PPC does not define what kinds of information you can transfer many applications do not support it PPC is the best way to send large amounts of information between applications that support PPC See Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIs for more information about PPC National Instruments Corporation 52 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs The following illu
352. ices B 20 Analog Input Configuration Programmability Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices sseeeseeeseeessesessseresrrrersseeee B 21 Analog Output Characteristics Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices sseeeseeesseessesesseesssrrseesseeee B 21 Analog Input Characteristics Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices ssseeseeeseeesseeessersssrrssessseee B 22 Digital Hardware Capabilities Digital I O Devices eee B 22 Digital Hardware Capabilities Timing Only Devices 0008 B 23 Counter Timer Characteristics Timing Only Devices ccccceeee B 24 Analog Input Configuration Programmability 2 0 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees B 24 Analog Input CWarac ter Suis erraina i B 24 Analog Input Characteristics Part 2 ccccccccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeess B 24 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual About This Manual The LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual contains descriptions of all virtual instruments VIs and functions including the following e VIs that support the devices for data acquisition e VIs for GPIB VXIbus and serial port I O operation e digital signal processing filtering and numerical and statistical VIs e networking and interapplication communications VIs This manual is a supplement to the LabVIEW User Manual and you should be familiar with that material This manual provides an overview of each function and VI
353. ided into sections denoted by a name enclosed in brackets Each section in a file must have a unique name Within each section are key and value pairs Each key within a section must have a unique name LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 20 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions An example of a configuration file with sections section 1 and section 21s section 1 keyl string value 1 key2 string value 2 key3 53 section 2 keyl TRUE key2 12 3 key3 c temp data dat The Configuration File VIs support the following data types e Strings e Paths e Booleans e 64 bit floating point numbers Double e 32 bit signed integers 132 e 32 bit unsigned integers U32 String data in the file must be enclosed in double quotes Any unprintable characters in the string are stored in the file with their equivalent hexadecimal escape codes for example OD for carriage return In addition backslash characters are stored in the file as double backslashes for example for Path data is stored in a platform neutral format This format is the standard UNIX format for paths The VIs will interpret the absolute path c temp data dat as follows on the various G platforms e Windows c temp data dat e MacOS c temp data dat e UNIX c temp data dat In addition the VIs interpret the relative path temp data dat as follows e Windows temp data dat e MacOS temp data dat e UNIX temp data dat
354. ients to the IHR Cascade Filter VI filter ty pe sampling freq T Te NF Filter Cluster high cutoff freq th Ea low cutoff freq fl passband ripple dB order stapband attenuation dB The Elliptic Coefficients VI is a subVI of the Elliptic Filter VI Elliptic Filter Generates a digital elliptic filter using sampling freq fs low cutoff freq fl high cutoff freq fh filter type passband ripple stopband attenuation and order by calling the Elliptic Coefficients VI The Elliptic Filter VI then calls the HR Filter VI to filter the X sequence using this model to obtain an elliptic Filtered X sequence filter ty pe passband rippleldB A Filtered sampling freq fs Ss high cutoff freq th low cutoff freq fl stopband attenuation dB order init cant Cinit Fi E A anton Sache dd F Equiripple BandPass Generates a bandpass FIR filter with equi ripple characteristics using the Parks McClellan algorithm and higher pass freq lower pass freq of taps lower stop freq higher stop freq and sampling freq fs The VI then filters the input sequence X to obtain the bandpass filtered linear phase sequence Filtered Data higher pass freq lower pass Treg r WE Filtered Data i error of taps lower stop treg higher stop freq sampling freq f National Instruments Corporation 41 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis The first stopband of the filter region goes from zero
355. ies Devices DAQCard 500 DAQCard 700 LPM Devices 516 Devices Advanced Counter VI Descriptions The following Advanced Counter VIs are available CTR Buffer Config Allocates memory where LabVIEW stores counter data The CTR Buffer Config VI also configures the specified group to perform buffered counter operations instead of the normal single point operations task ID out counts per buffer 1 no t error out CTR Buffer Read Returns data from the buffer allocated by CTR Buffer Config mark locations acquisition state task ID task ID out number to read 1 no change F number read error in no error ao binary data error out backlog time limit 1 no change LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 28 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs Note Incremental reading from the count buffer is supported However circular use of the buffer is not implemented Therefore you must set up a finite buffer You can read from the finite buffer as it fills CTR Group Config Collects one or more counters into a group You can use counter groups containing more than one counter to start stop or read multiple counters simultaneously DAQ STC devices do not currently support multiple counters in the same group device B counter list pm eror in no error Table 28 2 contains valid counter numbers for devices supported by this VI Table 28 2 Valid Counter Numb
356. ilable Gate Modes Available Counter Chip Used of General Purpose Counters Available Output Modes Available Count Direction rising edge up or down falling edge can be SW or high level HW controlled low level E Series Devices DAQ STC 2 internal 20 MHz or 100 kHz external AT MIO 16F 5 Am 9513 5 or 6 internal AT MIO 64F 5 5 MHz only on AT MIO 16 16D CTR2 of 16F 5 NB MIO 16 16X 64F 5 and AT MIO 16X 1 MHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 1 kHz 100 Hz external ISW Software HW Hardware ON rising edge falling edge high level low level National Instruments Corporation B 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 9 Counter Usage for Analog Input and Output MIO and Al Devices Counter Chip AI Channel AI Sample Device Name Used Clock Counter AI Scan Clock AO Update Clock DAQ STC The DAQ STC chip uses dedicated clocks for these purposes AT MIO 16F 5 Am9513 Ctr 3 Ctr 4 amp 5 Ctr 2 or 1 Ctr 5 2or1 AT MIO 64F 5 AT MIO 16X AT MIO 16 16D Am9513 Ctr 3 Ctr 4 amp 5 Ctr 2 or 1 Ctr 2 and NB MIO 16X via DMA for NB MIO 16X NB MIO 16 Am9513 Ctr 4 amp 5 None or 1 via DMA l Tf the total number of samples is less than 65535 only the first counter is used If the number of samples exceeds 65536 the first counter is used together with the second counter as a 32 bit sample counter 2 Ctr 2 or no counter for NB MIO 16 is used
357. ile of an ar description alias n a LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis Low Level AppleEvent VIs You can use Low Level AppleEvent VIs to construct AppleEvent parameters and send the AppleEvent The high level VIs for sending AppleEvents described earlier in this chapter are based on the AESend VI and are good examples of creating AppleEvents and their parameters To access the Low Level Apple Events palette pop up on the Low Level Apple Events icon tT Hake Send Alias idie a e 1 Record Vier Spec Creste oreste create Aarige Logics ooo Dest Desc Desi AESend Sends an AppleEvent specified in parameters to the specified target application requested reply parameters Event Class and ID reply parameters parameters error string target ID error send options Make Alias Creates a unique description of a file from its pathname and location on the network You can use this description with the AESend VI when sending an AppleEvent that refers to a file Server name File s full pana Make Alias Calis AESend descriptor Alias alias kind error C O minimal alias An alias is a data structure used by the Macintosh toolbox to describe file system objects files directories and volumes Do not confuse this with a Finder alias file A minimal alias contains a full path name to the file and pos
358. ile jumping to a specific point in a help file or closing the online help system Operation String to search for p i Error Output Path to the help file Error Input Get Help Window Status Returns the status and the position information for the Help window National Instruments Corporation 12 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Menu Functions The following illustration displays the options available on the Menu subpalette eh mH T ES Fea A Fa a gt 7 A m a The Menu functions operate on menus identified by a refnum A VI s menu refnum is obtained through the constant Current VI s menu Items are identified by an item tag string and sometimes by an item path string which is a list of item tags from the menu tree root up to the item and separated by colons The following Menu functions are available Delete Menu Items Deletes menu items from the menubar or a submenu within the menubar menubar menubar out menu tag items pP error out eror in no error If menu tag is specified the items are deleted from the submenu specified by menu tag or else the items are deleted from the menubar The function returns an error if menu tag or one of the items specified is not found items can be a tag string of an existing item an array of tags of existing items a position index zero based integer of an item in the menu or an array of p
359. ile path for reading and or writing d at alo WW gt ty jm nunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn z file path Eini ay mode 2 z emor out deny mg 2 error ir Path To Array Of Strings Converts a path into an array of strings and indicates whether the path is relative Path To String Converts path into a string describing a path in the standard format of the platform Path Type Returns the type of the specified path indicating whether it is an absolute relative or invalid path This function checks only the format of the path not whether the path refers to an existing file or directory Therefore this function only indicates an invalid path for Not A Path path type LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Refnum To Path Returns the path associated with the specified refnum refnum path Seek Moves the current file mark of the file identified by refnum to the position indicated by pos offset according to the mode chosen by pos mode refnum pos mode 0 2 pos offset 0 emor ir String To Path Converts string describing a path in the standard format for the current platform to path Type and Creator Reads and sets the type and creator of the file specified by path File type and creator are four character strings If you do not specify new type or new creator this function returns the current settings unchanged path dup path ne
360. ile vi shows how error I O is implemented in a simple VI new file path NotaPath if cancelled character string Chasse flee resd continue of stop message on an error Read Filet aa Jwi z a Error Handler wvi file path dialog if empty C Ee Bo Ta Open File wi Close File wi nos mode rel to begin fol mark after read chars start of read offset chars 0 filg size The operation starts at Open File vi If it opens the file successfully Read File string vireads the file and Close File vi closes the file If you pass in an invalid path Open File vi detects the error and passes the error state through the other two VIs to the General Error Handler which reports it Notice that the only presence of error handling LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 10 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions on this block diagram is the error wire and the General Error Handler It is neither cumbersome nor distracting The error state consists of three pieces of information that are combined into the error cluster The status is a Boolean value TRUE if an error exists FALSE if it does not The code consists of a signed 32 bit integer that identifies the error A non zero error code coupled with a FALSE error status signals a warning rather than a fatal error For example a DAQ timeout event code 10800 typically is reported as a warning The source consists of a string that iden
361. ilities Table B 5 Analog Output Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Continued Channel Numbers FIFO Size Output Limits V Update Clocks Transfer Method Device AI MIO 16 16D 0 1 12 bit double 0 to 10 10 Update Interrupts buffered Vref clock 1 is ctr2 0 to Vref or external update Timebase signal range is 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 and 100 NB MIO 16 16X 0 1 MIO 16 12 bit 0 to 10 10 Update MIO 16 DMA MIO 16X Vref clock 1 MIO 16X 12 bit double 0 to Vref external DMA interrupts buffered update MIO 16X only Timebase signal range is 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 and 100 Table B 6 Analog Output Characteristics E Series Devices Ground Can Control AO Gating Reglitching Reference FIFO Request Pause Resume Multiple Buffers Device Capable Capable Supported Supported AT MIO 16E 1 Yes No No No Yes AT MIO 16E 2 AT MIO 64E 3 NEC MIO 16E VXI MIO 64E 1 AT MIO 16E 10 No No No Yes AT MIO 16DE 10 AT MIO XE 50 No No No No Yes NEC MIO 16XE 50 O National Instruments Corporation B 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 6 Analog Output Characteristics E Series Devices Continued Ground Can Control AO Gating Reglitching Reference FIFO Request Pause Resume Multiple Buffers Device Capable Capable Modes Supported Supported PCI MIO 16E 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes No CPCI 6070E PXI 6070E PCI 6071E PCI MIO 16E 4 N
362. imple Error Handler calls General Error Handler and has the same basic functionality as General Error Handler but with fewer options National Instruments Corporation 10 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual File Functions This chapter describes the low level VIs and functions that manipulate files directories and paths This chapter also describes file constants and the high level file VIs You access these functions constants and VIs by selecting Functions File I O 27H File 1 0 Bale eet FILE E F d The File I O palette includes the following subpalettes e Advanced File Functions e Binary File VIs e Configuration File VIs e File Constants For examples of File functions and VIs see examples file National Instruments Corporation 11 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions File 1 0 VI and Function Overview This section introduces the high level and low level file VIs and the File functions High Level File Vis You can use the high level file VIs to write or read the following types of data e Strings to text files e One dimensional 1D or two dimensional 2D arrays of single precision numbers to spreadsheet text files e 1D or 2D arrays of single precision numbers or signed word integers to byte stream files The high level file VIs described here call the low level file functions to perform complete easy to use file operations Thes
363. in the palette because many of the VI palettes also contain several subpalettes Finding Help Online for the DAQ VIs You can find helpful information about individual VIs online by using the LabVIEW Help window Help Show Help When you place the cursor on a VI icon the wiring diagram and parameter names for that VI appear in the Help window You can also find information for front panel controls or indicators by placing the cursor over the control or indicator with the Help window open For more information on the LabVIEW Help window refer to the Getting Help section in Chapter 2 Creating VIs of the LabVIEW User Manual In addition to the Help window LabVIEW has more extensive online information available To access this information select Help Online Reference For most block diagram objects you can select Online Reference from the object s pop up menu to access the online description You can also access this information by pressing the button shown to the left which is located at the bottom of LabVIEW s Help window For information on creating your own online reference files see the LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIS Creating Your Own Help Files section in Chapter 5 Printing and Documenting VIs of the G Programming Reference Manual Note Use only the inputs you need on each VI LabVIEW sets all unwired inputs to
364. ings for all the channels in the group task ID task ID out channel st 4 i facurrent hardware settings channel ty pe g poj error out error in no error i limit settings i Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges and output limits available with your DAQ device AO Parameter Sets miscellaneous parameters associated with the Analog Output operation of the devices that are not covered with other Analog Output VIs float in value im boolean im task ID in channels parameter name error in no error task ID out error oul AO Single Update Performs an immediate update of the channels in the group task ID opcode 0 no change scaled array empty eror in ho error brary array empty task ID out binary array written eor out AO Trigger and Gate Config Windows Configures the trigger and gate conditions for analog output operations on E Series devices and 5411 devices task ID task ID out tigger or gate source 0 tigger or gate condition error out error in no error tigger or gate source spe LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 22 4 National Instruments Corporation Easy Digital 1 0 Vis This chapter describes the Easy Digital I O VIs which perform simple digital I O operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications Access the Easy Digital I O VIs by choosing
365. input limit 1 1 0 lower input limit 2 10 0 upper input limit 2 10 0 lower input limit 3 10 0 upper input limit 3 10 0 National Instruments Corporation 18 9 Channels O and 1 have input limits of 1 0 to 1 0 the first time they are sampled and input limits of 10 0 to 10 0 the second time they are sampled LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs The range polarity and gain determine the lower and upper input limits When you wire valid input limit arrays that is arrays of lengths greater than zero the VI chooses suitable input ranges polarities and gains to achieve these input limits The VI ignores the range polarity and gain arrays If you do not wire the input limit arrays the VI checks range polarity and gain Where the VI finds an array it sets the corresponding input property to the values in the array Where the VI does not find an array it leaves the corresponding input property unchanged For some devices and SCXI modules onboard jumpers set range polarity and or gain LabVIEW does not alter the settings of jumpered parameters when you specify input limits If LabVIEW cannot achieve the desired input limits using the current jumpered settings it returns a warning To override the current jumper values you must call the AI Hardware Config VI and specify range polarity and or gain explicitly The configuration utility determi
366. iod of 90 days from date of shipment as evidenced by receipts or other documentation National Instruments will at its option repair or replace software media that do not execute programming instructions if National Instruments receives notice of such defects during the warranty period National Instruments does not warrant that the operation of the software shall be uninterrupted or error free A Return Material Authorization RMA number must be obtained from the factory and clearly marked on the outside of the package before any equipment will be accepted for warranty work National Instruments will pay the shipping costs of returning to the owner parts which are covered by warranty National Instruments believes that the information in this manual is accurate The document has been carefully reviewed for technical accuracy In the event that technical or typographical errors exist National Instruments reserves the right to make changes to subsequent editions of this document without prior notice to holders of this edition The reader should consult National Instruments if errors are suspected In no event shall National Instruments be liable for any damages arising out of or related to this document or the information contained in it EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CUSTOMER S RIGHT TO RECOVER D
367. ion you can add sequence locals that allow you to pass information from one frame to subsequent frames by popping up on the edge of the structure E For more information on how to use the Sequence structure in LabVIEW see Chapter 4 Case and Sequence Structures and the Formula Node in the LabVIEW User Manual For Loop Executes its subdiagram n times where n equals the value contained in the count terminal As an option you can add shift registers so that you can pass information from one iteration to the next by popping up on the edge of the structure For more information on how to use For Loop in LabVIEW see Chapter 3 Loops and Charts in the LabVIEW User Manual LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 3 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 3 Structures While Loop Executes its subdiagram until a Boolean value you wire to the conditional terminal is FALSE As an option you can add shift registers so you can pass information from one iteration to the next by popping up on the edge of the structure For more information on how to use While Loop in LabVIEW see Chapter 3 Loops and Charts in the LabVIEW User Manual Formula Node Executes mathematical formulae on the block diagram For more information on the Formula Node see Chapter 4 Case and Sequence Structures and the Formula Node in the LabVIEW User Manual Global Variable A built in LabVIEW object that you define by creating a special kind
368. ion analysis Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics VIs describes the VIs that perform probability descriptive statistics analysis of variance and interpolation functions Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs describes the VIs that perform real and complex matrix related computation and analysis Part IV Analysis VIs e Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs describes the VIs that perform common one and two dimensional numerical array operations e Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIs describes the VIs that use numerical methods to perform root finding numerical integration and peak detection LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual IV 2 National Instruments Corporation Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW This chapter introduces the LabVIEW Analysis VIs a description of how the VIs are organized instructions for accessing the VIs and obtaining online help and a description of Analysis VI error reporting To access the Analysis palette from the block diagram window choose Functions Analysis and proceed through the hierarchical menus to select the VI you want You can place the icon corresponding to that VI in the block diagram and then wire it F reat far ole ua F AHE SE National Instruments Corporation 37 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW Full Development System The base Analysis VI library is a subset of the advanced ana
369. ion name network visible false error National Instruments Corporation 53 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIs When opening a port using PPC Open Port you must specify a portName cluster alias location name network wisible false Refer to the LabVIEW online help for more information on this VI PPC Read Reads a block of information from a specified session If a timeout occurs or the VI aborts before completing execution the port that port refnum represents closes session retnum n bytes to read timeout ticks CO no timeout poll wait 10 ms PPC Read executes asynchronously by starting to read the specified data and then polling until the read is finished PPC Start Session Attempts to start a session with the application specified by target ID through the specified port If a timeout occurs or the VI aborts before completing execution the port represented by port refnum closes timeout ticks C0 no timeout port refnum session refnum user dafa 03 reject info Allow Dialog true error prompt LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 53 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIS PPC Write Writes a block of information to the specified session If a timeout occurs or the VI aborts before completing execution the port represented by port refnum is closed PPC Write executes asynchro
370. ions of the Advanced Analog Output VIs These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Analog Output VIs You can access the Advanced Analog Output palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Output Advanced Analog Output The icon that you must select to access the Advanced Analog Output VIs is on the bottom row of the Analog Output palette as shown below Au Au Au Ao MULT FT AULT FT OME FT OME FT Eley Advanced E E Analog Output VIs Advanced Analog Output VI Descriptions The following Advanced Analog Output VIs are available AO Buffer Config Allocates memory for an analog output buffer If you are using interrupts you can allocate a series of analog output buffers and assign them to a group by calling the AO Buffer Config VI multiple times Each buffer can have its own size If you are using DMA you may allocate only one buffer National Instruments Corporation 22 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs Use the number you assign to the buffer with this VI when you need to refer to this buffer for other VIs DSP handle task ID task ID out channel list x DSP handle out number of updates poy ELTE error out error in no error allocate mode butter number AO Buffer Write Writes analog output data to buffers created by the AO Buffer Config VI time limit 1 auto calcul
371. ire style represents the data type for each terminal as the following table shows Polymorphic functions show the wire style for the most commonly used data type 1D Array 20 Array 3D Array Number Boolean SSSR String ARRRRRRRH JEERESGSSE ARRRRRRAA General Cluster Cluster of Numbers LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 2 6 National Instruments Corporation Structures This chapter describes the Structures available in G To access the Structures palette select Functions Structures The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Structures palette Hire Functions EEA earl aH Structures EEE See examples general structs 11b for examples of how these structures are used in LabVIEW National Instruments Corporation 3 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 3 Structures Structures Overview The following Structures are available in G Case Structure Has one or more subdiagrams or cases exactly one of which executes when the structure executes Whether it executes depends on the value of the Boolean string or numeric scalar you wire to the external side of the terminal or selector For more information on how to use the Case structure in LabVIEW see Chapter 4 Case and Sequence Structures and the Formula Node in the LabVIEW User Manual Sequence Structure Consists of one or more subdiagrams or frames that execute sequentially As an opt
372. irect calls to the FFT routine to compute the complex cross power sequence This method is extremely efficient in both execution time and memory management because the VI performs the operations in place When the number of samples in X and Y are not equal n m where n is the number of samples in X and m is the number of samples in Y the VI first resizes the smaller sequence by padding it with zeros to match the size of the larger sequence If this size is a valid power of 2 max n m 2 for k 1 2 3 23 the VI computes the cross power spectrum using the FFT otherwise the VI uses the slower DFT to compute the cross power spectrum Thus the size of the complex output sequence is size max n m CrossCorrelation Computes the cross correlation of the input sequences X and Y Aay ema LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 39 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs The cross correlation R t of the signals x t and y t is defined as co RO x y x t y t Tdt oo where the symbol denotes correlation For the discrete implementation of this VI let h represent a sequence whose indexing can be negative let n be the number of elements in the input sequence X let m be the number of elements in the sequence Y and assume that the indexed elements of X and Y that lie outside their range are equal to zero x 0 j lt 0 or j n and y 0 j lt
373. iring additional flexibility For more information on low level functions see Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions General Functions The general functions are useful for special situations For more information on general functions see Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions Serial Port VI Overview The serial port VIs configure the serial port of your computer and conduct I O using that port For more information on serial port functions see Chapter 36 Serial Port VIs National Instruments Corporation 31 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 32 This chapter describes the Instrument Driver Template VIs These VIs are located in examples instr insttmpl 11b Instrument Driver Template VIs Introduction to Instrument Driver Template VIs The LabVIEW instrument driver templates are the foundation for all LabVIEW instrument driver development The templates have a simple flexible structure and a common set of instrument driver VIs that you can use for driver development The templates establish a standard format for all LabVIEW drivers and each has instructions for modifying it for a particular instrument The LabVIEW instrument driver templates contain the following 11 predefined template component VIs e PREFIX Initialize e PREFIX Initialize VXI Reg based e PREFIX Close e PREFIX Reset e PREFIX Self Test e PREFIX Error Query e PREFIX Error Query Multiple e PREFIX Error Message e PREFIX Revision Query
374. is event the LabVIEW application must be running and the VI must be open you can open the VI using the Open Documents AppleEvent The reply indicates whether the VI is currently running Event Class LBVW Custom events use the Applications creator type for the event class Event ID VIAC Event Parameters VI Name keyDirectObject typeChar char required Reply Parameters Active required keyDirectObject typeBoolean bool Possible Errors 1001 The VI front panel is not open 1004 The VI is not in memory National Instruments Corporation 52 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Event Close VI Description Tells LabVIEW to close the specified VI s Before executing this event the LabVIEW application must be running and the VI must be open you can open the VI using the Open Documents AppleEvent Event Class LBVW Custom events use the Applications creator type for the event class Event ID C VI Event Parameters Vi or List of VIs keyDirectObject typeChar char gt required or list of typeChar list Save Options keyAESaveOptions typeEnum enum not required savo possible values yes and no Reply Parameters Cr a Possible Errors 1001 The VI front panel is not open 1004 The VI is not in memory cancelError 43 The user cancelled the close operation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference
375. is larger than the destination G copies only the low order bits of the value The block diagram places a coercion dot on the border of a terminal where the conversion takes place to indicate that automatic numeric conversion occurred as in the following example Because VIs and functions can have many terminals a coercion dot can appear inside an icon if the wire crosses an internal terminal boundary before it leaves the icon connector as the following illustration shows Moving a wired icon stretches the wire Coercion dots can cause a VI to use more memory and increase its execution time You should try to keep data types consistent in your VIs Overflow and Underflow G does not check for overflow or underflow conditions on integer values Overflow and underflow for floating point numbers is in accordance with IEEE 754 Standard for binary floating point arithmetic Floating point operations propagate not a number NaN and Inf faithfully When you explicitly or implicitly convert NaN or Inf to an integer or Boolean value however you get a value that looks reasonable but is meaningless For example dividing by zero produces Inf but converting that value to a word integer gives the value 32 768 which is the largest value that can be represented in the destination format National Instruments Corporation 2 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview Wire Styles The w
376. is reported in only one place 33 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference VISA Operation Descriptions These functions appear on the main VISA palette The valid classes for these functions are Instr default GPIB Instr Serial Instr VXI GPIB V XI VME RBD Instr and VXI GPIB VXI MBD Instr Note The following Easy VISA VIs provide a simple interface to the functions they use If optimizing performance is important for your application use the VISA primitives also located in this palette Easy VISA Find Resources Finds all the VXI Serial and GPIB resources that are available for communication search 0A Devices return count error in no error eror out Easy VISA Read Reads data from the resource specified by the resource name The maximum number of bytes to be read is determined by the byte count resource name bytes to read 1024 b read butter timeout 10sec p Tetum count error in no error eor out Easy VISA Serial Write and Read Writes a command string to the specified serial device then reads the response data The read is terminated when the specified termination character is received or after receiving the number of bytes specified in the bytes to read parameter whichever is first If a termination character is required for writing to the instrument it needs to be included in the write buffer string parity 0 none termination char 0A
377. ith the arithmetic functions discussed in Chapter 4 Numeric Functions to generate more elaborate waveforms For example if you want to generate an amplitude modulated pulse you multiply a pulse pattern by a sinusoidal pattern To access the Signal Generation palette select Function Analysis Signal Generation The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Signal Generation palette e Analysis Signal Generation dye Fe eSignal Generation For examples of how to use the signal generation VIs see the examples located in examples analysis sigxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 38 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs Signal Generation VI Descriptions The following Signal Generation VIs are available Arbitrary Wave Generates an array containing an arbitrary wave Wave Table samples Arbitrary Weave amplitude phase out f Error phase in reset phase Interpolation If the sequence y represents Arbitrary Wave then the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula yli a arb phase z for i 0 1 2 n 1 where a is amplitude n is the number of samples arb phase i WT phase i modulo 360 m 360 where m is the size of the Wave Table array If interpolation 0 no interpolation then W7 x Wave Table int x If interpolation linear interpolation then W7 x is equal to the linearly int
378. itioning VI Descriptions The following Signal Conditioning VIs are available Convert RTD Reading Converts a voltage you read from an RTD into temperature in Celsius AT Otemp This VI first finds the RTD resistance by dividing RTDVolts by Iex The VI then converts the resistance to temperature using the following solution to the Callendar Van Dusen equation for RTDs Rt Ro 1 At Bf C t 100 For temperatures above 0 C the C coefficient is 0 and the preceding equation reduces to a quadratic equation for which the algorithm implemented in the VI gives the appropriate root So this conversion VI is accurate only for temperatures above 0 C Your RTD documentation should give you Ro and the A and B coefficients for the Callendar Van Dusen equation The most common RTDs are 100 Q platinum RTDs that either follow the European temperature curve DIN 43760 or the American curve The following table gives the values for A and B for the European and American curves A 3 90802e 03 A 3 9784e 03 B 5 80195e 07 B 5 8408e 07 a 0 00385 1 492 a 0 00392 1 492 Some RTD documentation gives values for a and d from which you can calculate A and B using the following equations A 1 0 100 B ad 1002 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 30 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIS Convert Strain Gauge Reading Converts a voltage you read from a s
379. its in the y direction you can add a point 5 8 to the graph The Polymorphic Combinations example below illustrates some of the possible polymorphic combinations of the Add function Similar One Scalar scalar E calar calar acalar anay anay gt aai array array scalar p cluster cluster cluster cluster cluster Neural array of clusters anay of clusters cluster Polymorphism for Transcendental Functions The transcendental functions accept numeric input data If the input is an integer the output is a double precision floating point number Otherwise the output has the same numeric representation as the input These functions work on numbers arrays of numbers clusters of numbers arrays of clusters of numbers complex numbers and so on Polymorphism for Conversion Functions All the conversion functions except Byte Array to String String to Byte Array Convert Unit and Cast Unit Bases are polymorphic Therefore the polymorphic functions work on scalar values arrays of scalars clusters of scalars arrays of clusters of scalars and so on The output has the same numeric representation as the input but with the new type National Instruments Corporation 4 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions When you compare signed and unsigned integers and the signed integer is negative the negative integer is changed to positive before the comparison occurs Therefore you do no
380. l Instruments data acquisition devices e Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities lists commands that IEEE 488 defines e Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages describes basic concepts you need to understand to operate GPIB e Appendix D Customer Communication contains forms to help you gather the information necessary to help us solve your technical problems and a form you can use to comment on the product documentation e The ndex contains an alphabetical list of VIs described in this manual including the page where you can find each one Conventions Used in This Manual lt gt bold bold italic Ctrl The following conventions are used in this manual Angle brackets enclose the name of a key on the keyboard for example lt shift gt Angle brackets containing numbers separated by an ellipsis represent a range of values associated with a bit or signal name for example DBIO lt 3 0 gt Square brackets enclose optional items for example response A hyphen between two or more key names enclosed in angle brackets denotes that you should simultaneously press the named keys for example lt Control Alt Delete gt The symbol leads you through nested menu items and dialog box options to a final action The sequence File Page Setup Options Substitute Fonts directs you to pull down the File menu select the Page Setup item select Options and finally select the Substitute Fon
381. l Port Outputs a decimal pattern to a digital channel that you specify pork width 8 device digital channel pattern Iteration O iritialize If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Note When you call this VI on a digital I O port that is part of an 8255 PPI when your iteration terminal is left at 0 the 8255 PPI goes through a configuration phase where all the ports within the same PPI chip get reset to logic low regardless of the data direction The data direction on other ports however is maintained To avoid this effect connect a value other than 0 to the iteration terminal once you have configured the desired ports National Instruments Corporation 23 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Intermediate Digital 1 0 Vis This chapter describes the Intermediate Digital I O VIs These VIs are single VI solutions to common digital problems For example the DIO Single Read Write VI is a single VI solution for non buffered digital reads and writes The DIO Single Read Write VI works with any device with digital ports You combine the other VIs DIO Config DIO Start DIO Read DIO Write DIO Wait and DIO Clear to build more demanding applications using buffered digital reads and writes Your device must support handshaking to use these VIs All the VIs described in this chapter are built from the fundamental building block layer the advanced
382. l SCXI string CALGND in your SCXI channel string as described in the Amplifier Offset section of Chapter 21 Common SCXI Applications in the LabVIEW Data Acquisition Basics Manual Use intermediate or advanced analog input VIs to get binary data instead of voltage data Note If your device supports dithering you should enable dither on your DAQ device when you take multiple readings and average them LabVIEW assumes the DAQ devices gain settings and SCXI modules are ideal when it scales binary readings to voltage unless you use this VI to determine actual gain values for the channels Apply a known precision voltage to each channel and take a binary reading or take multiple readings from each channel and compute an average binary reading for each channel Your precision voltage should be about ten times as accurate as the resolution of your DAQ device to produce meaningful results When you wire binary readings precision voltages and binary offsets to this VI LabVIEW determines the actual gain using the following formula boas cern aai enans voltage resolution binary reading binary offset precision voltage In this formula the voltage resolution value expressed in volts per LSB and is a value that varies depending on the DAQ device type the polarity setting and the input range setting For example the voltage resolution for a PCI MIO 16E 1 device in bipolar mode with an input National Instruments Corporation 30 9 LabVIEW Fun
383. l for at least 100 msec if the Controller has System Controller authority This action initializes the GPIB and makes the Controller port CIC You generally use sic when you want a device to become CIC or to clear a bus fault condition The IFC signal resets only the GPIB functions of bus devices it does not reset internal device functions The Device Clear DCL and Selected Device Clear SDC commands reset the device functions Consult the instrument documentation to determine the effect of these messages National Instruments Corporation 34 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions sre Unassert or assert remote enable syntax sre 0 unassert Remote Enable sre 1 assert Remote Enable sre unasserts or asserts the GPIB REN line Devices monitor REN when they select between local and remote modes of operation A device does not actually enter remote mode until it receives its listen address The ESAC error occurs if the Controller is not System Controller LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 14 National Instruments Corporation GPIB 488 2 Functions This chapter describes the IEEE 488 2 GPIB functions The following figure shows the GPIB 488 2 palette which you access by selecting Functions Instrument I O GPIB 488 2 eI Instrument 170 GPIB 488 2 sumi E iik For examples of how to use the GPIB 488 2 functions see examples instr smplgpib 1lb
384. l rates used clock CO no change ao error aut error in no error ticks per second 1 no ch clock source CO no change Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the clocks available with your DAQ device You can express clock rates three ways with ticks per second seconds per tick or the three timebase parameters The VI searches these parameters in that order and expresses clock rates on the first parameter with a wired valid input When you configure an update clock one tick equals one update When you configure the interval clock one tick equals one interval AO Control Starts pauses resumes and clears analog output tasks task ID task ID out control code staging list mz error in no error iterations pause fresume channel list error out AO Group Config Assigns a list of analog output channels to a group number and produces the taskID that all the other analog output VIs use dewice task ID out grou group size channel lis error in no error error out Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channels available with your DAQ device National Instruments Corporation 22 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs AO Hardware Config Configures the limits polarity and reference and whether data for a given channel is expressed in volts milliamperes if you are using channel numbers This VI always returns the current sett
385. l string segments are shown in square brackets VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB VXI GPIB VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB board primary address secondary address INSTR ASRL board INSTR pa ameme GPIB VXI board MEMACC The VXI keyword is used for VXI instruments via either embedded or MXIbus controllers The GPIB VXI keyword is used for a GPIB VXI controller The GPIB keyword can be used to establish communication with a GPIB device The ASRL keyword is used to establish communication with an asynchronous serial such as RS 232 device The following table shows the default value for optional string segments Optional String Segments Default Value board secondary address National Instruments Corporation 33 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference The following table shows examples of address strings A VXI device at logical address 1 in VXI interface VXIO GPILB VxXi2 INSTR A VXI device at logical address 9 in a GPIB V XI controlled system A GPIB device at primary address 1 secondary address 0 in GPIB interface 0 A serial device attached to interface ASRL1 Board level register access to the VXI interface GPIB VXI1 MEMACC Board level register access to GPIB V XI interface number 1 For the access mode parameter the value VI_EXCLUSIVE_LOCK 1 is used to acquire an exclusive lock immediately upon opening a se
386. lat Top Window 42 4 Flatten To String 13 4 Flush File 11 16 Flush Queue 13 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 Flush Serial Buffer 33 18 For Loop 3 2 Force Window 42 4 Format amp Append 6 15 Format amp Strip 6 16 Format Date Time String Function 10 6 Format Into String 6 6 Formula Node 3 3 From Decimal 6 16 From Exponential Fract Eng 6 16 From Hexadecimal 6 16 From Octal 6 17 G Gaussian White Noise 38 3 General Cosine Window 42 5 General Error Handler 10 11 General Histogram 44 6 General LS Linear Fit 43 3 General Polynomial Fit 43 3 Generate Delayed Pulse 26 2 Generate Occurrence 13 19 Generate Pulse Train 26 3 Get Channel Information 29 19 Get DAQ Channel Names 29 18 Get DAQ Device Information 29 13 Get Date Time In Seconds 10 8 Get Date Time String 10 8 Get Help Window Status 12 7 Get Menu Item Info 12 9 Get Menu Selection 12 9 Get Menu Shortcut Info 12 10 Get Notifier Status 13 10 Get Queue Status 13 13 Get Rendezvous Status 13 15 Get Scale Information 29 19 Get SCXI Information 29 14 Get Semaphore Status 13 18 Get Target ID 52 4 53 3 Global Variable 3 3 GPIB Clear 34 3 GPIB Initialization 34 4 GPIB Misc 34 4 GPIB Read 34 5 GPIB Serial Poll 34 5 GPIB Status 34 6 GPIB Trigger 34 6 National Instruments Corporation GPIB Wait 34 6 GPIB Write 34 6 Greater Or Equal To 0 9 7 Greater Or Equal 9 7 Greater Than 0
387. lder sea NU E error string cone containing Finder ae Server containing Finder send options LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Note Apple may change the set of AppleEvents to which the Finder responds so that they more closely conform to the standard set of AppleEvents As a result the AppleEvent that AESend Finder Open sends to the Finder may not be supported in future versions of the system software AESend Open Sends the Open AppleEvent to a specified target application object specifier error string target ID send options error AESend Open Document Sends the Open Document AppleEvent to the specified target application telling the application to open the specified document full pathname of oo error string Zone containing documen D server containing document Ener send options AESend Print Document Sends the Print Document AppleEvent to the specified target application telling the application to print the specified document full pathname of ea error string zone containing documen server containing document error send options AESend Quit Application Sends the Quit Application AppleEvent to a specified target application target ID error string send options E error National Instruments Corporation 52 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs LabVIEW Specific AppleEvent Vis
388. le Read Write 24 3 DIO Start 24 4 DIO Wait 24 4 DIO Write 24 4 dma Set DMA mode or programmed I O mode 34 10 Dot Product 45 11 Down Counter or Divider Config 27 4 DSA Calibrate 29 10 DSP2200 Calibrate Windows 29 11 DSP2200 Configure Windows 29 11 E Easy VISA Find Resources 33 4 Easy VISA Read 33 4 Easy VISA Serial Write and Read 33 4 Easy VISA Write 33 5 Easy VISA Write and Read 33 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Index EigenValues amp Vectors 45 11 Elliptic Coefficients 41 5 Elliptic Filter 41 5 Empty Path 11 27 Empty String 6 20 Empty String Path 9 6 Enable Menu Tracking 12 9 EnableLocal 35 4 EnableRemote 35 5 End of Line 6 20 EOF 11 15 Equal To 0 9 6 Equal 9 6 Equiripple BandPass 41 5 Equiripple BandStop 41 6 Equiripple HighPass 41 6 Equiripple LowPass 41 7 erf x 44 6 erfc x 44 6 E Series Calibrate 29 12 Event or Time Counter Config 27 5 Exact Blackman Window 42 3 Exclusive Or 5 4 Exponential 4 18 Exponential Arg 1 4 18 Exponential Fit 43 2 Exponential Fit Coefficients 43 2 Exponential Window 42 4 F F Distribution 44 6 Fast Hilbert Transform 39 10 FHT 39 12 File Dialog 11 16 File Directory Info 11 16 Find First Error 10 10 FindLstn 35 6 FindRQS 35 5 FIR Narrowband Coefficients 41 7 FIR Narrowband Filter 41 9 FIR Windowed Coefficients 41 9 FIR Windowed Filter 41 9 Fixed Constants 4 22 F
389. leEvent to the target LabVIEW application Y name error string target ID K send options E error AESend VI Active Sends the VI Active AppleEvent to the specified target LabVIEW application VI running is a Boolean indicating whether the VI is currently executing Y name running target ID error string send options i Advanced Topics This section describes some of the advanced programming you can do with AppleEvent VIs Constructing and Sending Other AppleEvents In addition to VIs that send common AppleEvents you can use lower level VIs to send any AppleEvent Using these VIs requires more knowledge of AppleEvents than using the VIs described earlier in this chapter If you are interested in using these VIs you should be familiar with the discussion of AppleEvents in Inside Macintosh Volume VI and the AppleEvent Registry When sending an AppleEvent you must include several pieces of information The event class and event ID identify the AppleEvent you are sending The event class is a four letter code which identifies the AppleEvent group For example an event class of core identifies an AppleEvent as belonging to the set of core AppleEvents The event ID is another four letter code that identifies the specific AppleEvent that you wish to send For example odoc 1s the four letter code for the Open Documents AppleEvent one of the core AppleEvents To send an AppleEvent using the AESend VI concatenate t
390. lities This appendix contains tables that summarize the analog and digital I O capabilities of National Instruments data acquisition DAQ devices The devices in this appendix are grouped into categories The DAQ device categories for these tables include the following e MIO and AI Devices e Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices e 54xx Series Devices e SCXI Modules e Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices e Analog Output Only Devices e Digital Only Devices e Timing Only Devices e 5102 Devices Hardware Capabilities Note Macintosh When a NuBus device indicates it supports DMA transfers a DMA device such as an NB DMA2800 is also required MIO and Al Device Hardware Capabilities Table B 1 Analog Input Configuration Programmability MIO and Al Devices All MIO E Series Devices By Channel By Channel By Channel By Channel DC All AI E Series Devices AC DC for PCI 6110E PCI 6111E AT MIO 16F 5 By Channel By Group By Group By Group AT MIO 64F 5 By Channel By Channel By Channel By Channel DC AT MIO 16X AT MIO 16 16D By Channel By Device By Device By Device DC NB MIO 16 NB MIO 16X National Instruments Corporation B 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities By Device means you select the value of a parameter with hardware jumpers and the selection affects any group of channels on the device By Group means you program the selection through software and the selection
391. ll responds by asserting a predetermined GPIB data line either TRUE or FALSE depending on the value of its local ist bit For example you can assign the GPIB Controller to drive the DIO3 data line TRUE if ist is 1 and FALSE if ist is 0 Conversely you can assign it to drive DIO3 TRUE if ist is 0 and FALSE if ist is 1 The Parallel Poll Enable PPE message in effect for each device determines the relationship among the value of ist the line that is driven and the sense at which the line is driven The Controller is capable of receiving this message either locally via ppe or remotely via a command from the CIC Once the PPE message executes ist changes the sense at which the GPIB Controller drives the line during the parallel poll and the GPIB Controller can convey a one bit device dependent message to the Controller ilo Local lockout syntax llo llo places all devices in local lockout state This action usually inhibits recognition of inputs from the front panel of the device llo sends the Local Lockout LLO command loc Place Controller in local state syntax loc loc places the GPIB Controller in a local state by sending the local message Return To Local RTL if it is not locked in remote mode indicated by the LOK bit of status You use loc to simulate a front panel RTL switch when you use a computer to simulate an instrument National Instruments Corporation 34 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual C
392. ls of three factors and performs a three way analysis of variance In any ANOVA you look for evidence that the factors or interactions among factors have a significant effect on experimental outcomes What varies with each model is the method used to do this Levels es Info Indes wa Signiticance Indes B eror Indes C observations per cell The three way ANOVA models are as follows where L is the number of observations per cell e Fixed effects with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell e Any of the six mixed effects models with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell e Random effects with interaction and L gt 1 observations per cell A factor is a basis for categorizing data A cell of data consists of all those experimental observations that fall in particular levels of the three factors The number of observations that fall in a cell must be some constant number L which does not vary between cells See the description of factors levels and cells in the 2D ANOVA VI description Remember that a LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 44 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vis cell in this 3D ANOVA Vlis the intersection of three factors instead of two as described in the 2D ANOVA VI description Chi Square Distribution Computes the one sided probability p of the y distributed random variable x with the specified degrees of freedom probability deg
393. ly the elements you want to access Because these functions reference components by name and not by cluster position you can change the data structure of a cluster without breaking wires as long as you do not change the name of or remove the component you reference on the block diagram Cluster Function Descriptions The following cluster functions are available Array To Cluster Converts a 1D array to a cluster of elements of the same type as the array elements Pop up on the node or resize it to set the number of elements in the cluster The default is nine The maximum cluster size for this function is 256 Build Cluster Array Assembles all the component inputs in top down order into an array of clusters of that component If the input is four single precision floating point components the output is a four element array of clusters containing one single precision floating point number Element 0 of the array has the value of the top component and so on array of clusters of component Bundle Assembles all the individual input components into a single cluster LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 8 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 8 Cluster Functions Bundle By Name Replaces components in an existing cluster After you wire the node to a cluster you pop up on the name terminals to choose from the list of components of the cluster cluster component 1 component 2 You must always wire t
394. lysis VI library available in the full development system The base analysis library includes VIs for statistical analysis linear algebra and numerical analysis The advanced analysis library includes more VIs in these areas as well as VIs for signal generation time and frequency domain algorithms windowing routines digital filters evaluations and regressions If the VIs in the base analysis library do not satisfy your needs then you can add the LabVIEW Advanced Analysis Libraries to the G Base Package After you upgrade you have all the analysis tools available in the Full Development System Refer to Chapter 38 through Chapter 47 which introduce each analysis subpalette for information on how to access a particular function or VI palette Analysis VI Overview The LabVIEW analysis VIs efficiently process blocks of information represented in digital form They cover the following major processing areas e Pattern generation e Digital signal processing e Measurement based analysis e Digital filtering e Smoothing windows e Probability and statistical analysis e Curve fitting e Linear algebra e Numerical analysis The Analysis VIs perform numerical operations using the central processing unit CPU and a floating point coprocessor FPU Many of the VIs take advantage of the concurrent processing capabilities of the CPU and the FPU thereby minimizing execution time of data analysis tasks LabVIEW Function and VI Ref
395. m IIR FIR and nonlinear digital filtering functions e Windows contains VIs that perform data windowing e Probability and Statistics contains VIs that perform descriptive statistics functions such as identifying the mean or the standard deviation of a set of data as well as inferential statistics functions for probability and analysis of variance ANOVA e Curve Fitting contains VIs that perform curve fitting functions and interpolations e Linear Algebra contains VIs that perform algebraic functions for real and complex vectors and matrices National Instruments Corporation 37 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW e Array Operations contains VIs that perform common one and two dimensional numerical array operations such as linear evaluation and scaling e Additional Numerical Methods contains VIs that use numerical methods to perform root finding numerical integration and peak detection You can reorganize the folders and the VIs to suit your needs and applications You can also rebuild the original structure by removing the VIs from your hard disk and then reinstalling them from the distribution disks Notation and Naming Conventions To help you identify the type of parameters and operations this section of the manual uses the following notation and naming conventions unless otherwise specified in a VI description Although there are a few scalar functions an
396. maphore 13 18 Remove Key 11 24 Remove Queue Element 13 14 Remove Section 11 24 Replace Array Element 7 6 ResetSys 35 6 Reshape Array 7 6 Resize Rendezvous 13 16 Reverse 1D Array 7 6 Reverse String 6 11 RMS 44 12 Rotate 1D Array 7 7 Rotate Left With Carry 13 5 Rotate Right With Carry 13 5 Rotate String 6 11 Rotate 13 5 Route Signal 29 16 rpp Conduct parallel poll 34 12 rsc Release or request system control 34 13 rsv Request service and or set the serial poll status byte 34 13 RTSI Control 29 16 S Sample Variance 44 12 Sawtooth Wave 38 6 Scale 1D 46 7 Scale 2D 46 7 Scaled Time Domain Window 40 6 Scaling Constant Tuner 29 17 30 9 Scan From String 6 11 Scan String for Tokens 6 13 SCXI Cal Constants 29 17 SCXI Temperature Scan 30 11 Search 1D Array 7 7 Secant 4 16 Seconds To Date Time 10 9 Seek 11 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Index Select 9 10 Select amp Append 6 13 Select amp Strip 6 14 Send 35 3 Send Notification 13 10 SendCmds 35 9 SendDataBytes 35 9 SendIFC 35 6 SendList 35 5 SendLLO 35 7 SendSetup 35 9 Sequence Structure 3 2 Serial Port Break 36 2 Serial Port Init 36 2 Serial Port Read 36 2 Serial Port Write 36 2 Set DAQ Device Information 29 17 Set Menu Item Info 12 11 Set Occurrence 13 20 Set SCXI Information 29 18 Set Serial Buffer Size 33 19 SetRWLS 35 7 SetTimeOut 35
397. mbolic string value of the enum For compatibility with C G treats a u conversion code unsigned integer the same as a d and ignores an 1 or L preceding the conversion code However in G the datatype of the parameter determines the size of an integer and whether the integer is signed or unsigned For examples of format string usage see the Format Into String and Scan From String function descriptions later in this chapter String Function Descriptions The following string functions are available Array To Spreadsheet String Converts an array of any dimension to spreadsheet string spreadsheet string is a table in string form containing delimiter separated column elements a platform dependent EOL character separating rows and for arrays of three or more dimensions separated pages delimiter ab format string spreadsheet stin array P J Concatenate Strings Concatenates input strings and one dimensional arrays of strings into a single output string For array inputs this function concatenates each element of the array string O MER concatenation of f E a a MH String stringi string n 1 string n i Format Into String Converts input arguments into resulting string whose format is determined by format string You increase the number of parameters by popping up on the node and selecting Add Parameter or by placing the Positioning tool over the lower left or right corner of the node then stretc
398. ment Index of element shart index 0 Sort 1D Array Returns a sorted version of array with the elements arranged in ascending order The rules for comparing each datatype are described in Chapter 9 Comparison Functions sorted array Split 1D Array Divides array at index and returns the two portions array first subarray index wat second subarray Threshold 1D Array Compares threshold y to the values in array of numbers or points starting at start index until it finds a pair of consecutive elements such that threshold y is greater than the value of the first element and less than or equal to the value of the second element The function then calculates the fractional distance between the first value and threshold y and returns the fractional index at which threshold y would be placed within array of numbers or points using linear interpolation array of numbers or points l l threshold y p fractional index or x start index 0 National Instruments Corporation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter7 Array Functions For example suppose array of numbers or points is an array of four numbers 4 5 5 6 start index is 0 and threshold y is 5 The fractional index or x is 1 corresponding to the index of the first value of 5 the function finds Suppose the array elements are 6 5 5 7 6 6 the start index is 0 and the threshold y is 6 or less The output is 0 If threshold y is greater than 7 for t
399. modified Bessel function Triangle Window Applies a triangular window to the input sequence X Triangle eF OF Note The Triangle smoothing window is also known as the Bartlett smoothing window If y represents the output sequence Triangle X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x tri w for i 0 1 2 n 1 2i n w n where tri w 1 Iwl and n is the number of elements in X National Instruments Corporation 42 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Curve Fitting VIs This chapter describes the VIs that perform curve fitting or regression analysis To access the Curve Fitting palette choose Functions Analysis Curve Fitting as shown in the following illustration e Analysis Curve Fitting For examples of how to use the regression VIs see the examples located in examples analysis regressn 11b National Instruments Corporation 43 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS Curve Fitting VI Descriptions The following Curve Fitting VIs are available Exponential Fit Finds the exponential curve values and the set of exponential coefficients amplitude and damping which describe the exponential curve that best represents the input data set Y Walues b Best Exponential Fit amplitude m values The general form of the exponential fit is given by F ae where F is the output sequence Best Exponential Fit X is t
400. mplete indicator of the DIO Write VI is TRUE taskID in taskID out direction b il check ever i milzecondz 5 pam m emor out eror in no error Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the handshake modes available with your DAQ device DIO Write Calls the Digital Buffer Write VI to write to the internal transfer buffer Macintosh You must fill the buffer with data before you use the DIO Start VI to begin the digital output operation You can call the DIO Write VI after the transfer begins to retrieve status information taskID in taskID out digital data butter iterations time limit in sec no chang ir g generation complete write location h error out error in no error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 24 4 National Instruments Corporation Advanced Digital 1 0 Vis This chapter describes the Advanced Digital I O VIs which include the digital port and digital group VIs You use the digital port VIs for immediate reads and writes to digital lines and ports You use the digital group VIs for immediate handshaked or clocked I O for multiple ports These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and the foundation of the Easy and Intermediate Digital I O VIs You can access the Advanced Digital I O palette by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Digital I O Advanced
401. n Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIs tl result fjar partial sums t0 J where j is a range dependent on the number of points and the method of integration The basic formulas for the computation of the partial sum of each rule in ascending method order are Trapezoidal x i x i 1 dt k 1 Simpsons x 2i 4x 2i 1 x 2i 2 dt 3 k 2 Simpsons 3 8 3x 37 9x 3i 1 9x 3i 2 3x 3i 3 dt 8 k 3 Bode 14x 47 64x 474 1 24x 4i 2 64x 4i 3 14x 4i 4 dt 45 k 4 for i 0 k 2k 3k 4k Integral Part of N 1 k where N is the number of data points k is an integer dependent on the method and x is the input array Peak Detector Finds the location amplitude and second derivative of peaks or valleys in the input array found rm Pee Locations threshold mplitudes width detect 2nd Derivatives peaks Syalleys i ERAR initialize TY wt i end of data CT The data set can be passed to the VI as a single array or as consecutive blocks of data This VI is based on an algorithm that fits a quadratic polynomial to sequential groups of data points The number of data points used in the fit is specified by width For each peak or valley the quadratic fit is tested against the threshold level peaks with heights lower than threshold or valleys with troughs higher than threshold are ignored peaks valleys are detected only after approximately width 2 data points have
402. n 0 lt index lt samples 20018 IndexLengthErr The index must meet the condition 0 lt index length lt samples 20019 UpperGELowerErr The upper value must be greater than or equal to the lower value LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 4 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 3 Analysis Error Codes Continued 20020 NyquistErr ee E 1 PRE frequency f must meet the condition S O lt f lt 5 2 20021 021 OrderGTZeroErr The order must be greater than zero 20022 DecFactErr The decimating factor must meet the condition 0 lt decimating lt samples 20023 BandSpecErr The band specifications must meet the condition s 0 S flow SShigh s 7 l 20028 M The attenuation must be greater than the ripple amplitude 2 200293 029 StepSizeEr The step size u must meet the condition 0 lt u lt 0 1 20030 LeakErr The leakage coefficient must meet the condition 0 lt leak lt u 20031 EqRplDesignErr The filter cannot be designed with the specified input values 20032 RankErr The rank of the filter must meet the condition 1 lt 2xrank 1 lt size 2 20033 033 The number of coefficients must be odd for this filter 2 20034 034 OddSizeErr The number of coefficients must be even for this filter 20035 StdDevErr The standard deviation must be greater than zero for normalization 20036 MixedSignErr The elements of the Y Values array must b
403. n be allocated either on the device itself or on the computer s system memory The memory region referenced by offset that is returned from this function can be accessed with the high level functions VISA Move In8 Move In16 Move In32 and VISA Move Out8 Move Out16 Move Out32 or it can be mapped using the VISA MapAddress function YISA session dup VISA session size 0 offset error in no error VISA Memory Free Frees the memory previously allocated by the VISA Memory Allocation function If the specified offset has been mapped using the VISA Map Address function it must be unmapped before the memory can be freed VISA session dup VISA session offset 0 eror in no error National Instruments Corporation 33 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA M VISA Library Reference ove In Move In16 Move In32 Moves a block of data from device memory to local memory in accesses of 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits respectively The VISA Move InXX functions use the specified address space to read 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits of data respectively from the specified offset These functions do not require the VISA Map Address to be called prior to their invocation address space A16 1 YISA session x dup VISA session offset 0 g data count 0 p eror Out emor in no error f ice Te M Yisa Move In 16 Wisa Move In 32 32 H bell rei The following table lists the valid ent
404. n by m Let A represent the 2D input array A matrix B represent the 2D input array B matrix and C represent the 2D output array A B The VI obtains the elements of C using the formula Ken P E E EN Ci X aub for 1 0 j 0 1 2 m 1 where n is the number of rows in A matrix k is the number of columns in A matrix and the number of rows in B matrix and m is the number of columns in B matrix Note The A x B VI performs a strict matrix multiplication and not an element by element 2D multiplication To perform an element by element multiplication you must use the LabVIEW Multiply function In general AB BA A x Vector Performs the multiplication of an input matrix and an input vector 4 Vector ector If A is an n by k matrix and X is a vector with k elements the multiplication of A and X Y AX results in a vector Y with n elements Let Y represent the output A x Vector The VI obtains the elements of Y using the formula LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs k 1 Ji X ajx fori 0 1 2 n j 0 where n is the number of rows in A and k is the number of columns in A and the number of elements in X Cholesky Factorization Performs Cholesky factorization for a real positive definite matrix A If the real square matrix A is positive definite you can factor it as A R R where R is an upper triangular matrix and R is the t
405. n the stimulus and response signals from a network under test The coherence function shows the frequency content of the Response Signal Y due to Stimulus Signal X and measures the validity of the network frequency response measurement You can use this VI to measure the coherence between any two signals The VI averages multiple stimulus and response signals to get valid coherence measurements Cross Power Spectrum and Impulse Response are the rms averaged versions of the similarly named VIs Frequency Response is the rms averaged version of the frequency response outputs of the Transfer Function VI Peak Detector For information on this VI see Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method VIs in this manual Power amp Frequency Estimate Computes the estimated power and frequency around a peak in the power spectrum of a time domain signal Power Spectrum Y 2 rms peak frequency kmax est frequency peak window constants est power peak With this VI you can achieve good frequency estimates for measured frequencies that lie between frequency lines on the spectrum The VI makes corrections for the window function you use Pulse Parameters Analyzes the input sequence X for a pulse pattern and determines the best set of pulse parameters that describes the pulse slew pate overshoot 1 etime a rAplitude Base chat error falltine width delay National Instruments Corporation 40 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Man
406. n using the specified counter and an adjacent counter The signal has the prescribed frequency duty cycle and polarity Each cycle of the pulse train consists of a delay phase phase 1 followed by a pulse phase phase 2 gate mode Cungated 0 pulse polarity Chigh 0 device PLILSE taskID of counter counter f TRAIN taskID of counter 1 number of pulses cont 0 rin wa ata parameters frequency Hz duty cycle 0 5 This VI uses only the specified counter to generates a continuous pulse For a finite length pulse the VI also uses counter 1 to generate a minimum delayed pulse to gate counter To generate another pulse train execute the intermediate Counter Start VI with the taskIDs supplied by this VI To stop a continuous pulse train execute the intermediate Counter Stop VI or execute this counter again to generate one short pulse You must externally wire counter 1 s OUT pin to counter s GATE pin for a finite length pulse train You can optionally gate or trigger the start of the train with a signal on counter 1 s GATE pin J ote pulse train consists of a series of delayed pulses where phase 1 or the first phase i Not A pul ists of a series of delayed pul here phase 1 or the first ph of each pulse is the inactive state of the output low for a high pulse and the phase 2 of the second phase is the pulse itself Measure Frequency Measures the frequency of a TTL signal on the specified counter s SOURCE
407. nce Manual Chapter7 Array Functions Interleave 1D Arrays Interleaves corresponding elements from the input arrays into a single output array arrayQ array 1 interleaved array Interpolate 1D Array Uses the integer part of fractional index or x to index the array and the fractional part of fractional index or x to linearly interpolate between the values of the indexed element and its adjacent element array of numbers or points fractional index or x Replace Array Element Replaces the element in array at index with the new element array Elia array with new element i new element indes at Reshape Array Changes the dimension of an array according to the value of dimension size The function is resizable m dim array has one dimension for each dimension size input For example you can use this function to change a 1D array into a 2D array or vice versa You also can use it to increase and decrease the size of a 1D array n dinm array ENE m dim array dimension size eH Reverse 1D Array Reverses the order of the elements in array array reversed array LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 7 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 7 Array Functions Rotate 1D Array Rotates the elements of array by the number of places and in the direction indicated by n oon aray last n elements first Search 1D Array Searches for element in 1D array starting at start index 1D array ele
408. nce Manual 29 12 National Instruments Corporation Note Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Calibration of your E Series device takes some time Do not be alarmed if the VI takes several seconds to execute A Warning When you run this VI with the operation set to self calibrate or external calibrate LabVIEW will abort any ongoing operations the device is performing and set all configurations to their defaults Therefore you should run this VI before any other DAQ VIs or when no other operations are running 12 Bit E Series Devices Connect the positive output of your reference voltage source to the analog input channel 8 Connect the negative output of your reference voltage source to the AISENSE line Connect DACO line analog output channel 0 with analog input channel 0 If your reference voltage source and your computer are floating with respect to each other connect the AISENSE line with the AIGND line as well as with the negative output of your reference voltage source 16 Bit E Series Devices Connect the positive output of your reference voltage source to the analog input channel 0 Connect the negative output of your reference voltage source to the analog output channel 8 by performing those two connections you supply reference voltage to the analog input channel 0 which is configured for differential operation If your reference voltage source and your computer are floating with respect to each other
409. nctions are polymorphic They work on scalar values arrays of scalars clusters of scalars arrays of clusters of scalars and so on The output has the same composition as the input but with the new type Format Strings Overview Many G functions accept a format string input which controls the behavior of the function A format string is composed of one or more format specifiers which determine what action to take to process a given parameter The Format Into String and Scan From String functions can use multiple format specifiers in the format string one for each resizable input or output to the function Characters in the string that are not part of the format specifier are copied verbatim to the output string in the case of Format Into String or are matched exactly in the input string in the case of Scan From String with the exception of special escape codes You can use these codes to insert nondisplayable characters the backslash and percent characters within any format string These codes are similar to those used in the C programming language Table 6 1 displays the special escape codes A code does not exist for the platform dependent end of line EOL character If you need to append one use the End of Line constant from the String palette LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 1 Special Escape Codes XX character with hexadecimal ASCII code
410. nd hardware and to allocate a buffer for the data It also calls the AO Write VI to write the given data into the buffer and then the AO Start VI to set the update rate and start the signal generation On each subsequent iteration the VI LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 21 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility Vis calls the AO Write VI to write the next portion of data into the buffer at the current write position On the last iteration when clear generation is TRUE or if an error occurs the VI also calls the AO Clear VI to clear any generation in progress Although it is not normally necessary you can call the AO Continuous Gen VI outside of a loop that is to call it only once But if you do leave the iteration and clear generation inputs unwired The first call to the AO Write VI sets allow regeneration to TRUE so that the same data can be generated more than once If you change allow regeneration to FALSE you must write new data fast enough that new data is always available to be generated If you do not fill the buffer fast enough you get a regeneration error To correct this problem decrease the update rate increase the buffer size increase the amount of data written each time or write data more often If you set allow regeneration to FALSE and your device has an analog output FIFO your buffer size must be at least twice as big as your FIFO If an error occurs the VI calls the AO
411. nd shows where you can find them in LabVIEW Descriptions of these VIs comprise Chapter 14 through Chapter 29 LabVIEW includes a collection of VIs that work with your DAQ hardware devices With LabVIEW DAQ VIs you can develop acquisition and control applications You can find the DAQ VIs in the Functions palette from your block diagram in LabVIEW The DAQ VIs are located near the bottom of the Functions palette To access the Data Acquisition palette choose Functions Data Acquisition as shown in the following illustration eet x Data Acquisition Aco son sets National Instruments Corporation 14 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs The Data Acquisition palette contains six subpalette icons that take you to the different classes of DAQ VIs The following illustration shows what each of the icons in the Data Acquisition palette means Analog Output VIs Digital I O VIs Analog Input Vis I Counter VIs Calibration and Configuration VIs Signal Conditioning VIs This part of the manual is organized in the order that the DAQ VI icons appear in the Data Acquisition palette from left to right For example in this section the Analog Input VI chapters are followed by the Analog Output VI chapters which are followed by the Digital I O VI chapters and so on Most often there are several chapters devoted to one class of DAQ VIs
412. nds the least square solution X which minimizes IIA X YII When m lt n the system has more unknowns than equations so it is an underdetermined system It might have infinite solutions that satisfy AX Y The VI then selects one of these solutions When m n if A is a nonsingular matrix no row or column is a linear combination of any other row or column respectively then you can solve the system for X by decomposing the Input Matrix A into its lower and upper triangular matrices L and U such that AX LZ Y and N II UX National Instruments Corporation 45 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIS can be an alternate representation of the original system Notice that Z is also an n element vector Triangular systems are easy to solve using recursive techniques Consequently when you obtain the L and U matrices from A you can find Z from the LZ Y system and X from the UX Z system When m n A can be decomposed to an orthogonal matrix Q and an upper triangular matrix R so that A QR and the linear system can be represented by QRX Y You can then solve RX Q Y You can easily solve this triangular system to get X using recursive techniques Note You cannot always determine beforehand whether the matrix is singular especially with large systems The Inverse Matrix VI detects singular matrices and returns an error so you do not need to verify whether you have a v
413. neering notation or exponential or fractional format and returns it in number OSE Daz NUMOEl number Note If you wire the characters Inf or NaN to string this function returns the G values Inf and NaN respectively From Hexadecimal Interprets the characters 0 through 9 A through F and a through f in string starting at offset as a hex integer and returns it in number silsakl m sek rria hkar offset past numDer number Aaka al 7 Deal il UUL i ee A a I i i LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions From Octal Interprets the characters 0 through 7 in string starting at offset as an octal integer and returns itin number This function also returns the index in string of the first character following the number To Decimal Converts number to a string of decimal digits width characters wide or wider if necessary decimal integer string To Engineering Converts number to an engineering format floating point string width characters wide or wider if necessary Engineering format is similar to E format except the exponent is a multiple of three 3 0 3 6 numar Engineering string To Exponential Converts number to an E format exponential notation floating point string width characters wide or wider if necessary 1 ith oh i E format string 6 To Fractional Converts number to an F forma
414. nes the initial setting for these parameters the default value is the factory jumper setting If a pair of input limits values are both 0 the VI does not change the input limits SCXI channel hardware configurations are actually a combination of SCXI module and DAQ device settings and require special considerations The way you specify channels indicates whether LabVIEW alters the SCXI module settings and or the DAQ device settings The input limits parameter always applies to the entire acquisition path When you configure on a per group basis LabVIEW may alter both SCXI module and DAQ device settings In this case gain applies to the entire path and is the product of the SCXI channel gain and acquisition device channel gain LabVIEW sets the highest gain needed on the SCXI module then adds DAQ device gain if necessary When configuration is on a per channel basis you can specify the channels in one of three ways The first way is to specify the entire path as in the following example OBOTSCLIMDODLICHO S7 Also you can specify the path using channel names configured in the DAQ Channel Wizard as in the following example temperature If you use either of these methods LabVIEW can alter both SCXI and DAQ device settings and gain applies to the product of the SCXI channel gain and the DAQ device gain LabVIEW sets the highest gain needed on the SCXI module then adds DAQ device gain if necessary The second method is to specify t
415. nfig VI to set your desired gate modes output polarity and output type Use the CTR Pulse Config VI to specify timebase source and timebase signal for pulse generation because LabVIEW ignores these values specified in the CTR Mode Config VI National Instruments Corporation 28 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs CTR Control Controls and reads groups of counters Control operations include starting stopping and setting the output state change parameter data output state task ID task ID out counter list read value aray control code PST g eA overflow state array emor in no eror eee eror out fout data output state array ICTRControl Controls counters on devices that use the 8253 chip Lab and 1200 Series devices 516_devices PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 and DAQCard 700 count output state device read yalue counter control code gen error out error in no error binary or bed LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 28 10 National Instruments Corporation Calibration and Configuration VIs This chapter describes the VIs that calibrate specific devices and set and return configuration information This chapter also includes a VI for controlling the RTSI bus which is a triggering and timing bus you can use to synchronize time and trigger multiple DAQ devices Windows There is also a VI you can use to set up data acquisition event occurrenc
416. ng the property value If the small direction arrow on the property is on the right you are getting the property value l dup reference error in no error soca Vico BOR OUT attribute 1 attribute 4 ae ee Y ee iar I If the property to be written is of ActiveX Variant type then you can wire in G data types and they will automatically be converted to variant data types and indicated by a coercion dot If the property is of ActiveX Variant type use the ActiveX Variant to G function to convert to G type if needed National Instruments Corporation 51 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 51 ActiveX Automation Functions Data Conversion Function Some applications provide ActiveX data in the form of a self describing data type called an ActiveX or OLE Variant To review the data or process it in G you must convert it to a corresponding V data type To convert ActiveX Variant data to G data use the ActiveX Variant to G Data function described below ActiveX Variant to G Data Converts ActiveX Variant data to data that can be displayed in LabVIEW type Actives YVanant Emor ir LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 51 4 National Instruments Corporation AppleEvent Vis Note This chapter applies only to users running LabVIEW on the Macintosh System 7 platform This chapter describes the LabVIEW VIs for AppleEvents one form of interapplication communication IAC through which Macintosh appl
417. ng to write eror code LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 36 2 National Instruments Corporation Analysis VIs Part IV Analysis VIs describes the Analysis VIs This part contains the following chapters Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW introduces the LabVIEW Analysis VIs It also provides a description of how the VIs are organized instructions for accessing the VIs and obtaining online help and a description of Analysis VI error reporting Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs describes the VIs that generate one dimensional arrays with specific waveform patterns Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs describes the VIs that process and analyze an acquired or simulated signal The Digital Signal Processing VIs perform frequency domain transformations frequency domain analysis time domain analysis and other transforms such as the Fourier Hartley and Hilbert transforms Chapter 40 Measurement VIs describes the Measurement VIs which are streamlined to perform DFT based and FFT based analysis with signal acquisition for frequency measurement applications as seen in typical frequency measurement instruments such as dynamic signal analyzers Chapter 41 Filter VIs describes the VIs that implement IIR FIR and nonlinear filters Chapter 42 Window VIs describes the VIs that implement smoothing windows Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIs describes the VIs that perform curve fitting or regress
418. no error NL tg Error Message emor out PREFIX Initialize and PREFIX Initialize VXI Reg based The Initialize VI is the first VI called when you are accessing an instrument driver It configures the communications interface manages handles and sends a default command to the instrument Typically the default setup configures the instrument operation for the rest of the driver including turning headers on or off or using long or short form for queries After successful operation the Initialize VI returns a VISA session that addresses the instrument in all subsequent instrument driver VIs The Initialize VI is a template for message based instruments while Initialize VXI Reg based is for register based instruments VISA session emor out error in no error The VI has an Instrument Descriptor string as an input Based on the syntax of this input the VI configures the I O interface and generates an instrument handle for all other instrument driver VIs The following table shows the grammar for the Instrument Descriptor Optional parameters are shown in square brackets Interface GPIB GPIB board primary address secondary address INSTR VXI VXI VXI logical address INSTR GPIB V XI GPIB VXI board GPIB VXI primary address VXI logical address INSTR Serial ASRL board INSTR National Instruments Corporation 32 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 32 Instrument Dri
419. nously by starting to write the specified data and then polling until the write is finished timeout ticks O no timeout session retnurm data bytes data info length written error poll wait 10 ms National Instruments Corporation 53 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Error Codes This document contains tables listing all the numeric error codes for LabVIEW Connect error handler VIs to other VIs to return a description of an error if one occurs Error handler VIs also can display a dialog box with an error message description and with buttons that can stop or continue execution See the Error Handling topic in the LabVIEW Online Reference for more information about error handlers Note All error codes and descriptions are also included in the configuration utility help panels in Windows and Macintosh platforms Numeric Error Codes The tables are arranged roughly in ascending order from negative to positive values Tables with negative number values are arranged from the smallest absolute value to the largest absolute value Notice that error codes 5000 to 9999 are reserved for your own use Table A 1 Numeric Error Code Ranges gt 1073807360 w 1073807231 National Instruments Corporation A 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 1 Numeric Error Code Ranges Continued 1000 to 1004 LabVIEW Specific AppleEvent Error Codes 14001 to 14020 DDE Error Code
420. ns The following illustration shows the options for the Trigonometric subpalette Trigonometric Cosecant Computes the cosecant of x where x is in radians Cosecant is the reciprocal of sine Cosine Computes the cosine of x where x is in radians Cotangent Computes the cotangent of x where x is in radians Cotangent is the reciprocal of tangent 1 hari Hyperbolic Cosine Computes the hyperbolic cosine of x H coshis LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Hyperbolic Sine Computes the hyperbolic sine of x X sinhi x Hyperbolic Tangent Computes the hyperbolic tangent of x tanh s Inverse Cosine Computes the arccosine of x in radians If x is not complex and is less than 1 or greater than 1 the result is NaN Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine Computes the hyperbolic argcosine of x If x is not complex and is less than 1 the result is NaN angcosh s Inverse Hyperbolic Sine Computes the hyperbolic argsine of x X argaimnhfs National Instruments Corporation 4 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Inverse Hyperbolic Tangent Computes the hyperbolic argtangent of x If x is not complex and is less than 1 or greater than 1 the result is NaN X angtanh s Inverse Sine Computes the arcsine of x in radians If x is not complex and is less than 1 or great
421. nter VIs which are in turn composed of Advanced Counter VIs The Easy Counter VIs provide a basic convenient interface with only the most commonly used inputs and outputs For more complex applications you should use the intermediate or advanced level VIs for more functionality and performance Refer to Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs for specific VI information Intermediate Counter Input VIs ey tht Fa Enn Intermediate Counter VI Icon You can find the Intermediate Counter VIs in the second row of the Counter palette The Intermediate Counter VIs are in turn built from the fundamental building block layer called the Advanced Counter VIs These VIs offer almost as much power as the advanced level VIs and they conveniently group the advanced level VIs into a tidy logical sequence Refer to Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs for specific VI information National Instruments Corporation 14 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs Advanced Counter VIs ETL Fi Advanced Counter VI Icon You can access the Advanced Counter palette by choosing the Advanced Counter icon from the Counter palette These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy and Intermediate Counter VIs Because all these VIs rely on the advanced level VIs you can refer to Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs for additional information on the inputs and
422. ntil the VI exhausts the arrays If channels in channel list or in the group remain unconfigured the VI applies the final values in the arrays to all the remaining unconfigured channels If you want to adjust only the channel offsets and you want to assume the gain settings on the DAQ device and SCXI modules are ideal wire only binary offsets and leave precision voltages and binary readings unwired You can also use this VI to retrieve the binary offset and actual gain values for all the channels in the group by wiring taskID only After you use this VI to adjust the scaling constants for a channel path any analog input VIs that return voltage data use the adjusted constants for scaling You can use the AI Group Config VI to reset the scaling constants for each channel in the group to their default values zero offset and ideal gain LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 30 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIS SCXI Temperature Scan This VI returns a single scan of temperature data from a list of SCXI channels The SCXI Temperature Scan VI uses averaging to reduce 60 Hz and 50 Hz noise performs thermocouple linearization and performs offset compensation for the SCXI 1100 module CJC sensor type CIC temperature units CC devicel1 PT R E readings channels CobOlse 1 mdi 10 5 2 channel sensor types J te a p error out channel signal limits 4500 dF error in na error iteration
423. o 10V 5V 0 20mA sink software selectable AT AO 10 only LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 20 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 26 Analog Input Configuration Programmability Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices TEISA A2000 A2000 Bipolar Tsp dBy By Channel NB A2000 NB A2100 2 828 Bipolar By Group AT DSP2200 NB A2150 1 2 828 Bipolar SE By Channel pair 0 and 1 AT A2150 2 and 3 Note By Device means you Select the value of a parameter with hardware jumpers and the selection affects any group of channels on the device By Group means you program the selection through software and the selection affects all the channels used at the same time By Channel means you program the selection with hardware jumpers or through software on a per channel basis When a specific value for a parameter is shown that parameter value is fixed Table B 27 Analog Output Characteristics Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices Channel Transfer Device Numbers DAC Type Output Limits Update Clocks Method PCI 4451 0 1 18 bit 10V 1V 100 Update clock 1 DMA PCI 4552 National Instruments Corporation B 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 28 Analog Input Characteristics Dynamic Signal Acquisition Devices Number of Channels Resolution Range V Inp
424. o Yes Yes Yes No CPCI 6040E PXI 6011E PCI MIO 16XE 10 CPCI 6030E PXI 6030E PCI 6031E DAQPad 6020E 6020E PCI 6110E PCI 6111E Table B 7 Digital I O Hardware Capabilities MIO and Al Devices Port Port Handshake DIO Transfer Device Type Numbers Modes Direction Clocks Method All MIO 16 Devices 4 bit 0 1 No handshaking Read or write None Software AT MIO 16D ports polling AT MIO 64F 5 All MIO 16E Devices 8 bit No handshaking Bit wise Software All NEC E Series Devices ports direction polling AT MIO 64E 12 control AT MIO 16DE 10 AT MIO 16XE 50 DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 PCI MIO 16XE 50 PXI 6040E MIO 16E 4 PXI 6070E MIO 16E 1 PXI 6071E MIO 64E 1 PCI 6031E MIO 64XE 10 PCI 6032E AI 16XE 10 PCI 6033E AI 64XE 10 PCI 61 10EPCI 6111E LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 8 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 7 Digital I O Hardware Capabilities MIO and Al Devices Continued Port Port Handshake Transfer Pe _ Leo Be eee a eee eet Clocks eee ee TarmMioisp S E 2 A on me or aae Pea AT MIO 16DE 10 ports or off write port 2 may be bidirectional 8 bit 4 No Read or write None Software ports handshaking polling Unusable if port 2 or 3 uses handshaking l These devices appear more than once in this table because they have enhanced digital functionality Table B 8 Counter Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Timebases Ava
425. o set the scan rate for devices in slave list until you run A2150 Config again on device with master clock equal to 1 and number of slaves equal to 0 Note Executing A2150 Config with master clock equal to 1 and number of slaves equal to 0 deconfigures the devices previously in the slave list and sets them up to use their own sampling clock signal A2150 Calibrate Macintosh Performs offset calibrations on the ADCs of the specified AT A2150 device device out ADCO reference ALCI reference Status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for more information on the AT A2150 DAQ device When you launch LabVIEW or when you reset the AT A2150 LabVIEW performs an offset calibration using the analog ground as the reference Use this VI only for device calibration to an external reference or for device recalibration for ground reference after using an external reference A0 6 10 Calibrate Windows Loads a set of calibration constants into the calibration DACs or copies a set of calibration constants from one of four EEPR
426. ock slave is invalid 17 noClkSrcError No source signal has been assigned to the clock resource 10618 badClkSrcError The specified source signal cannot be assigned to the clock resource 10619 multClkSrcError A source signal has already been assigned to the clock resource 10620 noTrigError No trigger signal has been assigned to the trigger resource 10621 badTrigError The specified trigger signal cannot be assigned to the trigger resource 10622 preTrigError The pretrigger mode is not supported or is not available in the current configuration or no pretrigger source has been assigned National Instruments Corporation A 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10623 postTrigError No posttrigger source has been assigned 10624 delayTrigError The delayed trigger mode is not supported or is not available in the current configuration or no delay source has been assigned 10625 The trigger configuration for the trigger master is invalid 10626 slaveTrigError The trigger configuration for the trigger slave is invalid 10627 noTrigDrvError No signal has been assigned to the trigger resource 10628 multTrigDrvError A signal has already been assigned to the trigger resource 10629 invalidOpModeError The specified operating mode is invalid or the resources have not been configured for the specified operating mode 10630
427. of VI with front panel controls that define the datatype of the global variable You can read and write values to the global variable For more information on the Global Variable see Chapter 23 Global and Local Variables in the G Programming Reference Manual National Instruments Corporation 3 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 3 Structures Local Variable Lets you read or write to one of the controls or indicators on the front panel of your VI Writing to a local variable has the same result as passing data to a terminal except that you can write to it even though it is a control or read from it even though it is an indicator LOCAL For more information on the Local Variable see Chapter 23 Global and Local Variables in the G Programming Reference Manual LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 3 4 National Instruments Corporation Numeric Functions This chapter describes the functions that perform arithmetic complex conversion logarithmic and trigonometric operations It also describes the commonly used constants such as the Numeric constant Enumerated constant and Ring constant as well as additional numeric constants To access the Numeric palette select Functions Numeric The following illustration shows the options that are available on the Numeric palette The Numeric palette includes the following subpalettes Additional Numeric Constants
428. og Input VIs Refer to Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs for specific VI information Locating Analog Input VI Examples For examples of how to use the analog input VIs see examples daq anlogin anlogin 11lb National Instruments Corporation 14 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs Analog Output Vis These VIs perform analog output operations The Analog Output VIs can be found by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Output When you click on the Analog Output icon in the Data Acquisition palette the Analog Output palette pops up as shown in the following illustration eH Analog Output A Au AQ A AULT FT AULT FT OME OME FT FT Bio BBLS AQ Al AQ AQ Ag COHMFIG WRITE START nS CLEAR Ete Ea lee Ee ee UTIL ADI f p oN There are four classes of Analog Output VIs found in the Analog Output palette the Easy Analog Output VIs Intermediate Analog Output VIs Analog Output Utility VIs and the Advanced Analog Output VIs The following illustrates these VI classes T HULT FT Easy Analog ai atna i Output VIs A CONFIG Intermediate el Analog Output VIs BS Advanced Analog Output VIs Analog Output Utility Vis LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 14 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs Easy Analog Output Vis T
429. ollowing illustration shows the UDP palette which you access by selecting Functions Communication UDP UDP VI Descriptions The following UDP VIs are available UDP Close Closes the UDP connection specified by connection ID connection IO connmectian ID out _ error in Coo errori ooo Ee Pr Out UDP Open Attempts to open a UDP connection on the given port connection ID is an opaque token used in all subsequent operations relating to the connection port connection ID error in no error error out National Instruments Corporation 49 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 49 UDP VIs UDP Read Returns a datagram in the string data out that has been received on the UDP connection specified by connection ID connection ID E connection I out mas size 545 tar data out timeout ms 25000 error out error in no error port address UDP Write Writes the string data in to the remote UDP connection specified by address and port port address connection ID E connection ID out data in error in no error error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 49 2 National Instruments Corporation DDE VIs This chapter describes the LabVIEW VIs for Dynamic Data Exchange DDE for Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT These VIs execute DDE functions for sharing data with other applications that accept DDE connections The following illustra
430. olynomial Fit Coefficients which describe the polynomial curve that best represents the input data set Y Values j Eest Folynomial Fit A values EE Polynomial Fit Coefficients polynomial order H mse algorithm error The general form of the polynomial fit is given by m J f aX j 0 where f represents the output sequence Best Polynomial Fit x represents the input sequence X Values a represents the Polynomial Fit Coefficients and m is the polynomial order National Instruments Corporation 43 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS Linear Fit Finds the line values and the set of linear coefficients slope and intercept which describe the line that best represents the input data set Best Linear Fit Y Values he slope a intercept Values bl ies P EFF OF The general form of the linear fit is given by F mX b where F represents the output sequence Best Linear Fit X represents the input sequence X Values m is slope and b is intercept The VI obtains mse using the formula n l1 l 2 mse X y n i 0 where F represents the output sequence Best Linear Fit y represents the input sequence Y Values and n is the number of data points Linear Fit Coefficients Finds the set of linear coefficients slope and intercept which describe the line that best represents the input data set T Values a values This VI is a subVI of the Linear Fit VI The general f
431. omed to in LabVIEW For example parallel calls using the Call By Reference node to a reentrant VI using the same VI reference do not execute in parallel but execute serially one after the other Notice that a VI reference is similar to what is known as a function pointer in other languages However in LabVIEW these function pointers also can be used to call VIs across the network Print Panel Produces the same printout as programmatic print at completion but can be called from other VIs and at times other than at completion By default it prints the entire panel not just what is visible in the window This VI assumes that the VI is loaded but does not require the window to be open YI name Entire Panel T ccc error in no error Property Node Sets writes or gets reads VI and application property information To select the VI or application class pop up on the node and select from the Select VI Server Class submenu To select an application class select Application To select a VI class select Virtual Instrument or wire the VI or application refnum to reference and the node choices change accordingly To select a specific property pop up on one of the name terminals and select Properties To set property information pop up and select Change to Write and to get property information pop up and select Change to Read Some properties are read only so you cannot see Change to Write in the pop up menu The Property no
432. omparing the first set of elements to produce the output unless the first elements are equal in which case the function compares the second set of elements and so on National Instruments Corporation 9 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Comparison Function Descriptions The following Comparison functions are available Decimal Digit Returns TRUE if char is a decimal digit ranging from 0 through 9 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Empty String Path Returns TRUE if string path is an empty string or path Otherwise this function returns FALSE Equal Returns TRUE if x is equal to y Otherwise this function returns FALSE Equal To 0 Returns TRUE if x is equal to 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Greater Returns TRUE if x is greater than y Otherwise this function returns FALSE LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 9 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 9 Comparison Functions Greater Or Equal Returns TRUE if x is greater than or equal to y Otherwise this function returns FALSE Greater Or Equal To 0 Returns TRUE if x is greater than or equal to 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Greater Than 0 Returns TRUE if x is greater than 0 Otherwise this function returns FALSE Hex Digit Returns TRUE if char is a hex digit ranging from 0 through 9 A through F or a through f Otherwise this function returns FALS
433. omparison functions test one input or compare two inputs and return a Boolean value The functions convert numbers to the same representation before comparing them Comparisons with a value of not a number NaN return a value that indicates inequality Cluster Comparison The Comparison functions compare clusters the same way they compare strings one element at a time starting with the 0 element until an inequality occurs Clusters must have the same number of elements of the same type and in the same order if you want to compare them Comparison Modes Some of the Comparison functions have two modes for comparing arrays or clusters In the Compare Aggregates mode if you compare two arrays or clusters the function returns a single value In the Compare Elements mode the function compares the elements individually Then returns an array or cluster of Boolean values The following illustration shows the two modes LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 9 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 9 Comparison Functions are Arrays Equal You change the comparison mode by selecting Compare Elements or Compare Aggregates in the pop up menu for the node as shown in the following illustrations are Arrays Equal Online Help Description SHOW Replace Array Tools Create Constant Create Control Create Indicator Compare Aggregates p Fut array 2 Element By Element Equalit Online Help Description SHOW Repl
434. on Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 10 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Trigger Config VI Part 1 Trigger or Trigger Pause Type Mode Condition Device Retest feet a me oe AT MIO 16E 10 2 lt n lt 4 1 lt nsx3 les no support AT MIO 16DE 10 7 8 AT MIO 16XE 50 PCI MIO 16XE 50 AT MIO 16E 2 1 lt n lt 6 1 lt n lt 3 1 lt n lt 8 fa 5 AT MIO 64E 3 NEC MIO 16E 4 1 Lab and 1200 Series a no no a devices PC LPM 16 no a no Fall d no Kanal no Baad DAQCard 500 DAQCard 700 NB A2100 l 1 2 l 1 lt nsx3 l 1 2 NB A2150 o E E E 6 4 5911 5912 1 L23 1 1 lt n lt 3 1 1 9 3 10 lt n lt 6 4 10 42 DS Default Setting R Range National Instruments Corporation 18 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 11 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for the Al Trigger Config VI Part 2 Additional Trigger Specifications Cluster Trigger Source Analog Window Window Size Coupling Default a Default O Poe Setting Range Setting Range oeta Bange Range C AT MIO 16E6 1 O lt n lt 15 O lt n lt 20 no support AT MIO 16E 2 PFIO NEC MIO 16E 4 PCI MIO 16E 1 PCI MIO 16E 1 PCI MIO 16XE 10 AT MIO 64E 3 O lt n lt 63 O lt n lt 20 no support PFIO NB NB A200000 Osns3 lt n 3 no support iS lt n lt 3 0 lt n lt 2 NB A2150 5 656 5102 Devices 1 1 0 lt n lt 10 l TRIG PCI 6110E 0 lt n lt 4 0 lt n lt 80 1 B PFIO
435. on Descriptions cccccccecccecceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 35 6 GPIB 488 2 Low Level I O Function DeSCcriptions ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeseeeees 35 8 GPIB 488 2 General Function Descriptions ccceeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeees 35 10 Chapter 36 Serial Port Vis Serial Port VTDesen pions ccsstccectestastaes Madavenearaisam E R teshedestetesdatestenst 36 1 PART IV Analysis VIs Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW Full Development Syste ieena sc ed aoa acwanud bean Henkes 37 2 Analysis Vl OV GIVACW weni a EE Welee sens EEE 37 2 National Instruments Corporation xiii LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents Analysis VI Organization eceseeeeseseeseeeeeeeseeees Notation and Naming Conventions ccccccccceeeeees Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs Signal Generation VI Descriptions c cseeeseeeeees Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs Signal Processing VI Descriptions cccccceeseeeeees Chapter 40 Measurement VIs Measurement VI Descriptions 00eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Chapter 41 Filter Vis Filter VI Descriptions cct ts arteritis Chapter 42 Window VIs Window VI Descriptions 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees Chapter 43 Curve Fitting Vis Curve Fitting VI Descriptions ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Chapter 44 Probability and Statistics Vi
436. on voltages Status binary readings For more information on the Scaling Constant Tuner VI see the Scaling Constant Tuner VI description in Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs SCXI Cal Constants Calculates calibration constants for the given channel and range or gain using measured voltage binary pairs You can use this VI with any SCXI module TE Gain 1 0 Cal Constant In 1 Volts Amp 2 Volts Amp 1 SCSI Chassis Cluster Task ID i Task ID Out Op Code Cal Constant Out 1 Cal Area a g Cal Constant Out 2 Range Code o error out SCal Gain error in no error DAU Board Cluster Binary 1 Binary 2 Cal Constant In 2 Set DAQ Device Information Sets the data transfer mode for different types of operations task ID task ID out Information ty pe information setting pam error out error in no error Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the transfer methods available with your DAQ device National Instruments Corporation 29 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS Set SCXI Information Sets the SCXI chassis configuration information slot information device string chassis type chassis address communication mode communication path status Use this VI to override the configuration already set with the configuration utility You can use this VI instead of using the configuration utility to enter the chassis configuration information I
437. ons or when you need additional flexibility e Although you must use an IEEE 488 2 compatible controller with these functions they can control both IEEE 488 1 and IEEE 488 2 devices The GPIB 488 2 functions are divided into five functional categories single device multiple device bus management low level and general Single Device Functions The single device functions perform GPIB I O and control operations with a single GPIB device In general each function accepts a single device address as one of its inputs For more information on single device functions see Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions Multiple Device Functions The multiple device functions perform GPIB I O and control operations with several GPIB devices at once In general each function accepts an array of addresses as one of its inputs For more information on multiple device functions see Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions Bus Management Functions The bus management functions perform system wide functions or report system wide status For more information on bus management functions see Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 31 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs Low Level Functions The low level functions let you create a more specific detailed program than higher level functions You use low level functions for unusual situations or for situations requ
438. ons should be built using the new functions The following table shows how the old functions map to the new functions Table 51 1 New and Old ActiveX Automation Functions New ActiveX Functions Old ActiveX Functions Automation Close Release Refnum Invoke Node Execute Method Property Node Get Property Set Property ActiveX Automation Function Descriptions The following functions are available Open Automation Refnum Opens an automation refnum which refers to a specific ActiveX Automation object You select the class of the object by popping up on the function and selecting Select ActiveX Class Once you open a refnum it can be passed to other ActiveX functions You should select only createable classes as inputs to this function Automation Refnum Automation Aetnum emor in no error error out Close Automation Refnum Closes an automation refnum Make sure you close every open automation refnum when you no longer need it open Automation Refnum eror infra error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 51 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 51 ActiveX Automation Functions Invoke Node Invokes a method or action on an ActiveX object To select an ActiveX class object pop up and choose Select ActiveX Class or wire an automation refnum to the input To select a method related to that object pop up on the second section of the node method in the diagram and select Methods Once you select t
439. onstants Numeric Constant i123 Use this constant to supply a constant numeric value to the block diagram Set this value by clicking in the constant with the Operating tool and typing a value You can change the data format and representation The value of the numeric constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant Enumerated Constant Enumerated values associate unsigned integers to strings If you display a value from an enumerated constant the string is displayed instead of the number associated with it If you need a set of strings that do not change then use this constant Set the value by clicking in the constant with the Operating Tool Set the string with the Labeling Tool and enter the string To add another item click the constant and choose Add Item Before or Add Item After LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions The value of the enumerated constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant Ring Constant Rings associate unsigned integers to strings If you display a value from a ring constant the number is displayed instead of the string associated with it If you need a set of strings that do not change then use this constant Set the value by clicking the constant with the Operating tool Set the string with the Labeling tool and enter the string To add another it
440. or or client only application has attempted a DDE transaction National Instruments Corporation A 29 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 14 DDE Error Codes Continued 14008 DDEML_EXECACKTIMEOUT Request for a synchronous execute transaction has timed out DDEML_INVALIDPARAMETER Parameter not validated by the DDML DDEML_LOW_MEMORY Server application has outrun client consuming large amounts of memory Ti A memory allocation failed 2 Request or poke is for an invalid istem 13 Client conversation attempt failed 4 Transaction failed 14015 DDEML_POSTMSG_FAILED Request for a synchronous poke transaction has timed out DDEML_REENTRANCY An application with a synchronous transaction in progress attempted to initiate another transaction or a DDEML callback function called DdeEnableCallback KA tA KA A gt A gt A A gt H A H A DDEML_SERVER_DIED Server side transaction attempted on conversation terminated by client or service terminated before completing a transaction 14018 DDEML_SYS_ERROR Internal error in the DDMEML 14019 DDEML_UNADVACKTIMEOUT Request to end advise has timed out DDEML_UNFOUND_QUEUE_ID Invalid transaction identifier passed to DDEML function 14022 Occurrence timeout the transaction timed out before it completed LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 30 National Instruments Corporation DAQ Hardware Capabi
441. orm of the linear fit is given by F mX b where F is the sequence representing the best fitted values X represents the input sequence X Values m is the slope and b is the intercept LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 43 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 43 Curve Fitting VIS Nonlinear Lev Mar Fit Uses the Levenberg Marquardt method to determine a nonlinear set of coefficients that minimize a chi square quantity Standard Deviation Covariance ri HenbnFi Eest Fit Coefficients Y bak Best Fit Initial Guess Coefficients tT mse maxz iteration error derivative Polynomial Interpolation Interpolates or extrapolates the function f at x given a set of n points x y where l l e e Ix fis any function and given a number x The VI calculates output interpolation value Ph 1 x where P _ 1 is the unique polynomial of degree n 1 that passes through the n points x y Interpolation value Interpolation error error Rational Interpolation Interpolates or extrapolates f at x using a rational function Y Array interpolation value 5 Array interpolation error Wwalue error The rational function m P x _ Pot DX DX O x do t qX q xX passes through all the points formed by Y Array and X Array P and Q are polynomials and the rational function is unique given a set of n points x y where Ie Ja y fis any function and given a number x in the r
442. osition indices of items in the menu If you do not wire items all the items in the menu are deleted If there is a submenu in any of the specified items the submenu and all its contents are deleted automatically Because separators do not have unique tags they are best deleted by using their positional indices LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Enable Menu Tracking Enables or disables tracking of menu selections menubar enable T menu out emor out ermar in no error Get Menu Item Info Returns the attributes of the menu item specified through item tag tem tag zubmenu tags menubar menubar out tem name eror in no error at enabled j error out E checked short cut Item attributes are item name the string that appears in the menu enabled false designates that the item is grayed out checked specifies whether there is a check mark next to the item and short cut key accelerator If the item has a submenu its item tags are returned as an array of strings in submenu tags If item tag is unwired the menubar items are returned If item tag is not valid an error is returned Get Menu Selection Returns the item tag of the last selected menu item optionally waiting timeout milliseconds item path is a string describing the position of the item in the menu hierarchy which is the format of a list of menu
443. ot And 5 4 Not Equal To 0 9 9 Not Equal 9 9 Not Exclusive Or 5 4 Not Or 5 4 Number To Boolean Array 4 11 5 5 Numeric Integration 47 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual l 6 0 Octal Digit 9 10 off Take controller offline 34 12 off Take device offline 34 7 One Button Dialog Box 10 8 Open Application Reference 12 3 Open Automation Refnum 51 2 Open Config Data 11 22 Open File 11 18 Open VI Reference 12 4 Open Create Replace File 11 7 Or 5 5 Or Array Elements 5 5 Out Port Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 13 7 Outer Product 45 14 P Parks McClellan 41 13 PassControl 35 3 Path Constant 11 27 Path To Array Of Strings 11 18 6 19 Path To String 11 18 6 19 Path Type 11 18 pct Pass control 34 8 Peak Detector 40 5 47 3 Periodic Random Noise 38 4 Pick Line amp Append 6 11 Polar To Complex 4 20 Polynomial Interpolation 43 5 Power amp Frequency Estimate 40 5 Power Of 2 4 19 Power Of 10 4 19 Power Of X 4 19 Power Spectrum 39 17 ppc Parallel poll configure 34 8 ppc Parallel poll configure enable and disable 34 12 PPC Accept Session 53 2 PPC Browser 52 5 53 2 PPC Close Port 53 2 PPC End Session 53 3 PPC Inform Session 53 3 PPC Open Port 53 3 PPC Read 53 4 PPC Start Session 53 4 PPC Write 53 5 PPoll 35 5 PPollConfig 35 2 National Instruments Corporation PPollUnconfig 35 5 ppu Parallel poll unconfigure
444. other To create a target ID cluster for the front panel of a VI that passes target information to another VI or to an AppleEvent you can copy the target ID cluster from the front panel of one of the AppleEvent VIs Many of the VIs that send an AppleEvent have a send options input which specifies whether the target application can interact with the user and the length of the AppleEvent timeout send options 5 5 Server may come to foreground 5 C Y Eont try te reconnect transaction ID r Allow Interaction timeout ticks Jeo Targeting VI Descriptions The following Targeting VIs are available Get Target ID Returns a target ID for a specified application based on its name and location You can either specify the application name and location or the VI searches the entire network for the application App port name first target ID Search entire network total targets cone ora 5 targets Serwer error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis The following table summarizes the operation of Search entire network Zone and Server To search the following locations Use the following parameters The current computer Zone and Server must be unwired Search entire network must be FALSE A specific computer on Zone and Server must specify the target computer s zone and the network server If you do not wire Zone the VI searches th
445. ously sent notification notifier notifier out cancelled notification error in no error error aut This prevents a call to the Wait On Notification VI with ignore previous set to FALSE to see the previously sent notification Create Notifier Looks up an existing notifier or creates a new notifier and returns a refnum that you can use when calling other Notification VIs name unnamed notifier return exisiting KF eeren created new error in no error error out If name is specified the VI first searches for an existing notifier with the same name and will return its refnum if it exists If a named notifier with the same name does not already exist and the return existing input is FALSE the VI will create a new notifier and return its refnum The created new output returns TRUE if the VI creates a new notifier National Instruments Corporation 13 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Destroy Notifier Destroys the specified notifier and returns the last notification that was sent All Wait on Notification VIs that are currently waiting on this notifier time out immediately and return an error notifier notifier out last notification error in no error error out Get Notifier Status Returns current status information of notifier name notifier notifier aut waiting error in no error a Jast notification error aut Not A Notifier Returns TRUE if notifier is
446. pin by counting positive edges of the signal during a specified period of time In addition to this connection you must wire counter s GATE pin to the OUT pin of counter 1 This VI is useful for relatively high frequency signals when many cycles of the signal occur during the timing period Use the Measure Pulse Width or Period VI for relatively low frequency signals Keep in mind that period s 1 frequency Hz counter 1 gate modelungated 0 actual parameters device frequency Hz counter gate width 5 ounter size 16 274 bit 0 maximum delay to gate 5 0 National Instruments Corporation 26 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs This VI configures the specified counter and counter 1 optional for Am9513 as event counters to count rising edges of the signal on counter s SOURCE pin The VI also configures counter 1 to generate a minimum delayed pulse to gate the event counter starts the event counter and then the gate counter waits the expected gate period and then reads the gate counter until its output state is low Next the VI reads the event counter and computes the signal frequency number of events actual gate pulse width and stops the counters You can optionally gate or trigger the operation with a signal on counter 1 s GATE pin Measure Pulse Width or Period Measures the pulse width length of time a signal is high or low or period length of time between adjac
447. pplication Control functions e Chapter 13 Advanced Functions describes the functions that perform advanced operations This chapter also describes the Help Data Manipulation and Synchronization functions and the VI Control and Memory VISA LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual l 2 National Instruments Corporation G Function and VI Reference Overview This chapter introduces the G Functions and VIs descriptions of which comprise Chapter 3 through Chapter 13 Functions are elementary nodes in the G programming language They are analogous to operators or library functions in conventional languages Functions are not VIs and therefore do not have front panels or block diagrams When compiled functions generate machine code VIs are virtual instruments so called because they model the appearance functions of a physical instrument You select G Functions from the Functions palette in the block diagram When the block diagram window is active you can display the Functions palette by selecting Windows Show Functions Palette You also can access the Functions palette by popping up on the area in the block diagram window where you want to place the function National Instruments Corporation 2 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview The following illustration shows the G functions and VIs available on the Functions palette E Functions G Functions an
448. ption of count for an explanation of the structures data can have Reading Datalog Files If refnum is a datalog file refnum the Read File function reads records from the datalog file specified by refnum If the data in the file does not match the datatype associated with the datalog file this function returns an error The number of records read can be less than specified by count if this function encounters the end of the file The function sets the file mark to the record following the last record read You should never encounter a partial record if you do the file is corrupt Do not wire convert eol line mode and byte stream type They do not pertain to datalog files The count and data parameters function in the following manner count is the number of records to read and may be wired or unwired If you do not wire count the function returns a single record of the datalog type specified when the file is created or opened For example if the type is a 16 bit integer the function returns one 16 bit integer If the type is an array of 16 bit integers the functions returns one array of 16 bit integers Your records typically consist of clusters of diverse elements but the rules for simple types used in these examples apply to those as well If you wire count it can be a scalar number in which case the function returns a 1D array of records Or it can be a cluster of N scalar numbers in which case the function returns an N dimen
449. ptions rsson n a 27 2 Chapter 28 Advanced Counter Vis Advanced Counter VI Descriptions ccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeseaeeeeeaaeaaaaaeaaaaaaaaaas 28 2 Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIs Calibration and Configuration VI Descriptions cccccecccccccccecceceeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 29 2 Channel Contreuraton WAS usgan corsgadatcntanaa tet aeues aatdadeteden dea acuaupipadenteriaadceceninanmncsauaianees 29 18 Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning Vis Signal Conditioning VI Descriptions ssns naia aia es dees 30 2 National Instruments Corporation xi LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents PART Ill Instrument I O Functions and Vis Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument 1 0 VIs Instrument Drivers OVErvie Weiss lacie ieniodasichiyececudaccr needs becticcdend specs a e a Instrument Driver Distribution cc cece ccc ceeccceseccceesscceseeccesecceseceeeceseuesess CD ROM Instrument Driver Distribution cece ccceeeeeeeee Instrument Driver Template V Igerain e AER Introduction to VISA LIDA ceecee a E A E A A Introd ction to GPIB aortna a E ar a beat E Ea ase a LabVIEW Traditional GPIB Functions s seeesesessesensseessseesssersseerssessssessseesssee GPIB 498 2 FUNCHONS vesasvaxsivaroseacavavcardesnoobundertarcisandetncnsseoustsendsseonasesanpeueboasauease Sins leDevice FuncHhonsS sessirnir ne a Multiple Device Functions rmesresronnann i a a E sta yean
450. pulse phase 1 then for the pulse itself phase two The VI selects the highest resolution timebase to achieve the desired characteristics You can optionally gate or trigger the operation with a signal on the counter s GATE pin Call the Counter Start VI to start the pulse train or to enable it to be gated Counter Read Reads the counter or counters identified by taskID taskID taskID counter list Read count error in no error overflow error out The VI is designed to read one counter or two concatenated counters of an Am9513 counter chip or to read one counter of a DAQ STC counter chip Counter Start Starts the counters identified by taskID taskID taskID counter list emor in no error error out Counter Stop Stops a count operation immediately or conditionally on an input error task ID at task ID error in no error error out stop when Crag T eeren National Instruments Corporation 27 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Delayed Pulse Generator Config Configures a counter to generate a single delayed TTL pulse on its OUT pin timebase source internal 0 gate mode Cungated 0 device task ID counter F actual delay Cs or cycles pulse polarity Chigh 0 a ao actual width s or cycles error in no error error out pulse delay s or cycles pulse width s or cycles The signal is created by decrementing counter
451. pulses and to measure the frequency pulse width or period of a TTL signal These VIs do not work with Lab and 1200 Series devices DAQCards and other devices that have the 8253 54 chip Use the intermediate level ICTR Control for those devices Refer to Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs for more information on the ICTR Control VI Some of these VIs use other counters in addition to the one specified In this case a logically adjacent counter is chosen which is referred to as counter 1 when it is the adjacent logically higher counter and counter 1 when it is the adjacent logically lower counter For a device with the Am9513 chip if the counter is 1 then counter 1 is counter 2 and counter 1I is counter 5 National Instruments Corporation 26 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 26 Easy Counter VIs See the Adjacent Counters VI described in Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs for more information For examples of how to use the Easy Counter VIs open the example libraries located in examples dag counter Easy Counter VI Descriptions The following Easy Counter VIs are available Count Events or Time Configures one or two counters to count external events or elapsed time An external event is a high or low signal transition on the specified SOURCE pin of the counter source edge rising 0 event source timebase coun device count counter seconds since start counter size 16 24 bits 0 i S
452. put is 3 1 the result is 3 X i cells smallest int gt Round To infinity Rounds the input to the next lowest integer For example if the input is 3 8 the result is 3 If the input is 3 8 the result is 4 X i gt Hloor s largest int lt Round To Nearest Rounds the input to the nearest integer If the value of the input is midway between two integers for example 1 5 or 2 5 the function returns the nearest even integer 2 number ii nearest integer value Scale By Power Of 2 Multiplies one input x by 2 raised to the power of the other input n If n is a floating point number this function rounds n prior to scaling x 0 5 rounds to 0 0 51 rounds to 1 If x is an integer this function is the equivalent of an arithmetic shift E National Instruments Corporation 4 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Sign Returns 1 if the input value is greater than O returns 0 if the input value is equal to 0 and returns 1 if the input value is less than 0 Other programming languages typically call this function the signum or sgn function number i 1 0 1 Square Root Computes the square root of the input value If x is negative the square root is NaN unless x is complex X p agrtfs Subtract Computes the difference of the inputs D x y y User Definable Arithmetic Constants You can define the following c
453. put transfer buffer LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 18 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10807 earlyTrigError The trigger occurred before sufficient pretrigger data was acquired 10808 LPTCommunicationError An error occurred in the parallel port communication with the DAQ device 10809 gateSignalError Attempted to start a pulse width measurement with the pulse in the phase to be measured for example high phase for high level gating 10840 internalDriverError An unexpected error occurred inside the driver when performing the given operation 10841 firmwareError The firmware does not support the specified operation or the firmware operation could not complete due to a data integrity problem 10842 hardwareError The hardware is not responding to the specified operation or the response from the hardware is not consistent with the functionality of the hardware 10843 underFlowError Because of system limitations the driver could not write data to the device fast enough to keep up with the device throughput 10844 underWriteError New data was not written to the output transfer buffer before the driver attempted to transfer the data to the device 10845 overFlowError Because of system limitations the driver could not read data from the device fast enough to keep up with the device throughput the onboard device memory reported
454. putes the logical exclusive OR of the inputs Implies Computes the logical OR of y and of the logical negation of x The function negates x then computes the logical OR of y and of the negated x implies y Not Not And Computes the logical NAND of the inputs Not Exclusive Or Computes the logical negation of the logical exclusive OR of the inputs Hot s or yy Not Or Computes the logical NOR of the inputs Ho s sor yy LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 5 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 5 Boolean Functions Number To Boolean Array Converts number to a Boolean array of 8 16 or 32 elements where the 0 element corresponds to the least significant bit LSB of the two s complement representation of the integer number Boolean array Computes the logical OR of the inputs Or Or Array Elements Returns FALSE if all the elements in Boolean array are false otherwise it returns TRUE logical OR Boolean Constant Use this function to supply a constant TRUE FALSE value to the block diagram Set this value by clicking the T or F portion of the constant with the Operating tool This value cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant National Instruments Corporation 5 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual String Functions This chapter describes the string functions including those that convert strings to number
455. r Additional String to Number Functions earlier in this chapter The following illustration displays the options available on the Additional String to Number Functions subpalette Format amp Append Converts number into a regular string according to the format specified in format string and appends this to string format string sting output string National Instruments Corporation 6 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Note The Format Into String function has the same functionality as Format amp Append but can use multiple inputs so you can convert information simultaneously Consider using Format Into String instead of this function to simplify your block diagram Format amp Strip Looks for format string at the beginning of string formats any number in this string portion according to the conversion codes in format string and returns the converted number in number and the remainder of string after the match in output string string 9 number format string default 0 dbl output string From Decimal Converts the numeric characters in string starting at offset to a decimal integer and returns it in number string a a offset pas t number ollzet default OL number From Exponential Fract Eng Interprets the characters 0 through 9 plus minus e E and the decimal point usually period in string starting at offset as a floating point number in engi
456. r eror out SOUICE MESSages If this VI finds an error it sets the parameters in the error out cluster You can wire this cluster to the Simple or General Error Handler to identify the error and describe it to the user The following illustration shows how you can use Find First Error in the example VI Write Binary File Find First Error creates the error cluster from individual error numbers and Simple Error Handler reports any errors to the user permit read deny write Array of DBL Write Binary File Mew File Write Binary File write File Write Binary File Close File LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 10 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions General Error Handler Determines whether an error has occurred If an error has occurred this VI creates a description of the error and optionally displays a dialog box user defined descriptions user defined codes eror code 0 eror source code out type of dialog OF msg 1 p f sgue Out emor in no eror l Message exception action none 0 i emor out exception code Simple Error Handler Determines whether an error has occurred If it finds an error this VI creates a description of the error and optionally displays a dialog box eror code no eror 0 eror source code out type of dialog OF msg 1 P source out ermar in no error eor out message S
457. r 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS For each computer platform Lab VIEW limits the number of occurrences per second that you can set Although this limit depends on the speed of your computer avoid exceeding 500 occurrences per second For some of the events you must perform your operation using interrupts instead of DMA Refer to the description of the DAQ event control in this section for more information Device Reset Resets either an entire device or the particular function identified by taskID task ID RESET task ID out device device string i Status Resetting a taskID function has the same result as calling the control VI for that function with control code set to clear When you reset the entire device LabVIEW clears all tasks and changes all device settings to their default values DSA Calibrate Use this VI to calibrate your DSA device taskID i taskID out operation reference valag JE pam Error cut Error in Ho Error Your device contains calibration D A converters calDACs that fine tune the analog circuitry The calDACs must be programmed loaded with certain numbers called calibration constants These constants are stored in non volatile memory EEPROM on your device To achieve specification accuracy perform an internal calibration of your device just before a measurement session but after your computer and the device have been running for at least 15 minutes Frequent calibration prod
458. r applications The following illustration shows the TCP palette which you access by selecting Functions Communication T CP Fe TCP Se TCP oe TOF ie TOP Ge TOP Se p a EE TEF TEF For examples of how to use the TCP VIs see the examples in examples comm tcpex 11b National Instruments Corporation 48 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 48 TCP VIs TCP VI Description The following TCP VI is available TCP Listen Creates a listener and waits for an accepted TCP connection at the specified port connection ID remote address timeout ms wait forever 1 aic remote port error in no error error out When a listen on a given port begins you cannot use another TCP Listen VI to listen on the same port For example suppose a VI has two TCP Listen VIs on its block diagram If you start a listen on port 2222 with the first TCP Listen VI any attempts to listen on port 2222 with the second TCP Listen VI fail TCP IP Functions In addition to existing functions some TCP IP VIs are now functions The following VIs are now functions in LabVIEW 5 0 e IP To String e String To IP e TCP Open Connection e TCP Create Listener e TCP Wait on Listener e TCP Write e TCP Read e TCP Close Connection The TCP Listen VI is still a VI in LabVIEW 5 0 because its functionality is duplicated by the TCP Create Listener and the TCP Wait on Listener functions The TCP Read TCP Write and TCP W
459. r bypassing this dialog box so you should take this into account when designing VIs that use IAC For example you cannot command an unattended remote computer to send an AppleEvent to a third computer someone must enter user information into the User Identity dialog box that appears on the remote computer The PPC VIs allow for unauthenticated sessions if guest access is enabled on the computer with which you wish to communicate so you might find the PPC VIs more useful for certain kinds of LabVIEW to LabVIEW communication Target ID Most VIs that send AppleEvents need a description of the target application that receives the AppleEvent The target ID is a complex cluster of information defined by Apple Computer Inc describing the target application and its location The following VIs generate the target ID so you do not need to create this cluster on the diagram e PPC Browser creates the target ID by displaying a dialog box by which you interactively select AppleEvent aware applications on the network e Get Target ID creates the target ID programmatically based on the application name and network location These VIs are discussed in more detail in the Targeting VI Descriptions section of this chapter National Instruments Corporation 52 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs send Options You need to look at the target ID cluster only if you want to pass target information from one VI to an
460. r more jumperless boards you have configured using the NI DAQ Configuration Utility DAQCardConfError Cannot configure the DAQCard because of one of the following reasons The correct version of the card and socket services software is not installed The card in the PCMCIA socket is not a DAQCard The base address and or interrupt level requested are not available according to the card and socket services resource manager The Card Services failed to load due to insufficient available memory under 1 MB in Windows 3 1 Try different settings or use AutoAssign in the NI DAQ Configuration Utility Memory under 1 MB must be available to configure DAQCard in Win 3 x LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 10 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10255 ere DE There was an error in initializing the driver for remote SCXI 10256 256 comPortOpenError There was an error in opening the specified COM port baseAddressError Bad base address specified in the configuration utility 10258 dmaChannel1 Error Bad DMA channel 1 specified in the configuration utility or by the operating system 10259 dmaChannel2Error Bad DMA channel 2 specified in the configuration utility or by the operating system 10260 dmaChannel3Error Bad DMA channel 3 specified in the configuration utility or by the operating system 10261 userModeToKernelModeCallError The u
461. rallel poll response in the output string as ASCI characters LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions rsc Release or request system control syntax rsc 0 release system control rsc request system control rsc releases or requests the capability of the GPIB Controller to send the Interface Clear IFC and Remote Enable REN messages to GPIB devices using the sic and sre functions For the GPIB Controller to respond to IFC sent by another Controller the GPIB Controller must not be the System Controller In most applications the GPIB Controller is always the System Controller You use rsc only if the computer is not the System Controller for the duration of the program execution rsv Request service and or set the serial poll status byte syntax rsv byte rsv sets the serial poll status byte of the GPIB Controller to byte If the 0x40 bit is set in byte the GPIB Controller also requests service from the Controller by asserting the GPIB RSQ line For instance if you want to assert the GPIB RSQ line send the ASCII character in which the 0x40 bit is set You use rsv to request service from the Controller using the Service Request SRQ signal and to provide a system dependent status byte when the Controller serial polls the GPIB port sic Send interface clear syntax sic sic causes the Controller to assert the IFC signa
462. ranspose of R Complex A x B Performs the matrix multiplication of two input complex matrices IfA is an n by k matrix and B is a k by m matrix the matrix multiplication of A and B C AB results in a matrix C whose dimensions are n by m Let A represent the 2D input array A matrix B represent the 2D input array B matrix and C represent the 2D output array A x B The VI obtains the elements of C using the formula m i 0 1 2 n 1 Cij X aby for a j 0 1 2 m 1 where n is the number of rows in A matrix k is the number of columns in A matrix and the number of rows in B matrix and m is the number of columns in B matrix Note The Complex A x B VI performs a strict matrix multiplication and not an element by element 2D multiplication To perform an element by element multiplication you must use the LabVIEW Multiply function In general ABABA National Instruments Corporation 45 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIS Complex A x Vector Performs the multiplication of a complex input matrix and a complex input vector Vector If A is an n by k matrix and X is a vector with k elements the multiplication of A and X Y AX results in a vector Y with n elements Let Y represent the output A x Vector X represents the input vector The VI obtains the elements of Y using the formula k 1 i X aj s fori 0 1 2 nh j 0 where n is the number of rows in A and k is the number
463. rate 1000 upoares sec WaveErOr i If you place this VI in a loop to generate multiple waveforms with the same n group of channels wire the iteration terminal to the VI iteration input terminal 31 Note If your program iterates more than 2 1 times do not wire this VI iteration terminal to the loop iteration terminal Instead set the iteration value to 0 on the first loop then to any positive value on all other iterations The VI reconfigures and restarts if iteration lt 0 On iteration O the VI calls the AO Config VI to configure the channel group and hardware and to allocate a buffer for the data On each iteration the VI calls the AO Write VI to write the data into the buffer then the AO Start VI to set the update rate and start the generation If you call the AO Waveform Gen VI only once you can leave iteration unwired The iteration parameter defaults to 0 which tells the VI to configure the device before starting the waveform generation If an error occurs the VI calls the AO Clear VI to clear any generation in progress then passes the error information unmodified through error out If an error occurs inside the AO Waveform Gen VI it clears any generation in progress and passes its error information out Refer to Appendix B DAO Hardware Capabilities for the channel ranges output limits and scanning order available with your DAQ device Note The AO Waveform Gen VI uses an uninitialized shift regi
464. ration chapter in your device user manual before using the E Series Calibrate VI Your device contains calibration D A converters calDACs that are used for fine tuning the analog circuitry The calDACs must be programmed loaded with certain numbers called calibration constants Those constants are stored in non volatile memory EEPROM on your device or are maintained by LabVIEW To achieve specification accuracy you should perform an internal calibration of your device just before a measurement session but after your computer and the device have been powered on and allowed to warm up for at least 15 minutes Frequent calibration produces the most stable and repeatable measurement performance The device is not harmed in any way if you recalibrate it as often as you like Two sets of calibration constants can reside in two areas inside the EEPROM called load areas One set of constants is programmed at the factory the other is left for the user One load area in the EEPROM corresponds to one set of constants The load area LabVIEW uses for loading calDACs with calibration constants is called the default load areas When you get the device from the factory the default load area is the area that contains the calibration constants obtained by calibrating the device in the factory LabVIEW automatically loads the relevant calibration constants stored in the load area the first time you call a VI that requires them LabVIEW Function and VI Refere
465. rds no i The AI Continuous Scan VI scans a group of channels indefinitely as you might do in data logging applications Place the VI in a While Loop and HAUN wire the loop s iteration terminal to the VI iteration input terminal LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 17 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs Also wire the condition that terminates the loop to the clear acquisition input inverting the signal if necessary so that it reads TRUE on the last iteration On iteration 0 the VI calls the AI Config VI to configure the channel group and hardware and allocates a data buffer the VI calls the AI Start VI to set the scan rate and start the acquisition On each iteration the VI calls the AI Read VI to retrieve the number of measurements specified by number of scans to read scales them and returns the data as an array of scaled values On the last iteration when clear acquisition is TRUE or if an error occurs the VI calls the AI Clear VI to clear any acquisition in progress You should not need to call the AI Continuous Scan VI outside of a loop but if you do you can leave the iteration and clear acquisition inputs unwired When calling the AI Continuous Scan VI in a loop to read portions of the data from the ongoing acquisition you must read the data fast enough so that newly acquired data does not overwrite it Th
466. re devices instrument devices and other communication interfaces Locating the G Functions and VIs Functions are elementary nodes in the G programming language They are analogous to operators or library functions in conventional languages Functions are not VIs and therefore do not have front panels or block diagrams When compiled functions generate inline machine code You select functions from the Functions palette in the block diagram When the block diagram window is active select Windows Show Functions Palette You also can access the Functions palette by popping up on the area in the block diagram window where you want to place the function National Instruments Corporation 1 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 1 Introduction to the G Functions and VIS The following illustration shows the functions and VIs available from the Functions palette E gt Functions Fa F ar Structures Numeric Boolean String Array Cluster Comparison Time amp Dialog File I O Communication Instrument I O DAQ Analysis Tutorial Advanced Instrument Library User Libraries Application Control Select a VI Many Functions palette chapters include information about function examples The paths for these examples for LabVIEW begin with examples Function and VI Overviews The following functions and VIs are available from the Functions palette Structures G Structures include While Loop For
467. rees of freedom error p Prob X lt x where X is 7 distributed with n degrees of freedom p is probability n is degrees of freedom and x is the value Contingency Table Classifies and tallies objects of experimentation according to two schemes of categorization H probability error With the 7 test of homogeneity the VI takes a random sample of some fixed size from each of the categories in one categorization scheme For each of the samples the VI categorizes the objects of experimentation according to the second scheme and tallies them The VI tests the hypothesis to determine whether the populations from which each sample is taken are identically distributed with respect to the second categorization scheme With the 7 test of independence the VI takes only one sample from the total population The VI then categorizes each object and tallies it in two categorization schemes The VI tests the hypothesis that the categorization schemes are independent You must choose a level of significance for each test This is how likely you want it to be that the VI rejects the hypothesis when it is true Ordinarily you do not want it to be very likely So you should use a small number 0 05 or 5 percent is a common choice to determine the level of significance The output parameter probability is the level of significance at which the hypothesis is rejected Thus if probability is less than the level of significance you must rej
468. rence VISA Unmap Address Unmaps memory space previously mapped by VISA Map Address YISA session dup VISA session error in no error VISA Serial Functions This section describes the VISA functions that are specific to serial ports Valid classes for these functions are Instr default and Serial Instr To access the VISA Serial functions pop up on the Low Level icon on the VISA palette YISA Seral ae gar eT e hee E wo FaSvio EASTIS aben eT e r Lis bis vis bis Lis co ses cl ste TRG R ran _ iE i p al a bis t Balies p ae ma Mani a LAE Flush Serial Buffer Flushes the serial buffer YISA session dup YISA session mask 16 emor im no error emor out Flushing the receive buffer 16 discards the contents while flushing the output buffer 32 waits for any remaining contents in the transmit buffer to be sent to the device To discard any remaining data in the transmit buffer you need to use the discard output buffer mask 128 To flush more than one buffer simultaneously combine the buffer masks by using an O Ring LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Set Serial Buffer Size Sets the size of the serial buffer VISA session y dup YISA session mask 16 size 0 P eror out eror in no error Valid values for mask are Serial receive buffer 16 and Serial transmit buffer
469. req th cd low cutoff freq Tl error attenuation dE order The Inv Chebyshev Coefficients VI is a subVI of the Inverse Chebyshev Filter VI Inverse Chebyshev Filter Generates a digital Chebyshev II filter using the specified sampling freq fs high cutoff freq fh low cutoff freq fl attenuation in decibels filter type and filter order by calling the Inv Chebyshev Coefficients VI The Inverse Chebyshev Filter VI filters the input sequence X using this model to obtain a Chebyshev II Filtered X sequence by calling the IIR Filter VI filter type A Filtered sampling freq fs ee high cutett freq th low cutoff freq fl attenuation dB order init cont Cinit Fi Se ee PE oe oe 2 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 41 12 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 41 Filter Vis Median Filter Applies a median filter of rank to the input sequence X Filtered Data BPP Or If Y represents the output sequence Filtered Data and if J represents a subset of the input sequence X centered about the i element of X Dg AG 5 pty oes Os As ese ees ea and if the indexed elements outside the range of X equal zero the VI obtains the elements of y using y Median J fori 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in the input sequence X and r is the filter rank Parks McClellan Generates a set of linear phase FIR multiband digital filter coefficients using of taps sampling freq fs
470. res a specified number of samples at a specified sample rate from a single input channel and returns the acquired data device channel 0 number of samples sample rate 1000 samples sec National Instruments Corporation 15 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 15 Easy Analog Input VIs The AI Acquire Waveform VI performs a hardware timed measurement of a waveform multiple voltage readings at a specified sampling rate on a single analog input channel If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers and input limits available with your DAQ device Al Acquire Waveforms Acquires data from the specified channels and samples the channels at the specified scan rate device Hl waveforms channels 0 actual scan number of samples ch period sec scan rate 1000 scans sec high limit 0 0 low limit 0 0 The AI Acquire Waveforms VI performs a timed measurement of multiple waveforms on the specified analog input channels If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to abort the operation or continue execution Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers and input limits available with your DAQ device Al Sample Channel Measures the signal attached to the specified channel and returns the measured value device channel 0 l sample high liri
471. res the value of gate mode with mode 7 which means that you cannot tell whether the first measurement starts at a rising or falling edge Pairs of arrows indicate measured semi periods I I I I l Measured Messy ted Measured Measured 1 HMeasured l La Li _ _ l 1 hteral hterval Interval Interval 1 terval i Buffer Figure 28 9 Buffered Mode 7 Semi Period Measurement Table 28 3 shows the legal values and default settings for timebase signal A value of 1 tells LabVIEW to use the default settings When the table says counter it refers to the counter being configured If there are multiple counters LabVIEW configures each counter successively LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 28 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs Refer to Table 28 3 to determine what is the next higher or lower consecutive counter Table 28 3 Adjacent Counters Device Next Lower Next Higher Type eo Soue ho Co Counter DAQ STC CTR Pulse Config Specifies the parameters for pulse generation This VI configures the counters but does not start them Use the CTR Control VI with control code 1 Start to produce the pulse low Jewel parameters duty cycle i task ID task ID out counter list F tm actual parameters used contig mode oo error out error in no error Clock frequency pulse mode Use this VI to specify the characteristics of your pulses You can also use the CTR Mode Co
472. rgument indicates both primary and secondary addresses if you use the form primary secondary where primary and secondary are the decimal values of the primary and secondary addresses For example if primary is 2 and secondary is 3 then address is 2 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 34 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions Controller Functions cac Become active Controller syntax cac 0 take control synchronously cac take control immediately cac takes control either synchronously or immediately and in some cases asynchronously You generally do not need to use the cac function because other functions such as cmd and rpp take control automatically If you try to take control synchronously when a data handshake is in progress the function postpones the take control action until the handshake is complete If a handshake is not in progress the function executes the take control action immediately Taking control synchronously is not guaranteed if a read or write operation completes with a timeout or other error You should take control asynchronously when it is impossible to gain control synchronously for example after a timeout error The ECIC error results if the GPIB Controller is not CIC cmd Send IEEE 488 commands syntax cmd string cmd sends GPIB command messages These command messages include device talk and listen addresses secondary addresses seri
473. ries for specifying address space Address the A16 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A24 address space of the VXI MXI bus VISA M Address the A32 address space of the VXI MXI bus ove Out8 Move Out16 Move Out32 Moves a block of data from local memory to the specified address and offset and uses the specified address space to write 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits of data respectively to the specified offset These functions do not require the VISA Map Address function to be called prior to their invocation address space 416 1 VISA session a dup VISA session offset 0 data J error out eror in no error Lise 16 Mivisa Mowe Out 16 Visa Moye Out a2 Ba LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 14 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference The following table lists the valid entries for specifying address space Address the A16 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A24 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A32 address space of the VXI MXI bus VISA Out8 Out16 Out32 Writes 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits of data respectively to the specified memory space assigned memory base plus offset These functions do not require the VISA Map Address function to be called prior to their invocation address space 416 1 VISA session dup VISA session offset 0 value 0 m emor out eror in no error MSA 1 cy vis wisa Gut 16 Yisa O
474. riptions nensi na E A a O 52 4 National Instruments Corporation XV LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents AppleBvent VI Descrip tl olsean sda tate Oates odes Bree shevaeaneneasedaeseadeedpeee nde oet uae es 52 6 bab VIEW lt Specitic Appie Eyent VAS nraeeni in tases cate a 52 8 IN GW ANCE dh PODICS a ada taastn a a Oyen aaaledat O den ntnen 52 9 Constructing and Sending Other AppleEvent cccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 9 Creating AppleE vent Parameters sicco ei aa aan 52 10 Low evel Apple Vent VIS corina a R Beas eakine caves cote 52 13 ODC Su poet VU Ex Arp e so sot E ee ctr tana dau awa aed Sovadiadag nace encaweuaeaeatees 52 16 Sending AppleEvents to LabVIEW from Other Applications 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 52 18 Required A pple Eveni Ssa a a le coueucase uate 52 18 LabVIEW Speci Apple PB Vents Ais csti casi icccs wuts utta dude N a 52 18 Replies TO Apple Vents rass cons ewasten pores ioute itis cdaseeaan eA 52 18 Eveni RUN Vicena eae netane trannies 52 19 B YesSVo gi 0 80 s ase nr ene ner ne RA E 52 19 EVENE EE E I caus tahini N E E aren anatdees 52 19 FS CNG Dea R etae zat Sagres ualue sa sstunarenlaaa lions 52 19 FEV Clit Parame tol Sena a r Sate ianads 52 19 Rep Paramete See ns AR 52 19 P ssiDle ENO zus o a a a E 52 19 Eveni ADON V beane a a AS 52 20 DESCHPUON anson a a cans adie 52 20 ESen Ola Sa a are 52 20 Eear oi a nen eer hte ee any ene ene ere 52 20 Event Parameter
475. rminal or wire pop up menus The following illustration shows the pop up menu Online Help Description Show b Replace Cluster Tools Create Constant Create Control n e Create Indicator E ee LLE LLLE Hide Full Harmes If you select the functions from this palette they appear with the correct number of terminals to wire to the object on which you popped up Cluster Function Overview Some of the cluster functions have a variable number of terminals When you drop a new function of this kind it appears on the block diagram with only one or two terminals You can add and remove terminals by using the Add Input or Remove Input pop up menu options or by resizing the node using the Positioning tool If you want to add terminals by popping up place your cursor on the input terminal to access the pop up menu You can shrink the node if doing so does not delete wired terminals The Add Input option inserts a terminal directly after the one on which you popped up The Remove Input option removes the terminal on which you popped up even if it is wired LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 8 Cluster Functions The following illustration shows the two ways to add more terminals to the Bundle function Online Help Description SHOW Replace Add Input Remove Input Create Constant Create Control Create Indicator Polymorphism for Cluster Functions
476. ror Invoke Node Invokes a method or action on a VI Most methods have parameters associated with them To select the method pop up anywhere on the node and select Methods Once you select the method the associated parameters appear in the following illustration You can set and get the parameter values Parameters with a white background are required inputs and the parameters with a gray background are recommended inputs Suto Retro Iti dup uto Retin error in ino error See POR Out D elass t paratt 1 DSCs Z Open Application Reference Returns a reference to a VI Server application running on the specified computer If you do not specify a value for machine name then it returns a reference to the local LabVIEW application in which this function is running machine name gt open loc application reference port number emor in no error emor out You can use the application reference output as an input to the Property and Invoke nodes to get or set properties and invoke methods on the application Using it as the input to the Open VI Reference function lets you get references to VIs in that application Close the reference with the Close Application or VI Reference function If you forget to close this reference it closes automatically when the top level VI associated with this function finishes executing However it is good practice to conserve the resources involved in maintaining the connection by
477. ror The DLL could not be called because of an interface error 10460 interfaceInteractionError You have mixed VIs from the DAQ library and the _DAQ compatibility library LabVIEW 2 2 VIs You can switch between the two libraries only by running the DAQ VI Device Reset before calling _DAQ compatibility VIs or by running the compatibility VI Board Reset before calling DAQ VIs 10480 muxMemFullError The scan list is too large to fit into the mux gain memory of the board 10481 bufferNotInterleavedError You must provide a single buffer of interleaved data and the channels must be in ascending order You cannot use DMA to transfer data from two buffers however you may be able to use interrupts 10540 SCXIModuleNotSupportedError At least one of the SCXI modules specified is not supported for the operation 10541 TRIG1ResourceConflict CTRB1 will drive COUTB1 However CTRB1 also will drive TRIG1 This conflict might cause unpredictable results when the chassis is scanned 10600 noSetupError No setup operation has been performed for the specified resources Or some resources require a specific ordering of calls for proper setup 10601 multSetupError The specified resources have already been configured by a setup operation 10602 No output data has been written into the transfer buffer 10603 groupWriteError The output data associated with a group must be for a single channel or for consecutive channels 10604 activeWriteError On
478. row you must give each change enough time to take effect before requesting further changes 10881 partialTransferCompleteError You cannot do another transfer after a successful partial transfer 10882 daqPollDataLossError The data collected on the remote SCXI unit was overwritten before it could be transferred to the buffer in the host Try using a slower data acquisition rate if possible 10883 wfmPollDataLossError New data could not be transferred to the waveform buffer of the remote SCXI unit to keep up with the waveform update rate Try using a slower waveform update rate if possible 10884 pretrigReorderError Could not rearrange data after a pretrigger acquisition completed 10920 gpctrDataLossError One or more data points may have been lost during buffered GP CTR operations due to the speed limitations of your system 10940 chassisResponseTimeoutError No response was received from the remote SCXI unit within the specified time limit 10941 reprogrammingFailedError Reprogramming the remote SCXI unit was unsuccessful Please try again LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 20 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10942 invalidResetSignatureError An invalid reset signature was sent from the host to the remote SCXI unit 10943 chassisLockupError The interrupt service routine on the remote SCXI unit is taking longer than necessary
479. rror VISA Discard Events Discards all pending occurrences of the specified event types and mechanisms from the specified session YISA session dup VISA session event type mechanism 1 VI OGUEDE a error cluster error in no error LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference VISA Enable Event Enables notification of a specified event VISA session dup VISA session event type mechanism 1 YILQUEUE error Out _ he m error in no error Note You must call the VISA Enable Event VI for a given session before using VISA Wait on Event VI VISA Wait On Event Suspends execution of a thread of application and waits for an event of event type for a time period not to exceed that specified by timeout Refer to individual event descriptions for context definitions If the specified event type is All Events the operation waits for any event that is enabled for the given session timeout 0 YISA session dup VISA session event type or event type event session for class m event session eror in no eror m gror out Note You must first call the VISA Enable Event VI for the specified session before using VISA Wait on Event VI National Instruments Corporation 33 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference High Level Register Access Functions This section describes the V
480. rror eror in no error HE e a Sell Test Response i Emor out PREFIX Utility Clean UP Initialize Closes an open VISA session 1f there is an error during initialization This VI should be called only from the Initialize VI VISA session dup YISA session eror in no error error out National Instruments Corporation 32 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 32 Instrument Driver Template VIs PREFIX Utility Default Instrument Setup Sends a default command string to the instrument whenever a new VISA session is opened or the instrument is reset Use this VI as a subVI for the Initialize and Reset VIs VISA session dup VISA session error in no error error out PREFIX VI Tree The VI Tree VI is a non executable VI that shows the functional structure of the instrument driver It contains the Getting Started VI application VIs and all of the component VIs LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 32 6 National Instruments Corporation VISA Library Reference This chapter describes the VISA Library Reference operations and attributes The following figure shows the VISA palette which you access by selecting Functions Instrument I O VISA a Event risd Lice ioe ioe ioe 2m abea N Eir Ha ka ra E R E ea cir St AKA High risd a ake e abe PEE E 42 Ea ae Et ane Low National Instruments Corporation 33 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual
481. rs assumed to specify the local time second minute hour day month year day of the week day of the year and Standard or Daylight Savings Time in the configured time zone for your computer into a time zone independent number of seconds that have elapsed since 12 00 a m Friday January 1 1904 Universal Time date time rec Seconds The day of week day of year and DST integers are ignored If any of the other integers are out of the ranges specified in Table 10 1 the results are unpredictable When used as an integer the day of month integer has a valid range of 1 to 366 Thus you can specify Julian dates by setting the month to January and the current day to the day of the year For example use January 150 for the 150 day of the year Format Date Time String Function Gives you the ability to display the date and time in a format you specify time format string 2c Eki ian l aler Ejen datetime string seconds now The date time string is determined from the seconds now which is the number of seconds since 12 00 a m January 1 1904 Universal Time and time format string is the format of the output string If seconds is not wired the current time is used If time format string is not wired the default is c which corresponds to the date time representation appropriate for the current locale LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 10 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error
482. rs the input sequence X using the direct form IIR filter specified by Reverse Coefficients and Forward Coefficients init cont Linit F a Hai Filtered Reverse Coefficients Forward Coefficients If y represents the output sequence Filtered X the VI obtains the elements of y using n 1 m 1 1 yi HY r Lesia gt j 0 k 1 where n is the number of Forward Coefficients represented by b and m is the number of Reverse Coefficients represented by az IIR Filter with Integrated Circuit Filters the input sequence X using the direct form IIR filter specified by Reverse Coefficients and Forward Coefficients ka map Filtered 2 Reverse Coefficients Wave emor Forward Coefficients Finals Conditions Initials Conditions Final t Conditions Initial Conditions National Instruments Corporation 41 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 41 Filter Vis If y represents the output sequence Filtered X the VI obtains the elements of y using n 1 m 1 Ie TTA Lei j 0 k 1 where n is the number of Forward Coefficients represented by b and m is the number of Reverse Coefficients represented by ap Inv Chebyshev Coefficients Generates the set of filter coefficients to implement an IIR filter as specified by the Chebyshev II Filter model You can pass these coefficients to the IIR Cascade Filter VI to filter a sequence of data Tilter type eo ng teed et IIR Filter Cluster high cutett f
483. rs to their default settings This mode overrides any conflicting parameter settings Use mode 2 to count transitions of the selected signal and to stop at the first TC The overflow status bit is set at TC Use the CTR Control VI to read the overflow status This mode is available only with Am9513 devices Mode 2 counting is unbuffered Figure 28 1 shows the count values you would read with this mode using two gate mode settings high level gating and rising edge gating pHigh Leva 2 J Aae Low Leva e 2 5 m L 0 0 r M Gat ae Figure 28 1 Unbuffered Mode 2 and 3 Counting Use mode 3 to count transitions of the selected signal continuously rolling over at TC and then continuing on Figure 28 1 shows unbuffered mode 3 counting Figure 28 2 illustrates a buffered mode 3 operation with rising edge gating This buffered operation is available only with DAQ STC devices With buffered mode 3 operation LabVIEW stores the current count value into the buffer on each selected edge of the source signal LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 28 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 28 Advanced Counter VIs I Coumted l l i wata I I Figure 28 2 Buffered Mode 3 Counting Use mode 4 with level gating to measure pulse width and with edge gating to measure the period of the selected gate signal Note For the following descriptions of pulse width measurements modes 4 6 and 7 a high pulse is de
484. rts an array of unsigned bytes into a string unsigned byte array Path To Array Of Strings Converts path into array of strings and indicates whether the path is relative relative path array of strings Path To String Converts path into a string describing a path in the standard format of the platform Refnum To Path Returns the path associated with the specified refnum String To Byte Array Converts string into an array of unsigned bytes string unsigned byte array National Instruments Corporation 6 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions String To Path Converts a string describing a path in the standard format for the current platform to a path String Fixed Constants The following String Fixed Constants are available String Constant Use this constant to supply a constant ASCII string to the block diagram Set this string by clicking the constant with the Operating tool and typing the value You can change the display mode so you can see non displayable characters or the hex equivalent to the characters You also can set the constant in password display mode so asterisks are displayed when you type characters The value of the string constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant Carriage Return Consists of a constant string containing the ASCII CR value Empty String E Consists of a constant string that is
485. rum the VI can compute using the fast DFT is 277 1 4 194 303 or 4M 1 The FFT computation of the power spectrum is time and memory efficient because the transform is real and done in the same space However the size of the input sequence must be exactly a power of 2 The DFT version efficiently computes the power spectrum of any size sequence The DFT version is slower than the FFT version uses more memory and is not as efficient in scaling National Instruments Corporation 39 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIS Let Y be the Fourier transform of the input sequence X and let n be the number of samples in it It can be shown that oh aval You can interpret the power in the n i element of Y as the power in the i element of the sequence which represents the power in the negative i harmonic You can find the total power for the i harmonic DC and Nyquist component not included using Power in i harmonic 2 on 2 O0 lt i lt 2 The total power in the DC and Nyquist components are Y T and Y respectively Real FFT Computes the Real Fast Fourier Transform FFT or the Real Discrete Fourier Transform DFT of the input sequence X The input sequence is real valued The Real FFT VI automatically determines the options which are the following e FFT of a real valued sequence e DFT of a real valued sequence The Real
486. s These tables contain some error codes with overlapping numerical values but different meanings depending on the source of the error Table A 2 VISA Error Codes 1073807360 VI_ERROR_SYSTEM_ERROR Unknown system error miscellaneous error 1073807346 VI_ERROR_INV_OBJECT The given session or object reference is invalid VI_ERROR_INV_SESSION 1073807345 VI_ERROR_RSRC_LOCKED Specified type of lock cannot be obtained or specified Operation cannot be performed because the resource is locked 1073807344 VI ERROR_INV_EXPR Invalid expression specified for search 1073807343 VI_ERROR_ RSRC_NFOUND Insufficient location information or the device or resource is not present in the system 1073807342 VI_ERROR_INV_RSRC_NAME Invalid resource reference specified Parsing error 1073807341 VI_ERROR_INV_ACC_MODE Invalid access mode 1073807339 VI_ERROR_TMO Timeout expired before operation completed 1073807338 VI_ERROR_CLOSING_FAILED Unable to deallocate the previously allocated data structures corresponding to this session or object reference 1073807332 VI_ERROR_INV_JOB_ID Specified job identifier is invalid 1073807331 VI_ERROR_NSUP_ATTR The specified attribute is not defined or supported by the referenced resource 1073807330 VI_LERROR_NSUP_ATTR_STATE The specified state of the attribute is not valid or is not supported as defined by the resource 1073807319 VI_LERROR_INV_HNDLR_REF The given handler reference is invalid 10
487. s Probability and Statistics VI Descriptions Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Linear Algebra VI Descriptions i ececeeeeeeeees LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual XIV National Instruments Corporation Contents Chapter 46 Array Operation VIs Array Operation VI Description sc iiecdeeiscsdssseediee vei evexiactiecelavecsewiklnatiionsbosinanassieeeiens 46 2 Chapter 47 Additional Numerical Method Vis Additional Numerical Method VI Descriptions ccccessessceccecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeennnteeeeees 47 1 PART V Communication Vis and Functions Chapter 48 TCP VIs TCP V1 DescnpuOn ini coue nici eure e o a Reeve eines 48 2 TEC IO 1S ata saat a a innate danialen aes es aesetnaaneneeet tat uassneesbacer cet 48 2 Chapter 49 UDP VIs UDP VI Descriptions casio cca dadeceeasstci ae ieoa aoe hca eee as ea as ode eden tetas 49 1 Chapter 50 DDE VIs DDE C lent VE DCS er PU iS aena a a cesenetwasbaapsdeasanadaadinniioseatemmentansupipatea tense 50 2 DDE Server Vil DescripOns eo na aa a E 50 3 Chapter 51 ActiveX Automation Functions ActiveX Automation Function Descriptions cccccccccecceeseseeeeeeeseeenaaaaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 51 2 Data Conversion Func WOM sirara i eE E TEETE 51 4 Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs General Apple Vent VI BWA VIO rl satis soasecass cnese en E A AAE 52 2 The User Genet Dialga BOX taspa 52 2 Taret ID iae E E ttem rn rrercrr ante 52 3 SNC OPON Sasa EO N N 52 4 Tate tine VI Desc
488. s nosupon no supor DS Default Setting R Range LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 22 National Instruments Corporation Easy Analog Output VIs This chapter describes the Easy Analog Output VIs in LabVIEW which perform simple analog output operations You can run these VIs from the front panel or use them as subVIs in basic applications You can access the Easy Analog Output VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Output The Easy Analog Output VIs are the VIs on the top row of the Analog Output palette as shown below A A A HULT FT HULT FT Easy Analog Output VIs UTIL F Easy Analog Output VI Descriptions The following Easy Analog Output VIs are available AO Generate Waveform Generates a voltage waveform on an analog output channel at the specified update rate device channel 0 Update rate 1000 updates sec waveform The AO Generate Waveform VI generates a multipoint waveform on a specified analog output channel If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue National Instruments Corporation 19 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 19 Easy Analog Output VIs AO Generate Waveforms Generates multiple waveforms on the specified analog output channels at the specified update rate device channels 0 Update rate 1000 updates sec waveforms If an error occurs a dialog box appears
489. s Heasurement H Measurement CRIZ EHE TPE POWER MAE Be ttn Nyko Poy RECT RU Arap likada oe J fe kF Fay ap eo key 7 7 Morte Wuyi rv Ee i Lid bid m DEET Pre Ee H peak ahili eel debeck f Cart For examples of how to use the measurement VIs see the examples using data acquisition located in examples analysis measure daqmeas 11b and using simulated signals in examples analysis measure measxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 40 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 40 Measurement VIs Measurement VI Descriptions The following Measurement VIs are available AC amp DC Estimator Computes an estimate of the AC and DC levels of the input signal a AL estimate Vrrnis elves DC estimate w Amplitude and Phase Spectrum Computes the single sided scaled amplitude spectrum magnitude and phase of a real time domain signal Signal 0 Amp Spectrum blag Mrs ira plikude Amp Spectrum Fhase radians dt peste dt The VI computes the amplitude spectrum as FFT Signal N where N is the number of points in the Signal array The VI then converts the amplitude spectrum to single sided rms magnitude and phase spectra Auto Power Spectrum Computes the single sided scaled auto power spectrum of a time domain signal Signal 0 Power Spectrum v2 rms dt juta Pore df Poe CRY This VI computes the power spectrum as FFT Signal x FFT Signal N2 where N i
490. s folders and files Related Documentation You might find the following documentation helpful as you read this manual e LabVIEW User Manual e G Programming Reference Manual e LabVIEW Data Acquisition Basics Manual e LabVIEW QuickStart Guide e LabVIEW Online Reference available by selecting Help Online Reference e LabVIEW Online Tutorial Windows only which you launch from the LabVIEW dialog box e LabVIEW Getting Started Card e G Programming Quick Reference Card e LabVIEW Release Notes e LabVIEW Upgrade Notes National Instruments Corporation XXV LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual About This Manual Customer Communication National Instruments wants to receive your comments on our products and manuals We are interested in the applications you develop with our products and we want to help if you have problems with them To make it easy for you to contact us this manual contains comment and configuration forms for you to complete These forms are in Appendix D Customer Communication at the end of this manual LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual XXvI National Instruments Corporation Introduction to the G Functions and VIs This chapter contains basic information about the functions and virtual instruments VIs that are available in the LabVIEW development system The development system includes collections of VIs that work with your G programming language data acquisition DAQ hardwa
491. s including aliases which are used when referencing files in parameters and descriptor lists which are used to specify a list of items as a parameter You can concatenate or cascade these strings together to create a more complex parameter LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis Table 52 1 describes the format of AppleEvent descriptor strings and indicates VIs that can create the descriptor where appropriate Table 52 1 AppleEvent Descriptor String Formats To send data as an integer enumerated data E o National Instruments Corporation Parameter is of code type m enum Format the string as A series of decimal digits optionally preceded by a minus sign A four letter code If it is too long it is truncated if it is too short it is padded with spaces If you put single quotes around it it can contain any characters otherwise it cannot contain Gta CCF J and cannot begin with a digit Enclose the desired sequence of characters within open and close curly quotes entered with lt option gt and entered with lt option shift gt Notice that the string is not null terminated TEXT 52 11 Enclose a comma separated list of elements in curly braces where each element consists of a keyword a type code followed by a colon followed by a value which can be any of the types listed in thi
492. s Ay 6 and the last element is a 1 m 1 Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following simplified array operation notations Setting the elements of an array to a scalar constant is represented by X a which corresponds to the sequence X a a a a and is used instead of 4G fois 0 1 23225 n 1 Multiplying the elements of an array by a scalar constant is represented by Y aX which corresponds to the sequence Y axo AX 4X2 AXn 1 National Instruments Corporation 37 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 37 Introduction to Analysis in LabVIEW and is used instead of yj axj fori 0 1 2 n 1 Similarly multiplying a 2D array by a scalar constant is represented by B kA which corresponds to the sequence Kdgy kag kag kaom kajo kay kay kay 1 B Kay ka ka Kay 1 Kay 19 KAy 11 K4q 2 KAy_tm 1 and is used instead of b ka tori 0 1 2 n 1 andj 0 1 2 m 1 Empty arrays are possible in LabVIEW An array with no elements is an empty array and is represented by Empty NULL In general operations on empty arrays result in empty output arrays or undefined results LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 37 6 National Instruments Corporation Signal Generation VIs This chapter describes the VIs that generate one dimensional arrays with specific waveform patterns You can combine these VIs w
493. s Pulse Pattern the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula a ifd lt i lt d w fori 0 1 2 n 1 0 0 elsewhere where a is amplitude d is delay w is width and n is the number of samples Ramp Pattern Generates an array containing a ramp pattern samples ae Ramp Pattern end start ilk error National Instruments Corporation 38 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs If the sequence X represents Ramp Pattern the VI generates the pattern according to the formula X Xo t iAx fori 0 1 2 n 1 X 1 l l where Ax i X _1 18 end x is start and n is the number of samples n E The VI does not impose conditions on the relationship between start and end Therefore it can generate ramp up and ramp down patterns Sawtooth Wave Generates an array containing a sawtooth wave reset phase PEE N i samples w sawtooth Wawe amplitude T phase out f error phase in If the sequence Y represents Sawtooth Wave the VI generates the pattern according to the following formula y i a sawtooth phase i for i 0 1 2 n 1 where a is the amplitude n is the number of samples E 0 lt p lt 180 sawtooth phase i p P_ 20 180 lt p lt 360 180 P p phase i modulo 360 0 phase i initial_phase f 360 0 i f is the frequency in normalized units of cycles sample initial_phase is phase in if reset phase is true
494. s a connection between LabVIEW and another application You must call this VI before you use any other DDE VIs except Server VIs Service conversation refnum topic error in ho eror emor out DDE Poke Tells the DDE server to put the value data at item timeout L 1 conversation refnum conversation refnum item data error out error in no error DDE Request Initiates a DDE message exchange to obtain the current value of item timeout 1 conversation refnum conversation refnum ttem data error in no error error out DDE Server VI Descriptions You access the DDE Server functions by selecting Functions Communication DDE DDE Server oH BOEl t ODE ft ODE DIE DDE DUE TEKENE SERIER ITEH SET CHECKE ITEM SERVER DDE Srv Check Item Sets the value of a previously defined DDE Item timeout 1 item refnum DDE item refnum A A value error in no error CHECK peor error out National Instruments Corporation 50 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 50 DDE VIs DDE Srv Register Item Establishes a DDE item for the service specified by service refnum Service refnum item refnum item value 7 error out error in no error DDE Srv Register Service Establishes a DDE service to which clients can connect service seryice refnum topic z error in no error error out DDE Srv Set Item Sets the value of a previousl
495. s and numbers to strings The following illustration shows the String palette which you access by selecting Functions String we aai T 1 H Ee 7 Overview of Polymorphism for String Functions This section provides descriptions of polymorphism for String functions Additional String to Number functions and String Conversion functions Polymorphism for String Functions String Length To Upper Case To Lower Case Reverse String and Rotate String accept strings clusters arrays of strings and arrays of clusters To Upper Case and To Lower Case also accept numbers clusters of National Instruments Corporation 6 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions numbers and arrays of numbers interpreting them as ASCII codes for characters refer to the Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages for the numbers that correspond to each character Width and precision inputs must be scalar Polymorphism for Additional String to Number Functions To Decimal To Hex To Octal To Engineering To Fractional and To Exponential accept clusters and arrays of numbers and produce clusters and arrays of strings From Decimal From Hex From Octal and From Exponential Fract Sci accept clusters and arrays of strings and produce clusters and arrays of numbers Width and precision inputs must be scalar Polymorphism for String Conversion Functions The Path To String and String To Path fu
496. s shown in Figure 27 2 the output becomes low on count following the leading edge of the gate input and becomes high on TC Figure 27 2 Setup Mode 1 in ICTR Control In setup mode 2 as shown in Figure 27 3 the output becomes low for one period of the clock input The count indicates the period between output pulses clock I LILI LIU UU UU Ul Gae 4 3 2 1 03 2 1 Ol Oupa jms LT LT Figure 27 3 Setup Mode 2 in ICTR Control In setup mode 3 the output stays high for one half of the count clock pulses and stays low for the other half Refer to Figure 27 4 cok I LILLU LU LU LU LU LULU LU LU Ul Note Counting is possible Gae 4 2 42 4242 4 4 2 4 only when Gate stays high Output r 4 i ee fe ee Output n 5 oO pe SES E Figure 27 4 Setup Mode 3 in ICTR Control In setup mode 4 as in Figure 27 5 the output is initially high and counter begins to count down while the gate input is high On TC the output becomes low for one clock pulse then becomes high again Figure 27 5 Setup Mode 4 in ICTR Control LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 2 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 27 Intermediate Counter VIs Setup mode 5 is similar to mode 4 except that the gate input triggers the count to start See Figure 27 6 for an illustration of mode 5 cok ILIL LU UU UU UU UU Gate 43 21 D Cub p 4 L Figure 27 6 Setup Mode 5 in ICTR Control See the 8253 Programmable Interval Timer data sh
497. s table VI that can construct Examples string 1234 put x into card field 5 Hi There x 100 y 100 Forigin AECreate Record x 100 ee Oke Fy extent x 500 y 500 cont 1 5 25 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Table 52 1 AppleEvent Descriptor String Formats Continued VI that can Parameter is construct To send data as Format the string as of code type string an AE descriptor list Enclose a AECreate comma separated list of Descriptor descriptors in square List brackets hex data Enclose an even number must be 01 57 Hex dataisa of hex digits between coerced see 64 fe AB component of French quotes entered next item Cl the string with lt option gt and produced by entered with Make Alias lt option shift gt some other data type Embed data created in The specified sing 123 n a one of the types listed in type code 4 Make Alias this table in parentheses alis he creates a hex x dump and put the desired type code before it If the data is anumeric LabVIEW coerces the data to the 7 l l ype lin n a specified type if possible s and returns the rang sta errAECoercionFail ee B error code if it cannot If stop 6 the data is of a different type LabVIEW replaces the old type code with the specified type code null data Coerce anempty string to null n a no type dump of a f
498. s the number of points in the Signal array and denotes complex conjugate The VI then converts the power spectrum into a single sided power spectrum result LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 40 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 40 Measurement VIs Cross Power Spectrum Computes the single sided scaled cross power spectrum of two real time signals The cross power spectrum gives the product of the amplitude of the signals X and Y and the difference between their phases phase of Y minus phase of X Cross Power 7 Spectrum Mag W rms Cross Power 8Y Spectrum Phase radians dt This VI computes the cross power spectrum as FFT Signal X x FFT Signal Y N2 where N is the number of points in Signal X or Signal Y arrays The VI then converts the cross power spectrum to single sided magnitude and phase spectra Harmonic Analyzer Finds the fundamental and harmonic components amplitude and frequency present in the input Auto Power Spectrum and computes the percent of total harmonic distortion THD and the total harmonic distortion plus noise THD Noise frame size Auto Power Spectrum Harmonic Amplitudes harmonics Harmonic Frequencies window THD sampling rate w THO Moise fundamental frequency You must pass the windowed auto power spectrum of your signal to this VI for it to function correctly You should pass your time domain signal through the scaled time domain window and then
499. save little or no execution time and overflow much more easily The analysis libraries for example use double precision floating point numbers You should only use extended precision floating point numbers when necessary The performance and precision of extended precision arithmetic varies among the platforms For integers it is usually best to use a long integer If you wire an output to a destination that has a different numeric representation from the source G converts the data according to the following rules e Signed or unsigned integer to floating point number Conversion is exact except for long integers to single precision floating point numbers In this case G reduces the precision from 32 bits to 24 bits e Floating point number to signed or unsigned integer G moves out of range values to the integer s minimum or maximum value Most integer objects such as the iteration terminal of a For Loop round floating point numbers G rounds a fractional part of 0 5 to the nearest even integer for example G rounds 6 5 to 6 rather than 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 2 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview e Integer to integer G does not move out of range values to the integer s minimum or maximum value If the source is smaller than the destination G extends the sign of a signed source and places zeros in the extra bits of an unsigned source If the source
500. se Index has the values 0 1 2 2 and 1 Finally there are three possible levels so you pass in a value of 3 for the of levels parameter 2D ANOVA Takes an array of experimental observations made at various levels of two factors and performs a two way analysis of variance levels A Index 4 Index E observations per cell B levels Factors Levels and Cells A factor is a basis for categorizing data For example if you count the number of sit ups individuals can do one basis of categorization is age For age you might have the following levels Level 0 6 years old to 10 years old Level 1 11 years old to 15 years old Another possible factor is weight with the following levels Level 0 less than 50 kg Level 1 between 50 and 75 kg Level 2 more than 75 kg Now suppose that you made a series of observations to see how many sit ups people could do If you took a random sampling of n people you might find the following results Person 1 8 years old level 0 30 kg level 0 10 sit ups Person 2 12 years old level 1 40 kg level 0 15 sit ups Person 3 15 years old level 1 76 kg level 2 20 sit ups Person 4 14 years old level 1 60 kg level 1 25 sit ups Person 5 9 years old level 0 51 kg level 1 17 sit ups Person 6 10 years old level 0 80 kg level 2 4 sit ups and so on If you plot observations as a function of factor A and factor B they fall into cells of a matrix with factor A as rows and factor
501. sents the output sequence Blackman X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x 0 42 0 50 cos w 0 08 cos 2w fori 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in X Blackman Harris Window Applies a three term Blackman Harris window to the input sequence X Elackman Harrisit ePror If y represents the output sequence Blackman Harris X the VI obtains the elements of y from y x 0 42323 0 49755 cos w 0 07922 cos 2w fori 0 1 2 n 1 where n is the number of elements in X LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 42 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 42 Window VIS Cosine Tapered Window Applies a cosine tapered window to the input sequence X Cosine Taperedist EFF OF If y represents the output sequence Cosine Tapered X the VI obtains the elements of y from X elsewhere _ cosw fori 0 1 2 m 1 and fori n m n m 1 n 1 2 where w n n m round and m where n is the number of elements in the input sequence X Using this window is the equivalent of applying the Hanning window to the first and last 10 of the input sequence X Exact Blackman Window Applies an Exact Blackman window to the input sequence X Exact Blackmant error If y represents the output sequence Exact Blackman X the VI obtains the elements of y from yi x ag a cos w ay cos 2w for i 0 1 2 n 1 where n is t
502. ser mode code failed when calling the kernel mode noConnectError No RTSI signal line is connected or the specified signal and the specified line are not connected badConnectError The RTSI signal line cannot be connected as specified multConnectError The specified RTSI signal is already being driven by an RTSI line or the specified RTSI line is already being driven by an RTSI signal SCXIConfigError The specified SCXI configuration parameters are invalid or the function cannot be executed given the current SCXI configuration chassisSynchedError The Remote SCXI unit is not synchronized with the host Reset the chassis again to resynchronize it with the host 10345 chassisMemAllocError The required amount of memory cannot be allocated on the Remote SCXI unit for the specified operation 10346 badPacketError The packet received by the Remote SCXI unit is invalid Check your serial port cable connections 10347 chassisCommunicationError There was an error in sending a packet to the remote chassis Check your serial port cable connections waitingForReprogError The remote SCXI unit is in reprogramming mode and is waiting for reprogramming commands from the host NI DAQ Configuration Utility 10349 SCXIModuleTypeConflictError The module ID read from the SCXI module conflicts with the configured module type National Instruments Corporation A 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Tabl
503. set save new values to 1 then this VI stores the gain and offset calibration values in an EEPROM on the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 device which does not lose its data even if the device loses power LabVIEW reads these EEPROM values and loads them into the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 you can choose to replace the permanent copies of the gain and offset EEPROM values and use the new values until the next calibration even if you reinitialize the device You can also choose not to replace the EEPROM values but to use the new values until the next calibration or initialization For example if you consistently get inaccurate readings from one or more input channels after you reset the device you can calibrate and save the new gain and offset values as permanent copies in the EEPROM However if acquisition results are accurate after initialization but start to drift after a few hours of device operation when the device temperature increases you can calibrate the device at this operating temperature and retain the current EEPROM values to use after the next initialization National Instruments Corporation 29 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS A2000 Configure Configures dithering and whether to drive the SAMPCLK line for the NB A2000 or EISA A2000 device device out Sample clock drire dither Status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from th
504. sibly the zone and server that the file resides on A full alias contains more information such as creation date file type and creator The complete description of the structure of an alias is confidential to Apple Computer Aliases are the most common way to specify a file system object as a parameter to an AppleEvent National Instruments Corporation 52 18 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs Creating AppleEvent Parameters Using Object Specifiers Apple has created a high level interface for creating AppleEvents called the Object Support Library This interface is actually layered on top of the AppleEvent parameter data structures described earlier in this chapter This interface helps create common types of parameters including range specifications LabVIEW object support VIs are located on the Low Level Apple Events pop up palette AECreate Comp Descriptor Creates a string describing an AppleEvent comparison record which specifies how to compare AppleEvent objects with another AppleEvent object or a descriptor record comparison operator ETA operand 1 Pett comparison descriptor operand 2 besk For example you can use the output comparison descriptor string as an argument to the AESend VI or as an argument to AECreate Object Specifier to build a more complex descriptor string See the Object Support VI Example section of this chapter for an example of its use AECreate Logical Descriptor
505. sion array of records National Instruments Corporation 11 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions If the wired count is a scalar number and the datalog type is something other than an array the function returns that number of records in a 1D array For example if the type is a Single precision floating point number and count is 3 the array contains three single precision floating point numbers However if the type is an array the function returns the records in a cluster array because G does not have arrays of arrays Therefore if the datalog type is an array of single precision floating point numbers and count is 3 the function returns a cluster array of three single precision floating point number arrays If the wired count is a cluster of N numbers the function returns an N dimension array of records The size of each dimension is the value of the corresponding number according to its cluster order The number of records returned in this manner is the product of the N numbers Therefore you can return 20 records as a 2D array of two columns and ten rows by wiring a two element cluster with element 0 2 and element 1 10 to count Read From Spreadsheet File Reads a specified number of lines or rows from a numeric text file beginning at a specified character offset and converts the data to a 2D single precision array of numbers Optionally you can transpose the array The VI opens the fil
506. sis ais assis ereacernaeen es nwannstereneatdoveccateunan beatae aesohels 14 9 Advanced Distal VO VAS x2 6 chi cases soca dueconatsosdacavticaiescasslalowimnouenissnasanialeaccstaenss 14 10 Locating Digital I O VI Examples 3 icccucsuanoeioa tou hnecoandesoicet ki tienaelientaschelveetassnve 14 10 COUNTER V Sis ca eat oacctenstsaravebiesonarobeisceae aranebeenniusiae oS 14 10 Fas COMECE VIS eaa a teria cee r a 14 11 Intermediate Counter INput VIS sscsrascasctiinivaderinnonsnseubatehiacattaous aS aai 14 11 Advanced Counter Vige arer E E A a e 14 12 locating Counter VE Ex amples iir ea A E 14 12 Calibration and Configuration VIS jasc ciissied ete Git ent 14 12 SiS al CONG Onin VI Seriam Gna cease tectnons xecssuow ro ana aE 14 12 Chapter 15 Easy Analog Input VIs Easy Analog Input Vr Desceriptionse iaa a a E E en asesaniees 15 1 National Instruments Corporation LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Contents Chapter 16 Intermediate Analog Input VIs Panno ETOT S anae ea E E A r nes undecsan 16 1 Intermediate Analog Input VI Descriptions ssseeesseessseeeeseeessssssessssessssssssssssesssseeses 16 2 Chapter 17 Analog Input Utility VIs Pe CT ETOS ccoem a seta sateen iat ontien sa A Ea 17 2 Analos Input Utility VL Descriptions ossia anea E iaai 17 2 Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Advanced Analog Input VI Descriptions ccc cccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeseeeeaaeeaaaaaaaaagas 18 1 Chapter 19
507. ssion if a lock cannot be acquired the session is closed and an error is returned The value VI_LOAD_CONFIG 4 is used to configure attributes to values specified by some external configuration utility such as T amp M Explorer on Windows 95 NT or VISAconf on Windows 3 x Solaris 2 and HP UX VISA Read Reads data from a device Whether the data is transferred synchronously or asynchronously is platform dependent YISA session dup VISA session byte count 0 read butter error in no error J return count error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference VISA Read STB Reads the service request status from a message based device For example on the IEEE 488 2 interface the message is read by polling devices For other types of interfaces a message is sent in response to a Service request to retrieve status information If the status information is only one byte long the most significant byte is returned with the zero value VISA session dup VISA session status eror in no error gt error out VISA Status Description Retrieves a user readable string that describes the status code presented in error in VISA session dup VISA session status description error in no error VISA Unlock Relinquishes the lock previously obtained using the VISA Lock function YISA session dup VISA session error in no error
508. stances of that type Following the read operation the function sets the file mark to the byte following the last byte read If the function encounters end of file before reading all National Instruments Corporation 11 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions of the requested data it returns as many whole instances of the designated byte stream type as it finds Reading Characters To read characters from a byte stream file typically a text file do not wire the byte stream type The following paragraphs describe the manner in which the line mode count convert eol and data parameters function when reading from a byte stream file line mode in conjunction with count determines when the read stops If line mode is TRUE and if you do not wire count or count equals 0 Read File reads until it encounters an end of line marker a carriage return a line feed or a carriage return followed by a line feed or it encounters end of file If line mode is TRUE and count is greater than 0 Read File reads until it encounters an end of line marker it encounters end of file or it reads count characters If line mode is FALSE Read File reads count characters In this case if you do not wire count it defaults to 0 line mode defaults to FALSE convert eol F determines whether the function converts the end of line markers it reads into G end of line markers The system specific end of line marker is a carr
509. stem calls but the nodes themselves function synchronously Therefore they do not complete execution until the specified time has elapsed The functions use asynchronous calls so other nodes can execute while the timing nodes wait Note Time values outside the range 2082844800 to 4230328447 seconds or 12 00 a m Jan 1 1970 Universal Time to 3 14 a m Jan 19 2038 Universal Time might not convert to the same date on all platforms This exception primarily exists on Windows 3 x which does not support dates prior to Jan 1 1970 Universal Time LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 10 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Error Handling Overview Every time you design a program consider the possibility that something can go wrong and if it does you should consider how your program can manage the problem LabVIEW automatically notifies you with a dialog box only when a few run time errors occur mostly for file dialog operations LabVIEW does not report all errors If it reported all errors you would lose the flexibility to determine what to do when an error occurs and how and when to inform the user of the error in your program Rigorous error checking especially for I O operations file serial GPIB data acquisition and communication is invaluable in all phases of a project This section describes three I O situations in which errors can occur The first type of error can
510. ster as local memory to remember the taskID of the output operation between calls You normally use this VI in one place on your diagram but if you use it in multiple places all instances of the VI share the same taskID All calls to this VI configure write data or clear the same generation Occasionally you may want to use this VI in multiple places on the diagram but have each instance refer to a different taskID Save a copy of this VI with a new name for example AO Waveform Gen R and make the new VI reentrant LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 21 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility Vis AO Write One Update Writes a single value to each of the specified analog output channels Note iteration terminal limit settings no change Bae a eT device 1 channels 0 scaled data pers emor cut eror in no error iteration O initialize i The AO Write One Update VI performs an immediate untimed update of a group of one or more channels If you place the VI in a loop to write more than one value to the same group of channels wire the iteration terminal to the VI iteration input If your program iterates more than 2 times do not wire this VI iteration terminal to the loop iteration terminal Instead set the iteration value to 0 on the first loop then to any positive value on all other iterations The VI reconfigures and restarts if iteration lt 0
511. stor in a Voltage Divider Figure 30 5 shows a circuit where the thermistor is excited by a constant current source An example of this setup would be the use of the DAQPad MIO 16XE 50 which provides a constant current output The DAQPad TB 52 has a thermistor for cold junction sensing Figure 30 5 Circuit Diagram of a Thermistor with Current Excitation National Instruments Corporation 30 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs If the thermistor is excited by voltage the following shows equation relating the thermistor resistance Ry to the input values Vo Rek VREF Vo If the thermistor is current excited the equation is Vo Rp lgx The following equation is the standard formula the VI uses for converting a thermistor resistance to temperature l a b InRp e InR The values used by this VI for a b and c are given below These values are correct for the thermistors provided on the SCXI and DAQPad TB 52 terminal blocks If you are using a thermistor with different values for a b and c refer to your thermistor data sheet you can edit the VI diagram to use your own a b and c values a 1 295361E 3 b 2 343159E 4 c 1 018703E 7 The VI produces a temperature in degrees Celsius Therefore Tce Tg 273 15 Convert Thermocouple Buffer Converts a voltage buffer read from a thermocouple into a temperature buffer value in degrees Celsius Yoltage Buffer
512. stration shows the AppleEvent VI palette which you access by selecting Functions Communication AppleEvent E pen Open Open Do i Quit aA O Object Eeit Note For applications to communicate with IAC the computer must use System 7 0 or later with Program Linking enabled For examples of how to use the AppleEvent VIs see the examples located in examples comm AE Examples 11b General AppleEvent VI Behavior When sending an AppleEvent you must specify the target application for the event To receive the AppleEvent the target application must be open You can use the AESend Finder Open VI to open an application The User Identity Dialog Box Before you send an AppleEvent to another computer you must use the Users amp Groups control panel utility on the destination computer to set up a user name and password for yourself The first time you send an AppleEvent to an application or Finder on the destination computer a dialog box prompts you to enter your name and password The system compares this information to the configuration of the Users amp Groups control panel utility on the destination computer LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 52 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 52 AppleEvent Vis ey Connect to the file server Macintosh HD as i Guest Registered User Password Two way Scrambled The current design of the AppleEvent Manager does not include a programmatic method fo
513. t 0 0 low lirit 0 01 The AI Sample Channel VI performs a single untimed measurement of a channel If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers and input limits available with your DAQ device LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 15 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 15 Easy Analog Input VIs Al Sample Channels Performs a single reading from each of the specified channels device channels 0 samples high lirit 0 01 low lirit 0 0 The AI Sample Channels VI measures a single value from each of the specified analog input channels If an error occurs a dialog box appears giving you the option to stop the VI or continue Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the channel numbers and input limits available with your DAQ device National Instruments Corporation 15 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Intermediate Analog Input VIs This chapter describes the Intermediate Analog Input VIs These VIs are convenient but they lack flexibility You can access the Intermediate Analog Input VIs by choosing Functions Data Acquisition Analog Input The Intermediate Analog Input VIs are the VIs on the second row of the Analog Input palette as shown below HULT All Al Al Intermediate CONFIG 5 5CAH CLEAR Analog Input VIs AA AM okt Handling Errors
514. t fractional notation floating point string width characters wide or wider if necessary a F format string National Instruments Corporation 6 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions To Hexadecimal Converts number to a string of hexadecimal digits width characters wide or wider if necessary 1 pemaen hee hes integer string width To Octal Converts number to a string of octal digits width characters wide or wider if necessary number eee ge octal integer strin width gern String Conversion Function Descriptions For general information about String Conversion functions see Overview of Polymorphism for String Functions earlier in this chapter The following illustration shows the String Conversion subpalette F a IB Conversion Array Of Strings To Path accepts one dimensional 1D arrays of strings Path To Array Of Strings accepts paths Path To String accepts paths and String To Path accepts strings LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 18 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions Array Of Strings To Path Converts array of strings into a relative or absolute path If you have an empty string in the array the directory location before the empty string is deleted in the path output Think of this change as moving up a level in directory hierarchy relative array of strings path Byte Array To String Conve
515. t Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and POr DIC ID VM CE SEE emnes cand ened vaadencta eececeacunseete B 12 Counter Usage for Analog Input and Output Lab Series and Portable WE VIC CS aoira enre o EA NE E A EEEE B 12 Digital I O Hardware Capabilities Lab and 1200 Series and Portable DEVICES vcrir a e a A E acodeesendens B 13 Analog Output and Digital Output Characteristics JAA X Sees CV 10 C5223 csccdacous E E E B 14 Counter Timer Characteristics Lab and 1200 Series and Portable Devices ara ccna tins canes aoar E AE B 15 Analog Input Characteristics SCXI Modules Part 1 eee B 16 Analog Output Characteristics SCXI Modules cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees B 17 Relay Characteristics SCXI Modules ccccccceseseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 17 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual XX National Instruments Corporation Table B 21 Table B 22 Table B 23 Table B 24 Table B 25 Table B 26 Table B 27 Table B 28 Table B 29 Table B 30 Table B 31 Table B 32 Table B 33 Table B 34 National Instruments Corporation xxi Contents Digital Input and Output Characteristics SCXI Modules B 18 Terminal Block Selection Guide SCXI Modules eee B 18 Analog Input Configuration Programmiability 2 0 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 19 Analog Input Configuration Programmiability 2 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 19 Analog Output Characteristics Analog Output Only Dev
516. t and kg to the 2 input LabVIEW computes the output unit as kg m s 2 National Instruments Corporation 2 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 2 G Function and VI Reference Overview Suppose a different VI has two inputs of 1 and 1 s and computes an output of 1 2 If a call to this VI receives inputs of m s to the 1 input and m s 2 to the 1 s input LabVIEW computes the output unit as m 2 s 2 If this VI receives inputs of m to the 1 input and kg to the 1 s input however LabVIEW declares one of the inputs as a unit conflict and computes if possible the output from the other input A polymorphic VI can have a polymorphic subVI because LabVIEW keeps the respective units distinct Numeric Conversion You can convert any numeric representation to any other numeric representation When you wire two or more numeric inputs of different representations to a function the function usually returns output in the larger or wider format The functions coerce the smaller representations to the widest representation before execution Some functions such as Divide Sine and Cosine always produce floating point output If you wire integers to their inputs these functions convert the integers to double precision floating point numbers before performing the calculation For floating point scalar quantities it is usually best to use double precision floating point numbers Single precision floating point numbers
517. t get the expected results For example if you enter 1 with representation 32 for one input and 5 with a representation U32 as the other input the result returned states that the minimum value is 5 because 5 is less than 4294967295 Polymorphism for Complex Functions The complex functions work on scalar values arrays of scalars clusters of scalars arrays of clusters of scalars and so on The output has the same composition as the input but with the new type Arithmetic Function Descriptions The following functions are available Absolute Value Returns the absolute value of the input X ii absf Add Computes the sum of the inputs n ry Add Array Elements Returns the sum of all the elements in numeric array NUMeric anay SUM LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Compound Arithmetic Performs arithmetic on two or more numeric cluster or Boolean inputs yvalueQ sum product value L AMD or OR of values You select the operation multiply AND or OR by popping up on the function and selecting Change Mode You can invert the inputs or the output of this function by popping up on the individual terminals and selecting Invert For Add select Invert to negate an input or the output For Multiply select Invert to use the reciprocal of an input or to produce the reciprocal of the output For AND or OR select Inver
518. t incorporates solid state relays in place of digital outputs Table B 22 Terminal Block Selection Guide SCX Modules SCXI Module Terminal Blocks Cold Junction Compensation Sensor CJC SCXI 1100 SCXI 1303 Thermistor SCXI 1102 SCXI 1300 IC Sensor SCXI 1120 SCXI 1320 IC Sensor SCXI 1121 SCXI 1321 IC Sensor SCXI 1327 Thermistor SCXI 1328 Thermistor SCXI 1124 SCXI 1325 SCXI 1140 SCXI 1301 SCX I 1304 SCXI 1141 SCX I 1304 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 18 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 22 Terminal Block Selection Guide SCXI Modules Continued SCXI Module Terminal Blocks Cold Junction Compensation Sensor CJC SCXI 1160 SCXI 1324 SCXI 1161 None screw terminals located in module SCXI 1162 SCX I 1326 SCXI 1162HV SCXI 1163 SCXI 1163R SCXI 1180 SCXI 1302 SCXI 1181 SCXI 1300 IC Sensor SCXI 1301 SCXI 1200 SCXI 1302 CB 50 1 SCXI 1121 only Table B 23 Analog Input Configuration Programmability 5102 devices By Channel By Channel Table B 24 Analog Input Configuration Programmability Number of Input FIFO Device Channels Resolution Gains Range V words Scanning 5102 devices 8 bits 1 5 20 100 663546 1 or 2 channels in any order without repetitions Note By Device means you select the value of a parameter with hardware jumpers and the selection affects any group of channels on the device By Group means yo
519. t or spreadsheet data that other applications may need to read You can use byte stream files to record continuously acquired data that you need to read sequentially or randomly in arbitrary amounts You use datalog files typically to record multiple test results or waveforms that you read one at a time and treat individually Datalog files are difficult to read from non G applications Flow Through Parameters Many file functions contain flow through parameters which return the same value as an input parameter You can use these parameters to control the execution order of the functions By wiring the flow through output of the first node you want to execute to the corresponding input of the next LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions node you want to execute you create artificial data dependency Without these flow through parameters you would often have to use Sequence structures to ensure that file I O operations take place in the correct order Error 1 0 in File 1 0 Functions G uses error I O clusters consisting of error in and error out in all of its file I O functions With error I O clusters you can string together several functions When an error occurs in a function that function passes the error along to the next function When the error passes to subsequent functions the subsequent function does not execute and passes the error along to the following func
520. t pop up menu commands the actual names depend on the function or by resizing the node vertically from any corner If you want to add terminals by popping up you must place your pointer on the input terminals to access the pop up menu You can shrink the node if doing so does not delete wired terminals The Add Element Input or Add Array Input command inserts a terminal directly after the one on which you popped up The Remove Input command removes the terminal on which you popped up even if it is wired LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 7 Array Functions The following illustration shows the two ways to add more terminals to the Build Array function Online Help Description SHOW Replace Change to Arra Add Element Input fs Add Array Input Remove Input Create Constant Create Control Create Indicator Out of Range Index Values Attempting to index an array beyond its bounds results in a default value determined by the array element type Polymorphism for Array Functions Most of the array functions accept n dimensional arrays of any type However the wiring diagrams in the function descriptions show numeric arrays as the default data type Array Function Descriptions The following Array functions are available Array Max amp Min Searches for the first maximum and minimum values in a numeric array This function also returns the index or indices where
521. t to logically negate an input or the output Note You add inputs to this node by popping up on an input and selecting Add Input or by placing the Positioning tool in the lower left or right corner of the node and dragging it Decrement Subtracts 1 from the input value e i H Divide Computes the quotient of the inputs e E y y Increment Adds 1 to the input value X r 1 National Instruments Corporation 4 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Multiply Returns the product of the inputs Multiply Array Elements Returns the product of all the elements in numeric array numeric array i product Negate Negates the input value Quotient amp Remainder Computes the integer quotient and the remainder of the inputs X Ele y floora If the integer input value of y is zero the quotient is zero and the remainder is dividend x For floating point inputs if y is zero the quotient is infinity and the remainder defaults to NaN Random Number 0 1 Produces a double precision floating point number between 0 and 1 exclusive or not including O and 1 The distribution is uniform LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Reciprocal Divides by the input value Round To Infinity Rounds the input to the next highest integer For example if the input is 3 1 the result is 4 If the in
522. tags separated by a colon If block menu is set to True Menu selection is blocked out after an item tag is read E AT timed aut menubar menubar out me timeout 200 tem tag block menu F tem path ermar in no error m eror out National Instruments Corporation 12 9 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Get Menu Shortcut Info Returns the menu item that is accessible through a given shortcut menubar menubar out short cut 7 item tag eror in no eror em tem path Emor out item path is a string of menu item tags separated by a colon short cut consists of a string key and a Boolean specifies whether the shift key is included or not Insert Menu Items Inserts menu items into a menubar or a submenu within the menubar menu tag menubar menubar out tem names gt item tags out _ Hem tags error out error in no error after tem menu tag specifies the submenu where items are inserted If you do not specify menu tag the items are inserted into the menubar item names and item tags identify the items to be inserted into the menu The type of item names and item tags can be an array of strings for inserting multiple items or just a string for inserting a single item You can wire in either item names or item tags in which case both names and tags get the same values If you require each item to have different n
523. tant to the Item Symbols attribute E Color Box Constant Use this constant to supply a constant color value to the block diagram Set this value by clicking the constant with the Operating tool and choosing the desired color The value of the Color Box constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant National Instruments Corporation 4 21 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Error Ring Constant This constant is a predefined ring of errors specific to memory usage networking printing and file I O Errors related to DAQ GPIB VISA and Serial VIs and functions are not options in this ring Fixed Constants Avogadro Constant 1 mol Returns the value 6 0220e23 mnel Base 10 Logarithm of e Returns the value 0 43429448 190325183 Elementary Charge c Returns the value 1 6021892e 19 Gravitational Constant Nm2 kg2 Returns the value 6 6720e 11 fz Molar Gas Constant J mol K Returns the value 8 31441 E e Returns the value 2 7182818284590452e 0 M Natural Logarithm of Pi Returns the value 1 14472988584940020 Natural Logarithm of 2 Returns the value 0 693 14718055994531 Natural Logarithm of 10 Returns the value 2 30234095236904570 Negative Infinity Returns the value oo LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 4 22 The following constants are fixed National Instruments Corporation Chapter 4 Numeric Functions Pi Returns
524. tart VI this VI initiates a single scan using the fastest safe channel clock rate You can alter the channel clock rate with the AI Config VI If you run the AI Start VI a clock signal initiates the scans You must use the AI Start VI to set the clock source to external for externally clocked conversions If clock sources are internal and you do not allocate memory a timed nonbuffered acquisition begins when you run the AI Start VI You use this type of acquisition for synchronizing analog inputs and outputs in a point to point control application The following devices do not support timed nonbuffered acquisitions e Macintosh NB A2000 NB A2100 and NB A2150 Note LabVIEW restarts the device in the event of a FIFO overflow during a timed nonbuffered acquisition When you set opcode to 1 for anonbuffered acquisition the VI reads one scan from the FIFO and returns the data If opcode is 2 the VI reads the FIFO until it is empty and returns the last scan read Al Start Starts a buffered analog input operation This VI sets the scan rate the number of scans to acquire and the trigger conditions The VI then starts an acquisition edge or slope no change pretrigger scans 0 trigger type no trig 0 tasklD in taskID out number of scans to acquire 3 actual scan rate scan rate 1 000 scans sec pieg Eee actual trigger params number of buffers to acquir if error out error in no error f scan clock sourc
525. te Analog Output VIs for specific VI information Analog Output Utility Vis Analog Output Utility Icon You can access the Analog Output Utilities palette by choosing the Analog Output Utility icon from the Analog Output palette The Analog Output Utility VIs AI Read One Scan AI Waveform Scan and AI Continuous Scan are single VI solutions to common analog output problems These VIs are convenient but they lack flexibility These three VIs are built from the Intermediate Analog Output VIs in the Analog Output palette Refer to Chapter 21 Analog Output Utility VIs for specific VI information National Instruments Corporation 14 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 14 Introduction to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition VIs Advanced Analog Output VIs You can access the Advanced Analog Output palette by choosing the Advanced Analog Output icon from the Analog Output palette These VIs are the interface to the NI DAQ software and are the foundation of the Easy Utility and Intermediate Analog Output VIs Advanced Analog Output Icon Because all these VIs rely on the advanced level VIs you can refer to Chapter 22 Advanced Analog Output VIs for additional information on the inputs and outputs and how they work Locating Analog Output VI Examples For examples of how to use the analog output VIs see the examples in examples dag anlogout anlogout 11b Digital Function VIs These VIs perform digital oper
526. te level VI has an error in input cluster and an error out output cluster The clusters contain a Boolean that indicates whether an error occurred the error code for the error and the name of the VI that returned the error If error in indicates an error the VI returns the error information in error out and does not continue to run When you use any of the Analog Input Utility VIs in a While Loop you should stop the loop if the status in the error out cluster reads TRUE If you wire the error cluster to the General Error Handler VI the VI deciphers the error information and describes the error to you The General Error Handler VI is in Functions Time and Dialog in LabVIEW For more information on this VI refer to Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Analog Input Utility VI Descriptions The following VIs are available through the Analog Input Utility subpalette Al Continuous Scan Makes continuous time sampled measurements of a group of channels stores the data in a circular buffer and returns a specified number of scan measurements on each call butter size 10 z coupling amp input config no input limits ho change nmm h device 1 i scaled data channels 0 number read number of scans to read 500 pinh scan backlog scan rate 1000 scans sec ae actual scan period sec error in no error error out Iteration irit 0 clear acquisition T er f number of AMU boa
527. tered 10447 memPageLockError The operating environment is unable to grant a page lock 10448 stackMemError The driver is unable to continue parsing a string input due to stack limitations 10449 cacheMemError A cache related error occurred or caching is not supported in the current mode 10450 physicalMemError A hardware error occurred in physical memory or no memory is located at the specified address virtualMemError The driver is unable to make the transfer buffer contiguous in virtual memory and therefore cannot lock the buffer into physical memory thus you cannot use the buffer for DMA transfers 10452 nolntAvailError No interrupt level is available for use 10453 The specified interrupt level is already in use by another device il 10454 454 noDMACError No DMA controller is available in the system noDMAAvailError No DMA channel is available for use National Instruments Corporation A 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued DMAInUseError The specified DMA channel is already in use by another device 10457 badDMAGroupError DMA cannot be configured for the specified group because it is too small too large or misaligned Consult the user manual for the device in question to determine group ramifications with respect to DMA 10458 diskFullError A disk overflow occurred while attempting to write to a file DLLInterfaceEr
528. terrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts Interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B Table B 5 Analog Output Characteristics MIO and Al Devices Continued Device PCI MIO 16XE 10 CPCI 6030E PXI 6030E PCI 6031E DAQPad 6020E PCI 6110E PCI 6111E AT MIO 16F 5 AT MIO 64F 5 AI MIO 16X Channel Numbers DAQ Hardware Capabilities 16 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 16 bit double buffered 12 bit double buffered 64F 5 2K FIFO 16 bit double buffered 2K FIFO LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual cP TN es s B 6 i en 0 to 10 10 Vref 0 to Vref 10 0 to 10 Vref 0 to Vref Update Clocks Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 or external update Update clock 1 is first available of ctr 5 2 1 or external update Default is 5 Timebase signal range is 5 000 000 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 and 100 Update clock 1 is first available on ctr 5 2 1 or external update Timebase signal range is 5 000 000 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 100 Transfer Method DMA interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts DMA interrupts National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capab
529. th the Operating tool and typing in the value Use the standard file path syntax for a given platform You can set the value of the path constant to Not a Path by clicking on the path symbol with the Operating tool and selecting Not a Path from the resulting menu See the Paths and Refnums section of Chapter 6 Strings and File I O in the LabVIEW User Manual for more information on using the Not a Path value The value of the path constant cannot be changed while the VI executes You can assign a label to this constant National Instruments Corporation 11 27 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Temporary Directory Constant Returns the path to your temporary directory The temporary directory is the directory in which you store temporary information that you expect the user or the operating system to delete periodically The G Preferences dialog box Edit Preferences under Paths defines this directory path VI Library Constant Returns the path to the VI library directory for the current development library on the current computer The Preferences dialog box Edit Preferences under Paths defines this directory If you build an application using the Application Builder libraries this path is the path of the directory containing the application LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 28 National Instruments Corporation Application Control Functions This chapter describes the Appli
530. the input value is TRUE If you leave the input unwired the stop occurs as soon as the node that is currently executing finishes stop T If you need to abort execution of all VIs in a hierarchy from the block diagram you can use this function but you must use it with caution Before you call the Stop function with a TRUE input be sure to complete all final tasks for the VI first such as closing files setting save values for devices being controlled and so on If you put the Stop function in a subVI you should make its behavior clear to other users of the VI because this function causes their VI hierarchies to abort execution In general avoid using the Stop function when you have a built in termination protocol in your VI For example I O operations should be performed in While Loops so that the VI can terminate the loop on an I O error You should also consider using a front panel Stop Boolean control to terminate the loop at the request of the user rather than using the Stop function LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 12 6 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 12 Application Control Functions Help Function Descriptions The following illustration displays the options available on the Help subpalette Help Control Help Window Modifies the Help window by showing hiding or repositioning the window Control Online Help Controls the online help system by displaying the table of contents of a help f
531. the inverse fast Hartley transform FHT of the input sequence X Inv FHT 33 EFFO The inverse Hartley transform of a function X f is defined as x t X fycas 2nft df where cas x cos x sin x National Instruments Corporation 39 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 39 Digital Signal Processing VIs If Y represents the output sequence Inv FHT X the VI calculates Y through the discrete implementation of the inverse Hartley integral n l1 Y TY xicas fork 0 1 2 n 1 i 0 where n is the number of elements in X The inverse Hartley transform maps real valued frequency sequences into real valued sequences You can use it instead of the inverse Fourier transform to convolve deconvolve and correlate signals You can also derive the Fourier transform from the Hartley transform See the FHT section earlier in this chapter for a comparison of the Fourier and Hartley transforms Inverse Real FFT Computes the Inverse Real Fast Fourier Transform FFT or the Inverse Real Discrete Fourier Transform DFT of the input sequence FFT X The input sequence is complex valued This VI automatically determines the following options e Inverse Real FFT of a complex valued sequence if the size is a power of 2 e Inverse Real DFT of a complex valued sequence if the size is not a power of 2 This VI executes inverse FFT routines if the size of the input sequence is a valid power of 2 size
532. the number is positive optional When used with the e or g conversion codes uses engineering notation exponent is always a multiple of 3 0 optional Pads any excess space to the left of a numeric parameter with Os rather than spaces Width optional When scanning specifies an exact field width to use G scans only the specified number of characters when processing the parameter When formatting specifies the minimum character field width of the output This width 1s not a maximum width G uses as many characters as necessary to format the parameter without truncating it G pads the field to the left or right of the parameter with spaces depending on justification If Width is missing or zero the output is only as long as necessary to contain the converted input parameter Precision For floating point parameters specifies the optional number of digits to the right of the decimal point If Width is not followed by a period G inserts a fractional part of six digits If Width is followed by a period and Precision Is missing or 0 G does not insert a fractional part For string parameters specifies the maximum width of the field G truncates strings longer than this length LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 2 String Syntax Continued unit optional Overrides the choice of unit of a VI when converting a physical quantity a
533. the specified section If the section does not exist the VI adds section with the key value pair to the end of the configuration data refnum out eror in no eror File Constants Descriptions The following constants are available from the File Constants subpalette i gt File Constants E m e Current VI s Path Constant Returns the path to the file containing the VI in which this function appears If the VI is incorporated into an application using the Application Builder libraries the function returns the path to the VI in the application file and treats the application file as a VI library path LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 11 26 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 11 File Functions Default Directory Constant Returns the path to your default directory The default directory is the directory which the file dialog displays initially The Preferences dialog box Edit Preferences under Paths defines this directory path Empty Path Returns an empty path Not A Path Returns a path whose value is Not A Path You can use this path as an output from structures and subVIs when an error occurs Not A Refnum Returns a refnum whose value is Not A Refnum You can use this refnum as an output from structures and subVIs when an error occurs Path Constant Use this to supply a constant directory or file path to the block diagram Set this value by clicking inside the constant wi
534. the value 3 14159265358979320 3 Pi divided by 2 Returns the value 1 57079632679489660 E Pi multiplied by 2 Returns the value 6 28318530717958650 Planck s Constant J Hz Returns the value 6 6262e 34 E o Positive Infinity Returns the value vz Reciprocal of e Returns the value 0 367879441 17144232 Reciprocal of Pi Returns the value 0 31830988618379067 Rydberg Constant m Returns the value 1 097373177e7 m Speed of Light in Vacuum m sec Returns the value 299 792 458 National Instruments Corporation 4 23 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Boolean Functions This chapter describes the functions that perform logical operations The following illustration shows the Boolean palette which you access by selecting Functions Boolean x Boolean ele s ae D w gt gt H m V 2 9 D m gt gt m 9 ra For examples of some of the Boolean functions see examples general structs 11b Polymorphism for Boolean Functions The logical functions take either Boolean or numeric input data If the input is numeric G performs a bit wise operation If the input is an integer the output has the same representation If the input is a floating point number G rounds it to a long integer and the output is a long integer The logical functions work on arrays of numbers or Boolean values clusters of numbers or Boolean values arrays of clust
535. through the Auto Power Spectrum connecting the Auto Power Spectrum output to this VI National Instruments Corporation 40 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 40 Measurement VIs The following illustration shows an example of using this VI frame size Harmonic Amplitudes Harmonic Frequencies THD Noise Impulse Response Function Computes the impulse response of a network based on real signals X Signal X Stimulus and Y Signal Y Response Signal Stimulus wee l Impulse Response Signal Y Response y The Impulse Response is in the time domain so you do not need to convert time units to frequency units The Impulse Response is the inverse transform of the transfer function This VI computes Impulse Response as Inverse FFT Power Stimulus ee Power Spectrum Stimulus Network Functions avg Computes several network response functions of two real time domain signals X Stimulus Signal and Y Response Signal Cross Power Spectrum Cawg Stimulus Signal Frequency Response Skt Coherence Function LO Impulse Response awg df The signals X Stimulus Signal and Y Response Signal include coherence averaged cross power spectrum magnitude and phase averaged transfer function Frequency Response and averaged Impulse Response LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 40 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 40 Measurement VIs You usually compute these functions o
536. tifies where the error occurred The error in and error out state clusters for the Open File vi where the error shown in the preceding example originated are shown in the following illustration The error in cluster whose default value is no error does not need to be wired if it is the first in the chain error in Mo error error out status code status code a no emor yO Ho error 0 SOLUCE SOUICE You can find the error in and error out clusters by selecting Controls Array amp Cluster on the front panel The following illustration shows the message you receive from the General Error Handler if you pass an invalid path Error 7 occurred at Open File in Untitled 2 Possible reasons LabuviEW File not found GPIB ENEB Non existent board National Instruments Corporation 10 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions The General Error Handler is one of the three error handling utility VIs It contains a database of error codes and descriptions from which it creates messages like the previous one The Simple Error Handler performs the same basic operation but has fewer options The third VI Find First Error creates the error I O cluster from functions or VIs that output only scalar error codes Time and Dialog Function Descriptions The following Time and Dialog functions are available Date Time To Seconds Converts a cluster of nine signed 32 bit intege
537. tion and so on The following illustration displays an example of the error in and error out clusters pattern prompt file path start path Mot 4 Path function Copen 0 ee een file size bytes error in not an error error out default name advisory dialog display Tl Arare EErEE ERER Although the error I O clusters specify whether an error has occurred you may want to use error handlers to report the error to the user For more information on error I O see Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions in this manual Permissions Some of the file functions have a 32 bit integer parameter called permissions or new permissions These functions use only the least significant nine bits of the 32 bit integer to determine file and directory access permissions Windows The permissions are ignored for directories For files only bit 7 the UNIX user write permission bit is used If this bit is clear the file is read only Otherwise you can write to the file Macintosh All 9 bits of permissions are used for directories The bits that control read write and execute permissions respectively on a UNIX system are used to control See Files Make Changes and See Folders access rights respectively on the Macintosh For files only bit 7 the UNIX user write permission bit is used If this bit is clear the file is locked Otherwise the file is not locked National Instruments Corporation 11 5 LabVIEW
538. tion of linear equations to errors in the data It gives an indication of the accuracy of the results from a matrix inversion and a linear equation solution Matrix Norm Computes the norm of a real matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix _ norm E 4 E norm ty pe The norm of a matrix is a scalar that gives some measure of the magnitude of the elements in the matrix Let A represent the Input Matrix the norm of A is represented by A where p can be 1 2 F Different values of p mean different types of norms that are computed National Instruments Corporation 45 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Matrix Rank Computes the rank of a rectangular real matrix Input Matrix Input MHatrix tolerance Matrix rank is the number of singular values in the Input Matrix that are larger than the tolerance rank is the maximum number of independent rows or columns in the Input Matrix Outer Product Computes the outer product of X Vector and Y Vector Eo Let X represent the input sequence X Vector and Y represent the input sequence Y Vector The VI obtains Outer Product using the formula i 0 1 2 n 1 aij X Yp for j 0 1 2 m 1 where A represents the 2D output sequence Outer Product n is the number of elements in the input sequence X Vector and m is the number of elements in the input sequence Y Vector Pseudolnverse Matrix Finds the PseudoInverse Matrix of a
539. tion shows the DDE palette which you access by selecting Functions Communication DDE OPEN CLOSE EA E bE fel oel fe one RORE REGST POKE EXEC bE fel oel fe one eee ee START CHECK STOP The DDE palette includes the DDE Server subpalette For examples of how to use the DDE VIs see the examples in examples comm DDEexamp 11b National Instruments Corporation 50 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 50 DDE VIs DDE Client VI Descriptions The following DDE Client VIs are available DDE Advise Check Checks an advise value previously established by DDE Advise Start timeoutl 1 adwise retnum advise retnum Unused current data wait for change FALSE ee see Changed error in no error error out DDE Advise Start Initiates an advise link conversation refnum advice refnum item error in no error emor out DDE Advise Stop Cancels an advise link previously established by DDE Advise Start advise refnum conversation refnum eror in no erar error out DDE Close Conversation Closes a DDE conversation conversation refnum error in no error DDE Execute Tells the DDE server to execute command timeout 11 conversation refnum conversation retnum command error in no error error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 50 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 50 DDE VIs DDE Open Conversation Establishe
540. tly choose the local or remote state While Local Lockout is in effect only the Controller can alter the local or remote state of the devices by sending the appropriate GPIB messages You should use SendLLO only in unusual local remote situations particularly those in which you must lock all devices into local programming state Use the SetRWLS Function when you want to place devices in Remote Mode With Lockout State atakus emor out SetRWLS Places particular devices in the Remote With Lockout State The function sends Remote Enable REN to the GPIB devices listed in address list It also places all devices in Lockout State which prevents them from independently returning to local programming mode without intervention by the Controller bus status address liat error out error ino TestSRQ Determines the current state of the SRQ line This function is similar in format to the WaitSRQ function except that WaitSRQ suspends itself while it waits for an occurrence of SRQ and TestSRQ immediately returns the current SRQ state shatus error out National Instruments Corporation 35 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions TestSys Directs multiple devices to conduct IEEE 488 2 self tests bus result list address list status error in failed devices error out WaitSRQ Waits until a device asserts Service Request The function suspends execution until a GPIB de
541. train gauge to units of strain P zl w 0 0 Veg 0 0 Ag 120 G ij J Bridge Configuration 3 H al Vex 3 33 Wirit 0 0 Al 0 0 The conversion formula the VI uses is based solely on the bridge configuration Figures 30 1 through 30 3 show the seven bridge configurations you can use and the corresponding formulas For all bridge configurations the VI uses the following formula to obtain Vr Vr Vsg Vinit Vex In the circuit diagrams VOUT is the voltage you measure and pass to the conversion VI as the Vsg parameter In the quarter bridge and half bridge configurations R1 and R2 are dummy resistors that are not directly incorporated into the conversion formula The SCXI 1121 and SCXI 1122 modules provide R1 and R2 for a bridge completion network if needed Refer to your Getting Started with SCXI manual for more information on bridge completion networks and voltage excitation National Instruments Corporation 30 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 30 Signal Conditioning VIs Figures 30 1 through 30 3 illustrate the bridge completion networks available bridgeConfig 1 Qtr Bridge strain B an i RL GF 1 2V Rg RL iro E Rg dummy bridgeConfig 1 Qtr Bridge II t _ _ _ _ x 1 strain GE av uae Figure 30 1 Strain Gauge Bridge Completion Networks Quarter Bridge Configuration LabVIEW Function and VI Reference
542. tring Argument s Resulting String level n3 7 2e V 0 03642 level 3 64e 2 V Name s s Smith John Name Smith John National Instruments Corporation 6 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 4 Format Specifiers Continued Format Formatore __Argument s Resulting String String Temp 05 1f s 96 793 Fahrenheit _ 793 Fahrenheit Temp 096 8 Fahrenheit String 410 53 Hello World Sering Hello The last table entry shows the output when the unit in the format specifier is in conflict with the input unit Index amp Append Selects a string specified by index from string array and appends that string to string string array string Index te output string Index amp Strip Compares each string in string array with the beginning of string until there is a match string gt Index string array output string Match Pattern Searches for regular expression in string beginning at offset and if it finds a match splits string into three substrings regular expression before substring string ad match substring offset 0 after substring offset past match LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 6 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 6 String Functions Table 6 5 Special Characters for Match Pattern Special Character Interpreted by the Match Pattern Function as Matches any character Matches zero or one instan
543. truments Corporation 12 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Advanced Functions This chapter describes the functions that perform advanced operations This chapter also describes the Data Manipulation and Synchronization functions and the VI Control and Memory VIs To access the Advanced palette shown in the following illustration select Functions Advanced et Functions x da anni pE pm The Advanced functions include the following subpalettes National Instruments Corporation Data Manipulation Memory Synchronization VI Control LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 13 Advanced Functions Advanced Function Descriptions The following Advanced functions are available Beep Causes the system to issue an audible tone You can specify the tone frequency in Hertz the duration in milliseconds and the intensity as a value from 0 to 255 with 255 being the loudest Although this VI appears on all platforms the frequency duration and intensity parameters work only on the Macintosh frequency Hz ignored ay duration mec ignored ktg emor ignored Intensity 0 255 ignored Code Interface Node Calls code written in a conventional programming language such as C directly from a block diagram Code Interface Nodes CINs make it possible for you to use algorithms written in another language or to access platform specific features or hardware that G does not
544. ts options from the last dialog box Bold text denotes the names of menus menu items parameters dialog boxes dialog box buttons or options icons windows Windows 95 tabs or LEDs Bold italic text denotes an activity objective note caution or warning Key names are capitalized LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual XXIV National Instruments Corporation italic italic monospace monospace monospace bold paths About This Manual Italic text denotes variables emphasis a cross reference or an introduction to a key concept This font also denotes text from which you supply the appropriate word or value as in Windows 3 x Italic text in this font denotes that you must supply the appropriate words or values in the place of these items Text in this font denotes text or characters that you should literally enter from the keyboard sections of code programming examples and syntax examples This font is also used for the proper names of disk drives paths directories programs subprograms subroutines device names functions operations variables filenames and extensions and for statements and comments taken from programs Bold text in this font denotes the messages and responses that the computer automatically prints to the screen This font also emphasizes lines of code that are different from the other examples Paths in this manual are denoted using backslashes to separate drive names directorie
545. tus AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this VI will return the following message deviceSupportError If you wish to use this VI please reinstall NI DAQ version 4 9 0 or an earlier version Enable io trigger drive only if you have executed the RTSI Control VI to receive the RTSITRIG signal over the RTSI bus or if you have enabled the analog level trigger using the AI Trigger Config VI In these cases you can monitor the signal being sent to the A D trigger circuitry at the EXTTRIG line of the I O connector after starting the acquisition A high to low edge of the signal triggers the data acquisition National Instruments Corporation 29 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS The NB A2150 uses signals over the RTSI bus for sampling clock synchronization between two or more NB A2150 devices The sampling clock synchronization circuitry makes simultaneous sampling possible on more than four channels using additional NB A2150 devices If master clock is 1 slave list should contain the list of devices that accept the sampling clock from device After you run A2150 Config with master clock equal to 1 and number of slaves greater than 0 you cannot use the AI Clock Config t
546. u program the selection through software and the selection affects all the channels used at the same time By Channel means you program the selection with hardware jumpers or through software on a per channel basis When a specific value for a parameter is shown that parameter value is fixed National Instruments Corporation B 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Analog Output Only Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 25 Analog Output Characteristics Analog Output Only Devices Channel Output Update Waveform Transfer Device Numbers DAC Type Limits Clocks Grouping Method AT AO 6 0 through 5 12 bit 10V Update For update Update ATI AO 10 6 through 9 double Vrefl clock 1 is clock 1 clock 1 NB AO 6 buffered 0 to 10 V ctrO or channels are channels with 1 K 0 to Vref external any one DMA FIFO for 4 to 20 mA update channel Nor interrupts update clock Update set of update 1 channels clock 1 channel clock 2 channels are pairs 0 N channels 0 1 2 3 4 for update interrupts 5 6 7 8 clock 2 9 Oto 1 channels are 0 to 3 2 N same 0 to 5 0 to rules as 7 0 to 9 above N 6 Update N 10 clock 2 is ctrl Update clock 2 channels are 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 to 3 2 to 5 2 to 7 2to9 timebase signal range is 1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1 000 100 PC AO 2DC 0 to 10V Plug and Play 5V 0 20mA sink software selectable DAQCard AO 2DC 0 t
547. ual Chapter 40 Measurement VIs The waveform related parameters are slew rate overshoot topline top amplitude baseline base and undershoot The time related parameters are risetime falltime width duration and delay This VI completes the following steps to calculate the output parameters 1 Finds the maximum and minimum values in the input sequence X 2 Generates the histogram of the pulse with 1 range resolution 3 Determines the upper and lower modes to establish the top and base values 4 Finds overshoot amplitude and undershoot from top base maximum and minimum values 5 Scans X and determines slew rate risetime falltime width and delay The VI interpolates width and delay to obtain a more accurate result not only of width and delay but also of slew rate risetime and falltime If X contains a train of pulses the VI uses the train to determine overshoot top amplitude base and undershoot but uses only the first pulse in the train to establish slew rate risetime falltime width and delay Note Because pulses commonly occur in the negative direction this VI can discriminate between positive and negative pulses and can analyze the X sequence correctly You do not need to process the sequence before analyzing it Scaled Time Domain Window Applies the selected window to the time domain signal Waveform Sh Windowed Waveform window au window constants The VI scales the result so that w
548. ual C 2 National Instruments Corporation Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages National Instruments Corporation C 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual C 4 National Instruments Corporation Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages 34 MTA29 MTA30 UNT MSAO PPE MSA1 PPE MSA2 PPE MSA3 PPE MSA4 PPE MSA5 PPE MSA6 PPE MSA7 PPE MSA8 PPE MSA9 PPE MSA10 PPE MSA11 PPE MSA12 PPE MSA13 PPE MSA14 PPE MSA15 PPE MSA16 PPD MSA17 PPD MSA18 PPD National Instruments Corporation C 5 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages Hex Oct MSA23 PPD MSA24 PPD y MSA25 PPD MSA26PPD MSA27 PPD MSAD pe om oe Message Definitions ee rae LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual C 6 National Instruments Corporation Appendix C GPIB Multiline Interface Messages National Instruments Corporation PPU SDC SPD SPE TCT UNL UNT LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Customer Communication For your convenience this appendix contains forms to help you gather the information necessary to help us solve your technical problems and a form you can use to comment on the product documentation When you contact us we need the information on the Technical Support Form and the configuration form if your manual contains one about yo
549. uces the most stable and repeatable measurement performance Before the device is shipped from the factory an external calibration is performed and the EEPROM contains calibration constants that LabVIEW automatically loads into the calDACs as needed The value of the onboard reference voltage is also stored in the EEPROM and this value is used when you subsequently perform a self calibration The calibration constants are re calculated and stored in the EEPROM when a self calibration is performed When you perform an external calibration LabVIEW recalculates the value of the onboard reference voltage and then performs a self calibration This new onboard reference value is used for all subsequent self calibration operations If a mistake is made when performing an external calibration you can restore the board s factory calibration so that the board is not unusable LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 29 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 29 Calibration and Configuration VIS DSP2200 Calibrate Windows Performs offset calibrations on the analog input and or analog output of the AT DSP2200 DEF 1 device Cs device out mode conibe i ADC reference Status AN Warning This VI is supported only up to NI DAQ version 4 9 0 and has been removed from the Calibration and Configuration palette This VI is still included in the DAQ VI Library for compatibility only therefore if you are using NI DAQ version 5 0 or later this V
550. uffer Read 28 2 CTR Control 28 10 CTR Group Config 28 3 CTR Mode Config 28 3 CTR Pulse Config 28 9 Current VI s Path Constant 11 26 D DAQ Occurrence Config Windows 29 9 Date Time To Seconds 10 6 DDE Advise Check 50 2 DDE Advise Start 50 2 DDE Advise Stop 50 2 DDE Close Conversation 50 2 DDE Execute 50 2 DDE Open Conversation 50 3 DDE Poke 50 3 DDE Request 50 3 DDE Srv Check Item 50 3 DDE Srv Register Item 50 4 DDE Srv Register Service 50 4 DDE Srv Set Item 50 4 DDE Srv Unregister Item 50 4 DDE Srv Unregister Service 50 4 Decimal Digit 9 6 Decimate 39 8 Decimate 1D Array 7 5 Deconvolution 39 9 National Instruments Corporation l 3 Index Default Directory Constant 11 27 Delayed Pulse Generator Config 27 4 Delete 11 15 Delete Menu Items 12 8 Derivative x t 39 10 Destroy Notifier 13 10 Destroy Queue 13 13 Destroy Rendezvous 13 15 Destroy Semaphore 13 18 Determinant 45 10 DevClear 35 2 DevClearList 35 4 Device Reset 29 10 Digital Buffer Config 25 3 Digital Buffer Control 25 3 Digital Buffer Read 25 3 Digital Buffer Write 25 3 Digital Clock Config 25 4 Digital Group Config 25 4 Digital Mode Config 25 5 Digital Single Read 25 6 Digital Single Write 25 6 Digital Trigger Config 25 7 DIO Clear 24 2 DIO Config 24 3 DIO Parameter 25 5 DIO Port Config 25 2 DIO Port Read 25 2 DIO Port Write 25 2 DIO Read 24 3 DIO Sing
551. ument not to the communication interface This creates more opportunities for using the instrument driver in many diverse situations For more information on VISA functions see Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 31 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 31 Introduction to LabVIEW Instrument I O VIs Introduction to GPIB The General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB is a link or interface system through which interconnected electronic devices communicate LabVIEW Traditional GPIB Functions These traditional GPIB functions are compatible with both IEEE 488 and IEEE 488 2 devices and are sufficient for most applications For more complex applications such as using several devices and more than one GPIB interface you can use the GPIB IEE 488 2 functions For more information on the LabVIEW Traditional GPIB functions see Chapter 34 Traditional GPIB Functions GPIB 488 2 Functions Using GPIB 488 2 functions together with IEEE 488 2 compatible devices improves the predictability of instrument and software behavior and lessens programming differences between instruments of different manufacturers The latest revisions of many National Instruments GPIB boards are fully compatible with the IEEE 488 2 specification for controllers The LabVIEW package also contains functions that use IEEE 488 2 By using these functions your programming interface will strictly adhere to the IEEE 488 2 st
552. unction in LabVIEW For more information on this VI refer to Chapter 10 Time Dialog and Error Functions Intermediate Digital 1 0 VI Descriptions The following Intermediate Digital I O VIs are available DIO Clear Calls the Digital Group Buffer Control VI to halt a transfer and clear the group taskID in ci ffp taskib gt out error in no error nn gt error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 24 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 24 Intermediate Digital I O VIS DIO Config The DIO Config VI calls the advanced Digital Group Config VI to assign a list of ports to the group establish the group s direction and produce the taskID The VI then calls the Digital Mode Config VI to establish the handshake parameters which only affect the operation of the DIO 32 devices Finally the VI calls the Digital Buffer Config VI to allocate a buffer to hold the scans as they are read or the updates to be written of scans updates 1000 device oe port lis TO a oes group direction aa error ous error in no error handshaking mode parameters Refer to Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities for the ports and directions available with your DAQ device DIO Read Calls the Digital Buffer Read VI to read data from the internal transfer buffer and returns the data read in pattern Scar backlog number read taskID in taskID out number of scans to read port data time limit m sec no chang _
553. uniformly distributed pseudorandom pattern whose values are in the range a a where a is the absolute value of amplitude samples Uniform White Nose amplitude Emor seed The VI generates the pseudorandom sequence using a modified version of the Very Long Cycle random number generator algorithm Given that the probability density function f x of the uniformly distributed Uniform White Noise is if a lt x lt a fl 424 0 elsewhere where a is the absolute value of the specified amplitude and given that you can compute the expected values E using the formula co E x x fix dx oo LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 38 10 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 38 Signal Generation VIs then the expected mean value u and the expected standard deviation value of the pseudorandom sequence are u E x 0 2 a o E x p B The pseudorandom sequence produces approximately 2 samples before the pattern repeats itself 0 57735a National Instruments Corporation 38 11 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Digital Signal Processing VIs This chapter describes the VIs that process and analyze an acquired or simulated signal The Digital Signal Processing VIs perform frequency domain transformations frequency domain analysis time domain analysis and other transforms such as the Fourier Hartley and Hilbert transforms To access the Digital Signal
554. ur system configuration to answer your questions as quickly as possible National Instruments has technical assistance through electronic fax and telephone systems to quickly provide the information you need Our electronic services include a bulletin board service an FTP site a fax on demand system and e mail support If you have a hardware or software problem first try the electronic support systems If the information available on these systems does not answer your questions we offer fax and telephone support through our technical support centers which are staffed by applications engineers Electronic Services Bulletin Board Support National Instruments has BBS and FTP sites dedicated for 24 hour support with a collection of files and documents to answer most common customer questions From these sites you can also download the latest instrument drivers updates and example programs For recorded instructions on how to use the bulletin board and FTP services and for BBS automated information call 512 795 6990 You can access these services at United States 512 794 5422 Up to 14 400 baud 8 data bits stop bit no parity United Kingdom 01635 551422 Up to 9 600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity France 01 48 65 15 59 Up to 9 600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity FTP Support To access our FTP site log on to our Internet host ftp natinst com aS anonymous and use your e mail address such as joesmith anywh
555. urself 10415 externalMuxSupportError This function does not support this device when an external multiplexer such as an AMUX 64T or SCXI is connected to it LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 12 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 4 Data Acquisition VI Error Codes Continued 10440 m ome aona The specified resource is owned by the driver and cannot be accessed or modified by the user memConfigError No memory is configured to support the current data transfer mode or the configured memory does not support the current data transfer mode If block transfers are in use the memory must be capable of performing block transfers 10442 memDisabledError The specified memory is disabled or is unavailable given the current addressing mode memAlignmentError The transfer buffer is not aligned properly for the current data transfer mode For example the buffer is at an odd address is not aligned to a 32 bit boundary is not aligned to a 512 bit boundary and so on Alternatively the driver is unable to align the buffer because the buffer is too small 10445 memLockError The transfer buffer cannot be locked into physical memory On PC AT machines portions of the DMA data acquisition buffer may be in an invalid DMA region for example above 16 MB 10446 memPageError The transfer buffer contains a page break system resources may require reprogramming when the page break is encoun
556. ut FIFO words Triggers Max Sampling Rate S s Transfer Device EISA A2000 4 SE 12 5 EISA 51 Software trigger 0 1 2 3 0 NB A2000 bits NB 1 024 pretrigger and and 1 2 and interrupts posttrigger with 3 0103 digital or analog triggering and posttrigger delay NB A2100 2 SE 16 2 828 32 Software trigger A2150 2100 48 k DMA NB A2150 bits pretrigger and 0 1 2 3 0 2150 24 k interrupts posttrigger with and1 2and 2150C digital or analog 3 0 to 3 48 k triggering A2100 2150S 0 1 0and1 51 2k AT A2150 4 SE 16 2 828 Software trigger 0 1 2 3 0 2150 24k DMA bits pretrigger and and1l 2and 2150 51 2k interrupts posttrigger with 3 0 and 3 digital or analog triggering Digital Only Devices Hardware Capabilities Table B 29 Digital Hardware Capabilities Digital I O Devices Port Port Handshake Transfer Device Type Numbers Modes Direction DIO Clocks Method AT DIO 32F 8 bit ports 0 1 8 bit port Read or write Two DMA for each NB DIO 32F 2 3 Handshaking on clocks group dual or off extensive available channel DMA handshaking 16 bitwith for groups modes variable containing port 0 timebase PC DIO 24 8 bit port 0 1 Handshaking Read or write None Interrupts NB DIO 24 on or off port 0 may be DAQCard DIO 24 bidirectional LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual B 22 National Instruments Corporation Appendix B DAQ Hardware Capabilities Table B 29 Digital Hardware Capabilities Digital
557. ut Matrix Input Matrix _ norm E1 4 E GK norm ty pe National Instruments Corporation 45 7 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIS The norm of a matrix is a scalar that gives some measure of the magnitude of the elements of the matrix Let A represent the Input Matrix A p represent the norm of A where p can be 1 2 f co Different values of p mean different types of norms that are computed Complex Matrix Rank Computes the rank of a rectangular complex matrix Input Matrix Input Matrix tolerance rank is the number of singular values of the Input Matrix that are larger than the tolerance rank is the maximum number of independent rows or columns of the Input Matrix Complex Matrix Trace Finds the trace of Input Matrix Input Matrix Let A be a square matrix that represents Input Matrix and tr A be trace The trace of A is the sum of the main diagonal elements of A n 1l tr A X ai i 0 where n is the dimension of Input Matrix Complex Outer Product Computes the outer product of a complex X Vector and Y Vector a vector uter Product TY Weotor LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 45 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Let X represent the input sequence X Vector and Y represent the input sequence Y Vector The VI obtains Outer Product using the formula i 0 1 2 n 1 Qij Xi Yj for j 0 1 2 m
558. ut a2 a ose ote The following table lists the valid entries for specifying address space Address the A16 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A24 address space of the VXI MXI bus Address the A32 address space of the VXI MXI bus National Instruments Corporation 33 15 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Low Level Register Access Functions This section describes the VISA Low Level Register Access functions Valid classes for these functions are Instr default VXI GPIB V XIV XE RBD Instr VXI GPIB V XI MBD Instr and VXI GPIB VXI VME MemAcc To access the VISA Low Level Register Access functions pop up on the Low Level icon on the VISA palette Low Level Register access isd lisa vee wo Yim aiaei a HlLow Level Register Access Lis bic en ban Lice Fan gii zzl 6 52 VISA Map Address Maps a specified memory space The memory space that is mapped is dependent on the type of interface specified by VISA session and the address space parameter Once the window is mapped VISA tracks the window that is mapped This behavior dictates that VISA can only map one window for each VISA session address space 416 1 YISA session dup VISA session map base 0 z map size 0 phe error cluster emor in no error access False LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 33 16 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 33 VISA Library Reference Th
559. ver Template VIs The GPIB keyword is used with GPIB instruments The VXI keyword is used for either embedded or MXIbus controllers The GPIB V XI keyword is used for a National Instruments GPIB VXI controller The following table shows the default values for optional parameters Optional Parameter Default Value her Additionally the Initialize VI can perform selectable ID query and reset operations In other words you can disable the ID query when you are attempting to use the driver with a similar but different instrument without modifying the driver source code Also you can enable or disable the reset operation This feature is useful for debugging when resetting would take the instrument out of the state you were trying to test PREFIX Message Based Template and Register Based Template The PREFIX Message Based and Register Based Template VIs are the starting point for developing your own instrument driver VIs The template VIs have all required instrument driver controls and instructions for modification for a particular instrument VISA session dup VISA session eror in no error aopla Bro Ot PREFIX Register Based Template The PREFIX Register Based Template VI is a template for creating a register based VI for your particular instrument VISA session dup VISA session eror in no error pia error out PREFIX Reset All LabVIEW instrument drivers have a Reset VI that places the instrument in a default state
560. vice connected on the GPIB asserts the Service Request SRQ line This function is similar in format to TestSRQ except that TestSRQ returns the SRQ status immediately whereas WaitSRQ suspends the program for the duration of the timeout period but no longer waiting for an SRQ to occur GPIB 488 2 Low Level I O Function Descriptions The low level functions let you create a more specific detailed program than higher level functions You use low level functions for unusual situations or for situations requiring additional flexibility RevRespMsg Reads data bytes from a previously addressed device This function assumes that another function such as ReceiveSetup Receive or SendCmds has already addressed the GPIB Talkers and Listeners You use RcvRespMsg specifically to skip the addressing step of GPIB management You normally use the Receive function to perform the entire sequence of addressing and then to receive the data bytes data string status byte count emor out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 35 8 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 35 GPIB 488 2 Functions ReceiveSetup Prepares a device to send data bytes and prepares the GPIB board to read data bytes After you call this function you can use a function such as RcvRespMsg to transfer the data from the Talker In this way you eliminate the need to readdress the devices between blocks of reads bus status address byte count error in
561. w type w type new crealor pm creator efor in Bor out Windows and UNIX do not support file types and creators Trying to set the type or creator of a file in these platforms results in an error however you can get the file type and creator in these platforms If the specified file has a name ending with characters that Type and Creator recognizes as specifying a file type such as vi for the LVIN file type and 11b for the LVAR file type this function returns that type in type and LBVW in creator Otherwise the function returns in both type and creator National Instruments Corporation 11 19 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 11 File Functions Volume Info Returns information about the volume containing the file or directory specified by path including the total storage space provided by the volume the amount used and the amount free in bytes volume path IZE used free error out Configuration File Vls The Configuration File VIs provide you with the tools to create modify and read a platform independent configuration file The following illustration shows the options available on the Configuration File VIs subpalette 0 Emig Emi abe TF DBL f EF i am l USE DBL TF isa Ba abe TEF MESME iF EE EE The Configuration File VIs work with a platform independent configuration file similar in format to the standard Windows initialization ini file The file is div
562. wedErr Destination port requires authentication Table A 8 GPIB Error Codes Oo f o a O oo fe o oe a CO o feo i oeeo O A e a E COo fe oee LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 24 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 9 LabVIEW Function Error Codes a a E a a a OOO aee OOO i enom OOO ee OOOO em a a E OOOO eea OOO ii ea O OOO i i O ee a a a OOO eee Oo i e OOO i i i a OOO oee OOO oee OOO oea O OOO e OOO i eoe O a OOO i eoe National Instruments Corporation A 25 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 9 LabVIEW Function Error Codes Continued a e E S a a T E T a OOO eme OOO O i ea OOO o i i e E OOO eme OOO O i oee e OOO e OOo o i i y OOo o i i owo COo o i i Two OOO O i i o e OOOO O i COo o i o OOO i eO OOO O i e OOO i o OOO O i aO COo o OOOO O i oe OOOO i LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual A 26 National Instruments Corporation Appendix A Error Codes Table A 9 LabVIEW Function Error Codes Continued a T E a CO i OOO e OOO o Coo o oo COO o i ra OOO ee OOO eO i renee ee enoe COo o i i eon a ee OOO eO OOO O i omea Co o i oe OOO o i me repro Se a Fr a National Instruments Corporation A 27 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Appendix A Error Codes Table A 10 LabVIEW Specific PPC Error Codes errNoPPCToolBox The PPC ToolBox either does not
563. with a portClosedErr error 916 You can use the Close All PPC Ports to handle abnormal conditions that leave ports open An example of an abnormal condition is when a VI is aborted before it can terminate normally and close the PPC port You can use the Close All PPC Ports VI during VI development when such mistakes are more likely to be made or as a precaution at the beginning of any program that opens ports PPC Close Port Closes the specified PPC port port refnum isis Close Closing a port terminates all outstanding calls associated with the port with a portClosedErr error 916 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 53 2 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 53 Program to Program Communication VIS PPC End Session Ends the specified PPC session session retnum isl is Ending a session causes all outstanding calls associated with the session PPC Read and PPC Write calls to finish with a sessClosedErr error 917 Get Target ID For information on the Get Target ID VI see Chapter 52 AppleEvent VIs of this manual PPC Inform Session Waits for a PPC session request port refnum session retnum automatically accept CT en initiator s target ID timeout ticks CO na timeout Beso equest info error PPC Open Port Opens a port for PPC communication and returns a unique port reference number in port refnum You can use a single port for multiple sessions por tharne port refnum alias locat
564. x where T is t distributed p is probability n is degrees of freedom and x is the value probability degrees of freedom error Variance Computes the variance and the mean value of the input sequence X mean A Variance error This VI computes variance 0 7 and mean u using the following formula n 1l 3 1 2 i 0 n 1l 1 Where u yx and n is the number of elements in X n i 0 National Instruments Corporation 44 13 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Linear Algebra VIs This chapter describes the VIs that perform real and complex matrix related computation and analysis including the following e Basic Matrix Manipulations e Solving Linear Equations and Matrix Inverses e Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors e Matrix Analysis To access the Linear Algebra palette choose Functions Analysis Linear Algebra as shown in the following illustration 2 HAnalysis_ Linear Algebra For examples of how to use the linear algebra VIs see examples located in examples analysis linaxmpl 11b National Instruments Corporation 45 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 45 Linear Algebra VIs Linear Algebra VI Descriptions The following Linear Algebra VIs are available AxB Performs the matrix multiplication of two input matrices If A is ann by k matrix and B is ak by m matrix the matrix multiplication of A and B C AB results in a matrix C whose dimensions are
565. y defined DDE Item item refnum item Fetnum value 7 error in no error error out DDE Srv Unregister Item Removes the specified item from its service Note DDE clients can no longer access the item after this VI completes item refnum seryice refnum error in no error error out DDE Srv Unregister Service Removes the specified service DDE clients can no longer connect to this service and all current conversations are closed Service reinum error in no error error out LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 50 4 National Instruments Corporation ActiveX Automation Functions This chapter describes the functions for support of ActiveX automation These functions allow other ActiveX enabled applications such as Microsoft Excel to request properties and methods from LabVIEW and individual VIs You access the ActiveX Automation functions by selecting Functions Communications ActiveX OLE The ActiveX OLE palette includes the following functions National Instruments Corporation Automation Open Automation Close Invoke Node Property Node 51 1 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 51 ActiveX Automation Functions It also includes the ActiveX Variant to G Data function For more information on this function see Data Conversion Function later in this chapter National Instruments supports the old functions using compatibility functions but all new applicati
566. ys with clock frequency with clock period or with timebase source timebase signal and timebase divisor The VI searches these parameters in that order and sets the clock rate using the first one with a value not equal to 1 National Instruments Corporation 18 3 LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 2 lists default settings and ranges for the controls of the AI Clock Config VI Table 18 2 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for Controls in the Al Clock Config VI Configuration Retrigger Mode Mode Which Clock Clock Source Default Default Default Default ees Setting Range Setting Setting Range Setting Range AT MIO 1 ATLMIO I6E1 1 3 12 2 AT MIO 16E 2 nee A lt n lt 11 AT MIO 64E 1 NEC MIO 16E 4 PCI MIO 16E 1 PCI MIO 16E 4 PCI MIO 16XE To PCI 6110E PCI 6111E an E3 l AT MIO 16E 10 l l 12 AT MIO 16DE 10 Pa 4 lt n lt 9 AT MIO 16XE 50 PCI MIO 16XE 50 NB A2150 1 1 3 no 1 1 1 I lt n lt 3 NB A2100 support NB A2000 DSA Devices 1 1 3 no 1 1 1 1 support PC LPM 16 DAQCard 500 o DAQCard 516 DAQCard 700 Lab PC Lab LC Lab NB nace NB MIO 16 5102 nae LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual 18 4 National Instruments Corporation Chapter 18 Advanced Analog Input VIs Table 18 2 Device Specific Settings and Ranges for Controls in the Al Clock Config VI Continued Configuration Retrigger Mode Mode Which Clock Clock Source Default Default

LabVIEW Function and VI Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents